Tempus Stylus User Guide

Product Version 23.10

November 2023
© 2011-2023 Cadence Design Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
Cadence Design Systems, Inc. (Cadence), 2655 Seely Ave., San Jose, CA 95134, USA.
Trademarks: Trademarks and service marks of Cadence Design Systems, Inc. (Cadence) contained in this
document are attributed to Cadence with the appropriate symbol. For queries regarding Cadence's
trademarks, contact the corporate legal department at the address shown above or call 1-800-862-4522.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Restricted Print Permission: This publication is protected by copyright and any unauthorized use of this
publication may violate copyright, trademark, and other laws. Except as specified in this permission
statement, this publication may not be copied, reproduced, modified, published, uploaded, posted,
transmitted, or distributed in any way, without prior written permission from Cadence. This statement grants
you permission to print one (1) hard copy of this publication subject to the following conditions:
The publication may be used solely for personal, informational, and noncommercial purposes;
The publication may not be modified in any way;
Any copy of the publication or portion thereof must include all original copyright, trademark, and other
proprietary notices and this permission statement; and
Cadence reserves the right to revoke this authorization at any time, and any such use shall be discontinued
immediately upon written notice from Cadence.
Disclaimer: Information in this publication is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Cadence. Except as may be explicitly set forth in such agreement, Cadence does
not make, and expressly disclaims, any representations or warranties as to the completeness, accuracy or
usefulness of the information contained in this document. Cadence does not warrant that use of such
information will not infringe any third party rights, nor does Cadence assume any liability for damages or
costs of any kind that may result from use of such information. Cadence is committed to using respectful
language in our code and communications. We are also active in the removal and/or replacement of
inappropriate language from existing content. This product documentation may however contain material
that is no longer considered appropriate but still reflects long-standing industry terminology. Such content
will be addressed at a time when the related software can be updated without end-user impact.
Restricted Rights: Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth
in FAR52.227-14 and DFAR252.227-7013 et seq. or its successor.
 Tempus Stylus User Guide

Contents

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
How This Manual Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1
Product and Licensing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1 Tempus Product and Licensing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2 About Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3 Tempus Timing Solution Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.4 Tempus Timing Solution Product Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.5 Tempus License Options for Single View Distributed STA (DSTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.6 Tempus License Options for Distributed MMMC (DMMMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.7 Tempus License Options for Concurrent MMMC (CMMMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.8 Tempus License Options for CMMMC in DSTA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.9 Tempus Paradime Flow Licensing for Interactive ECOs in CMMMC Mode . . . . . . . 25
1.10 About Tempus Timing Solution Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.11 Checking Out Tempus Licenses for Product Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2
Design Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1 Design Import Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.1 Input Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2 Design Import Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.2.1 MMMC Timing Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.2.2 Simple Timing Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3 Performing Design Sanity Checks in Tempus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.4 Tempus File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

November 2023 1 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide

3
Installation and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.1 Tempus Product and Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2 Setting Up the Tempus Run Time Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2.1 Temporary File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.3 Launching the Tempus Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.3.1 Completing Command Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.3.2 Command-Line Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.3.3 Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4 Starting the Tempus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4.1 Using the Log File Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.5 Accessing Tempus Documentation and Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.6 Accessing Documentation and Help from Tempus GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.7 Using the Tempus man and help Commands on the Command-Line . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.8 Other Sources of Cadence Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4
Analysis and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.1 Base Delay Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.1.2 Base Delay Analysis Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.1.3 Limitations of Traditional Delay Calculators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.1.4 Performing Base Delay Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.1.5 Base Delay Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.2 Signal Integrity Delay and Glitch Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.2.2 Understanding Attacker and Victim Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.2.3 SI Delay Analysis - An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.2.4 SignaI Integrity Delay Analysis Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.2.5 Performing Signal Integrity Delay Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.2.6 SI Delay Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.2.7 SI Glitch Analysis - An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.2.8 SI Glitch Analysis Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.2.9 Understanding SI Glitch Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

November 2023 2 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide

4.2.10 Running Detailed SI Glitch Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

4.2.11 SI Glitch Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.2.12 Overshoot-Undershoot Glitch Analysis - An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.2.13 Running Overshoot-Undershoot Glitch Analysis - Sample Script . . . . . . . . . 122
4.3 Timing Analysis Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.3.2 Specifying Timing Analysis Mode Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.3.3 Advanced On-Chip Variation (AOCV) Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.3.4 Statistical On-Chip Variation (SOCV) Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.4 Path-Based Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4.4.2 GBA vs PBA Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4.4.3 Reporting in Path-Based Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4.4.4 Path-Based Analysis Reporting Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.4.5 Path-Based Analysis Essence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4.5 Analysis Of Simultaneous Switching Inputs - SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.5.2 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
4.5.3 Reporting in SSI Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4.5.4 Considerations for Path-Based Analysis (PBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.6 Waveform Aware and Rail Swing Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
4.6.2 Rail Swing Checks - An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
4.6.3 Rail Swing Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.6.4 Waveform Aware Pulse Width Checks - An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.6.5 Waveform Aware Pulse Width Checks Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.7 Set Instance Library Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4.7.1 Iinstance Library Flow Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4.7.2 MMMC set_instance_library Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4.7.3 MMMC Flow Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.7.4 Save and Restore MMMC set_instance_library Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.7.5 Limitations of set_instance_library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.8 Inter Power Domain (IPD) Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4.8.1 IPD Analysis Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4.8.2 IPD Analysis Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
4.8.3 IPD Path Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

November 2023 3 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide

4.8.4 Scope-Based IPD Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

4.8.5 Scope-Based IPD Analysis Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.8.6 IPD Analysis - User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.8.7 IPD Analysis Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.9 Aging-Aware STA Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4.9.1 Aging-Aware STA Analysis - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.9.2 Tempus Aging-Aware STA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4.9.3 Aging-Aware Tempus vs SPICE Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.9.4 Spice Deck for Aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

5
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis . . . . . . . 238
5.1 CMMMC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.2 Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.3 Configuring Setup for Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.4 Library Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5.5 Defining Timing Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
5.6 Virtual Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
5.7 RC Corner Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.8 Delay Corner Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.9 Power Domain Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
5.10 Constraint Mode Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
5.11 Constraint Support in Multi-Mode and MMMC Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.12 Analysis Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
5.13 Design Loading and MMMC Configuration Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.14 Saving Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.15 Controlling Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Analysis through the Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.16 Performing Timing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.17 Generating Timing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

6
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis . . . . . . . 259
6.1 DMMMC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.2 Performing Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6.2.1 Design Loading and MMMC Configuration Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

November 2023 4 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide

6.3 Performing Concurrent MMMMC Analysis in DMMMC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

6.4 Setting Up MSV/CPF-Based Design in DMMMC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6.5 Performing Setup/Hold View Analysis and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
6.6 Running Single Interactive User Interface in DMMMC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
6.7 Running Interactive ECO on Multiple Views in DMMMC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
6.8 Important Guidelines and Troubleshooting DMMMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

7
Distributed Static Timing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
7.1 Tempus Timing Analysis Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7.1.1 Static Timing Analysis (STA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7.1.2 Distributed Static Timing Analysis (DSTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7.2 Converting STA to DSTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7.3 Hardware Recommendations for DSTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
7.4 Accessing Specific Machines using LSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7.5 DSTA Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.6 DSTA Operational Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.7 Distributed Static Timing Analysis Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
7.8 Additional Commands Supported in DSTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
7.9 Commands Not Supported in DSTA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

8
Signoff ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
8.1 Signoff ECO Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
8.2 Key Features of Signoff ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8.3 Signoff ECO Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8.4 Setting Up Signoff ECO Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
8.5 Signoff Optimization Use Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.6 Basic Signoff ECO Optimization Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.7 Fixing SI Violations in Tempus Signoff ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.8 Fixing IR Drop in Tempus Signoff ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
8.9 Path-Based Analysis (PBA) Mode Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.10 Total Power Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
8.11 Setup Timing Recovery After Large Leakage or Total Power Optimization . . . . . . 332
8.12 Recommendations for Getting Best Total Power Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

November 2023 5 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide

8.13 Hierarchical ECO Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

8.14 High Capacity ECO Flow for Timing and Power Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
8.15 Generating Node Locations in Parasitic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
8.16 Optimization Along Wire Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
8.17 Optimization using Endpoint Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
8.18 Metal ECO Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
8.19 Handling Large Number of Active Timing Views Using SmartMMMC . . . . . . . . . . 351
8.20 Performing Clock Skewing for Setup Timing Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

9
Timing Model Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
9.1 Extracted Timing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
9.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
9.1.2 ETM Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
9.1.3 ETM Generation for MMMC Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
9.1.4 Slew Propagation Modes in Model Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
9.1.5 Basic Elements of Timing Model Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
9.1.6 Secondary Load Dependent Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
9.1.7 Characterization Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
9.1.8 Constraint Generation during Model Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
9.1.9 Parallel Arcs in ETM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
9.1.10 Latency Arcs Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
9.1.11 Latch-Based Model Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
9.1.12 Model Extraction in AOCV Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
9.1.13 Stage Weight Modeling in ETM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
9.1.14 AOCV Derating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
9.1.15 PG Pin Modeling During Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
9.1.16 Extracted Timing Models with Noise (SI) Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
9.1.17 Extracted Timing Models with SOCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
9.1.18 Merging Timing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
9.1.19 Limitations of ETM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
9.1.20 Validation of Generated ETM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
9.1.21 Auto-Validation of ETM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
9.1.22 ETM Extremity Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
9.1.23 Limitations/Implications of EV-ETM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

November 2023 6 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide

9.1.24 Ability to Check Timing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

9.2 Boundary Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
9.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
9.2.2 Boundary Model Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
9.2.3 Hierarchical Flow with Boundary Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
9.2.4 Clock Mapping in Top Level Run with Boundary Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
9.2.5 Recommendations for Generating Accurate Boundary Models . . . . . . . . . . . 407
9.2.6 Glitch-Specific Boundary Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
9.2.7 Boundary Models in MMMC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
9.2.8 Save-Restore of Hierarchical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
9.3 SmartScope Hierarchical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
9.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
9.3.2 Why Use SmartScope Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
9.3.3 Choosing Blocks to Use for SmartScope Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
9.3.4 SmartScope Analysis Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
9.3.5 Running SmartScope Hierarchical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
9.3.6 Scope Generation from Distributed STA (DSTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
9.4 Prototype Timing Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
9.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
9.4.2 Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
9.4.3 Using the PTM Flow to Generate Dotlib Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
9.4.4 Handling of Bus Bits in PTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
9.5 Interface Logic Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
9.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
9.5.2 Creating ILMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
9.5.3 Specifying ILM Directories at the Top Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
9.5.4 ILMs Supported in MMMC Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
9.5.5 ILM Validation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
9.5.6 Use of SDF, SDC, and XTWF in ILM Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
9.5.7 Creating XILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
9.5.8 Using ILM/XILM for Hierarchical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

10
Low Power Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
10.1 Low Power Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

November 2023 7 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide

10.2 Low Power Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

10.3 PGV Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10.4 Importing the Design in Low Power Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
10.5 Non-MMMC Flow Settings in Low Power Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

11
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Appendix - Timing Debug GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Appendix - Multi-CPU Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Appendix - Base Delay, SI Delay, and SI Glitch Correlation with SPICE . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Appendix - Supported CPF Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

12
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

November 2023 8 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide

About This Manual

The Tempus Timing Solution software, also known as Tempus, provides a sign-off timing and
signal integrity solution for a design flow. This manual describes how to install, configure, and
use Tempus to implement digital integrated circuits.

Audience
This manual is written for experienced designers of digital integrated circuits. Such designers
must be familiar with design planning, placement and routing, block implementation, chip
assembly, and design verification. Designers must also have a solid understanding of UNIX
and Tcl/Tk programming.

How This Manual Is Organized

The chapters in this manual are organized to follow the flow of tasks through the design
process. Because of variations in design implementations and methodologies, the order of
the chapters will not correspond to any specific design flow.

Each chapter focuses on the concepts and tasks related to the particular design phase or
topic being discussed.

In addition, the following sections provide prerequisite information for using the Tempus
software:
■ Installation and Startup
Describes how to install, set up, and run the Tempus software, and use the online Help
system.
■ Design Import
Describes how to prepare data for analysis in the Tempus software.Tempus Timing
Solution

November 2023 9 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
About This Manual

Conventions Used in This Manual

This section describes the typographic and syntax conventions used in this manual.

text Indicates text that you must type exactly as shown. For
example:
report_annotated_check -missing_setup

text Indicates information for which you must substitute a name

or value.
In the following example, you must substitute the name of a
specific file for worst_entries:
report_clock_timing -type skew
-nworst worst_entries

text Indicates the following:

■ Text found in the graphical user interface (GUI),
including form names, button labels, and field names
■ Terms that are new to the manual, are the subject of
discussion, or need special emphasis
■ Titles of manuals
[ ] Indicates optional arguments.
In the following example, you can specify none, one, or
both of the bracketed arguments:
command [-arg1] [arg2 value]

[ | ] Indicates an optional choice from a mutually exclusive list.

In the following example, you can specify any of the
arguments or none of the arguments, but you cannot
specify more than one:
command [arg1 | arg2 | arg3 | arg4]

{ | } Indicates a required choice from a mutually exclusive list.

In the following example, you must specify one, and only
one, of the arguments:
command {arg1 | arg2 | arg3}

November 2023 10 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
About This Manual

{[ ] [ ]} Indicates a required choice of one or more items in a list.

In the following example, you must choose one argument
from the list, but you can choose more than one:
command {[arg1] [arg2] [arg3]}

{ } Indicates curly braces that must be entered with the

command syntax.
In the following example, you must type the curly braces:
command arg1 {x y}

... Indicates that you can repeat the previous argument.

. Indicates an omission in an example of computer output or
.
. input.

Command – Subcommand Indicates a command sequence, which shows the order in

which you choose commands and subcommands from the
GUI menu.
In the following example, you choose Analysis from the
menu, then Specify Analysis Mode from the submenu,
and then Advanced from the tabs:
Analysis – Specify Analysis Mode – Advanced
This sequence opens the Specify Analysis Mode
Advanced form.

Related Documents
For more information about Tempus, see the following documents. You can access these and
other Cadence documents with Doc Assistant (cloud-based) documentation system.
■ Tempus Known Problems and Solutions
Describes important Cadence Change Requests (CCRs) for Tempus, including solutions
for working around known problems.
■ Tempus Text Command Reference
Describes the Tempus text commands, including syntax and examples.
■ Tempus Menu Reference
Describes Tempus graphical user interface.

November 2023 11 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
About This Manual

■ New Features in Tempus

Provides information about new features in this release of Tempus.
■ Tempus Foundation Flows User Guide
Describes the Cadence-recommended procedures for performing basic STA and SI
signoff, MMMC signoff, and CPF-based MMMC signoff using Tempus Timing Solution.
■ README file
Contains installation, compatibility, and other prerequisite information, including a list of
Cadence change requests (CCRs) that were resolved in this release. You can read this
file online at downloads.cadence.com.

November 2023 12 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

1
Product and Licensing Information

1.1 Tempus Product and Licensing Overview on page 14

1.2 About Licensing on page 14
1.3 Tempus Timing Solution Products on page 15
1.4 Tempus Timing Solution Product Options on page 18
1.5 Tempus License Options for Single View Distributed STA (DSTA) on page 20
1.6 Tempus License Options for Distributed MMMC (DMMMC) on page 21
1.7 Tempus License Options for Concurrent MMMC (CMMMC) on page 22
1.8 Tempus License Options for CMMMC in DSTA Mode on page 23
1.9 Tempus Paradime Flow Licensing for Interactive ECOs in CMMMC Mode on
page 25
1.10 About Tempus Timing Solution Licenses on page 26
1.11 Checking Out Tempus Licenses for Product Options on page 27

November 2023 13 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

1.1 Tempus Product and Licensing Overview

Each Cadence Tempus Timing Solution product is sold as part of a product package. Product
packages might also include product options. The options provide advanced features and
capabilities, such as support for enabling distributed client servers and/or accelerating
performance through increased CPU multi-threading.

Each product and product option has a corresponding license. The software uses licenses to
determine the features that are available when the software runs.

Related Topics
■ About Licensing
■ Tempus Timing Solution Products
■ Tempus Timing Solution Product Options
■ About Tempus Timing Solution Licenses
■ Checking Out Tempus Licenses for Product Options

1.2 About Licensing

The following terminology is useful in understanding licenses.
■ Base license
The license that is checked out when the software starts. Only a full-fledged product
license can be used as a base license. You cannot use a product option license as a base
license to start the software.
■ Dynamic license
A license for a product option that is not checked out until a feature provided by the
product option is needed. You can check out more than one dynamic license per base
license. For more information on dynamic licenses, see Checking Out Tempus Licenses
for Product Options.
■ Multi-CPU license
A license that enables additional CPUs for multi-threading, Superthreading, or
distributed processing. Multi-CPU licenses must be product licenses, and can be
checked out after the base license is checked out. You can check out more than one
multi-CPU license per base license.

November 2023 14 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

For more information on multi-CPU licenses, For more information on multi-CPU

licenses, see Innovus System Licensing and Packaging on SourceLink ®.
■ Licensing Server license
Tempus running on Linux x86 platforms is integrated with FLEXnet version 11.16.4.0.
The Tempus software using this version also requires the upgraded license server
version, which is integrated with FLEXnet 11.16.4.0 or higher versions. If the license
server is not updated, the Tempus software will not be able to run.
You can check the version of the licensing server by running the following commands in
the terminal where the license server is installed:
lmgrd -v
cdslmd -v

Related Topics
■ Tempus Product and Licensing Overview
■ Tempus Timing Solution Products
■ Tempus Timing Solution Product Options
■ About Tempus Timing Solution Licenses
■ Checking Out Tempus Licenses for Product Options

1.3 Tempus Timing Solution Products

The Tempus Timing Solution package includes the products listed in the table below. To start
any of these products, type the following UNIX/Linux command:

tempus -stylus

November 2023 15 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

Table 1-1 Tempus Timing Solution Products

Name and Product

Abbreviation Description
License String Number
Tempus Timing Tempus L TPS100 Tempus L is one of the two base
Solution L licenses in the Tempus line. Tempus
L provides better timing analysis
performance for both Graph-Based
Analysis (GBA) and Path-Based
Analysis (PBA) versus Tempus XL
and also allows for multi-threaded
PBA, which is unavailable in Tempus.
Tempus L is functionally equivalent to
Tempus XL with the exception of
concurrent MMMC operation.
Concurrent MMMC is available only
in Tempus XL.
Tempus_Timing_Signoff_L
Tempus L can be paired with Tempus
ECO for Signoff ECO and it can be
paired with Tempus MP to enable
more CPUs for multi-threading.
Tempus L can be used for
acceleration and enables 8 CPUs.
Tempus L can checkout Tempus
ECO, or Voltus L/Voltus XL to load the
concurrent MMMC view definitions by
default. If any of these licenses are
not available, the software will load
the design with a SMSC (single-mode
single-corner) definition.

November 2023 16 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

Name and Product

Abbreviation Description
License String Number
Tempus Timing Tempus XL TPS200 Tempus XL provides all the
Solution XL functionality of Tempus L and
includes the primary innovation of
distributed design. Distributed design
leverages massive parallel
computation by leveraging multiple
compute servers to perform static
timing analysis for a single view for
designs up to 100s of millions of
placeable cell instances.
In addition, Tempus XL provides eight
additional CPUs over Tempus L - no
compromise on hierarchical/
incremental analysis, or concurrent
MMMC analysis in a single
session.Tempus XL can be used for
acceleration and enables 16 CPUs.
Tempus_Timing_Signoff_XL
Virtuoso Digital VDS100
Signoff Timing
Solution
Tempus Library TPS500
Validation
Solution

Related Topics
■ Tempus Product and Licensing Overview
■ Tempus Timing Solution Products
■ Tempus Timing Solution Product Options
■ About Tempus Timing Solution Licenses
■ Checking Out Tempus Licenses for Product Options

November 2023 17 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

1.4 Tempus Timing Solution Product Options

The Tempus Timing Solution product options provide the extendibility and cost-effective
access to additional advanced technologies, such as support for enabling distributed client
servers and/or accelerating performance through increased CPU multi-threading. These
options are listed in in the table below.

Table 1-2 Tempus Timing Solution Product Options

Name and Product

Abbreviation Description
License String Number
Tempus Timing Tempus ECO TPS300 The Tempus ECO option works with
Solution ECO either Tempus L or Tempus XL to
enable MMMC signoff ECO
functionality. This enables physically-
aware MMMC timing optimization for
setup/hold and DRV violations. It also
supports leakage power optimization.
Tempus ECO is only an additional
license, which is required to run
physically-aware timing signoff
optimization.Tempus ECO can also
be used to enable concurrent MMMC
operation when used with the base
Tempus L license.
Tempus_Timing_Signoff_TSO
Tempus Tempus MP TPS400 Tempus MP is a dual use accelerator
Massively Parallel for Tempus. In non-distributed
analysis, Tempus MP adds sixteen
CPUs to the base license of either
Tempus L or Tempus XL for
enhanced multi-threaded
performance.

November 2023 18 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

Name and Product

Abbreviation Description
License String Number
While performing design distribution,
Tempus MP is required for each
distributed process. Distributed
processes can be on separate
hardware clients or can be packed on
a single large compute server. In
either case, it is one Tempus MP per
process and each process enables
up to sixteen CPUs. Tempus MP
licenses can be stacked to provide
more CPUs in blocks of
sixteen.Tempus MP can be used for
acceleration and enables 16 CPUs.
Tempus TPS210 This is a single option required for all
Advanced the designs using any of the
Analysis Option functionality in this analysis package.
This license is not tied to any specific
technology node or foundry.
Tempus Timing TPS230 This is a single option required for all
Solution 3nm the 3nm designs independent of the
Option foundry. This includes all the
modeling features that are required
by foundries to enable and support
3nm designs.
Tempus Timing TPS232 This is a single option required for all
Solution 2nm the 2nm designs independent of the
Option foundry. This includes all the
modeling features that are required
by foundries to enable and support
2nm designs.
Certus Solution Certus CRTS232 This is a single option required for the
2nm Option Certus Client Manager and Clients for
all the 2nm designs independent of
the foundry.
Certus Multi-CPU Certus CRTS150 This option is required for ECO/
Option Optimization only for Certus clients.

November 2023 19 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

Note: The default multi-CPU order is Tempus MP, Tempus L, and Tempus XL.

Related Topics
■ Tempus Product and Licensing Overview
■ About Licensing
■ Tempus Timing Solution Products
■ About Tempus Timing Solution Licenses
■ Checking Out Tempus Licenses for Product Options

1.5 Tempus License Options for Single View Distributed

STA (DSTA)
The following are the Tempus license requirements for single view DSTA mode:
■ Master requires 1 Tempus XL (up to 16 CPUs).
■ Clients require 1 Tempus MP each (up to 16 CPUs per client).
■ Additional Tempus MP keys unlock additional CPUs for the master and client (up to 16
more per license).
■ Each slave checks out a Tempus-MP license and also allows Tempus-XL functionality.

The order of licenses is shown in Figure 1-1 on page 20:

Figure 1-1 DSTA license requirements

November 2023 20 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

Related Topics
■ Tempus License Options for Distributed MMMC (DMMMC)
■ Tempus License Options for Concurrent MMMC (CMMMC)
■ Tempus License Options for CMMMC in DSTA Mode

1.6 Tempus License Options for Distributed MMMC

(DMMMC)
The following are the Tempus license requirements in DMMMC mode, see Figure 1-2 on
page 21:
■ 1 Tempus L or XL to start the master session
■ 1 Tempus L or XL per view or slave (1:1 view/slave ratio)
■ Tempus XL enables 16 CPUs, Tempus L enables 8 CPUs

Figure 1-2 DMMMC license requirements

Related Topics
■ Tempus License Options for Single View Distributed STA (DSTA)
■ Tempus License Options for Concurrent MMMC (CMMMC)
■ Tempus License Options for CMMMC in DSTA Mode

November 2023 21 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

1.7 Tempus License Options for Concurrent MMMC

(CMMMC)
The following are the Tempus license requirements in CMMMC mode:
■ When 'N' views are combined into a single STA job on a single machine, the following
licenses are required:
❑ 1 to 8 views: 1 XL (16 CPUs) or [1 L + 1 ECO] (8 CPUs)
❑ 9 to 16 views: 2 XL (16 CPUs) (the L + ECO combo not accepted)
❑ Unlimited views: 3 XL (16 CPUs) (the L + ECO combo not accepted)
■ More CPUs enabled by checking out more L (8), XL (16), or MP (16) licenses
■ Minimum configuration: 1/2/3 XL or 1(L + ECO)

Examples:
❑ CMMMC with 6 views on 12 CPUs = 1 XL
❑ CMMMC with 15 views on 18 CPUs = 2 XL + 1 XL or = 2 XL + 1 MP
❑ CMMMC with 20 views on 32 CPUs = 3 XL + 1 XL or = 3 XL + 1 MP
Note: The CMMMC STA licensing is different from Tempus ECO, which is also multi-mode/
multi-corner.

November 2023 22 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

Figure 1-3 CMMMC license requirements

Related Topics
■ Tempus License Options for Single View Distributed STA (DSTA)
■ Tempus License Options for Distributed MMMC (DMMMC)
■ Tempus License Options for CMMMC in DSTA Mode

1.8 Tempus License Options for CMMMC in DSTA Mode

Tempus DSTA can distribute a CMMMC job across multiple computers. Each computer
performs local multi-threading. The licensing requirements are given below:
■ The master process requires an XL license:
❑ unlimited views (master not affected by any number of views)
❑ unlimited CPUs
■ Each client requires a Tempus MP license - and licenses CMMMC just like non-DSTA
jobs:
❑ 1XL (16 CPU) or 1{L+ECO} (8 CPU) for <= 8 views

November 2023 23 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

❑ 2 XL for 9 to 16 views
❑ 3 XL for unlimited views
❑ Add extra CPUs with additional MP licenses
■ The required minimum configuration for this setup is 3 XL + 2 MP.

Figure 1-4 CMMMC license requirements in DSTA mode

Examples:
■ Run CMMMC with 6 views across 5 computers = 1XL + 5MP +5 XL = 80 CPUs (5
clients@16)
■ Run CMMMC with 10 views across 3 computers = 1XL + 3MP + 6XL= 48 CPUs (3
clients@16)

Related Topics
■ Tempus License Options for Single View Distributed STA (DSTA)
■ Tempus License Options for Distributed MMMC (DMMMC)

November 2023 24 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

■ Tempus License Options for Concurrent MMMC (CMMMC)

1.9 Tempus Paradime Flow Licensing for Interactive

ECOs in CMMMC Mode
Tempus Paradime keeps all the STA sessions alive so that ECO changes can be committed
and timing can be immediately updated incrementally across all the views. The Paradime
licensing model is based on a master-client architecture (DMMMC), where:
❑ The Master session requires one Tempus XL and one Tempus ECO.
❑ Each client requires a Tempus XL license.

You can stack extra Tempus MP, Tempus L, and Tempus XL licenses to enable more CPUs
for each client session. All the licenses are checked out upon start up and are valid throughout
the session.

The license flow is illustrated in the diagram below.

Figure 1-5 Tempus Paradime Flow Licensing in CMMMC Mode

Related Topics
■ Tempus License Options for Single View Distributed STA (DSTA)

November 2023 25 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

■ Tempus License Options for Distributed MMMC (DMMMC)

■ Tempus License Options for Concurrent MMMC (CMMMC)
■ Tempus License Options for CMMMC in DSTA Mode

1.10 About Tempus Timing Solution Licenses

When you run a command to invoke a product or product option, a license is checked out.
Each product and product option has a unique license string (also called a license key). The
following table lists the product and product option names, and provides the corresponding
license strings.

Table 1-3 Product and product options and corresponding license strings

Product or Option License String

Tempus Timing Solution L Tempus_Timing_Signoff_L
Tempus Timing Solution XL Tempus_Timing_Signoff_XL
Tempus Timing Solution ECO Tempus_Timing_Signoff_TSO
Tempus Timing Solution MP Tempus_Timing_Signoff_MP

The version of vendor daemon (cdslmd) and license daemon (lmgrd) should be 11.11.1.1 or
higher. If the daemon versions have not been updated, Tempus may fail to checkout a license:
$ tempus
Checking out Tempus Timing Solution license ...
Fail to find any Tempus Timing Solution license...
Check your Tempus Timing Solution license status.

To fix the above error, restart the license server using the latest cdslmd and lmgrd versions
included in the release tree.

Related Topics
■ Tempus Product and Licensing Overview
■ About Licensing
■ Tempus Timing Solution Products
■ Tempus Timing Solution Product Options

November 2023 26 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

1.11 Checking Out Tempus Licenses for Product Options

The tempus command specifies the product options to be checked out when you invoke the
software. The product options specified with the -lic_startup_options parameter are
checked out immediately and the product options specified with the -lic_options
parameter are checked out dynamically. The use model is as follows:
tempus -lic_startup_options "lic1 lic2 ..."

Note: If you do not want any product options to be checked out dynamically, use empty
quotes with the -lic_options parameter, as follows:
tempus -lic_options "lic1 lic2 ..."

The following command can be used to check out product options after you have invoked the
software:
set_license_check -checkout license -optionList "license1 license2 …"
The product option specified with the -checkoutList parameter is checked out
immediately and the product options specified with the -optionList parameter are
checked out dynamically. With the -checkOut parameter, you can specify only one product
option.
Note: If you do not want any product options to be checked out dynamically, use empty
quotes with the -optionList parameter, as follows:
set_license_check -checkout option -optionList " "

Important
You cannot check out a license for a product option if you have not checked out a
base license.

Related Topics
■ Tempus Product and Licensing Overview
■ About Licensing
■ Tempus Timing Solution Products
■ Tempus Timing Solution Product Options
■ About Tempus Timing Solution Licenses

November 2023 27 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Product and Licensing Information

November 2023 28 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Design Import

2
Design Import

2.1 Design Import Overview on page 30

2.2 Input Requirements on page 30
2.3 Design Import Flow on page 32
2.4 Performing Design Sanity Checks in Tempus on page 36
2.5 Tempus File Management on page 36

November 2023 29 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Design Import

2.1 Design Import Overview

This topic describes the tasks that you perform to import the data and prepare for analysis in
Tempus. The Tempus software supports both MMMC (multi-mode multi-corner) and non-
MMMC methods of importing design data. However, Tempus database has MMMC
configuration settings by default. Tempus works in logical and physical modes. Physical
information is available in the form of LEF/DEF format, Innovus, or Open Access (OA)
database.

2.1.1 Input Requirements

Required Design Data
■ Timing Libraries (Liberty dotlib files)
■ Verilog Netlist
■ SDC Constraints
■ Parasitic Data (SPEF/RCDB)

Optional Design Data

■ Delay Data (SDF file)
■ Physical Data

Timing Libraries

Timing library files contain timing information in ASCII format for all standard cells, blocks, and
I/O pad cells. Tempus reads timing library format files (.lib).You can read in the library files
using the read_libs command.

Verilog Netlist

Tempus reads synthesized netlist in Verilog. You can read in the netlist files using the
read_netlist command.

SDC Constraints
■ To ensure that your design meets the timing requirements, you must first specify the
requirements by setting the constraints. You can use the timing constraints to set:

November 2023 30 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Design Import

■ Timing context for constraint assertions

■ Boundary conditions, such as input and output delays
■ Slew rates
■ Path exceptions, such as false paths, path delays, and cycle additions
■ Disable certain paths in the design

You can read the timing constraints using the read_sdc command.

Parasitic Data (SPEF/RCDB)

You can specify the parasitic data for more accurate timing analysis using a SPEF or RCDB
file.

You can use the read_spef command to specify the SPEF file. The read_parasitics
command is used for reading SPEF and RCDB-based RC parasitics information, and already
created RCDBs in Tempus.

Delay Data (SDF file)

This is an optional input requirement.

An SDF file contains details about the absolute delays for all cells and interconnects,
including IR drop and crosstalk impact. It annotates user-specified delay information from the
SDF file into the timing system. You can use the read_sdf command to supply pre-
calculated delays and timing check values from an external delay calculator, or from a
previous Tempus session.

In Tempus, you can use the read_sdf command to read in a SDF file and then the timing
analysis engine will use the delays annotated from this SDF file.

Physical Data

This is an optional input requirement. In Tempus, you can read physical information, such as
placement, floorplan, and routing that you created using LEF and DEF in Innovus.

To read the physical data, use one of the following commands:

■ The -physical_data parameter of the read_db command with either configuration file
or Innovus file that you generate using Innovus.

November 2023 31 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Design Import

■ The read_def command after reading the LEFfiles, netlist, and .lib files.
Note: To read LEF files, use the -lefs parameter of the read_physical command.

2.2 Design Import Flow

The design import flow involves the following steps:
■ Initializing the design
■ Writing the design
■ Reading the design

Initializing the design involves reading the timing data, physical data, HDL/netlist, and power
intent data. After initialization, the design is in consistent state and is ready for timing analysis.

There are two main types of initialization:

■ MMMC Timing Initialization
■ Simple Timing Initialization

2.2.1 MMMC Timing Initialization

The MMMC (multi-mode multi-corner) timing initialization uses the read_mmmc command to
load a MMMC configuration file with the timing setup data. The physical data can optionally
be loaded into Tempus to support physical flows, such as Tempus ECO. The power intent
data is required for all multi-supply, multi-voltage (MSV) designs. This flow is common to all
the tools and supports all the optimization and analysis flows.

The following is an example script to import MMMC data:

read_mmmc top.mmmc #required
read_physical -lef {tech.lef stdcell.lef} #optional in Genus, Tempus,
#required for Innovus
read_netlist top.v #required, Genus also allows
read_hdl/elaborate #Genus only
read_power_intent -1801 top.1801 #required for power domain designs
init_design #required
read_def top.def #optional in all tools

The above flow is described below:

November 2023 32 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Design Import

■ read_mmmc will create the library_set, rc_corner, timing_condition, constraint_mode, and

analysis_view objects as specified in the MMMC file. It will also load the timing libraries
required by the active views from the set_analysis_view command in the MMMC file.
The reading of other files like SDC constraints is deferred until init_design. During
init_design, only the files required by the active views from the set_analysis_view
command are loaded. Timing libraries or constraint files for non-active views are not
loaded unless those views are made active with set_analysis_view later in the flow.
■ read_physical is used to load LEF or OA technology data and physical library data.
This command is required by Innovus and can be optionally loaded in Tempus and
Genus to support physical design flows.
■ read_netlist is used to load a Verilog gate-level netlist, or an OA netlist. Genus also
allows the usage of read_hdl/elaborate instead of read_netlist to synthesize an RTL
netlist (see the Genus documentation for details).
■ read_power_intent can optionally be used to load a power intent file (IEEE 1801, or
CPF). The power data is incomplete until the binding done with the timing data during
init_design. A power intent description in either CPF or IEEE 1801 format is generally
required for MSV designs.
■ init_design loads any deferred timing data from read_mmmc above, and binds the
timing data to the netlist, and binds the analysis_views to any power_domains if needed.
Various consistency checks are done, and after this step the design is ready for use.
■ read_def can optionally be used to load an initial DEF file after init_design. Innovus
also allows read_floorplan to read in a previously saved floorplan file instead of
read_def. After read_def is done, it is important to run commit_power_intent -
keep_rows -power_domain to make sure any DEF GROUPS statements (or floorplan
file Groups section) has not changed the power_domain group definitions, but keep the
rows from the DEF or .fp file.

The design import flow in MMMC mode is summarized below:

Table 2-1 MMMC Design Import Flow

Initialize Design
Logical Data read_mmmc <>
read_netlist <> [-top <>]
read_power_intent <> (optional)
init_design

November 2023 33 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Design Import

Physical Data read_mmmc <>

read_physical -lefs <>
read_netlist <> [-top <>]
read_power_intent <> (optional)
init_design
OA Physical Data read_mmmc <>
read_physical -oa_ref_libs <>
read_netlist <> [-top <>]
read_power_intent <> (optional)
init_design
Write Design
Logical Data write_db <out_dir>
Physical Data write_db <out_dir>
OA Physical Data write_db -oa_lib_cell_view <lib cell view>
Read Design
Logical Data read_db <in_dir>
Physical Data read_db <in_dir> -physical_data
OA Physical Data read_db -oa_lib_cell_view <lib cell view> \
-physical_data

To load a design in DMMMC mode, refer to the “Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing
Analysis” chapter of the Tempus User Guide.

2.2.2 Simple Timing Initialization

A single timing mode and delay corner (SMSC) analysis can use read_libs and read_sdc
commands instead of loading a MMMC file using read_mmmc. The physical data is optional,
and power intent is not supported. This is intended for simple synthesis flows or timing signoff
analysis that only deals with one timing mode and delay corner at a time.

A typical initialization script is shown below:

read_libs all.lib #required
read_netlist top.v #required
read_sdc top.sdc #required
init_design #required

The above flow is described below:

November 2023 34 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Design Import

■ read_libs will save the file names, but defer reading them until the netlist is read. To
configure the physical aware ECO flow of Tempus, use read_physical to add physical
library data after read_libs.
■ read_netlist will load the timing libraries and a Verilog netlist, or an OA netlist.
read_sdc will read in the SDC timing constraints into the analysis.

■ init_design does various consistency checks, finishes setting some default

initialization values, and after this step the design is ready for use. To configure the
physical aware ECO flow of Tempus, use read_def (after this step), to load a DEF file.

The design import flow in non-MMMC mode is summarized below:

Table 2-2 Non-MMMC Design Import Flow

Initialize Design
Logical Data read_libs <>
read_netlist <> [-top <>]
read_sdc <>
init_design
Physical Data read_libs <>
read_physical -lefs <>
read_netlist <> [-top <>]
read_sdc <>
init_design
OA Physical Data read_libs <>
read_physical -oa_ref_libs <>
read_netlist <> [-top <>]
read_sdc <>
init_design
Write Design
write_db <out_dir>
Logical Data
write_db <out_dir>
Physical Data
write_db -oa_lib_cell_view <lib cell view>
OA Physical Data
Read Design
read_db <in_dir>
Logical Data
read_db <in_dir> -physical_data
Physical Data

November 2023 35 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Design Import

OA Physical Data read_db -oa_lib_cell_view <lib cell view> \

-physical_data

When the data is imported using non-MMMC commands, Tempus internally stores it in
MMMC configuration as the following MMMC objects:
default_emulate_view
default_emulate_delay_corner
default_emulate_rc_corner
default_emulate_libset_max
default_emulate_libset_min
default_emulate_constraint_mode

2.3 Performing Design Sanity Checks in Tempus

At various stages of the design process, you can check for missing or inconsistent library and
design data.

To perform these checks, use the following commands:

■ check_design
■ check_timing_library
■ check_timing

2.4 Tempus File Management

Tempus allows you to manage temporary and auto-generated files. These are described in
the sections below:

Temporary Files Management

You can specify the directory for writing out temporary files during a Tempus session.

The Tempus software creates a unique temporary sub-directory for a session, specified by
setenv TMPDIR <dir-name> at the command prompt, where:

■ Default value of TMPDIR is “/tmp”.

■ All temporary files will be created under directory:
“$TMPDIR/tempus_<user>_<pid>_<xxxxx/”

November 2023 36 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Design Import

■ If write-permission is not provided in $TMPDIR, then TMPDIR will internally reset to “/

tmp”.
■ If the specified TMPDIR does not have enough space, the software will not launch.
■ All temporary files/directories will be deleted, once a session ends.
■ No temporary file is expected to be created in the run directory.

This support is also available for DMMMC and DSTA flows.

Auto-Generated File Management

You can control the location and name of auto-generated files in a session. These files are
created by Tempus automatically and are retained after the run completes. This includes
report files, or other output files with default names that are auto-generated in the current run
directory. The software allows you to control the directory that the files should be redirected
to, and also add unique prefixes to file names. You can use the following attributes to control
this behavior:
■ auto_file_dir
Represents the top-level directory to store files/sub-directories that are auto-generated
by the software.
■ auto_file_prefix
Represents the prefix to be applied to all files/sub-directories that are auto-generated by
the software.

November 2023 37 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

3
Installation and Startup

3.1 Tempus Product and Installation Information on page 39

3.2 Setting Up the Tempus Run Time Environment on page 39
3.3 Launching the Tempus Console on page 40
3.4 Completing Command Names on page 41
3.5 Command-Line Editing on page 41
3.6 Setting Preferences on page 43
3.7 Starting the Tempus Software on page 43
3.8 Accessing Tempus Documentation and Help on page 45
3.9 Accessing Documentation and Help from Tempus GUI on page 45
3.10 Using the Tempus man and help Commands on the Command-Line on page 47
3.11 Other Sources of Cadence Product Information on page 48

November 2023 38 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

3.1 Tempus Product and Installation Information

For product, release, and installation information, see the README file at any of the following
locations:
■ http://downloads.cadence.com
■ In the software installation, where it is also available when you are using or running the
software

For information about the Tempus licenses, see “Product and Licensing Information” chapter.

3.2 Setting Up the Tempus Run Time Environment

If install_dir is the location of the Tempus installation, then you should setup the run time
environment as follows:
■ Add the install_dir/bin directory to the path. The bin directory has links to all the
public executable files in the install hierarchy.
■ If you want the Tempus man pages to be available with the Unix man command, then you
can add the install_dir/share/tempus/man to the MANPATH envar.
■ If you want the Stylus Common UI Tempus man pages to be available with the Unix man
command, then you can add install_dir/share/tempus/stylus_man to the
MANPATH envar.
■ If you want the Tcl man pages to be available with the Unix man command, then you can
add the install_dir/share/tcltools/man to the MANPATH envar.

For example, you can add the following to the startup shell script:
set install_dir = /tools/tempus16.2/lnx86
set path = ($install_dir/bin $path)
setenv MANPATH $install_dir/share/tempus/man:$install_dir/share/tcltools/
man:$MANPATH

Note: When Tempus launches, it automatically adds the legacy or the Stylus CUI man pages
(if the -stylus parameter is specified), and the Tcl man pages at the beginning of the current
MANPATH inside Tempus. Therefore, from within Tempus the man command will show both
the sets of man pages before any other man pages.

November 2023 39 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

3.2.1 Temporary File Locations

Each Tempus session creates its own temporary directory to store temporary files at the
beginning of the run.

By default, the tmp_dir is created in the /tmp directory. If the Unix envar TMPDIR is set, then
the tmp_dir is created inside $TMPDIR.

The name of the tmp_dir will appear as given below:

ssv_temp_[pid]_xxxxxx

Where _xxxxxx is a string that is added to make the directory unique. For example:
ssv_temp_10233_nfp9ez

The temporary directory is automatically removed on exit or if the run is terminated with a
catchable signal (for example, SIGSEGV).

Supported and Compatible Platforms

The README file lists the supported and compatible platforms for this release.

3.3 Launching the Tempus Console

When you start Tempus in the non-GUI environment using the -no_gui parameter, the UNIX
window (shell tool, xterm, and so on) where you start the Tempus session is called the
Tempus console. This is where you enter all Tempus text commands and where the software
displays messages. When a session is active, this console displays the following prompt:
tempus>

When you start the Tempus in the GUI environment, the Tempus console is displayed within
the main Tempus window.

If you use this console for other actions, for example, to use the vi editor, the session
suspends until you finish the action.

If you suspend the session by typing Control-z, the tempus> prompt is no longer
displayed. To return to the Tempus session, type fg, which brings the session to the
foreground.

November 2023 40 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

3.3.1 Completing Command Names

Use the Tab key within the software console to complete text command names.

After you type a partial text command name and press the Tab key, the software displays the
exact command name that completes or matches the text you typed (if the string is unique to
one text command) or all the commands that match the text you typed.

For example, if you type the following text and press the Tab key
report_ti

The software displays the following command:

report_timing

If you type the following text and press the Tab key
report_t

The software displays the following commands:

report_table
report_tclist
report_thermal
report_thresh
report_timing
report_timing_derate
report_timing_lib

3.3.2 Command-Line Editing

The Tempus software provides a GNU Emacs-like editing interface. You can edit a line before
it is sent to the calling program by typing control characters. A control character, shown below
as a caret followed by a letter, is typed by holding down the Control key when typing the
character.

Most editing commands can be given a repeat count, n, where n is a number. To enter a
repeat count, press the Esc key, the number, and then the command to execute. For example,
Esc 4 ^f moves forward four characters. If a command can be given a repeat count, the
text [n] is shown at the end of its description.

You can type an editing command anywhere on the line, not just at the beginning. You can
press Return anywhere on the line, not just at the end.
Note: Editing commands are case sensitive: Esc F is not the same as Esc f.

November 2023 41 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

Table 3-1 Control (^) Characters

^A Move to the beginning of the line

^B Move left (backwards) [n]
^C Exits from editing mode, returning the console to normal Tempus System mode
^D Delete character [n]
^E Move to end of line
^F Move right (forwards) [n]
^G Ring the bell
^H Delete character before cursor (backspace key) [n]
^I Complete filename (Tab key); see below
^J Done with line (Return key)
^K Kill to end of line (or column [n])
^L Redisplay line
^M Done with line (alternate Return key)
^N Get next line from history [n]
^P Get previous line from history [n]
^R Search backward (forward if [n]) through history for text; must start line if text begins
with an up arrow
^T Transpose characters
^V Insert next character, even if it is an edit command
^W Wipe to the mark
^X^X Exchange current location and mark
^Y Yank back last killed text
^[ Start an escape sequence (Esc key)
^]c Move forward to next character c
^? Delete character before cursor (Delete key) [n]

November 2023 42 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

3.3.3 Setting Preferences

You set preferences at the beginning of a new design import. You can assign special
characters for the design import parser for Verilog®, DEF, and PDEF files, and control the
display of the Physical view window. You can also change the hierarchical delimiter character
in the netlist before importing the design, and change the DEF hierarchical default character
and the PDEF bus default delimiter before loading the file.
Note: If you change the default values for the DEF delimiter or PDEF bus delimiter, these
changes become the default delimiters for the DEF and PDEF writers.

For information on setting design preferences, see Tools - Preferences in the Tempus
Menu Reference.

Initialization Files

By default, various initialization files are loaded up at startup, if they exist. They can be used
to configure the GUI, load utility Tcl files, or configure Tempus settings.

For a list of the files and the order in which they are loaded, refer to tempus in the Tempus
Text Command Reference.

3.4 Starting the Tempus Software

To start a Tempus session, type the following command with the appropriate parameters on
the UNIX/Linux command line.
tempus

For information on using this command, see tempus in the Tempus Text Command
Reference.

This command starts one of the following products:

■ Tempus L
■ Tempus XL

For an overview of the products and product licensing, see “Product and Licensing
Information”.

November 2023 43 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

3.4.1 Using the Log File Viewer

The following methods are available to view the log file:
■ Integrated Log File Viewer on page 44
■ Standalone Log File Viewer on page 44

Integrated Log File Viewer

You can use the integrated log file viewer when the software is running. It has the following
features:
■ Ability to expand and collapse command information.
■ Ability to view multiple log files in separate console windows simultaneously.
■ Color coding of error, warning, and information messages.
■ Access to the documentation in the Tempus Text Command Reference.
When a log file is displayed, click on any of the underlined commands to open an HTML
window that displays the documentation for that command.

Use one of the following methods to use the viewer:

Select Tools - Log Viewer on the main menu.

The Log File window is displayed. Select the log file to view. The software opens a separate
console window and displays the log file.

For more information, see Tools - Log Viewer in the "Tools Menu" chapter of the Tempus
Menu Reference.

Standalone Log File Viewer

You can use the standalone viewer even if the software is not running. It provides most of the
same functionality as the viewer that is run within the software but does not provide access
to the documentation.

To use the standalone viewer, type the following UNIX/Linux command in the console window:
viewlog [-file logFileName]

The viewer opens the most recently created log file unless you specify a different file with the
-file parameter.

November 2023 44 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

3.5 Accessing Tempus Documentation and Help

You can access the Tempus documentation and help system by using the following methods:
■ Launching Doc Assistant on page 45
■ Accessing Documentation and Help from Tempus GUI on page 45
■ Using the Tempus man and help Commands on the Command-Line on page 47
■ Other Sources of Cadence Product Information on page 48

Launching Doc Assistant

To launch the Doc Assistant, you can use one of the following ways:
■ Linux systems: Navigate to the <install_directory>/lnx86/bin directory, and run
the cda command.
■ Tool's Help menu.

For more information, see the Doc Assistant User Guide.

3.6 Accessing Documentation and Help from Tempus

GUI
The Tempus software provides the following two methods to access documentation and help
from the GUI:
■ Select Help on the Main Tempus Menu on page 45
■ Select Help from a Tempus Form on page 46

Select Help on the Main Tempus Menu

Follow the steps given below:

November 2023 45 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

Figure 3-1 Help Menu

Select Help, and click any of the following options:

■ Text Command Reference
Opens the Table of Contents page of the text command reference.
■ User Guide
Opens the Table of Contents page of the user guide.
■ Known Problems and Solutions
Opens the Table of Contents page of the known problems and solutions document.

Select Help from a Tempus Form

Click the Help button in the bottom right corner of a form.

Clicking the Help button opens the entry for the form in Doc Assistant.

November 2023 46 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

3.7 Using the Tempus man and help Commands on the

Command-Line

Using the help Command to View the Command Syntax

■ To see syntax information for a command, type the following command in the software
console:
help command_name
For example, to see syntax information for the read_lib command, type the following
command:
help read_lib
The software displays the following text:
Usage: read_lib <dotlib_file> [-min <min_lib_list>]
[-max <max_lib_list>] [-cdb <cdb_list>]
[-lef <file_names>] [-pgv <power_grid_list>]
■ To see the entire list of Tempus commands and their syntax, type the following command
in the software console:
help

Using the man Command to View the Command Description

To see the complete set of information for a Tempus command, type the following command
in the software console:
man command_name

For example, to see the complete set of information for the read_lib command, type the
following command:
man read_lib

Using the help Command to View Message Summary

To see the message summary of a particular message ID, type the following command in the
software console:
help msg_id

For example, to see the message summary for the TECHLIB-1002 message ID, type the
following command:
help TECHLIB-1002

November 2023 47 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Installation and Startup

Using the man Command to View Message Detail

To see the message detail of a particular message ID, type the following command in the
software console:
man msg_id

For example, to see the message summary for the SI-2253 message ID, type the following
command:
man SI-2253

The detailed description is not available for all active message IDs.

3.8 Other Sources of Cadence Product Information

You can also get help on Cadence products by selecting Customer Support on the Help
menu. The Customer Support sub menu provides access to the following Cadence
resources:
■ Cadence Online Support
Opens Cadence Online Support in your browser.
■ Web Collaboration
Opens your default browser and explains the current methodology followed by Cadence
to support web based collaboration.

November 2023 48 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4
Analysis and Reporting

4.1 Base Delay Analysis on page 50

4.2 Signal Integrity Delay and Glitch Analysis on page 64
4.3 Timing Analysis Modes on page 124
4.3.1 Advanced On-Chip Variation (AOCV) Analysis on page 144
4.3.2 Statistical On-Chip Variation (SOCV) Analysis on page 169
4.4 Path-Based Analysis on page 186
4.5 Analysis Of Simultaneous Switching Inputs - SSI on page 193
4.6 Waveform Aware and Rail Swing Checks on page 199
4.7 Set Instance Library Flow on page 204
4.8 Inter Power Domain (IPD) Analysis on page 210
4.9 Aging-Aware STA Analysis on page 222

November 2023 49 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.1 Base Delay Analysis

4.1.1 Overview on page 51
4.1.2 Base Delay Analysis Flow on page 51
4.1.3 Limitations of Traditional Delay Calculators on page 54
4.1.4 Performing Base Delay Analysis on page 56
4.1.5 Base Delay Reporting on page 61

November 2023 50 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.1.1 Overview
Tempus enables you to perform fast and precise signal integrity-aware delay calculations for
cell-based designs. The software combines signal integrity (SI) analysis with timing analysis
to check for functional failures due to SI glitch and performs accurate timing calculations (that
account for both the SI and IR-drop effects). Tempus utilizes the multi-threaded circuit
simulation methods to deliver accuracy, capacity, and performance needed for nano meter
designs.

This chapter describes the delay analysis flow and reporting.

4.1.2 Base Delay Analysis Flow

The base delay analysis flow is described below:

Initialization Flow - MMMC Mode

The following figure shows the initialization flow in MMMC mode.

Figure 4-1 Base Delay Analysis Initialization Flow - MMMC Mode

Non-MMMC Initialization Flow

The following figure shows the initialization flow in non-MMMC mode.

November 2023 51 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-2 Base Delay Analysis Initialization Flow - Non-MMMC Mode

Sample Base Delay Calculation Script

You can use the following script to calculate base delay:

1. Specify the design size:
set_db –process 28
2. Load the design data. Follow the steps given below.
❑ Load the timing libraries (.lib):
read_libs
❑ Schedule reading of structural gate-level verilog netlist:
read_netlist dma_mac.v
❑ Set the top module name, and check for consistency between the Verilog netlist and
timing libraries:
init_design
❑ Load the timing constraints:
read_sdc constraints.sdc
❑ Load the cell parasitics:

November 2023 52 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

read_spef cell.spef.gz
3. Generate the timing report:
report_timing
4. Report base delay calculation details for the arcs:
report_delay_calculation –from inst1/A –to inst1/Y

Base Delay Analysis - Inputs and Outputs

Inputs
■ Timing Library (CCS or ECSM preferred): Contains the timing data.
■ Netlist: Specifies a circuit netlist in Verilog.
■ SPEF: Specifies the RC parasitics information in SPEF format.
■ Command File (Tcl): Contains a series of Tcl commands.
■ Noise Library (CCS-N, ECSM-SI, or cdB) (Optional input): Contains characterized noise
data.
■ Timing Constraints: Specifies the timing constraints, including clock propagation, in a
SDC file.

Outputs
■ Timing Reports: Contains details about the critical paths in the design.
■ Delay Report: Contains details about delay changes - with or without crosstalk.
■ SDF File: Contains the negative and positive delay changes caused by crosstalk. The full
SDF file contains details about the absolute delays for all cells and interconnects,
including crosstalk impact.
■ Noise Abstracts: Specifies an XILM abstract noise model. An XILM model is a detailed
noise abstracts that can be used to perform hierarchical timing and noise analysis. This
model contains cells that belong to block interface logic, and internal cells/nets that are
coupled to the interface logic.
■ Noise Report: Contains details about the glitch noise on nodes.

The inputs and outputs are shown in the diagram below.

November 2023 53 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-3 Inputs and Outputs required for Base and SI Analysis

4.1.3 Limitations of Traditional Delay Calculators

Traditional delay calculators use delay as a function of the input slew and output load. With
traditional delay calculators, a single linear slew value is used as the input to analyze a stage.
This methodology cannot produce the desired accuracy that new technologies demand.

This is illustrated in the figure below.

November 2023 54 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-4 Traditional Delay Calculation using Delay as function of slew and load

The advanced technologies (28nm and below) require waveform-based delay calculators to
accurately calculate the delays based on waveforms. The waveform-based delay calculators
use real waveforms as input to analyze a stage, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-5 Ideal Waveform based Delay Calculation

There are several shortcomings when you use traditional delay calculators. Some of these
are:

November 2023 55 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ Traditional delay calculators use single slew to calculate stage delays. This may not
produce accurate results.
■ Different waveforms with the same slew value produce the same delays.

Figure 4-6 Shortcomings of Traditional Delay Calculation

In the above figure, the grey waveforms indicate the input waveforms in an ideal case. The
black lines indicate the linear input slew values and slew waveforms, respectively.

Here, the linear input slew value and the input waveforms use the same slew, however, the
delay numbers are different. The long curve of the input waveform (grey) can produce larger
delays as compared to the one produced with the linear input slew (black). Also, the
measurement point shift can contribute to delay inaccuracy.

4.1.4 Performing Base Delay Analysis

To overcome the shortcomings of Traditional Delay Calculators, Tempus provides two
different approaches for performing delay calculations. These are described below:
■ Equivalent Waveform Model (EWM) on page 57
■ Waveform Propagation on page 58

November 2023 56 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Equivalent Waveform Model (EWM)

To achieve accuracy, the waveform shapes are required to be included during delay
calculations. The equivalent waveform model (EWM) computes equivalent receiver output
based on the input waveform shapes and adjusts the interconnect delay accordingly. The
adjustment in delay compensates for any inaccuracies that delay calculation might cause in
the next stage due to lack of waveform shape information. The EWM approach provides a
technique for producing higher accuracy results when compared to Spice.

When a stage is analyzed during delay calculation, a pre-defined waveform from the library
(based on single input slew value) is used as a stimulus. When the EWM mode is not enabled,
the input slew is measured from the actual waveform computed during the previous stage
analysis. This may have entirely different characteristics compared to the pre-defined
waveform used in the current stage. As a result, the delay impact due to waveform shape
differences may be affected.

The following figure illustrates delay calculation without EWM.

Figure 4-7 Delay Calculation without EWM

The following figure illustrates delay calculation with EWM.

November 2023 57 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-8 Delay Calculation with EWM

When EWM is enabled, the software computes the delay impact of waveform shapes on
receiver cells, and computes the delay impact - thus providing an overall improvement in path
delay accuracy. When EWM is enabled in SI analysis, the software provides delay
adjustments based on the receiver noise response to a noisy transition. This helps to reduce
the SI pessimism that will be reported if the total delay is measured on noisy waveforms at
the receiver input.

Use Model

Equivalent waveform model can be enabled by using the following command:

set_db delaycal_equivalent_waveform_model no propagation

Waveform Propagation

The waveform shapes have a significant impact on delay calculations. Traditionally, delay
calculation uses a single pre-driver waveform for specific slew value at the cell input to
compute the response on the output of a cell.

Consider two libraries characterized with pre-driver cells, BUFX16 and BUFX2. An accurate
delay on all the instances driven by BUFX16 will be reported, when the library uses BUFX16
as a pre-driver cell. In this case, the instance I4 produces more accurate results as the input
waveform matches with the pre-driver waveform. The accuracy of other cells is impacted due
to a difference in results for the pre-driver cell versus the actual driving cell. To facilitate actual
waveform propagation through a path, the waveform propagation feature stores the actual
waveform instead of a single slew value at the input of each cell.

November 2023 58 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

As shown in the figure below, both the BUFX16 slew (in grey) and BUFX2 slew (in black) have
the same value but their waveform shapes are different. The same slew having different
waveform shapes can produce different delays. The delay accuracy is a function of input
waveform shapes, even if the slew values are same. If the input waveform shape is different
from the input waveform used for cell characterization, the delay accuracy will be significantly
affected.

The waveform propagation feature is supported in both graph- and path-based analysis
modes.

The following figure illustrates waveform impact on delay.

Figure 4-9 Waveform impact on delay

Requirements for Waveform Propagation

The waveform propagation using ECSM models will be more accurate with additional receiver
pincap points. Cadence recommends at least eight points. The last three points can be the
lower slew threshold, delay measurement point, and upper slew threshold. The rest of the five
points must be selected to represent the tail waveform accurately. It is also recommended to
have actual pre-driver waveform in the ECSM libraries.

Use Model

Waveform propagation can be enabled by using the following command:

set_db delaycal_ewm_type moments

EWM-Only vs Waveform Propagation

EWM-Only

November 2023 59 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ Real waveform tail impact on the next stage is predicted and added to the current wire
delay.
■ The receiver cell is assumed to be the driver lumped load.

Waveform Propagation
■ Real waveforms are stored and used as input for the next stage. The input waveform tail
impact is used at the appropriate point.
■ Unlike EWM-Only, the waveform propagation computes accurate impact of the tail as it
uses distributed parasitics of wires.

EWM and Waveform Propagation - Impact on the Flow

The base delay flow is impacted in the following ways, when you use the equivalent waveform
model or waveform propagation methodology:
■ Enabling equivalent waveform modeling increases runtime by 10% - with no significant
increase in the memory.
■ Enabling waveform propagation increases runtime by 15%. There is an 8% increase in
the memory in graph-based analysis (GBA) mode, and no significant memory changes
take place in the path-based analysis (PBA) mode.

Normalized Driver Waveform in Library

The normalized driver waveform (pre-driver waveform) should be added to a library while
characterizing so that delay can be computed accurately (as there can be different waveforms
with the same slew). There are two types of pre-drivers – active and analytical. Cadence
recommends that you use the active pre-driver. The active pre-driver waveform has a longer
tail than the analytical pre-driver, and thus represents the real design scenario. In the absence
of NDWs (normalized driver waveform) in a library, Tempus auto-generates analytic pre-driver
waveforms.

An example of a normalized driver waveform in a library is given below:

normalized_driver_waveform (waveform_template_name) {
driver_waveform_name : "PreDriver20.25:rise";
index_1 ("0.00233, 0.01301, 0.05092, 0.1233, 0.2361, 0.3943, 0.6026");
index_2 ("0, 0.083, 0.166, 0.25, 0.333, 0.417, 0.5, 0.583, 0.666, 0.75, 0.833,
0.917,1");
values ( \
"0, 0.00037, 0.0005041, 0.0006424, 0.0008009, 0.0009783, 0.001179, 0.00140,
0.00166, 0.001995 0.002375, 0.002833, 0.003389", \
"0, 0.00220 0.0029643 0.003777, 0.004709, 0.005752, 0.006935, 0.00828374,
0.00988784, 0.0117336, 0.013969, 0.0166759, 0.0199283", \
"0, 0.00862494, 0.0116002, 0.01473, 0.0184297, 0.0225117, 0.0271421,

November 2023 60 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

0.0324164, 0.0386937, 0.0459165, 0.05466, 0.06571, 0.0779846", \

"0, 0.0208867, 0.0280917, 0.0357977, 0.0446304, 0.0545157, 0.065729,
0.0785015, 0.0937029, 0.111194, 0.132378, 0.15803, 0.188852", \
"0, 0.0399897, 0.0537844, 0.0685384, 0.0854496, 0.104376, 0.125845,
0.150299, 0.179404, 0.212893, 0.253452, 0.302566, 0.361577", \

Timing Library Requirement for Accurate Analysis for 16nm and Below

The ECSM/CCS library characterization for 16nm static timing analysis (STA) signoff meets
the challenges of accurate timing analysis in 20nm. In order to meet accuracy demands for
process nodes 16nm and below, the following are recommended:
■ 8-piece pin capacitances in ECSM timing libraries
■ 2-piece pin capacitance in CCS Timing libraries
■ N -piece pin capacitance in CCS Timing libraries
■ 2% - 98% ECSM waveform range

ECSM Libraries with 8-Piece Pin Capacitances

The 8-piece pin capacitance in the ECSM timing libraries are required to accurately model
back miller current. Traditionally, the receiver pin capacitance in an ECSM library
characterization is measured at the slew thresholds - that may be 30% to 70% of the VDD.
As a result, the use of such thresholds in the ECSM libraries may result in some missing
important data at the tail of the waveform. The 3-piece capacitance tables are extended to 8-
piece tables for 20nm nodes to better capture the waveform distortions due to back miller
current at the waveform tail. The selection of 8-piece pin capacitance is made such that the
required 20nm waveform distortion information can be captured correctly. Since the waveform
distortion happens mostly at the tail of waveforms, the pin-cap thresholds are selected so that
there are more points on the tail.

4.1.5 Base Delay Reporting

The following commands can be used to generate reports on base delay:
■ report_timing

■ report_delay_calculation

November 2023 61 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Using the report_timing Command

You can use the report_timing command to report the base delays on a timing path. It is
recommended to use the report_timing -split_delay parameter to produce a
comprehensive report.
tempus > set_db timing_report_fields {hpin cell transition delay arrival}
tempus > report_timing -split_delay
Path 1: VIOLATED (-1.191 ns) Path Delay Check with Pin wdata_rw_o[150]
View: slow_corner_setup
Group: default
Startpoint: (R) wdata_rw_i[150]
Clock: (R) CCLK
Endpoint: (R) wdata_rw_o[150]
Clock:
Capture Launch
Path Delay:+ 0.750 -
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 0.000 (I) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 0.750 0.000
Output Delay:- 0.000
Required Time:= 0.750
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Input Delay:+ 1.200
Data Path:+ 0.741
Slack:= -1.191
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Pin Cell Trans Delay Arrival
# (ns) (ns) (ns)
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
wdata_rw_i[150] (arrival) 0.004 - 1.200
wdata_rw_i_150_ATibuf_i14079/A BUFH_X13M_A12TS 0.004 0.002 1.202
wdata_rw_i_150_ATibuf_i14079/Y BUFH_X13M_A12TS 0.024 0.028 1.231
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i25015/A BUFH_X11M_A12TS 0.046 0.025 1.255
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i25015/Y BUFH_X11M_A12TS 0.023 0.047 1.303
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i1012019/A BUFH_X9M_A12TS 0.029 0.009 1.312
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i1012019/Y BUFH_X9M_A12TS 0.030 0.046 1.358
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i22662/A BUFH_X13M_A12TS 0.094 0.053 1.411
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i22662/Y BUFH_X13M_A12TS 0.029 0.073 1.484
wdata_rw_o_150_ATmdrc_i17414/A BUF_X9M_A12TS 0.063 0.037 1.521
wdata_rw_o_150_ATmdrc_i17414/Y BUF_X9M_A12TS 0.032 0.071 1.592
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i1013579/A BUFH_X16M_A12TS 0.036 0.007 1.599
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i1013579/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS 0.015 0.040 1.639
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i25739/A BUFH_X13M_A12TS 0.087 0.060 1.699
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i25739/Y BUFH_X13M_A12TS 0.020 0.064 1.763
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i1013616/A BUFH_X9M_A12TS 0.021 0.004 1.768
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i1013616/Y BUFH_X9M_A12TS 0.032 0.040 1.808
wdata_rw_o_150_ATdrc_i28560/A BUFH_X13M_A12TS 0.060 0.026 1.834
wdata_rw_o_150_ATdrc_i28560/Y BUFH_X13M_A12TS 0.023 0.054 1.888
wdata_rw_o_150_ATobuf_i14701/A BUFH_X3P5M_A12TS 0.034 0.013 1.901
wdata_rw_o_150_ATobuf_i14701/Y BUFH_X3P5M_A12TS 0.014 0.040 1.941
wdata_rw_o[150] ud_lpu_2x 0.014 0.000 1.941
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

November 2023 62 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Using the report_delay_calculation Command

You can use the report_delay_calculation command to report the delay calculation
information for a cell or net timing arc.
tempus > report_delay_calculation -from wdata_rw_i_150_ATibuf_i14079/Y -to
wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i25015/A

From pin : wdata_rw_i_150_ATibuf_i14079/Y

Cell : BUFH_X13M_A12TS_C35
Library : ff3sigma_0p935v_125c
To pin : wdata_rw_o_150_ATrbuf_i25015/A
Cell : BUFH_X11M_A12TS_C35
Library : ff3sigma_0p935v_125c
Base or SI : SI delay
Delay type : net
-------------------------------------------------------------
RC Summary for net wdata_rw_o_150_ATobuf_14701
-------------------------------------------------------------
Number of capacitance : 7
Net capacitance : 0.029770 pF
Total rise capacitance: 0.037020 pF
Total fall capacitance: 0.037104 pF
Number of resistance : 8
Total resistance : 1614.910156 Ohm
-------------------------------------------------------------
Rise Fall
-------------------------------------------------------------
Incr Net Delay : 0.009600 ns 0.009900 ns
Net delay : 0.033400 ns 0.033400 ns
From pin transition time: 0.005200 ns 0.004900 ns
To pin transition time : 0.057900 ns 0.058300 ns
-------------------------------------------------------------

November 2023 63 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.2 Signal Integrity Delay and Glitch Analysis

4.2.1 Overview on page 65
4.2.2 Understanding Attacker and Victim Nets on page 65
4.2.3 SI Delay Analysis - An Overview on page 65
4.2.4 SignaI Integrity Delay Analysis Flow on page 67
4.2.5 Performing Signal Integrity Delay Analysis on page 68
4.2.6 SI Delay Reporting on page 93
4.2.7 SI Glitch Analysis - An Overview on page 101
4.2.8 SI Glitch Analysis Flow on page 102
4.2.9 Understanding SI Glitch Analysis on page 104
4.2.10 Running Detailed SI Glitch Analysis on page 109
4.2.11 SI Glitch Reporting on page 111
4.2.12 Overshoot-Undershoot Glitch Analysis - An Overview on page 118
4.2.13 Running Overshoot-Undershoot Glitch Analysis - Sample Script on page 122

November 2023 64 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.2.1 Overview
Signal Integrity (SI) can impact the delay or introduce a glitch on a given net due to the
switching of nets that may be lying in close proximity. Tempus performs SI analysis by
analyzing the delay and slew changes of each switching signal in the presence of crosstalk
noise. The delay and slew changes, due to crosstalk noise, are then used to determine the
worst-case minimum or worst-case maximum path delays in the design. The software also
checks for functional failures due to crosstalk glitch noise and reports the failing nets.

Tempus performs the following signal integrity analysis operations:

■ SI Delay Analysis - An Overview
■ SI Glitch Analysis Flow

To perform signal integrity analysis, it is important to understand the role of attackers and
victim nets. These are discussed in the following section.

4.2.2 Understanding Attacker and Victim Nets

A victim net receives undesirable cross-coupling effects from any neighboring net. An
attacker is a net that causes undesirable cross-coupling effects on a victim net. An attacker
net can be a victim net and a victim net can also be an attacker net. The net which is analyzed
for SI effects is called a victim net.
■ The impact of an attacker net on a victim net depends on several factors:
■ The amount of cross-coupled capacitance
■ The relative time and the transition rate of the signal transitions
■ The switching directions (rising, falling)
■ The combination of effects from multiple attacker nets on a single victim net

4.2.3 SI Delay Analysis - An Overview

SI can increase or decrease signal delay, which can, in turn cause setup or hold failures.

Consider that attacker A1 switches in the opposite direction to the victim, as shown in the
figure below, then there can be a potential increase in the victim delay. Also, notice the non-
linear waveform shape that is caused by the glitch. This is shown in the figure below.

November 2023 65 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-10 SI increases delay

SI can also decrease the delay and cause hold time failures. If both the attacker and victim
are switching in the same direction, as shown in the figure below, then there is a decrease in
the victim net delay. If this occurs on a critical minimum delay path, it can lead to hold
violations. In other words, if a victim net transitions sooner than it was intended to, then it may
cause hold violations

The following figure illustrates decreased delay.

Figure 4-11 SI decreases delay

November 2023 66 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Tempus calculates the worst-case change in delay value due to cross-coupled attackers and
reports the change in delay in the timing and SI reports.

4.2.4 SignaI Integrity Delay Analysis Flow

The SI delay analysis flow is given below:

Figure 4-12 Tempus SI Delay Analysis Flow

Sample SI Delay Calculation Script

You can use the following script to calculate base and SI delay:
1. Specify the design size:
set_db –process 28
2. Load the design data. Follow the steps given below:
❑ Load the timing libraries (.lib) and characterized data (.cdB):
read_libs typ.lib -cdb typ.cdB
❑ Schedule reading of a structural, gate-level verilog netlist:
read_netlist dma_mac.v
❑ Set the top module name, and check for consistency between Verilog netlist and
timing libraries:

November 2023 67 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

init_design dma_mac
❑ Load the timing constraints:
read_sdc constraints.sdc
❑ Load the cell parasitics:
read_spef cell.spef.gz
3. Set the individual attacker threshold:
set_db si_individual_aggressor_threshold 0.015
4. Perform 3 SI iterations:
set_db si_num_iteration 3
5. Separate delta delay on data:
set_db si_delay_separate_on_data true si_delay_enable_report true
6. Enable SI-aware delay calculation:
set_db delaycal_enable_si true
7. Report the timing:
report_timing
8. Report details of SI delay calculation for an arc:
report_delay_calculation –si –from inst1/A –to inst1/Y
9. Report delay uncertainty due to SI:
report_noise –delay {min | max}

4.2.5 Performing Signal Integrity Delay Analysis

Tempus performs SI analysis in conjunction with base timing analysis. The SI delay analysis
calculates the change in delay due to coupling noise acting both with (min) and against (max)
a transitioning signal and outputs a delay uncertainty report in text format. SI delay analysis
uses a fast transistor-level transient Timing Windows (TW) Illustration simulation engine
to ensure the highest accuracy. This is done by accounting for non-linear waveforms created
due to the coupling noise and attributing delay changes to the victim.

Tempus performs the following operations during SI delay analysis:

November 2023 68 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-13 Tempus SI Delay Analysis Operations

These are explained in the sections below.

■ Determining Timing Windows on page 69
■ Selection of Attackers on page 74

Determining Timing Windows

Tempus can generate or read in the timing window information (using the read_twf
command) to determine which signals can (or cannot) switch simultaneously. The slews are
used to switch attacking signals. Timing windows represent the range of time during which a
net can transition. They are used to decide when it is possible for multiple attackers to
combine.

Attacker timing windows are exhaustively checked for the worst-case allowable combination
for the final combined simulation.
■ The worst case is determined by each attacker's glitch noise contribution.
■ The victim's timing windows are also checked for SI delay analysis.
■ The attacker slew affects the magnitude of the noise peak/incremental delay .

A more accurate slew reduces the noise peak, if the transition time is greater than the default
fast slew.

November 2023 69 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-14 Timing Windows (TW) Illustration

In the above figure, the ranges represent the TWs for respective nets. For attacker A1, TW
range is 2-3, that is, the time interval in which net A1 can switch. The attackers A1 and A2
can be combined to produce a bigger SI impact since their TWs are overlapping. Similarly,
attackers A3 and A4 can be combined since TWs are overlapping.

Now, depending on which one of the two combinations (A1-A2, or A3-A4) produces worst SI
impact, one of the combinations will be selected by the software for SI analysis.

Timing Windows Iterations

The SI effect on delay depends on timing windows and slew, whereas the timing window and
slew depends on the SI effect of delay. Therefore, the timing windows impact SI delay and SI
delay impacts timing windows.

Hence, an iterative approach is required to accurately compute the timing windows affected
due to SI so that Tempus can accurately calculate the SI delay and glitch.

There are two primary approaches to timing window iteration. The default approach starts
with an infinite timing window and iterates while shrinking the timing window width. The
second approach starts with a nominal or noiseless timing window and iterates while growing
the timing window width.

The following figure shows the default approach to start with infinite timing windows and
calculates the initial delta delays.

November 2023 70 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-15 Timing Windows (TW) 1st Iteration

In the second iteration, as shown in figure below, the delta delays are used to calculate new
arrival times, and therefore new timing windows. These new timing windows are used to
calculate new delta delays. The new delta delays are smaller because the timing windows are
more precise (smaller) compared to infinite timing windows.

Figure 4-16 Timing Windows (TW) 2nd Iteration

By default, Tempus performs two iterations. You can change the number of Iterations by using
the following command:
set_db si_num_iteration Number
All the nets are not reselected for analysis in each timing window iteration. Tempus supports
the following methods of re-selection.
■ Slack based
■ Delta delay based

November 2023 71 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ Xcap ratio based

These reselection criteria can be specified by using the command:

set_db si_reselection {{delta_delay | slack | xcap_ratio} (default is slack)
The default approach of starting with infinite TW will incur certain pessimism as in the initial
iteration, the nets will be having much bigger computed noise as compared to the actual
scenario. This pessimism will be reduced in the subsequent iterations as the nets are
reselected and their timing windows are shrunk. But reselecting all the nets will have a huge
run time impact. Therefore, the above mentioned criteria determines which nets are to be
reselected for further iterations. Understanding the trade-off between the runtime and
pessimism reduction, you can appropriately decide how the above criteria needs to be
deployed in the design.

Also, it is important to understand that reselecting a particular net does not ensure that all
pessimism is removed from SI analysis on that net. For instance, if the timing critical nets are
being reselected, the attackers of the critical victim nets may not necessarily be critical, so
the timing windows on the attackers may be pessimistic.

Timing Window CPPR

Timing windows of nets are computed irrespective of their relative positioning. There can be
some pessimism in analysis when the victim/attacker share common clock path.

Attacker attacks a victim with its full strength if it switches at the same time as the victim, and
the impact of the attacker on the victim declines as the distance between switching times
increases. The computation of closest switching time based on these arrival times can be
pessimistic if both attacker and victim share the same clock path.

November 2023 72 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-17 Timing Windows on CPPR Mode

In the example above, for path from Flop1 to Flop2, Attacker’s TW (4n – 8n) is overlapping
with Victim’s TW (2n – 5n). The clock arrival (at point P1), which is causing victim to reach at
5ns is 3ns. As both victim and attacker are sharing the same launch clock path till P1, they
both will be launched with the same clock arrival time till the point. So corresponding to the
arrival time of 3ns (at P1) the attacker can switch earliest by 6ns (and not 4ns). Therefore, the
actual positioning of the attacker and victim will be, as shown in the figure below. The attacker
can only attack from a shortest distance of 1ns from the victim switching time.

Figure 4-18 Timing window of Attacker and Victim not Overlapping

You can remove pessimism by enabling the following attribute:

set_db timing_enable_timing_window_pessimism_removal true
The adjustment in attacker TWs accounts for the difference in min-max delay on the top
common clock path due to the following factors:

Difference in base arrival of the top clock path due to early/late derates.

Min/Max SI impact on common clock path (adjusted only during hold analysis).

November 2023 73 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Selection of Attackers

After determining the timing windows of attacker/victim nets, Tempus selects the attackers
that produces the worst impact on the victim net. Tempus controls the attacker's selection
based on the following factors:
■ Strength of Attacker on page 74
■ Attacker Selection Based on Alignment on page 76
■ Attacker Selection Based on Logical Correlation on page 86

Strength of Attacker

The strength of an attacker is the amount of glitch it produces at victim’s receiver input and it
depends on the coupling capacitance between attackers and victims. With new processes
(smaller geometries), the ratio of Ccpl/Ctot is increasing. Some victims can have 100s or
1000s of attackers and many of these attackers can be small ones. SI analysis run time is a
strong function of the number of attackers. Higher numbers of attackers can result in high
analysis run time. Tempus provides a better way of handling small attackers by combining
these small attackers together. Tempus models many small attackers on a victim net and
replaces them with an imaginary net, called a virtual attacker.

Figure 4-19 Virtual Attackers Modeling

In the figure above, the small attackers, namely A1, A2, a3, and a4, are combined together
to form a virtual attacker ~net1.

Tempus identifies an attacker as an individual attacker if the glitch contribution from this
attacker is more than the threshold value specified with the set_db
si_individual_aggressor_threshold value command. If the peak of this glitch on the
victim net exceeds the specified threshold value, then the attacker is significant and is
individually reported in the constituents section of the SI report. You can use the
si_individual_aggressor_clock_threshold attribute to vary small attacker threshold for
victim nets lying on a clock path.

November 2023 74 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

If the glitch contribution of an attacker is less than the threshold value defined with the
si_individual_aggressor_threshold set_db attribute, then this attacker becomes
eligible for the virtual attacker.

The two main characteristics of a virtual attacker are: coupling capacitance and the voltage
source waveform used as a transition on the virtual attacker. You can use the set_db
si_accumulated_small_aggressor_mode attribute to create and control the characteristics
of the virtual attacker. Tempus provides the following two methodologies for creating virtual
attackers:
■ Current Matching-Based Methodology
■ Coupling Capacitance Matching-Based Methodology
Note: Both the methodologies account for the low probability of all small attackers switching
at once in order to reduce the pessimism on noise and SI delay analysis.

Current Matching-Based Methodology

To create virtual attackers using this methodology, you can set the following command:
set_db si_accumulated_small_aggressor_mode current

Tempus creates virtual attackers to match both the coupling capacitance and the noise
current. The PWL waveforms are generated in such a way that current induced by the
transition matches the total current induced by all virtual attacker components.

This methodology differs from the coupling capacitance methodology as follows:

■ Keeps several of the top virtual attacker components and calculates a PWL waveform for
each analysis type using TW filtering.
■ Improves on the statistical method (3-sigma method) by accounting for the probability of
switching.

Coupling Capacitance Matching-Based Methodology

To create virtual attackers using this methodology, you can set the following command:
set_db si_accumulated_small_aggressor_mode cap
Note: This is the default methodology for all process nodes above 45nm. The 45nm and
below default mode is current.

Tempus creates virtual attackers that model the combined coupling capacitance effects of
small attackers on a victim net. Every victim net can potentially have a virtual attacker.
Tempus assigns a name to each virtual attacker based on the name of the victim net. For
example, if the victim net name is ABC, then the virtual attacker net name will be ~ABC. The

November 2023 75 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

pessimism of using the virtual attacker can be reduced by adjusting the value of the
si_accumulated_small_aggressor_factor between 0 and 1.
set_db si_accumulated_small_aggressor_factor value
To recognize those attackers that may have a significant impact on a victim net, Tempus
performs a quick and conservative estimation that takes into account the resistance and
capacitance (RC) characteristics of the attacker and the victim net, as well as the worst-case
drive strength and the load of the victim net. If the estimated coupling capacitance effect from
an attacker is greater than five percent of VDD, the attacker is explicitly reported as an
attacker constituent of that particular victim net. It is typical for a victim net to have as many
as three or four attackers of this type. In general, attackers are usually very small and fall
under this five percent threshold.

You can change the virtual attacker glitch threshold using the set_db
si_accumulated_small_aggressor_threshold attribute. The default value of this
parameter is 10.01 percent of VDD. For example, to disable virtual attacker you can use a
threshold value greater than 1 (default), by using the following command:
set_db si_accumulated_small_aggressor_threshold 1.01

The virtual attacker provides time and memory savings, but sacrifices some accuracy,
reporting detail, and control on slew and timing window information. Because the virtual
attacker is used only for small attackers, these sacrifices should have a minimal impact on
results.

Attacker Selection Based on Alignment

Tempus supports three attacker alignment modes that allow you to select attackers based on
their alignment with victim nets.
■ Path Mode
■ Path Overlap Mode
■ Timing-Aware Edge Mode

The attacker alignment mode can be set by using the following command:
set_db si_aggressor_alignment {path | path_overlap | timing_aware_edge}
The default mode is timing_aware_edge.

Path Mode

In path alignment mode:

November 2023 76 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ Tempus uses the victim’s worst arrival edge (as shown in the figure) when determining
which attackers can align with it.
■ SI impact is computed according to the latest/earliest arrival edge of the victim for
maximum/minimum analysis.
■ This mode yields a more realistic analysis.

Path-based alignment annotates each attacker’s impact on victim transition where attacker
timing window edge aligns. The following example shows that in GBA mode Attacker 2 timing
window edge is close to the delay measurement point, thus resulting in maximum impact.

Figure 4-20 Path Alignment Mode

The path-based alignment is more realistic analysis and is less pessimistic than the other two
modes. However, GBA is not guaranteed to bound PBA delays. In this example, the victim
arrival time gets faster (move left) due to retiming of victim timing in PBA. With retimed arrival
time of victim, both the attacker timing window edges now align at the delay measurement
point, thus PBA sees a larger cross-talk impact than GBA.

The flow in path mode is illustrated in the figure below.

November 2023 77 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-21 Attackers alignment in path mode

In the above figure, for paths that are based on the last arrival edge of victim net, only A1 will
be selected for alignment in path mode.

Path Overlap Mode

In path overlap mode, Tempus uses the full timing window of the victim (as shown in the
figure), when determining which attackers can align with it.

SI impact is calculated according to the victim edge that is lying anywhere within the timing
window where the maximum impact occurs.

The path overlap mode considers all the attackers which overlap anywhere on victim
transition and annotate their combined impact at delay measurement point in both GBA and
PBA. Due to this methodology, the computed SI impact based on path overlap is pessimistic.
However, GBA is guaranteed to bound PBA analysis. The following example illustrates path
overlap alignment mode:

Figure 4-22 Path Overlap Alignment Mode

November 2023 78 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

This mode is more conservative in cross-talk delay computation among the other available
modes.

PBA analysis does not change based on attacker alignment modes, that is, PBA analysis
always annotates individual attacker impact on victim transition where ever attacker timing
windows overlap in all the three modes.

The flow in path overlap mode is illustrated in the diagram below.

Figure 4-23 Attackers alignment in path overlap mode

Even if victim timing window changes, the attackers' selection will remain the same. This
mode ensures that GBA bounds PBA delays.

In the figure above, consider a full timing window of a victim net - both attackers A1 and A2
will be considered for alignment with victim and hence both A1 and A2 are selected in the
path overlap mode. This mode is more pessimistic.

In path-based analysis (PBA) mode, Tempus uses the specific edge for the victim that occurs
for a specific path when determining the alignment of the attackers to the victim. It is possible
that the worst SI impact on a net occurs at a victim edge that is not the worst arrival edge for
the victim, thus the PBA victim edge used inside the timing window for the victim can yield a
worst-case SI result for a net. For more information, refer to section on Path-Based Analysis
on page 186.

To ensure that GBA results bound PBA, you should use the path overlap alignment mode.

Timing-Aware Edge Mode

Timing-aware edge mode performs realistic analysis similar to path-based analysis. Each
attacker’s impact is annotated on victim transition where attacker timing window edge aligns

November 2023 79 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

with the victim. However, to ensure GBA bounds PBA analysis, the timing-aware edge mode
handles some nets based on their timing properties in GBA analysis.

In the following example, if the victim net is a clock, or with exceptions like false paths or MCP,
the attacker timing windows are extended by width of the victim timing window.

Figure 4-24 Timing-Aware Edge Alignment Mode - Illustration 1

If the victim net is not a clock, and has no exceptions like false path or MCP, then all the
attacker timing windows are extended by a critical region of the victim timing window, in
addition to the maximum CPPR, as shown below.

Figure 4-25 Timing-Aware Edge Aligment Mode - Illustration 2

During PBA analysis, the attacker timing windows are extended by the actual CPPR of the
path, and no additional padding is required.

November 2023 80 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Clock and Exception Handling Timing-Aware Edge Mode

If the victim net is a clock net, and the attacker timing windows are extended by width of the
victim timing window to ensure that an attacker overlaps with the victim arrival time. Any
optimism on a clock net in GBA can result in large TNS optimism (in GBA) as compared to
PBA, because many paths share the same clock path. To eliminate this situation, the clock
nets are handled specially in timing-aware edge mode. The exceptions in certain scenarios
can cause optimism in GBA in path-based alignment mode.

Consider the following example:

set_false_path –through A1/A –through A2/A

Figure 4-26 Timing-Aware Edge Mode - Example 1

In this example, a path going through A1/B->Y in GBA analysis uses late edge, which
overlaps with attacker 2 only. However in PBA mode, a path going through A1/B->Y overlaps
with attackers 1 and 2 as well, this results in a larger delay than GBA. If the path ending at F3
is a critical path, then the late arrival time used in GBA analysis at A1/Y is not an optimal edge
as it produces optimism in GBA. In fact, late arrival used in GBA is coming from a pin that has
a false path. To overcome this caveat, timing-aware edge mode extends the attacker timing
windows by width of victim timing windows, such that GBA does not report optimistic delay
on critical path.

November 2023 81 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-27 Timing-Aware Edge Mode

Similarly, consider the following multi-cycle path example:

Figure 4-28 Timing-Aware Edge Mode - Example 2

If the late arriving edge at A1/Y is based on arrival time from A1/A, then the SI delay computed
based on that edge will see only one attacker, thus resulting in a smaller cross-talk delay
compared to the cross-talk delay computed based on the arrival time from A1/B. If a path is
reported from F2 in GBA and PBA, then PBA reports a larger delay at stage A1 due to this
optimism.

November 2023 82 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-29

To address this optimism in GBA analysis in path-based alignment, the timing_aware_edge

mode expands the attacker timing windows for stages with exceptions, such that GBA
analysis will be pessimistic than PBA.

Path-Based Analysis with Signal Integrity

Path-based SI analysis reduces the pessimism introduced during graph-based SI analysis by

considering path-based slews and arrival for victims. This helps in reducing design closure
ECO cycles, and saves area and power of design chips.

Figure 4-30 Analysis performed using actual path slew and arrival times of victim

Running PBA-SI on a complete set of paths in the design is computation intensive. It is

recommended to run PBA-SI on critical paths identified from GBA-SI analysis. So, while using
PBA-SI based signoff ensure that GBA-SI results are always pessimistic to PBA-SI.

November 2023 83 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

This can be ensured by running GBA-SI in path overlap mode, by using the following
command:
set_db si_aggressor_alignment path_overlap (default is path)

Attacker Selection Based on Relationship Between Clocks

The selection of attackers also depends upon the relationships between the clocks. Presence
of multiple clock groups - physically exclusive, asynchronous, and synchronous - in the design
will influence attacker selection behavior of Tempus differently. Tempus by default considers
all the clocks as synchronous clocks if no clock group is mentioned. You can change the
behavior by using below command below:
set_db si_clock_synchronicity {asynchronous | synchronous} (default is
synchronous)

Synchronous clocks have defined phase relationships amongst each other. Timing windows
are considered while evaluating the attacker/victim relationship.

The default behavior can be overridden by using the following command. This provides an
option to specify the timing relationship between specific clock domains.
set_clock_groups
[-group <clock_list>]
[-name <name_list>]
[-logically_exclusive] | [-physically_exclusive] | [ [-asynchronous]]

The preferred order of clock relationships is physically exclusive (highest) and then
asynchronous.

The table below explains the relationships and impact of different clock grouping on STA and
SI analysis:

Table 4-1 Relationships and impact of different clock grouping

Impact on STA or
Relationship Description Impact on SI Analysis
Timing Paths
Logically Specifies that Makes false path between No impact on SI Analysis.
Exclusive there is no logical such clocks. Crosstalk impact will remain
path between the the same.
clocks even
though they exist.

November 2023 84 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Asynchronous Indicates that Makes false path between Attackers from

there is no phase such clocks. asynchronous clock to
relationship victim clock are considered
between these to have infinite timing
clocks. windows.
Physically Specifies that Makes false path between Attackers from physically
Exclusive these clocks will such clocks. exclusive clock to victim
not exist physically clock are considered non-
at the same time in switching during SI analysis
the chip. of the victim (that is, they do
not attack the victim).
Such clocks
mainly exist in Note: When multiple clocks
constraints during on a victim net exist, then
mode merging. they are not marked
physically exclusive.

Consider a few scenarios for clock grouping, as follows:

Scenario1: In the following figure, the attacker is receiving timing window (TW) with respect
to the physically exclusive clock.

Figure 4-31 Attackers receiving TW with respect to Physically exclusive clock

In this case, the attackers will be dropped even if the timing window overlaps with that of the
victim.

November 2023 85 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

No impact of attacker will be considered on the victim.

Scenario 2: In the following figure, the attacker has a timing window with respect to
Synchronous as well as Physically Exclusive clocks to the victim.

Figure 4-32 Attackers having TW with respect to Synchronous as well as Physically

Exclusive clock

In this case:
■ Timing windows with respect to physically exclusive clocks to victim will be dropped
(CLK2) and victim-attacker relationship is determined using the attacker timing window
with respect to only synchronous clock (CLK3).
■ Victim timing window (with respect to CLK1) overlapping is checked with attacker timing
window (with respect to CLK3). As they do not overlap, attacker will not impact the victim.

Attacker Selection Based on Logical Correlation

During SI analysis Tempus introduces some pessimism when attackers that cannot logically
attack together are allowed to attack. Tempus by default assumes that all attackers can switch
together in a direction to cause a worst case delay (causing a slowdown) or speed up of
transition on the victim. But in some cases, there could be logical relationship between the
signals, that is, attackers might not actually switch together in the same direction.

Tempus performs logical correlation for inverters and buffers, except complex gates that are
not included in logical correlation.

You can use the following command to enable logical correlation:

set_db si_delay_enable_logical_correlation true (Default: false)

November 2023 86 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The following examples show some of the scenarios that logical correlation can handle.

Scenario 1: Relationship between Attackers

Exclusive sets are subsets of attackers that can switch simultaneously.

Exclusive sets can be {A1, A3} and {A2, A4}. Here, attackers A1 and A3 will be switching in
one direction, whereas A2 and A4 will switch in the opposite direction, as shown in the figure
below.

Figure 4-33 Logical Relationship Between Attackers

Scenario 2: Relationship between Victim and Attackers

In max analysis mode, attackers A1 and A4 can be excluded. Because, these nets cannot
switch in the opposite direction to the victim to increase the delay.

In min analysis mode, attackers A2 and A3 can be excluded. Because, these nets cannot
switch in the same direction as the victim to decrease the delay.

Figure 4-34 Logical Relationship Between Victim And Attackers

Scenario 3: Remote Attackers

If the number of inverters on each branch does not differ by a multiple of 2, then either A1 or
A2 will be used as an attacker, as shown in the figure below.

November 2023 87 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-35 Logical Relationship Between Remote Attackers

Waveform Computation

SI impact on delay (or glitch for glitch analysis) depends primarily on the following factors:
■ Victim Slew
■ Attackers’ Slew
■ Victim coupling cap to ground cap ratio
■ Relative switching direction for victim/attacker
■ Arrival windows of attackers/victim nets

SI impact on delay is performed in four steps. The first three steps will be applicable for SI
Glitch analysis as well.
■ Determine the slew of possible attackers and victim nets in their respective directions.
■ Determine the alignments of overlapping attackers to compute the worst impact.
■ Align all attackers at their respective positions.
■ Compute the stage delay.

These are explained below:

Step 1: Determine Slew of possible Attackers and Victim Nets in respective

directions.

Tempus implicitly considers attacker slew degradation by including the attacker's distributed
parasitic network in the simulation.

November 2023 88 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Tempus determines the fastest and slowest slew possible in each direction (rise/fall) at every
node in the design. For max delay analysis, the slowest slew for victim and the fastest slew
(in opposite direction of victim slew) for attackers will be used, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-36 Determine slew for max delay and min delay

For min delay analysis, the fastest slew for victim and the fastest slew (in the same direction
of victim slew) for attackers will be used, as shown in the figure above.

Step 2: Determine the alignments of overlapping attackers to compute the worst

impact

Tempus aligns fully overlapping attacker’s switching time in a way that creates worst impact
of each attacker on the victim receiver at the same time. Tempus computes the time of flight
for each attacker by individually switching each of them. The time of flight is the time between
the attacker switching time at the driver output and the corresponding glitch peak time at the
victim receiver input.

Tempus computes the delay from each attacker to the victim for peak alignment, as illustrated
in the figure below.

Figure 4-37 Compute Attacker A1 To Victim Delay (tvA1 – tA1)

November 2023 89 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

To compute time of flight for attacker A1, a voltage source with a slew rate, that is either
calculated internally or annotated from static timing analysis, is applied at attacker A1 driver
output while keeping all other attackers and victims silent.

Tempus calculates the delay from the 50 percent point of the switching attacker A1 at the
driving pin (ta1), to the time the glitch effect on the victim receiver is maximum (tva1). For
attacker A1, the delay is tva1-ta1.

Figure 4-38 Compute Attacker A2 To Victim Delay (tvA2 – tA2)

Similarly, Tempus calculates the delay from the 50% point of the switching attacker A2 at the
driving pin (ta2), to the time the glitch effect on the victim is maximum (tva2). For this case,
attacker A1 will be grounded. So, for attacker A2 the delay is tva2-ta2. These two delays can
be different if one attacker is closely coupled to the near end of the victim wire, and the other
attacker is closely coupled to the far end of the victim wire, and the victim wire is long.

Step 3: Aligning all attackers at their respective position

Tempus aligns the relative switch times of the fully overlapping attackers according to their
time of flights, such that their individual peak at victim receiver input occurs at the same time.

The attacker relative alignment will be (tva2-ta2) - (tva1-ta1) such that the peak due to attackers
A1 and A2 at the victim receiver input occurs at the same time, as shown in the figure below.

November 2023 90 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-39 Aligning Attackers to Have Worst Impact at Victim at Same Time

Step 4: Compute the stage delay

As a final step to compute the stage delay with SI, a transition is applied at the victim receiver,
and the attacker’s impact is evaluated across the victim slew to compute the worst-case stage
delay.

In the figure below, the delay at the victim’s receiver output is measured by considering the
attackers across the victim slew. This will result in a change in the delay at the victim receiver’s
input. Tempus computes different delays as tv2a’, tv2b’, tvc2’, and so on for different victim
alignment, with respect to attackers. The one resulting in the worst delay will be considered
for the worst-case stage delay computation as tv2’. Assuming that tv2 is the base delay for this
stage, that is when all the overlapping attackers of this victim are silent. The delta delay will
be (tv2’ - tv2). This difference becomes the SI effect on the delay results (either slow down or
speed up).

November 2023 91 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-40 Compute stage delay with SI (tv2’ -tv1)

The SI impact on delay depends on the following factors:

Handling of Unconstrained Nets

If an attacker net is unconstrained, then Tempus does not consider timing windows of such
nets for attacker selection. That means an unconstrained attacker is always selected in SI
analysis, that is, timing window is infinite for these unconstrained nets. This makes SI analysis
more pessimistic, but bounding.

To turn this off and use a constrained timing window, you can set set_db
si_unconstrained_net_use_infinite_timing_window to false. The default is true.

Constraining SI Analysis

SI analysis adheres to SDC constraints. However, you can additionally specify constraints on
SI analysis to control whether a net can be an attacker or not. To do this, you can use the
set_quiet_aggressor command. For example,
set_quiet_aggressor -victim vic -aggressor {att1 att2} -transition rise

This software ignores an attacker for certain edges when in reference to the victim.

Computing Timing Arc-Aware SI

The SI impact on delay is computed based on the timing arc through which the path is
traversing.

November 2023 92 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-41 SI Impact on Delay Computed on Timing Arc

By default, Tempus calculates the delay and SI for each arc. If you choose to view the SI delay
separately, it will show annotated to each arc. This helps in reducing pessimism on paths that
do not come through the worst arc.

This can be controlled by using the following command:

set_db si_delay_delta_annotation_mode {lumpedOnNet | arc} (Default : arc)
In lumped-on-net mode, Tempus annotates the worst arc delay on the net delay.

4.2.6 SI Delay Reporting

There are several commands for generating reports on SI effects on delay:
■ report_timing
■ report__delay_calculation
■ report_noise
■ get_property

These are explained below.

Using report_timing without Separating Delta Delay on Data

The report_timing command, by default, does not separate the delta delay on data (delta
delay is always separated for clock). You can set the incr_delay option of the
timing_report_fields attribute to display the delta delays of nets. It is recommended to
use the report_timing -split_delay parameter for generating comprehensive reports.
For example,

November 2023 93 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

tempus > set_db timing_report_fields {hpin cell transition incr_delay delay

arrival}
tempus > report_timing -split_delay
#--------------------------------------------------------
Path 1: VIOLATED (-1.537 ns) Late Output Delay Assertion
View: slow_corner_setup
Group: CCLK
Startpoint: (F) rd_i[152]
Clock: (R) CCLK
Endpoint: (F) rd_o[152]
Clock: (R) CCLK
Capture Launch
Clock Edge: +1.666 0.000
Src Latency: +0.000 0.000
Net Latency: +0.000 (I) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 1.666 0.000
Output Delay: -1.200
Uncertainty: -0.100
Cppr Adjust: +0.000
Required Time: 0.366
Launch Clock: 0.000
Input Delay: +1.200
Data Path: +0.703
Slack: -1.537
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Pin Cell Trans Incr Delay Arrival
# (ns) Delay (ns) (ns)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
rd_i[152] (arrival) 0.004 - - 1.200
rd_i_152_ATibuf_i164/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.004 0.000 0.001 1.201
rd_i_152_ATibuf_i164/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.017 0.000 0.026 1.227
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i225/A BUFH_X13M_A12 0.031 0.000 0.014 1.241
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i225/Y BUFH_X13M_A12 0.023 0.000 0.040 1.281
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10126/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.038 0.000 0.016 1.296
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10126/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.014 0.000 0.042 1.338
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i263/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.054 0.000 0.027 1.365
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i263/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.017 0.000 0.051 1.416
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.042 0.000 0.020 1.436
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.017 0.000 0.043 1.479
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i185/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.028 0.000 0.012 1.491
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i185/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.016 0.000 0.037 1.528
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i238/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.039 0.000 0.020 1.547
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i238/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.016 0.000 0.042 1.589
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i265/A BUFH_X11M_A12 0.037 0.000 0.017 1.606
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i265/Y BUFH_X11M_A12 0.018 0.000 0.043 1.648
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.031 0.000 0.013 1.661
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.014 0.000 0.037 1.698
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i202/A BUFH_X13M_A12 0.042 0.000 0.020 1.718
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i202/Y BUFH_X13M_A12 0.017 0.000 0.043 1.761
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.028 0.000 0.012 1.773
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.017 0.000 0.035 1.808
U2349/A OR2_X11M_A12 0.029 0.000 0.013 1.821
U2349/Y OR2_X11M_A12 0.019 0.000 0.050 1.871
rd_o_152_ATobuf_i155/A BUFH_X6M_A12 0.020 0.000 0.003 1.874
rd_o_152_ATobuf_i155/Y BUFH_X6M_A12 0.009 0.000 0.029 1.903
rd_o[152] ud_lpu_2x 0.009 0.000 0.000 1.903
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------

November 2023 94 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Using report_timing with Separating Delta Delay on Data

You can use the following commands to report delta delay on data separately under the Incr
Delay column in the timing report:
tempus > set_db si_delay_separate_on_data true
tempus > report_timing –split_delay
-----------------------------------------------------------
Path 1: VIOLATED (-1.537 ns) Late Output Delay Assertion
View: slow_corner_setup
Group: CCLK
Startpoint: (F) rd_i[152]
Clock: (R) CCLK
Endpoint: (F) rd_o[152]
Clock: (R) CCLK
Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 1.666 0.000
Src Latency: +0.000 0.000
Net Latency: +0.000 (I) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 1.666 0.000
Output Delay: -1.200
Uncertainty: -0.100
Cppr Adjust: +0.000
Required Time: =0.366
Launch Clock: =0.000
Input Delay: +1.200
Data Path: +0.703
Slack:= -1.537
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Pin Cell Trans Incr Delay Arrival
# (ns) Delay (ns) (ns)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
rd_i[152] (arrival) 0.004 - - 1.200
rd_i_152_ATibuf_i164/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.004 0.000 0.001 1.201
rd_i_152_ATibuf_i164/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.017 0.002 0.026 1.227
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i225/A BUFH_X13M_A12 0.031 0.002 0.014 1.241
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i225/Y BUFH_X13M_A12 0.023 0.002 0.040 1.281
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10126/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.038 0.001 0.016 1.296
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10126/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.014 0.002 0.042 1.338
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i263/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.054 0.007 0.027 1.365
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i263/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.017 0.002 0.051 1.416
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.042 0.003 0.020 1.436
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.017 0.000 0.043 1.479
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i185/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.028 0.000 0.012 1.491
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i185/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.016 0.002 0.037 1.528
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i238/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.039 0.003 0.020 1.547
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i238/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.016 0.001 0.042 1.589
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i265/A BUFH_X11M_A12 0.037 0.001 0.017 1.606
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i265/Y BUFH_X11M_A12 0.018 0.001 0.043 1.648
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.031 0.001 0.013 1.661
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.014 0.001 0.037 1.698
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i202/A BUFH_X13M_A12 0.042 0.002 0.020 1.718
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i202/Y BUFH_X13M_A12 0.017 0.001 0.043 1.761
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/A BUFH_X16M_A12 0.028 0.001 0.012 1.773
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i10136/Y BUFH_X16M_A12 0.017 0.000 0.035 1.808
U2349/A OR2_X11M_A12 0.029 0.000 0.013 1.821
U2349/Y OR2_X11M_A12 0.019 0.001 0.050 1.871
rd_o_152_ATobuf_i155/A BUFH_X6M_A12 0.020 0.000 0.003 1.874

November 2023 95 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

rd_o_152_ATobuf_i155/Y BUFH_X6M_A12 0.009 0.000 0.029 1.903

rd_o[152] ud_lpu_2x 0.009 0.000 0.000 1.903
#----------------------------------------------------------------------

Using report_timing with lumpedOnNet Option

By default, Tempus calculates the delay, including SI for each arc, and if you choose to view
the SI delay separately, it will show as annotated to each arc. Alternatively, you can choose
to annotate the SI delay solely to the net. You can use the following command to lump the
delta delay all onto the net:
tempus > set_db si_delay_delta_annotation_mode lumpedOnNet
tempus > report_timing
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
Path 1: VIOLATED (-1.537 ns) Late Output Delay Assertion
View: slow_corner_setup
Group: CCLK
Startpoint: (F) rd_i[152]
Clock: (R) CCLK
Endpoint: (F) rd_o[152]
Clock: (R) CCLK
Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 1.666 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 0.000 (I) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 1.666 0.000
Output Delay:- 1.200
Uncertainty:- 0.100
Cppr Adjust:+ 0.000
Required Time:= 0.366
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Input Delay:+ 1.200
Data Path:+ 0.703
Slack:= -1.537
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Pin Cell Trans Incr Delay Arrival
# (ns) Delay (ns) (ns)
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
rd_i[152] (arrival) 0.004 0.000 0.001 1.201
rd_i_152_ATibuf_i16431/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35 0.004 0.004 0.039 1.240
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i22570/Y BUFH_X13M_A12TS_C35 0.031 0.002 0.056 1.296
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i1012662/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35 0.038 0.008 0.069 1.365
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i26345/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35 0.054 0.004 0.071 1.436
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i1013653/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35 0.042 0.000 0.055 1.491
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i18556/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35 0.028 0.004 0.056 1.547
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i23875/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35 0.039 0.002 0.059 1.605
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i26553/Y BUFH_X11M_A12TS_C35 0.037 0.002 0.055 1.661
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i1013655/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35 0.031 0.002 0.057 1.717
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i20278/Y BUFH_X13M_A12TS_C35 0.042 0.002 0.055 1.772
rd_i_152_ATrbuf_i1013651/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35 0.028 0.000 0.048 1.820
U2349/Y OR2_X11M_A12TS_C35 0.029 0.001 0.053 1.873
rd_o_152_ATobuf_i15597/Y BUFH_X6M_A12TS_C35 0.020 0.000 0.030 1.903
rd_o[152] ud_lpu_2x 0.009 0.000 0.000 1.903
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

November 2023 96 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Using report_delay_calculation -si Command

You can use the report__delay_calculation command to report the delay calculation
information for a cell or net timing arc. When -si parameter is specified, the software will
report the SI components, including incremental delay. For example,
tempus > report_delay_calculation -from wdata_rw_o_150__ATrbuf_i1013579/Y -to
wdata_rw_o_150__ATrbuf_i25739/A -si
-------------------------------------------------------
From pin : rw_150_rbuf_i1013579/Y
Cell : BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35
Library : ff3sigma_0p935v_125c
To pin : rw_150_rbuf_i25739/A
Cell : BUFH_X13M_A12TS_C35
Library : ff3sigma_0p935v_125c
Base or SI : SI delay
Delay type : net

-------------------------------------------------------------
RC Summary for net rw_150_rbuf_1413352
-------------------------------------------------------------
Number of capacitance : 4
Net capacitance : 0.032299 pF
Total rise capacitance: 0.040678 pF
Total fall capacitance: 0.040768 pF
Number of resistance : 3
Total resistance : 2394.699463 Ohm
-------------------------------------------------------------
SI information for rise
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Victim timing window : 1.3741 ns 1.5132 ns CCLK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Attacker Status Direction Slew Coupling cap Fanout Voltage Bump
Timing window Clock
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
sbsel_r0_5_rbuf_14106 SY Fall 0.010500ns 0.009328pF 1 0.935v
0.114257v 1.3739ns 1.4720ns CCLK
addr_r0_11_rbuf_14131 SY Fall 0.009375ns 0.008941pF 1 0.935v
0.136697v 1.3728ns 1.4745ns CCLK
addr_r1_13_mdrc_193 SY Fall 0.011750ns 0.000998pF 1 0.935v
0.022721v 1.3648ns 1.4503ns CCLK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SI information for fall
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Victim timing window : 1.3777 ns 1.5183 ns CCLK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Attacker Status Direction Slew Coupling cap Fanout Voltage
Bump Timing window Clock
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
sbsel_r0_5_rbuf_14106 SY Rise 0.010625 ns 0.009328 pF 1 0.935 v
0.114725 v 1.3698 ns 1.4689 ns CCLK
addr_r0_11_rbuf_14131 SY Rise 0.009375 ns 0.008941 pF 1 0.935 v
0.136790 v 1.3691 ns 1.4698 ns CCLK
addr_r1_13_mdrc_193 SY Rise 0.011625 ns 0.000998 pF 1 0.935 v
0.022907 v 1.3618 ns 1.4473 ns CCLK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Model types

November 2023 97 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net Term Cell Model
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
rw_150_rbuf_14133 rw_150_rbuf_i1013579/Y BUFH_X16M_A12TS_C35 NLDM
rw_150_rbuf_14133 rw_150_rbuf_i25739/A BUFH_X13M_A12TS_C35 CCS
sbsel_r0_5_rbuf_14106 Y BUFH_X9M_A12TS_C35 CCS
addr_r0_11_rbuf_14131 Y BUFH_X11M_A12TS_C35 CCS
addr_r1_13_mdrc_193 Y BUFH_X11M_A12TS_C35 CCS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rise Fall
-------------------------------------------------------------
Incr Net Delay : 0.042800 ns 0.040500 ns
Net delay : 0.088500 ns 0.085400 ns
From pin transition time: 0.006100 ns 0.006000 ns
To pin transition time : 0.122700 ns 0.123700 ns
-------------------------------------------------------------
Abbreviative attacker status and filtered reason:
-------------------------------------------------------------
SY : Synchronous
INF: Attacker with infinite timing window
PE : Filtered due to physical exclusion
UF : Filtered by user
CN : Filtered because it is a constant net
SB : Filtered due to small bump
TA : Filtered because of timing window does not overlap
LC : Filtered due to logical correlation
ACT: Attacker is Active.
-------------------------------------------------------------

Note: To access attacker information, you need to make the set_db

si_delay_enable_report to true setting.

Using report_noise -delay {max | min} Command

You can use the report_noise –delay max –nets netName command to report
incremental delay on nets. For example,
tempus > report_noise -delay max -nets rdata_r_2x_combined[211]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Report Options:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-type delay
-net r_2x_combined[211]
-threshold 10 (ps)
-delay max
[-style default]
[-sortBy IncrDelay]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type IncrDelay(ps) Delay(NomMax/Max) Vdd(mV) VictimNet
R 0.200 2.600/2.800 740 U2307/B {r_2x_combined[211]}

Type IncrDelay(ps) Delay(NomMax/Max) Vdd(mV) VictimInst

R 21.600 184.900/206.500 740 r_2x_combined_reg_211_/Q
{SDFFRPQ_X1M_A12TS_C35:CK}

November 2023 98 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Constituents:
Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Edge Status Vdd(mV) Net
Cpl: - 26.125 0.609 F INF 740 r_o_327__ATobuf_15422
Cpl: - 26.250 0.452 F INF 740 r_o_323__ATobuf_15426
Cpl: - 26.750 0.360 F INF 740 r_o_343__ATobuf_15406
Cpl: - 75.125 0.491 F INF 740 r_2x_combined[298]
Cpl: - 77.875 0.473 F INF 740 r_2x_combined[235]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type IncrDelay(ps) Delay(NomMax/Max) Vdd(mV) VictimNet
R 0.000 0.400/0.400 740 r_2x_combined_reg_206_/SI
{r_2x_combined[211]}

Type IncrDelay(ps) Delay(NomMax/Max) Vdd(mV) VictimInst

R 21.600 184.900/206.500 740 r_2x_combined_reg_211_/Q
{SDFFRPQ_X1M_A12TS_C35:CK}

Constituents:
Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Edge Status Vdd(mV) Net
Cpl: - 26.125 0.609 F INF 740 r_o_327__ATobuf_15422
Cpl: - 26.250 0.452 F INF 740 r_o_323__ATobuf_15426
Cpl: - 26.750 0.360 F INF 740 r_o_343__ATobuf_15406
Cpl: - 75.125 0.491 F INF 740 r_2x_combined[298]
Cpl: - 77.875 0.473 F INF 740 r_2x_combined[235]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type IncrDelay(ps) Delay(NomMax/Max) Vdd(mV) VictimNet
F 0.300 2.500/2.800 740 U2307/B {r_2x_combined[211]}

Type IncrDelay(ps) Delay(NomMax/Max) Vdd(mV) VictimInst

F 16.500 178.900/195.400 740 r_2x_combined_reg_211_/Q
{SDFFRPQ_X1M_A12TS_C35:CK}

Constituents:
Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Edge Status Vdd(mV) Net
Cpl: - 26.375 0.609 R INF 740 r_o_327__ATobuf_15422
Cpl: - 26.625 0.452 R INF 740 r_o_323__ATobuf_15426
Cpl: - 27.125 0.360 R INF 740 r_o_343__ATobuf_15406
Cpl: - 95.500 0.491 R INF 740 r_2x_combined[298]
Cpl: - 100.375 0.473 R INF 740 r_2x_combined[235]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type IncrDelay(ps) Delay(NomMax/Max) Vdd(mV) VictimNet
F 0.000 0.400/0.400 740 r_2x_combined_reg_206_/SI
{r_2x_combined[211]}

Type IncrDelay(ps) Delay(NomMax/Max) Vdd(mV) VictimInst

F 16.500 178.900/195.400 740 r_2x_combined_reg_211_/Q
{SDFFRPQ_X1M_A12TS_C35:CK}

Constituents:
Offset(ps) Slew(ps Xcap(fF) Edge Status Vdd(mV) Net
Cpl: - 26.375 0.609 R INF 740 r_o_327__ATobuf_15422
Cpl: - 26.625 0.452 R INF 740 r_o_323__ATobuf_15426

November 2023 99 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Cpl: - 27.125 0.360 R INF 740 r_o_343__ATobuf_15406

Cpl: - 95.500 0.491 R INF 740 r_2x_combined[298]
Cpl: - 100.375 0.473 R INF 740 r_2x_combined[235]
********************************************************************************

Using Signal Integrity Attributes with get_property Command

Signal Integrity information can be reported using SI attributes for both graph-based as well
as path-based analysis. These attributes can be queried using the get_property
command.

You need to enable SI attributes by setting the timing_report_enable_si_debug

attribute to true.

The use model for using SI attributes for reporting is given below:

For path-based analysis, the SI attributes can be reported as follows:

The report_timing –retime option -collection command creates a property called

timing_points for each corresponding stage of the path. The timing_points property is a
pointer that contains information for each stage. Each timing point has a property called
si_object, which contains the victim information.

The following example shows a query on signal integrity attributes for timing points:
set path [report_timing -through $pin -retime path_slew_propagation -collection ]
set tps [ get_property $path timing_points ]
foreach_in_collection point $tps {
set x [ get_property $point si_object ]
set vic_name [ get_property $x hierarchical_name ]
puts "victim: $vic_name"
set num_agg [ get_property $x num_attackers ]
puts "Number of attackers: $num_agg"
set aggs [ get_property $x attackers ]
puts "attackers info:"
foreach_in_collection current_agg $aggs {
set active [ get_property $current_agg is_active ]
set state [ get_property $current_agg state ]
set agg_name [get_property $current_agg hierarchical_name]
puts "$agg_name $active $state"
}
}

The above use model is valid for graph-based analysis also. Additionally, for GBA the SI
attributes can be reported on the receiver input pin directly instead of timing points. Each pin
has a property si_victim, which contains the victim SI information. The following example
shows the usage of si_victim, where the number of active attackers are being printed for
both rise and fall transitions in maximum delay analysis:
set vicArray [get_property [get_pins $pin] si_victim –view $view]
foreach_in_collection vic $vicArray {
set view_type [get_property $vic view_type]

November 2023 100 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

set tran [get_property $vic transition]

if {$view_type == "Late"} {
if {$tran == "Rise"} {
set num_att [get_property $vic num_active_attackers]
puts "number of active attackers for rise transition: $num_att"
}
if {$tran == "Fall"} {
set num_att [get_property $vic num_active_attackers]
puts "number of active attackers for fall transition: $num_att"
}
}
}

For more information on signal integrity (SI) attributes/properties, refer to get_property

command in the Tempus Text Command Reference Guide.

4.2.7 SI Glitch Analysis - An Overview

Glitch analysis is based on calculating the worst-case glitch waveforms on each net in the
design. SI can result in functional failures due to glitch. This is illustrated in the diagram below:

Figure 4-42 Glitch due to SI resulting in functional failure

In this example, coupling from attacker A causes a significant glitch on the reset signal so that
it resets the flip-flop and destroys the stored logic state. This problem does not show up in
logic simulation, formal verification, or timing analysis. Isolating the source of a noise-induced
functional problem can be very time consuming and may take a few months of debugging.
Tempus calculates and reports the glitch induced in the design due to these scenarios.

Tempus performs glitch analysis by analyzing each potential victim net from primary inputs to
primary outputs. The analysis of each net is based on calculating the worst-case glitch
waveforms that can occur at the input pins of each of the victim net's receiving cells. The
receiver output peak of each receiving cell instance is computed by analyzing the propagation

November 2023 101 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

of the glitch waveform from the receiver's input through the first stage in the receiver. Tempus
assumes all worst-case crosstalk scenarios are possible unless timing windows are used.

Tempus checks for glitch receiver peak and propagates the glitch at a single stage and checks
to see if the noise glitch exceeds the failure criteria. This greatly reduces the number of
potential false alarms as it utilizes the inherent glitch filtering properties of CMOS logic.

Glitch Type

There are two types of glitch depending on victim state and attacker switching direction.

Glitch Type Victim State Attacker Switching

Glitch over ground rail (VL) Low Rising
Glitch under power rail (VH) High Falling

These are illustrated in the figure below.

Figure 4-43 VL and VH Glitch type

Glitch between ground and power rail voltages can cause logic failure, if they exceed logic
thresholds of the technology.

4.2.8 SI Glitch Analysis Flow

The following figure shows the glitch noise analysis flow:

November 2023 102 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-44 SI Glitch Analysis Flow

Sample Glitch Analysis Script

The following sample script shows the steps to perform glitch analysis:
■ Load the timing libraries (.lib) and noise data (cdB, ECSM-Noise, or CCS-Noise):
read_libs typ.lib -cdb typ.cdB
■ Schedule reading of a structural, gate-level verilog netlist:
read_netlist top.v
■ Set the top module name, and check for consistency between Verilog netlist and timing
libraries:
init_design top
■ Set the proper technology node:
set_db design_process_node 16
■ Load the timing constraints:
read_sdc constraints.sdc
■ Load the cell parasitics:
read_spef top.spef.gz
■ Enable signal integrity (SI) analysis.
set_db delaycal_enable_si true

November 2023 103 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ Perform glitch analysis and enable the glitch reports to be generated

set_db si_glitch_enable_report true
■ Enable glitch propagation:
set_db si_enable_glitch_propagation true
■ Perform glitch analysis:
update_glitch
■ Generate SI glitch report:
report_noise -txtfile glitch.txt

4.2.9 Understanding SI Glitch Analysis

In order to perform crosstalk functional failure analysis, Tempus first calculates the worst-case
glitch that occurs on each victim net when it is not transitioning. This worst-case glitch is
created from the worst-case combination of all allowable attackers where the attackers are
nets that are coupled to the victim. The set of allowable attackers is determined from both
timing and logic relationships between the victim and attacker nets. For example, attackers
whose timing is such that they do not overlap are not combined. A unique worst-case glitch
is calculated for each receiver (fanout) of the victim. Once the worst-case glitch is determined,
Tempus performs a number of additional steps to determine if this glitch is harmful to the
functionality of the design being analyzed.

There are three key components of SI Glitch analysis:

■ Glitch Waveform Computation
■ Glitch Failure Detection
■ Glitch Propagation

Glitch Waveform Computation

For more details, refer to section on Waveform Computation.

Glitch Failure Detection

When worst glitch is computed, Tempus checks if a glitch can result in failure. Tempus uses
two criteria for glitch failure by measuring the glitch at input and output of receiver cell, as
shown in the figure below.
■ Receiver Input Peak (RIP) Check

November 2023 104 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ Receiver Output Peak (ROP) Check

These are illustrated in the diagram below.

Figure 4-45 Glitch representation at input and output of receiver

Receiver Input Peak (RIP) Check

If a net has a receiver without noise data, then the receiver input peak (RIP) is compared
against:
set_db si_glitch_input_threshold (or si_glitch_input_voltage_high_threshold,
si_glitch_input_voltage_low_threshold)

or
set_glitch_threshold -failure_point input –threshold_type failure –value
float

In this case, failure can occur if RIP is greater than the tolerance threshold value.

Receiver Output Peak (ROP) Check

Tempus has the capability to compute glitch impact one step inside the cell, that is, at the
output of the first Channel Connected Component (CCC) in the cell. This is known as ROP
(Receiver Output Peak) analysis. Since CMOS logic acts as a low pass filter, it attenuates the
glitch, so that the glitch checked at the output of the first CCC may be less than the glitch at
the input of the cell. Using the ROP to determine failure may reduce the number of violation
counts.

November 2023 105 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Note: In some cases, the ROP may be more than the RIP. The ROP can be as high as VDD
in case of a full rail RIP, so any result close to the VDD ROP can be considered reasonable.

If a net has receiver with noise data (cdB or ECSM-Noise or CCS-Noise), then Tempus
propagates the glitch one stage and calculates the Receiver Output Peak (ROP). If the arc is
from input to output of the cell, then failure will occur if ROP is greater than the values
specified using the following command:
set_db si_glitch_receiver_peak_limit (or
si_glitch_receiver_clock_peak_limit, -si_glitch_receiver_latch_peak_limit)double

or
set_glitch_threshold –failure_point last –pin_type {clock | data | latch | all}
–threshold_type failure –value float

If the arc is from an input to an internal node of a combinational cell, by default failure will
occur if ROP is greater than 30% of the vdd value or if it is greater values specified using the
following command:
set_glitch_threshold –failure_point input –pin_type {clock | data | latch | all} –
threshold_type failure –value float

If the arc is from an input to an internal node of a sequential cell, then failure will occur if ROP
is greater than the value specified using the following command:
set_db si_glitch_receiver_latch_peak_limit float

or
set_glitch_threshold –failure_point last –pin_type latch –threshold_type failure
–value float

Figure 4-46 ROP (Receiver Output Peak) for single stage cell

In case of single stage receiver cell, as shown in the figure above for Victim Vic, ROP will be
performed at the output of receiver cell.

November 2023 106 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-47 ROP (Receiver Output Peak) for multi-stage cell

While in case of multi-stage cell, as shown in the figure above for Victim V1, ROP will be
performed at the output of the first stage of receiver cell XBUF3.

ROP is computed using the VIVO (Voltage In Voltage Out) current tables from the noise
library (cdB), ECSM-N library, or CCS-N library. VIVO tables are characterized for single
CCC. Tempus uses VIVO information, stored for the corresponding input pins, for ROP
computation.

Figure 4-48 VIVO model

Glitch Failure Flow

The Glitch Failure Flow diagram is given below.

November 2023 107 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-49 Glitch Failure Flow

Glitch Propagation

Tempus performs glitch propagation that:

■ Allows glitch to propagate and combine with coupling glitch noise along the path.
■ Models driver weakening due to glitch coming at the input pin. Due to glitch at driver
input, the current capability of the driver reduces leading to larger glitch at the output.

The following figure illustrates the glitch propagation feature:

Figure 4-50 Glitch Propagation

November 2023 108 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Driver weakening is needed for single-stage cells, not for multi-stage cells. In single-stage
cells, when ROP is not failing, driver weakening may affect the next stage if the coupling on
the next stage is big enough to be kept. In multi-stage cells, there is no coupling internal to
the cell so glitch propagation does not need to be taken into account. This is because a non-
failing glitch is not likely to propagate to the output of the cell.

Single-Stage Glitch Propagation and Driver Weakening

If glitch propagation is enabled, Tempus will propagate the glitch through single-stage cells
as long as it is not failing. A glitch is deemed failing when the receiver output peak is greater
than the threshold value specified using the following command:
set_db si_glitch_receiver_peak_limit (or
si_glitch_receiver_clock_peak_limit, si_glitch_receiver_latch_peak_limit)

The failing receiver output peaks are not propagated. Even if the input glitch is not large
enough to propagate to the output of the single-stage cell, it weakens the driver such that
when the output of the cell is attacked, the coupling noise is much larger. Tempus models
driver weakening when glitch propagation is enabled.

Single-stage glitch propagation and driver weakening is enabled automatically when using
the update_glitch command or by specifying the set_db
si_enable_glitch_propagation true command before using the report_timing or
update_timing commands.

Failure Detection with Enabled Noise Propagation

Glitch impact computation starts with the first net in the path and traced downstream. A stage
is analyzed taking into account the propagated glitch from last stage and the coupling of
current stage. You can compare the total glitch seen at the receiver with the failure threshold.
If the glitch exceeds failure threshold, then failure is flagged at the receiver and glitch impact
from this stage is not propagated further to downstream logic. If the glitch is less than failure
threshold, then the glitch impact at this stage is propagated to downstream logic.

4.2.10 Running Detailed SI Glitch Analysis

To run detailed glitch analysis, you can use the update_glitch command. This command
performs the following steps in multiple iterations:

Iteration 0

This iteration is performed to estimate slews on all the nets.

November 2023 109 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Iteration 1
■ Identify the attackers which are coupled to the victim net.
■ Analyze each attacker individually for glitch peak on victim.
■ Determine the attackers which can have glitch peak greater than a threshold of victim
voltage.
■ Estimate the combined impact of all such attackers, assuming infinite timing window, on
victim net for glitch.
■ Update the arrival times and compute slew values for all the nets in the design.

Iteration 2:
■ Select the victim nets. A net will be reselected if any of the following criteria is met:
❑ the net is violating
❑ the net has a glitch greater than 30% VDD
❑ the net has a glitch smaller than 30%VDD, but is capable of propagating
downstream.
Only those nets that are non-violating, have a glitch smaller than 30%VDD and are
incapable of propagating, will not be reselected in the 2nd iteration.
■ Analyze each attacker individually for glitch peak using slew/timing windows computed
above. If the set_db si_use_infinite_timing_window true setting has been
specified, then infinite timing windows is used in this iteration also.
■ Determine the attackers which can produce glitch peak greater than the threshold of
victim voltage.
■ Identify the attackers which can produce worst impact on the victim net depending on
timing window overlap, attacker slew, and other constraints.
■ Perform combined simulation with identified attackers and peak aligned to compute the
worst glitch at receiver input of victim net.

Failure Criteria Determination

■ If a net has a receiver without noise data, then the receiver input peak (RIP) check is
done.
■ If a net has receiver with noise data, then the software propagates the noise one stage
and receiver output peak (ROP) check is done.

November 2023 110 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.2.11 SI Glitch Reporting

You can use the report_noise command to generate glitch reports. The -format
parameter can be used to control the fields to be displayed in a glitch report.

Given below is a sample report generated using the report_noise command.

Glitch Violations Summary :

--------------------------
Number of DC tolerance violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of Receiver Output Peak violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of total problem noise nets = 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peak(mV) Level TotalCap(fF) TotalArea Width(ps) Vdd(mV) Library VictimNet
137.165 VL 10.10 5.94 86.640 935 ff3sigma_0p935v_125c
U2307/B {rd_r_2x_com[211]}

Receiver output peak:

Status Slack Value ReceiverPin ReceiverCell cell_type
Arc ReceiverThresholdType
MET 280.500 0.000 (280.500) U2307ny (OR2_X8M_A12TS_C35) [data] (A
0 B 1) Global

Constituents:
Source Peak(mV) Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Vdd(mV) Edge Status Net
Cpl: 42.027 0.000 10.375 0.446 935 R ACT rd_r_o_327_AT_1522
Cpl: 30.368 0.000 10.625 0.321 935 R ACT rd_r_o_323_AT_1526
Cpl: 23.085 0.000 11.250 0.253 935 R ACT rd_r_o_343_AT_1506
Cpl: 21.274 0.000 33.250 0.376 935 R ACT rd_r_2x_com[298]
Cpl: 20.369 0.000 30.000 0.333 935 R ACT rd_r_2x_com[235]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The report sections and columns are explained below.

The top section Glitch Violations Summary shows a summary of each type of violation count.
■ Peak value 1071.972 mV is the glitch at the receiver input pin (RIP).
■ Level can be VH or VL, which shows the type of glitch at receiver input pin. VH is glitch
under power rail and VL is glitch over ground rail.
■ The pin name xv5/A below VictimNet is the receiver input pin having glitch.
■ Receiver output peak (ROP) value 1226.940 is the glitch at the receiver output and
396.000 is the failure threshold for ROP. NOR4_F4 is the receiver library cell.
■ Constituents provide the details of attackers.
❑ Source column: Reports propagated noise as “Prp”.

November 2023 111 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

❑ Status column: The Status column shows the abbreviated attacker status and
filtered reason, as given below:
SY: Synchronous
INF: Attacker with infinite timing window
PE: Filtered due to physical exclusion
UF: Filtered by user
SB: Filtered due to small bump
TA: Filtered because of timing window does not overlap
LC: Filtered due to logical correlation
ACT: Attacker is Active.

■ The following sample report shows the DC tolerance violations:

--------------------------
Glitch Violations Summary :
--------------------------
Number of DC tolerance violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of Receiver Output Peak violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of total problem noise nets = 0
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Peak(mV) Level TotalCap(fF) TotalArea Width(ps) Vdd(mV) Library VictimNet
130.166 VH 11.68 13.49 207.278 740 ssg3sigma_0p74v_0c
U2307/B {rd_r_2x_combined[211]}
Receiver Input Threshold:
Status Slack Value (Threshold) ReceiverNet Receiver
failure_type ReceiverThresholdType
MET 165.834 130.166 (296.000) U2307/B (OR2_X8M_A12TS_C35) [bbox] Global
Constituents:
Source Peak(mV) Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Vdd(mV) Edge Status Net
Cpl: 40.820 0.000 26.125 0.609 740 F ACT rd_r_o_327_AT_1522
Cpl: 30.238 0.000 26.250 0.452 740 F ACT rd_r_o_323_AT_1526
Cpl: 23.911 0.000 26.750 0.360 740 F ACT rd_r_o_343_AT_1506
Cpl: 18.158 0.000 75.125 0.491 740 F ACT rd_r_2x_com[298]
Cpl: 17.013 0.000 77.875 0.473 740 F ACT rd_r_2x_com[235]
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

In this report glitch at receiver input pin u9/D is more than the threshold.
■ The report_noise -style extended option can be used to report additional
information, such as, timing windows of attackers. A sample report is shown below:
tempus > report_noise -style extended
--------------------------
Glitch Violations Summary:
--------------------------
Number of DC tolerance violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of Receiver Output Peak violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of total problem noise nets = 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peak(mV) Level TotalCap(fF) TotalArea Width(ps) Vdd(mV) Library VictimNet

November 2023 112 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

329.868 VL 39.89 30.87 187.173 935 ff3sigma_0p935v_125c

u1_lpu/u0_logic/u0_ud_udm/wdata_rw_q1_77_ATd_i29398/A {u1_lpu/u0_logic/u0_ud_udm/
wdata_rw_q1_77_ATd_401797}

Receiver output peak:

Status Slack Value ReceiverPin ReceiverCell cell_type
Arc ReceiverThresholdType
MET 264.418 16.082 (280.500) u1_lpu/u0_logic/u0_ud_udm/
wdata_rw_q1_77_ATd_i29398/ny (DLY2_X4M_C35) [data] (A 1) Global
Stage information:
Cell Pin
Driver : DLY2_X4M_C35 u1_lpu/u0_logic/u0_ud_udm/wdata_rw_q1_77_ATd_i20211/Y
Receiver : DLY2_X4M_C35 u1_lpu/u0_logic/u0_ud_udm/wdata_rw_q1_77_ATd_i29398/A
Constituents:
Source Peak(mV) Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Vdd(mV) Edge Status Net
Cpl: 130.793 31.000 13.375 5.128 935 R ACT sb_r2_o_1_AT_201
Cpl: 105.063 51.000 15.250 11.340 935 R ACT ad_r0_o_8_AT_193
Cpl: 76.101 38.000 11.750 4.427 935 R ACT wd_rw_o_163_AT_194
Cpl: 17.846 38.000 12.500 1.426 935 R ACT wd_rw_o_210_AT_141
Timing Windows: (NanoSecs)
MinTime MaxTime Edge Clock Net
0.113 0.265 F CCLK u1_lpu/u0_logic/u0_ud_udm/wdata_rw_q1_77_ATd_401797
0.970 1.320 F NULL u1_lpu/u0_logic/u0_ud_udm/wdata_rw_q1_77_ATd_401797
1.398 1.486 R CCLK sb_r2_o_1_AT_201
1.359 1.449 R CCLK ad_r0_o_8_AT_193
1.372 1.432 R CCLK wd_rw_o_163_AT_194
1.366 1.447 R CCLK wd_rw_o_210_AT_141
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

■ You can use the report_noise -histogram parameter to print a violation summary
and histogram of RIP/ROP. A detailed glitch report is not printed.
tempus > report_noise -histogram -out_file rip_rop.hist
--------------------------
Glitch Violations Summary :
--------------------------
Number of DC tolerance violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of Receiver Output Peak violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of total problem noise nets = 0

Receiver Input Peak Histogram for View : slow_corner_hold

Percentage of Receiver Vdd No. of Receivers
[ 0, 10 ) 0
[ 10, 20 ) 173213
[ 20, 30 ) 41788
[ 30, 40 ) 131
[ 40, 50 ) 0
[ 50, 60 ) 0
[ 60, 70 ) 0
[ 70, 80 ) 0
[ 80, 90 ) 0
[ 90, 100 ) 0

November 2023 113 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Receiver Output Peak Histogram for View : slow_corner_hold

Percentage of Receiver Vdd No. of Receivers
[ 0, 10 ) 0

Exceptions

Here are some exceptions:

The following command helps in specifying certain attackers as quiet for the victim net. This
implies that the net mentioned in this command will not be considered as an attacker for a
particular victim net, or all victim nets.
■ set_quiet_aggressor

You can use the following parameter to specify a list of victim/attacker pairs to be made quiet:
set_quiet_aggressor -victim string

If the -aggressor parameter is not used, then all the attackers are made silent for the
specified victim.

You can use the following parameter to specify the victim/attacker pair to be made quiet:
set_quiet_aggressor -aggressor string

If the -victim parameter is not used, then the given nets are made silent (as attackers) for
all the victim nets in the design.
tempus > set_quiet_aggressor -aggressor wdata_rw_o_163_AT_194 -victim u1_ud_lpu/
u0_ud_lpu_logic/u0_ud_udm/wdata_rw_q1_77_AT_401
tempus > update_glitch
tempus > report_noise -nets u1_ud_lpu/u0_ud_lpu_logic/u0_ud_udm/
wdata_rw_q1_77_AT_401
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Glitch Violations Summary :
---------------------------
Number of DC tolerance violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of Receiver Output Peak violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of total problem noise nets = 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peak(mV) Level TotalCap(fF) TotalArea Width(ps) Vdd(mV) Library VictimNet
247.868 VH 39.89 25.00 201.718 935 ff3sigma_0p935v_125c
u1_ud_lpu/u0_ud_lpu_logic/u0_ud_udm/umh_udm_wdata_rw_q1_77__ATdrc_i29398/A
{u1_ud_lpu/u0_ud_lpu_logic/u0_ud_udm/wdata_rw_q1_77_AT_401}
Receiver output peak:
Status Slack Value ReceiverPin ReceiverCell cell_type Arc Receive
rThresholdType
MET 277.976 2.525 280.5 u1_ud_lpu/u0_ud_lpu_logic/u0_ud_udm/
wd_rw_q1_77_AT_i29/ny (DLY2_X4M_A12TS_C35) [data] (A 1) Global
Constituents:
Source Peak(mV) Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Vdd(mV) Edge Status Net
Cpl: 123.339 35.000 13.375 5.128 935 F ACT sb_r2_o_1_AT_201

November 2023 114 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Cpl: 106.286 53.000 15.125 11.340 935 F ACT ar_r0_o_8_AT_193

Cpl: 18.218 39.000 13.000 1.426 935 F ACT wd_rw_o_210_AT_14
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

In the above noise report, status of attacker attc4 is changed to UF (User Filtered).
■ set_annotated_glitch
❑ The following parameter allows you to specify the port/pin name at which glitch
needs to be annotated:
set_annotated_glitch -ports

If a glitch is annotated at the driver output/input port, then it is combined with the
coupling of the stage. If a glitch is annotated at the receiver input, then it overrides
the glitch at receiver input with the annotated glitch.
❑ The following parameters allow you to specify the type of glitch waveform (vl or vh)
to be annotated:
set_annotated_glitch -voltage_low/-voltage_high {waveform with time
stamp and voltage value}
The voltage_high waveform should also be specified starting from “0”. The
software automatically inverts the waveform depending on receiver voltage.
The waveform is specified as PWL with multiple time and voltage points, such as,
{time-1 voltage-1 time-2 voltage-2…..}

The set_annotated_glitch -voltage_low {0 0 110e-12 0.6 310e-12 0}

command defines glitch as shown below:

For VH, the wave should be defined starting from 0V, the software automatically
inverts it when applying according to the victim voltage.

November 2023 115 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

For victim voltage 1V, the set_annotated_glitch -voltage_high {0 0 100e-

12 0.6 320e-12 0} command defines glitch, as shown below:

Here’s a sample report:

tempus > set_annotated_glitch -voltage_low {0 0 100e-12 0.1 200e-12 0.4 300e-12 0.3
600e-12 0} -port scan_in_0_i[5]
tempus > update_glitch
tempus > report_noise -nets scan_in_0_i[5]
--------------------------
Glitch Violations Summary :
--------------------------
Number of DC tolerance violations (VH + VL) = 1
Number of Receiver Output Peak violations (VH + VL) = 0
Number of total problem noise nets = 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peak(mV) Level TotalCap(fF) TotalArea Width(ps) Vdd(mV) Library VictimNet
625.818 VL 2.40 93.65 299.284 740 ssg3sigma_0p74v_0c
sc_in_0_i_5__ATibuf_i13381/A {sc_in_0_i[5]}

Receiver Input Threshold:

Status Slack Value (Threshold) ReceiverNet Receiver failure_type
ReceiverThresholdType
VIOLATED -329.818 625.818 (296.000) sc_in_0_i_5__ATibuf_i13381/
A (BUFH_X2M_A12TS_C35) [bbox] Global

Constituents:
Source Peak(mV) Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Vdd(mV) Edge Status Net
Cpl: 25.784 0.000 25.000 0.595 740 R ACT sc_in_0_i[6]
Prp: 599.992 -- -- -- -- -- sc_in_0_i[5]
********************************************************************************

The software overrides the glitch value showing up at RIP with the annotated glitch, as glitch
is annotated at the receiver input.
set_noise_lib_pin

This command helps in mapping noise properties of a library cell pin to other library cell pins.
The software copies the noise properties of a buffer type cell for a macro cell pin, for which a
noise property has not been defined.
■ set_noise_lib_pin -from <>

November 2023 116 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Specify the from_library/from_cell/from_pin.

■ set_noise_lib_pin -to <>

Specify the to_library/to_cell/to_pin.

For example,
set_noise_lib_pin -from cell_w_1.6.lib/CLKBUF/A -to memory.lib/MEM_256x32/
A

The software will map the noise properties from cdB linked to the specified library, even if
there is a difference in voltage values. You must ensure that the voltage values are similar
while mapping the properties.

Table 4-2 Impact of Timing Exceptions on Glitch Analysis.

Timing Exceptions Impact on Glitch in Infinite Timing Window Flow

set_case_analysis Attacker will be marked as silent, if constant value is input.
The net will be analyzed as victim even with the constant
value.
set_disable_timing Impact due to change in attackers slew, if attacker is lying
in the fanout path of disable timing.
set_false_path No impact
set_multicycle_path No impact
set_clock_uncertainty No impact
set_clock_groups Impact on noise results due to filtering of some attackers.

Impact of Timing Constraints on Glitch Analysis in Infinite TW Mode

■ set_input_transition
This input transition command defined at the input ports, serves as a starting point to
compute at slew at all nets. If its not defined, the software uses a fast slew of 5ps at input
ports.
■ set_driving_cell
This command is required to model holding resistance accurately, if there is coupling at
the net connected to the input port.
■ set_load

November 2023 117 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

This command sets the load at the output load. This impacts glitch computation on the
net connected at the output port.

Checking Noise Models

You can use the check_noise command before the update_glitch command to check
consistency and completeness of noise models specified for a design. These checks help to
ensure that the right set of models are available to perform SI analysis.

Library Requirement for Glitch Analysis

Tempus supports cdB, ECSM-N, and CCS-N library for glitch analysis. The key advantage of
moving to ECSM-N/CCS-N is both use the same library for timing and glitch analysis. The
cdB library is used only for glitch analysis and a separate timing library is required for timing
analysis.

4.2.12 Overshoot-Undershoot Glitch Analysis - An Overview

The Tempus software allows you to perform overshoot and undershoot analysis. The life span
of transistors can be described by the overshoot and undershoot values. If a transistor is
consistently exposed to a certain percentage of overshoot/undershoot, then it may suffer a
reduced life span. Tempus analyzes and generates reports for such cases.

Due to cross-coupled capacitance between interconnects, switching activity of one net

(attacker) can induce undesirable noise (glitch) on a static "victim” net. This glitch can be
classified into four categories based on the victim state and attackers' switching direction, as
shown in the table below.

Table 4-3 Classification of glitch

Glitch Type Victim State Attacker Switching

Glitch over ground rail (VL) Low Rising
Glitch under power rail (VH) High Falling
Glitch under ground rail (VLU) Low Falling
Glitch over power rail (VHO) High Rising

The glitch types VL and VH, mentioned in Table 1, can result in functional failures, if the glitch
exceeds the logic threshold.

November 2023 118 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The glitch types, VLU and VHO, are known as undershoot and overshoot, respectively. While
VLU (undershoot) and VHO (overshoot) do not cause any immediate silicon failure, exposure
to VLU/VHO glitch over a period of time causes degradation of the gate-oxide, which
increases the threshold voltage (Vth), and in turn can cause silicon failure.

The following figures indicate the type of glitch waveform:

Figure 4-51 VHO Glitch

Figure 4-52 VLU Glitch

Figure 4-53 VL, VH, VLU, and VHO glitch waveforms

November 2023 119 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Tempus performs overshoot-undershoot glitch analysis by analyzing each potential victim net
in the design. The analysis of each net is based on calculating the worst-case glitch waveform
that can occur at the input pins of each of the victim nets' receivers.

The VLU/VHO type of noise cannot propagate through a transistor, and therefore, Tempus
does not perform the glitch propagation and ROP (Receiver Output Peak) computation in
overshoot-undershoot analysis.

Overshoot-Undershoot Analysis Flow

To run overshoot-undershoot analysis, perform the following steps:

■ Setup the design for SI analysis.
■ Enable overshoot-undershoot analysis:
set_db si_enable_glitch_overshoot_undershoot
■ Set failure thresholds:
set_glitch_threshold -glitch_type vho/vlo
■ Analyze overshoot and undershoot glitches:
update_glitch

You can also use the update_timing and report_timing commands for overshoot/
undershoot glitch analysis and reporting.

The following figure shows the overshoot-undershoot analysis flow.

November 2023 120 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-54 Overshoot-Undershoot Analysis Flow

Reporting

The reporting structure of the overshoot-undershoot analysis is similar to that of traditional

glitch analysis.

Example VLU report

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peak(mV) Level TotalCap(fF) TotalArea Width(ps) Vdd(mV) Library VictimNet
310.282 VLU 50.91 29.49 190.083 740 ssg3sigma_0p74v_0c
u1_ud_lpu/u0_ud_lpu_logic/u0_ud_udm/umh_udm_wdata_rw_q1_77__ATdrc_i29398/A
{u1_ud_lpu/u0_ud_lpu_logic/u0_ud_udm/umh_udm_wdata_rw_q1_77__ATdrc_401797}

Receiver Input Threshold:

Status Slack Value
(Threshold) ReceiverNet Receiver failure_type ReceiverThresholdType

November 2023 121 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

VIOLATED -236.282 310.282 (74.000) u1_ud_lpu/u0_ud_lpu_logic/u0_ud_udm/

umh_udm_wdata_rw_q1_77__ATdrc_i29398/A (DLY2_X4M_A12TS_C35) [bbox] Global

Constituents:
Source Peak(mV) Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Vdd(mV) Edge Status Net
Cpl: 117.124 32.000 26.500 7.246 740 F ACT sb_r2_o_ATr_201
Cpl: 111.941 52.000 30.875 16.054 740 F ACT ad_r0_o_8_ATm_19
Cpl: 64.862 36.000 29.500 5.680 740 F ACT rw_o_16_ATm_19
Cpl: 16.355 42.000 32.375 1.928 740 F ACT rw_o_21_ATr_14
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Example VHO report

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peak(mV) Level TotalCap(fF) TotalArea Width(ps) Vdd(mV) Library VictimNet
386.155 VHO 45.02 33.59 173.967 935 ff3sigma_0p935v_125c
rw_o_82__ATobuf_i14769/A {rw_o_82_ATr_214587}

Receiver Input Threshold:

Status Slack Value (Threshold) ReceiverNet Receiver
failure_type ReceiverThresholdType
VIOLATED -12.155 386.155 (374.000) rw_o_82__ATobuf_i14769/A
(BUFH_X7P5M_A12TS_C35) [bbox] Global

Constituents:
Source Peak(mV) Offset(ps) Slew(ps) Xcap(fF) Vdd(mV) Edge Status Net
Cpl: 214.724 26.000 8.625 14.204 935 R ACT rw_o_45_ATr_141
Cpl: 151.118 20.000 11.250 6.460 935 R ACT rw_o_136_ATr_141
Cpl: 20.314 15.000 9.750 2.056 935 R ACT rw_o_4_ATr_14186
Cpl: 0.000 0.000 14.000 2.909 935 R SB rw_o_45_ATr_1235
Cpl: 0.000 0.000 12.000 1.679 935 R SB rw_o_136_ATd_380
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The report_noise command parameters, such as, -failure, -format, -histogram, -

nets, -style, -threshold, -out_file, and -view work with the overshoot-undershoot
reporting as well.

For more information, refer to Tempus Text Command Reference Guide.

4.2.13 Running Overshoot-Undershoot Glitch Analysis - Sample Script

The following is a sample script to run overshoot-undershoot glitch analysis:
■ Load the timing libraries (.lib) and characterized data (.cdB):
read_libs -noise_libs typ.cdB
Note: This sample script shows the usage of cdb noise data, however, this feature
supports CCS-N and ECSM noise models as well.
■ Schedule reading of a structural, gate-level verilog netlist:
read_netlist top.v

November 2023 122 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ Set the top module name, and check for consistency between Verilog netlist and timing
libraries:
init_design top
■ Load the timing constraints:
read_sdc constraints.sdc
■ Load the cell parasitics:
read_spef top.spef.gz
■ Enable signal integrity (SI) analysis:
set_db delaycal_enable_si true
■ Enable the Overshoot-Undershoot Analysis:
set_db si_enable_glitch_overshoot_undershoot true
si_glitch_enable_report true
■ Set the failure threshold for the VLU and VHO type glitch:
set_glitch_threshold -glitch_type vlu -value 0.3
set_glitch_threshold -glitch_type vho -value 0.3

Or
■ Set the failure threshold globally for both VLU and VHO by using the following command:
set_db si_glitch_input_threshold 0.3
In the above commands, the value specified is the ratio to VDD, that is, failure will occur
if the overshoot/undershoot glitch height is greater than the mentioned threshold value
times VDD. The default value is 0.4.
If both set_glitch_threshold and set_db si_glitch_input_threshold
commands have been specified, then the set_glitch_threshold command setting will
take the precedence.
■ Perform overshoot-undershoot glitch analysis:
update_glitch
■ Generate the overshoot/undershoot glitch report:
report_noise -failure -out_file vlu_vho.rpt –overshoot_undershoot
Here, only the VLU/VHO type of glitches will be printed in the report. For VL/VH type of glitch
numbers, you can re-run the report_noise command without the -overshoot_undershoot
parameter.

November 2023 123 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.3 Timing Analysis Modes

4.3.1 Overview on page 125
4.3.2 Specifying Timing Analysis Mode Types on page 126
4.3.3 Advanced On-Chip Variation (AOCV) Analysis on page 144
4.3.4 Statistical On-Chip Variation (SOCV) Analysis on page 169

November 2023 124 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.3.1 Overview
The Tempus software provides different timing analysis modes and accordingly performs
calculations for setup and hold checks for each mode. For a better understanding of these
modes, it is important to understand the impact of early and late paths in a design, as
explained in the following section.

Definition of Early and Late Paths

Early and late paths are referred to as the shortest and longest paths, respectively, and are
used for delay calculations. The early or minimum path delay is the minimum delay through
cells and nets in the path. The late or maximum path delay is the maximum delay through
cells and nets in the path.

The following figure shows a setup check with late launch clock and early capture clock:

Figure 4-55 Illustration of Setup Check- Setup check with early and late paths

The following figure shows a hold check with early launch clock and late capture clock.

November 2023 125 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-56 Illustration of Hold Check - Hold check with early and late paths

4.3.2 Specifying Timing Analysis Mode Types

The timing analysis mode types are:
■ Single Timing Analysis Type Overview
■ Best-Case Worst-Case (BC-WC) Timing Analysis Mode Overview
■ On-Chip Variation (OCV) Timing Analysis Mode Type Overview

Single Timing Analysis Type Overview

In this mode, the Tempus software uses a single set of delays (using one library group) based
on one set of process, temperature, and voltage conditions.

To set the timing analysis mode as single, you can use the following command:
set_db timing_analysis_type single
In single analysis mode, only maximum delay values are used for delay calculation. The -max
options of commands in constraints are used for both minimum and maximum analysis in
single analysis mode. For example, the set_annotated_delay –max 10 command will be
used for both minimum and maximum analysis.

Even with single library group, cell delay can have variation in maximum delay based on
sdf_cond, timing derates, and other inputs. In single analysis mode, early and late path delays
are the minimum and maximum, respectively, of this range of maximum delay.

November 2023 126 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Single Timing Analysis - Setup and Hold Checks

These are explained in the sections below.

Setup Check in Single Timing Analysis Mode

For setup check, the software checks the late launch clock and late data paths against early
capture clock path.

Figure 4-57 Setup Check in Single Timing Analysis Mode

For zero slack value in a setup check, the following condition should be met:

launch clock late path (tLAUNCH_CLK) + data clock late path (tDATA_DLY) <= capture clock early path
(tCAPTUE_CLK) + clock period - setup

Figure 4-58 on page 128 shows the setup check on a path from FF1 to FF2.

November 2023 127 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-58 Setup Check in Single Timing Analysis Mode

The software uses a library to calculate the maximum delay. For setup check, the software
considers two paths between the two registers, FF1 and FF2 - the late path delay is used to
calculate slack during setup check.

The following values are assumed in this example:

Clock period = 4; Clock source latency = none; Clock mode = Propagated

Data late path delay 3.6

Data early path delay 1.9
Launch clock late path 0.8 + 0.6 =1.4
delay
Capture clock early path 0.8 + 0.5 = 1.3
delay
Setup 0.2
Data arrival time 1.4 + 3.6 = 5
Data required time 4 + 1.3 - 0.2 = 5.1
Setup Slack 5.1 - 5 = 0.1

Hold Check in Single Timing Analysis Mode

For hold check the software compares the early arriving data against the late arriving clock
at the endpoint.

November 2023 128 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-59 Hold Check in Single Timing Analysis Mode

For zero slack value in a hold check, the following condition should be met:

launch clock early path (tLAUNCH_CLK) + data early path (tDATA_DLY) => capture clock late path
(tCAPTUE_CLK) + hold

The following example shows the hold check on a path from FF1 to FF2.

Figure 4-60 Hold Check in Single Timing Analysis Mode

The following values are assumed in this example:

Clock period = 4 ; Clock source latency = none ; Clock mode = Propagated

Data late path delay 2.6

Data early path delay 1.0

November 2023 129 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Launch clock early path 0.6 + 0.4 = 1.0

delay
Capture clock late path 0.6 + 0.3 = 0.9
delay
Hold 0.2
Data arrival time 1+1=2
Data Required Time 0.2 + 0.9 = 1.1
Hold Slack 2 – 1.1 = 0.9

Performing Timing Analysis in Single Analysis Mode

To perform timing analysis in single analysis mode, you need to perform the following steps:
■ Set the analysis mode to single, setup and propagated clock mode:

set_db timing_analysis_type single timing_analysis_check_type

setup
■ Generate the timing reports for setup:
report_timing
■ Set the analysis mode to hold:

set_db timing_analysis_check_type hold

■ Generate the timing reports for hold analysis:
report_timing

Alternatively, you can use the report_timing –early command with the set_db
timing_analysis_check_type setup attribute to report hold paths.

Best-Case Worst-Case (BC-WC) Timing Analysis Mode Overview

In best-case worst-case (BC-WC) analysis mode, the software uses delays from the
maximum library group for all the paths during setup checks and minimum library group for
all the paths during hold checks. In this mode, the Tempus software considers two operating
conditions and checks both operating conditions in one timing analysis run. To set the timing
analysis mode as BC-WC, you can use the following command:
set_db timing_analysis_type best_case_worst_case

November 2023 130 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

You can use the set_clock_latency constraint to set the source latency for a clock in both
ideal and propagated mode for setup and hold checks. You can also use this constraint to set
the network latency for an ideal clock. The specified source or network latency affects the
early and late clock paths for both capture and launch clocks for both minimum and
maximum operating conditions.

Note: The software considers the network latency, specified using the set_clock_latency
-max (or -min) command, for ideal clocks only. In propagated mode, actual clock propagated
latency values will be used.

BC-WC Timing Analysis Mode - Setup and Hold Checks

These are explained in the sections below.

Setup Check in BC-WC Mode

For setup check, the software calculates delay values from the maximum library group for
data arrival time, and network delay of both launch and capture clocks (in propagated mode).

The source latency in both ideal and propagated modes for setup checks is defined in the
constraints used by various clock paths as follows:

Clock Path (Operating

Constraint Used
Condition)
Launch clock late path (max) set_clock_latency
-source -late -max value
Capture clock early path (max) set_clock_latency
-source-early -max value

The network latency in ideal mode for setup checks is defined in the constraints used by
various clock paths as follows:

Clock Path (Operating

Constraint Used
Condition)
Launch clock late path (max) set_clock_latency
-max value
Capture clock early path (max) set_clock_latency
-max value

The following example shows the setup check on a path from FF1 to FF2.

November 2023 131 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-61 Setup Check in BC-WC Timing Analysis Mode

The software uses the max library to scale all delays at WC conditions. The following values
are assumed in this example:

Clock period = 4; Clock source latency = none ; Clock mode = Propagated

Data late path delay 3.5

Data early path delay 1.9
Launch clock late path delay 0.7 + 0.6 = 1.3
Capture clock early path delay 0.7 + 0.5 = 1.2
Setup 0.2
Data arrival time 1.3 + 3.5 = 4.8
Data Required Time 4 + 1.2 - 0.2 = 5
Setup Slack 5 - 4.8 = 0.2

HOLD Check in BC-WC Mode

For hold check, the software uses the delay values from the min library for the data arrival
time, and network delay of both launch and capture clocks (in propagated mode).

The source latency in both ideal and propagated modes for hold checks is defined in the
constraints used by various clock paths as follows:

Clock Path (Operating Condition) Constraint Used

November 2023 132 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Launch clock early path (min) set_clock_latency

-source -early -min value
Capture clock late path (min) set_clock_latency
-source -late -min value

The network latency in ideal mode for hold checks is defined in the constraints used by
various clock paths as follows:

Clock Path (Operating Condition) Constraint Used

Launch clock early path (min) set_clock_latency
-min value
Capture clock late path (min) set_clock_latency
-min value

Note: You can also use one library containing two operating conditions in this mode.

The following example shows the hold check on a path from FF1 to FF2.

Figure 4-62 Hold Check in BC-WC Timing Analysis Mode

The software uses the min library to scale all delays at BC conditions.

The following values are assumed in this example:

November 2023 133 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Clock period = 4; Clock source latency = none; Clock mode = Propagated

Data late path delay 2.3

Data early path delay 1.0
Launch clock early path delay 0.5 + 0.4 = 0.9
Capture clock late path delay 0.3 + 0.5 = 0.8
Hold 0.1
Data arrival time 0.9 + 1 = 1.9
Data required time 0.1 + 0.8 = 0.9
Hold Slack 1.9 - 0.9 = 1

Performing Timing Analysis in BC-WC Analysis Mode

To perform timing analysis in BC-WC analysis mode, complete the following steps:
■ Set the analysis mode to BC-WC:

set_db timing_analysis_type best_case_worst_case

timing_analysis_check_type setup
■ Generate the timing reports for setup:
report_timing
■ Set the analysis mode to hold and propagated clock mode:
set_analysis_mode -checkType hold
■ Generate the timing reports for hold:
report_timing

Alternatively, you can use the report_timing –early command with set_analysis_mode
-checkType setup option to report hold paths.

On-Chip Variation (OCV) Timing Analysis Mode Type Overview

In on-chip variation (OCV) mode, the software calculates clock and data path delays based
on minimum and maximum operating conditions for setup analysis and vice-versa for hold
analysis. These delays are used together in the analysis of each check.

November 2023 134 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The OCV is the small difference in the operating parameter value across the chip. Each timing
arc in the design can have an early and a late delay to account for the on-chip process,
voltage, and temperature variation.

OCV Timing Analysis Mode - Setup and Hold Checks

These are explained in the sections below.

Setup Check in OCV Mode

In OCV mode setup check, the software uses the timing delay values from the late library set
and operating conditions for the data and the launch clock network delay. The software uses
the delay values from the early library set and operating conditions for the capturing clock
network delay assuming that the clocks are set in propagated mode.
Note: You can use one library instead of both maximum and minimum libraries, and apply
timing derates for performing min/max analysis, respectively.

The source latency in both ideal and propagated modes for setup checks is defined in the
constraints used by various clock paths as follows:

Clock Path (Operating Constraint Used

Condition)
Launch clock late path (max) set_clock_latency
-source -late -max value
or set_clock_latency -source -late value
Capture clock early path (min) set_clock_latency -source -early -min value
or set_clock_latency -source -early value

The network latency in ideal mode for setup checks is defined in the constraints used by
various clock paths as follows:

Clock Path (Operating Condition) Constraint Used

Launch clock late path set_clock_latency -max value
Capture clock early path set_clock_latency -min value

The following example shows the setup check on a path from FF1 to FF2.

November 2023 135 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-63 Setup Check in OCV Mode

The software uses the max library for all late path delays and min library for all early path
delays.

The following values are assumed in this example:

Clock period = 4; Clock source latency = none; Clock mode = Propagated

Data late path delay (max) 3.5

Data late path delay (min) 3.0
Launch clock late path delay (max) 0.7 + 0.6 = 1.3
Capture clock early path delay (min) 0.5 + 0.3 = 0.8
Setup 0.2
Data arrival time 1.3 + 3.5 = 4.8
Data Required Time 4 + 0.8 - 0.2 = 4.6
Setup Slack 4.6- 4.8 = -0.2

Hold Check in OCV Mode

For OCV hold check, the software uses the timing delay values from the early library set and
operating conditions for the data arrival time and launch clock network delay. The software
uses delay values from the late library set and operating conditions for the capturing clock
network delay assuming that the clocks are set in propagated mode.

November 2023 136 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The source latency in both ideal and propagated modes for hold checks is defined in the
constraints used by various clock paths as follows:

Clock Path (Operating Constraint Used

Condition)
Launch clock early path (min) set_clock_latency -source -early -min
value
or set_clock_latency -source -early value
Capture clock late path (max) set_clock_latency -source -late -max value
or set_clock_latency -source -late value

The network latency in ideal mode for hold checks is defined in the constraints used by
various clock paths as follows:

Clock Path (Operating Condition) Constraint Used

Launch clock early path set_clock_latency -min value
Capture clock late path set_clock_latency -max value

The following example shows the hold check on the path from FF1 to FF2.

Figure 4-64 Hold Check in OCV Mode

The software uses the max library to scale all delays at WC conditions and minimum library
to scale all delays at BC conditions.

November 2023 137 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The following values are assumed in this example:

Clock period = 4; Clock source latency = none; Clock mode = Propagated

Data early path delay (max)

Data early path delay(min) 1.2
Launch clock early path delay (min) 0.5 + 0.4 = 0.9
Capture clock late path delay (max) 0.7 + 0.5 = 1.2
Hold 0.1
Data arrival time 0.9 + 1.2 = 2.1
Data required time 0.1 + 1.2= 1.3
Hold Slack 2.1 - 1.3 = 0.8

Performing Timing Analysis in OCV Mode

To perform timing analysis in OCV mode, complete the following steps:

■ Set the analysis mode to OCV and propagated clock mode:
set_db timing_analysis_type ocv
■ Generate the timing reports for setup:
report_timing -late
■ Generate the timing reports for hold:
report_timing -early

Using Timing Derates in OCV Analysis Mode

When the set_timing_derate command is used, the following paths in OCV mode are
affected:

Violations Data Launch Clock Capture Clock

Setup -late -data -late -clock -early -clock
Hold -early -data -early -clock -late -clock

November 2023 138 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Clock Path Pessimism Removal

Clock Path Pessimism Removal (CPPR) is the process of identifying and removing
pessimism introduced in slack reports for clock paths when launch and capture clock paths
have a segment in common.

You can introduce early or late delay variations by using the set_db timing_analysis_type
ocv attribute or by using the set_timing_derate command for early and late clock paths. In
CPPR calculations, the difference between late and early delays (for the common clock
segment between launch and capture clock path) is calculated first and then this number is
adjusted in the slack calculations to remove the pessimism, which existed because of
considering common clock path to be both late and early at the same time. To remove this
pessimism in propagated clock mode, you can use the following command:
set_db timing_analysis_cppr true

Consider the following figure for setup check between flops FF1 and FF2.

Figure 4-65 Signal Path

The setup check equation for the example in the figure above with pessimism (without CPPR)
is as follows:

t1max + t2max + t3max <= t4min + tcp - tsu

where tcp is the clock period and tsu is the setup requirement at D pin of flip-flop FF2.

November 2023 139 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The above setup check equation incorrectly implies that the common clock network, B1, can
simultaneously use maximum delay for the launch clock late path (clock source to FF1/CLK)
and minimum delay for the capture clock early path (clock source to FF2/CLK). Using the
CPPR to remove this pessimism, the setup check equation is as follows:

t1max + t2max + t3max <= t4min + tcp - tsu + tcppr

where tcppr is the difference in the maximum and minimum delay from the clock source to the
branching node.

Similarly, hold check equation using CPPR is as follows:

t1min + t2min + t3min + tcppr <= t4max + tH

where tH is the hold requirement at D pin of flop FF2.

Clock Reconvergence and CPPR

If a design contains re-convergent logic on the clock path, then the timing analysis software
might assume certain pessimism while calculating slack. The following figure shows a circuit
in which timing analysis is performed in single analysis mode.

Figure 4-66 Illustration of Clock Reconvergence

In this case, if the set_case_analysis command has not been set at point S of the
multiplexer, the timing analysis software will assume different delay values for early and late

November 2023 140 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

paths. For example, if common early clock path from the clock source to the common clock
point has a delay of 0.5ns, and the same common late clock path has delay of 1ns, then a
pessimism equal to 0.5ns is introduced in the design. The above pessimism is not specific to
single analysis mode only; it also applies to best-case/worst-case and on-chip variation
methodologies. You can use CPPR to remove pessimism introduced due to reconvergence.

Supported CPPR Attributes

The Tempus software uses multiple attributes to control CPPR behavior. These can be
changed based on the user requirements. When these attributes are changed, there can be
changes in common clock path pessimism removal in terms of accuracy, common point
selection, SI behavior, and so on.

Some of these attributes include:

■ timing_cppr_remove_clock_to_data_pessimism
■ timing_cppr_self_loop_mode
■ timing_cppr_skip_clock_reconvergence
■ timing_cppr_threshold_ps
■ timing_cppr_transition_sense
■ timing_enable_pessimistic_cppr_for_reconvergent_clock_paths
■ timing_enable_si_cppr
■ timing_cppr_opposite_edge_mean_scale_factor
■ timing_cppr_opposite_edge_sigma_scale_factor

For more information, refer to timing Category Attributes.

Tempus uses a default threshold of 20ps during pessimism removal. This means that 20ps of
uncertainty remains in the analysis. To set the threshold value you can use
the timing_cppr_threshold_ps attribute. When you set this attribute to a specified value,
all the paths may be reported without having pessimism removed by the given value of the
attribute. During SI analysis, the CPPR behavior for setup and hold checks can be controlled
by setting the timing_enable_si_cppr attribute.

Timing Analysis Results Before and After CPPR

The following example shows a full clock path timing report generated before CPPR analysis.
The timing slack is 7.388 without any CPPR adjustments:

November 2023 141 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Path 1: MET (0.285 ns) Setup Check with Pin CRE_IN/DATA_BUS_MACH_INST/
data_out_reg[9]/CP->D
Group: m_clk
Startpoint: (R) CRE_IN/EX_IN/arp_reg/CP
Clock: (R) m_clk
Endpoint: (F) CRE_IN/DATA_BUS_MACH_INST/data_out_reg[9]/D
Clock: (R) m_clk

Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 7.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 0.514 (P) 0.623 (P)
Arrival:= 7.515 0.623

Setup:- 0.074
Required Time:= 7.441
Launch Clock:= 0.623
Data Path:+ 6.533
Slack:= 0.285
Timing Path:
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Timing Point Flags Arc Edge Cell Fanout Trans Delay Arrival
(ns) (ns) (ns)
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CRE_IN/msvBuf21m_clk/Z - I->Z R LVLHLD8 1 0.040 0.119 0.196
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L1_I0/ZN - I->ZN F INVD16 2 0.088 0.053 0.249
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L2_I1/Z - I->Z F BUFFD12 1 0.044 0.082 0.331
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L3_I0/Z - I->Z F BUFFD12 1 0.029 0.088 0.419
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Timing Point Flags Arc Edge Cell Fanout Trans Delay Arrival
(ns) (ns) (ns)
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
m_clk__L1_I0/Z - I->Z R BUFFD12 2 0.030 0.065 7.065
CRE_IN/msvBuf21m_clk/Z - I->Z R LVLHLD8 1 0.040 0.099 7.163
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L1_I0/ZN - I->ZN F INVD16 2 0.088 0.044 7.208
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L2_I1/Z - I->Z F BUFFD12 1 0.044 0.068 7.276
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

When CPPR adjustment is made, the timing slack improvement is seen as pessimism and is
displayed as “CPPR Adjustment” in the timing report.

In the example given below, “c2” is a common clock point after which the clock diverges:
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Path 1: MET (0.328 ns) Setup Check with Pin CRE_IN/DATA_BUS_MACH_INST/
data_out_reg[9]/CP->D
Group: m_clk
Startpoint: (R) CRE_IN/EX_IN/ar0_reg[0]/CP
Clock: (R) m_clk
Endpoint: (F) CRE_IN/DATA_BUS_MACH_INST/data_out_reg[9]/D
Clock: (R) m_clk

Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 7.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 0.514 (P) 0.674 (P)

November 2023 142 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Arrival:= 7.515 0.674

Setup:- 0.074
Cppr Adjust:+ 0.042
Required Time:= 7.482
Launch Clock:= 0.674
Data Path:+ 6.480
Slack:= 0.328
Timing Path:
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Timing Point Flags Arc Edge Cell Fanout Trans Delay Arrival
(ns) (ns) (ns)
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
m_clk__L1_I0/Z - I->Z R BUFFD12 2 0.030 0.078 0.078
CRE_IN/msvBuf21m_clk/Z - I->Z R LVLHLD8 1 0.040 0.119 0.196
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L1_I0/ZN - I->ZN F INVD16 2 0.088 0.058 0.254
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L2_I0/ZN - I->ZN R INVD16 9 0.045 0.069 0.323
CRE_IN/EX_IN/RC_CGIC_INST/Q - CP->Q R CKLNQD1 1 0.073 0.155 0.478
CRE_IN/EX_IN/rc_gclk_L1_I0/Z - I->Z R BUFFD6 1 0.079 0.113 0.591
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Timing Point Flags Arc Edge Cell Fanout Trans Delay Arrival
(ns) (ns) (ns)
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
m_clk__L1_I0/Z - I->Z R BUFFD12 2 0.030 0.065 7.065
CRE_IN/msvBuf21m_clk/Z - I->Z R LVLHLD8 1 0.040 0.099 7.163
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L1_I0/ZN - I->ZN F INVD16 2 0.088 0.044 7.208
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L2_I1/Z - I->Z F BUFFD12 1 0.044 0.068 7.276
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L3_I0/Z - I->Z F BUFFD12 1 0.029 0.072 7.348
CRE_IN/msvNet21m_clk_L4_I0/ZN - I->ZN R INVD16 1 0.040 0.029 7.378
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

November 2023 143 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.3.3 Advanced On-Chip Variation (AOCV) Analysis

4.3.3.1 Overview on page 145
4.3.3.2 Using AOCV Derating Library Formats on page 145
4.3.3.3 Enabling AOCV Analysis on page 150
4.3.3.4 Reading AOCV Libraries on page 150
4.3.3.5 Stage Counts and their Properties for Launch and Capture Paths on
page 151
4.3.3.6 Handling OCV Derating with AOCV on page 156
4.3.3.7 Configuring AOCV Modes on page 158
4.3.3.8 Reporting in AOCV Modes on page 158
4.3.3.9 AOCV Reporting on page 166

November 2023 144 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.3.3.1 Overview
In on-chip variation (OCV) mode, the software uses the timing delay values from the late or
early library sets and operating conditions for the data, capture, and launch clocks. OCV
analysis uses a single constant derating factor. However, in actual Silicon, there can be lot of
sources of variation For example, variation of transistor length, distance, width, doping
amount, and so on. To model these, advanced on-chip variation (AOCV) analysis can be used
during timing analysis and optimization. AOCV analysis uses variable derating factors that
are based on the distance of the cell and logic depth. Depending on the number of logic levels
and placement locations, different derating factors can be used.

AOCV derating libraries are provided by library vendors, or can be characterized using
Cadence’s tool “Variety”. An AOCV factor is chosen so that when multiplied by the lib nominal
delay value, you get close to the mean ± 3 sigma value for that many stages in the path. As
number of stages in the path increases, the sigma value (the spread) relative to the mean
(nominal value) decreases on the order 1/sqrt(n). Due to which AOCV derate factor required
decreases.

4.3.3.2 Using AOCV Derating Library Formats

There are two different AOCV derating library formats:
■ External AOCV Format
■ Cadence-Specific AOCV Derating Format

The characterization data within either format is essentially the same - the differences are
mainly syntactic.

November 2023 145 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

External AOCV Format

The external AOCV format is currently supported by third parties. For example,

Cadence-Specific AOCV Derating Format

For example,

Cadence-Specific AOCV Derating Format: Library Syntax

The Cadence specific AOCV derating format is made of several sections allowing you to
customize how each table is applied:

Sections Tags Notes

[Apply- [Net | Cell] ] Table Group Optional

November 2023 146 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

[Voltage 1.5] Table Voltage Optional

[Early | Late] -[Rise | Fall]? -[Clock | Table ID Early or Late is required
Data]
[Cell | Net | Instance ] LIB/BUFS1 Object ID Optional
Depth 1 2 3 4 5 Derating Table It is possible to have a 1-D
distance.
[Distance 500 1000 1500 2000]?
1.123 1.090 1.075 1.067 1.062
1.124 1.091 1.076 1.068 1.063
1.125 1.092 1.077 1.070 1.065
1.126 1.094 1.079 1.072 1.067

The table sections are described below.

Table Group

The Apply- tag can be used with either a net or cell descriptor to designate the table for use
in derating net delays or cell delays, respectively. If the Apply- tag is not specified, then the
table will be used for both net and cell delay derating. The Apply- tags are described below:
To designate a table for only net-based derating, you should specify:
Apply-Net

To designate a table for only cell-based derating, use the following:

Apply-Cell

If you use the Object ID field to specify unique tables for specified libraries and/or library cells,
you should also specify Apply-Cell for these tables.

Table ID

The Table ID is a tag made up of up to three sub tags, which are used to further indicate to
the derating table to control early versus late, rise versus fall, and clock path versus data path.
{Early | Late}

Each table specifies Early or Late tags. Each object related to AOCV derating has both Early
and Late derating tables. AOCV derating of only early or late paths is not allowed. It is,
however, legal to use derating values of 1.0 for the tables.

November 2023 147 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

By default, an Early or Late derating table is used to supply derating for both rising and falling
delays. If a unique derating for each transition is required, the -Rise or -Fall tag can be added
to the Table ID for more specific results.
{Early-Rise}

To configure a table for only rising delays on early paths, you should use Early-Rise sub tag.
{Late-Fall}

To configure a table for falling delays on late timing paths, you can specify Late-Fall.
[Clock | Data]

Derating tables can also be configured so that they are specific to clock path delays or data
path delays. This can be achieved by adding a final -Clock or -Data tag to the Table ID string.

The complete set of possible Table IDs is:

Early Early-Rise-Clock Early-Rise-Clock Late-Rise-Clock

Early-Rise Early-Rise-Data Late-Rise Late-Rise-Data
Early-Fall Early-Fall-Clock Late-Fall Late-Fall-Clock
Early-Clock Early-Fall-Data Late-Clock Late-Fall-Data
Early-Data Late-Data

In the case where there is an overlap in the table specification, the derating table with the
tightest specification is used.

Object ID

You can further control the AOCV derating tables to be applied to specific timing libraries or
library cell groups. The syntax also supports specifying design-level cell instances or nets,
however, these types of design-level references are not currently supported.
Note: The AOCV libraries are configured and stored in the system the same way as Liberty
timing libraries, however, only library or library-cell level derate factors are supported.

In the AOCV flow you can use the Cell Object ID to designate particular derating tables to be
used for specific library-level groups. An object expression using simple wildcard rules can be
used for a variety of selection criteria. For example, the following expression specifies a
derating table to be used for a specific library:
Cell stdcell/*

November 2023 148 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The following expression specifies derating for a specific library cell:

Cell stdcell/BUF1S

The following expression specifies a common derate table for a group of cells with similar
drive strength:
Cell stdcell/*1S
Cell stdcell/*4S

The following expression specifies a common derate factor for a group of libraries at the same
corner:
Cell *-P1V15T120/*

Table Voltage

In the future, an optional voltage designation for the table can be specified by adding the
Voltage specifier to the model description. You can specify several tables with different
voltage specifications within the same .aocv library file. When performing derating, the
system uses the table that matches the current operating voltage of the cell. If the operating
voltage of the cell does not exactly match one of the specified voltage points, then the
following are considered:
■ If the operating voltage is between the Voltage points of two derating tables, the system
will use linear interpolation to derive the proper derating factor.
■ If the requested voltage is large than the maximum Voltage table, then that table data will
be used without extrapolation.
■ If the requested voltage is lower than the minimum Voltage table, then the minimum
Voltage data is used without extrapolation.
■ To specify a voltage of 1.5Volts for the derating table, use a specification of:
Voltage 1.5

Derating Table

The AOCV format allows derating table specifications that are either one or two-dimensional
– the possible axes being Distance, the bounding box diagonal of that path, and Stage - the
stage count depth of the path. Although AOCV graph-based analysis supports stage-based
derating only, you may specify either a 1-D stage-based table, or a 2-D Stage x Distance
table.

When using a 2-D table in conjunction with AOCV graph-based stage-based only analysis,
the system will attempt to pick the proper row of the table based on the estimated chip and/
or core dimensions. If the software includes physical information, the chip and core size

November 2023 149 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

are automatically determined from the design. The timing_aocv_chip_size and

timing_aocv_core_size attributes can be used in the software to specify the physical
dimensions when this information is not available. If this value falls off the table, then the final
row of the table will be used without extrapolation.

The Stage and Distance keywords are added to the model to provide the axis points for the
table. The table rows represent “distance” variance and the columns “stage count”,
irrespective of the order in which stage and distance keywords are specified for the model.
These are explained below:

Distance: List of distance (real) values, specified in microns, increasing in magnitude.

Stage: List of integer values representing stage depth, increasing in magnitude.

The following example shows a derating table with 5 Stage indices and 4 Distance indices:
Stage 1 2 3 4 5
Distance 500 1000 1500 2000
1.123 1.090 1.075 1.067 1.062
1.124 1.091 1.076 1.068 1.063
1.125 1.092 1.077 1.070 1.065
1.126 1.094 1.079 1.072 1.067

In case the stage or distance lookup value goes beyond the range of the table - either smaller
or larger, the system will use the last bound entry point. Extrapolation will not be performed
on either end of the axis.

4.3.3.3 Enabling AOCV Analysis

AOCV analysis can be enabled by using the following command variables.
set_db timing_analysis_type true

4.3.3.4 Reading AOCV Libraries

SMSC Environment

In SMSC environment, the AOCV libraries can be read using the command below:
read_libs -aocv_libs "myDerateLib.aocv.lib"

MMMC Environment

In MMMC environment, AOCV libraries can be read using the create_library_set

command.

November 2023 150 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

For example:
create_library_set –name slow –timing slow.lib –aocv test.aocv.lib

In case, the library set is already created , it can be updated to read the new aocv library or
update the existing library using the update_library_set command.

For example:
update_library_set –name slow –aocv test.aocv.lib

4.3.3.5 Stage Counts and their Properties for Launch and Capture Paths
Most cells in a clock path have both launch stage counts and capture stage counts. This
means a clock buffer exists in a launch path and a capture path simultaneously so the buffer
has its own launch stage count property and capture stage count property. This section
covers a comprehensive explanation for the launch stage count and capture stage count.

The following four timing paths in the figure below explain launch and capture stage counts:
■ The timing path from Input to RS/D (input to reg path)
■ The timing path from RS/CK to RT1/D (reg to reg path)
■ The timing path from RS/CK to RT2/D (reg to reg path)
■ The timing path from RT2/CK to output1 (reg to output path)

Figure 4-67 Timing Paths

November 2023 151 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The following default settings are assumed:

set_db timing_aocv_analysis_mode launch_capture; #(default)
set_db timing_aocv_use_cell_depth_for_net false; #(default: false)

Stage Counting Graph Based Analysis (GBA)

Graph-based AOCV analysis does choose a pessimistic situation so each cell has to its own
pessimistic property (only one value, not two or more values like PBA) such as the late launch
stage count for cell, early capture stage count for cell, and so on.

The following figure includes the launch cell and net stage counts:

Figure 4-68 Launch cell and net stage counts

The stage counts of C1 and C2 for launch paths in the above example are as follows:

The clock port is connected to input pin of C1.

1. From the clock port, there are 4 launch paths which include C1 and C2. that is, path from
the clock port through C1/C2/C3/RS/U1/U5 to RT1.
2. The launch path from the clock port through C1/C2/C3/RS/U1/U2/U3/U4 to RT2.
3. The launch path from the clock port through C1/C2/C4/RT1 through some combination
logic to the FF on the top-right side.
4. The launch path from the clock port through C1/C2/C4/RT2 to the output port.

November 2023 152 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The last path is the shortest launch path that includes C1 and C2 and each launch cell stage
count is 4 (C1, C2, C4, and RT2).

Next, stage count is reset to 0 at the common point C2/Y.

In case of the launch path, which includes C3/RS/U1, each stage count of C3/RS/U1 is 4/4/
4 for the end point RT1 and stage count of 6/6/6 for the end point RT2.

Now, the problem of choosing the stage count occurs on C3/RS/U1 because the cells exist in
the same launch path in the case of the two timings paths (RS to RT1 and RS to RT2) and
have different stage count based in path-based AOCV analysis.

Therefore, to maintain pessimism, the smaller stage count 4 is chosen. So, each launch cell
stage count of C3/RS/U1 is 4 in case of graph-based AOCV analysis. U5 has a stage count
of 4 and U2/U3/U4 has a stage count of 6, respectively. Smaller stage count means more
variation, so it is mapped to the worse AOCV derate for late and early.
Note: In GBA, the algorithm requires resetting of stage count at clock branch points- a major
source of pessimism.

In the given figure, another common point occurs at the pin C4/Y. which is connected to RT1/
CK and RT2/CK. So, state count is reset to 0 at the C4/Y pin. The stage count of the path
from the C4/Y through RT1 is longer than that of the path from the C4/Y through RT2 to the
output port. RT2 has stage count of 1 and RT1 has a stage count of a value greater than 1
and C4 has a stage count of 2.

The following table summarizes the graph-based launch cell stage counts of the above
example:

Stage
Segment Members Stage Path
Count
Clock root -> CPPR Common Point (C2/Y) C1-C2 4 C1-C2-C4-RT2
CPPR Common Point (C2/Y) -> C3-RS-U1 4 C3-RS-U1-U5
Launch Clock Branch Point (RS) -> Data
Path Branch
Data Path Branch -> Data Path Endpoint U5 4 C3-RS-U1-U5
Data Path Branch -> Data Path Endpoint U2-U3-U4 6 C3-RS-U1-U2-U3-U4
CRPR Common Point (C2/Y) -> C4 2 C4-RT2
CRPR Common Point (C4/Y)

November 2023 153 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

CRPR Common Point (C4/Y) -> Launch RT2 1 RT2

Clock Branch Point (RT2) -> data Path
Endpoint

Stage Counting Path-Based Analysis (PBA)

The method to calculate the stage count under path-based AOCV mode is intuitive.

The following figure includes the launch cell and net stage counts:

Figure 4-69 Launch cell and net stage counts

Firstly, look for the CPPR common point on the clock launch path and the capture path of a
timing path.

To derive the common point from RS to RT1:-

■ The launch path from RS to RT1:
clock->C1->C2->C3->RS->U1->U5->RT1/D
■ The capture path from RS to RT1:
clock->C1->C2->C4->RT1/CK.

So, the common point (pin) of the above timing path is the C2/Y pin.

To derive the common point from RS to RT2:

November 2023 154 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ The launch path from RS to RT2:

clock->C1->C2->C3->RS->U1->U2->U3->U4->RT2/D.
■ The capture path from RS to RT2:
clock->C1->C2->C4->RT2/CK.

So, the common point (pin) of the above timing path is the C2/Y pin.
Now, for calculation purpose, the stage count at C2/Y is reset to 0, as shown in below figure.

Figure 4-70 Stage count at C2/Y reset to 0

Therefore, the launch path from the pin C2/Y to RT1/D has a stage count of 4, that is,
C3(1)->RS(2)->U1(3)->U5(4)->RT1/D

The launch path from the pin RS to RT2/D has a stage count of 6, that is,
C3(1)->RS(2)->U1(3)->U2(4)->U3(5)->U4(6)->RT2/D

Stage
Segment Members Stage Path
Count
Launch Clock Branch Point - C3-RS-U1-U5 4 C3-RS-U1-U5
>
Data Path Endpoint (RS to
RT1)
Launch Clock Branch Point - C3-RS-U1-U2-U3-U4 6 C3-RS-U1-U2-U3-U4
>
Data Path Endpoint (RS to
RT2)

November 2023 155 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The table above summarizes the stage count of the 2 launch paths in PBA.

Based on above derived stage count, the tool calculates the diagonal distance for the timing
path and then gets the AOCV derate values from the AOCV derating library with the stage
count and the distance.
Note: The report_timing command can be used to report each cell’s AOCV derate and
each net’s AOCV derate.

So, think over which AOCV derates of the cells/nets on the common path are used for the
common parts. In the above example, you have to check the stage counts of the cells C1 and
C2 on the common path and AOCV derates of the cells. The stage count (SC) calculation on
the common path cells is relating to graph-based AOCV analysis.

4.3.3.6 Handling OCV Derating with AOCV

The timing system offers a set of controls that enable you to flexibly configure the derating
environment. You can perform the following functions:
■ Control whether AOCV and OCV derating factors are multiplied or added.
■ Specify whether the reference point for the AOCV and OCV factors are nominal around
0.0, or around 1.0 - and adjust the calculation appropriately.
■ Allow the final OCV factor to be built up by successive multiplication or addition of sub-
factors by using the set_timing_derate command.

These are described in the subsequent sections.

Using AOCV Addition or Multiplication with OCV

By default, when AOCV analysis is enabled, any OCV style derating specified with the
set_timing_derate command is multiplied by the calculated AOCV factor to get the final
derating value. You can use the following setting to add or multiply AOCV and OCV factors:
set_db timing_aocv_derate_mode aocv_multiplicative (default) | aocv_additive
Using Derating Reference Points

The AOCV and OCV derating factors may be added or multiplied, so it is important to
understand whether each factor is nominal at zero or one. For example, if there is an AOCV
+3% factor modeled as 1.03, and an OCV factor having a plus two percent factor modeled as
1.02, simple multiplication of factors yields a final derate of around 1.051. If the same factors
are added up, a sum of 2.05 is obtained, which is not the expected value. The timing system
can understand that both of these factors are nominally referenced to 1.0, and it can then
automatically adjust the final result. In this case the timer will calculate:

November 2023 156 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

(OCV) (AOCV) (Adjust)

1.02 + 1.03 - 1.0 = 1.05

The following attributes can be used to allow the specification of the reference point for both
OCV and AOCV factors:
set_db timing_derate_aocv_reference_point 0 | 1 (default)
set_db timing_derate_ocv_reference_point 0 | 1 (default)

According to current AOCV library definitions, the AOCV reference point is always expected
to be set at 1.0.

Using Addition and Multiplication of OCV Sub-Factors

The software provides the ability to perform incremental adjustments to the defined timing
derate factors. The software also allows addition and multiplication (using
set_timing_derate -add and –multiply parameters) to function on an instance-specific
basis as well.

When aocv_additive mode is selected, the adjustments are performed as shown in the
table below.

OCV
AOCV AOCV OCV Final Derate
Reference Add or Multiply
Factor Reference Pt Factor Calculation
Pt
X 0/1 Y 0/1 aocv_multiplicative X * Y
X 1.0 Y 1.0 aocv_additive X+Y-1
X 1.0 Y 0.0 aocv_additive X+Y
X 0.0 Y 1.0 aocv_additive X+Y
X 0.0 Y 0.0 aocv_additive X+Y+1

The table shows the hierarchy of derating factors in increasing order of precedence. No
adjustments are performed for aocv_multiplicative mode.
Note: It is expected that AOCV derating libraries will be referenced to 1.0. So the
combinations above are not expected to be actively used.

November 2023 157 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.3.3.7 Configuring AOCV Modes

The Tempus software allows you can control the handling of AOCV analysis modes by using
the timing_aocv_analysis_mode setting. You can specify one of the following modes for
both PBA and GBA:
■ combine_launch_capture
■ launch_capture (default)
■ clock_only
■ separate_data_clock

These are described below.

■ combine_launch_capture (default)
When set to combine_launch_capture, the software calculates the AOCV stage count
using the combined depth for launch and capture paths. This is achieved by the
summation of the path depth on the launch and capture paths.
■ launch_capture
When set to launch_capture, AOCV analysis will be performed on both the data and
clock paths, and the AOCV derating factor will be calculated based for both clock and
data path stages.
■ clock_only
When set to clock_only, AOCV analysis will be performed for clock paths only, and AOCV
derating factor will be calculated based on only the clock path stage depth.
■ separate_data_clock
When set to separate_data_clock, the software calculates the AOCV stage count for
clock paths and data paths separately. Both clock and data paths have related AOCV
derating factors.

4.3.3.8 Reporting in AOCV Modes

Consider the following diagram:

November 2023 158 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-71 AOCV stage count

The following examples show AOCV stage count in GBA and PBA mode:

timing_aocv_analysis_mode clock_only mode (GBA)

Path 1: VIOLATED (-48.474 ns) Hold Check with Pin cppr_DDF4_1/CK->D
View: default_analysis_view_setup
Group: clk_cppr
Startpoint: (F) data_cppr
Clock:
Endpoint: (F) cppr_DDF4_1/D
Clock: (R) clk_cppr

Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 0.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 48.540 (P) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 48.540 0.000

Hold:+ -0.026
AOCV Adjustment:- 0.040
Cppr Adjust:- 0.000
Required Time:= 48.474
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Data Path:+ 0.000
Slack:= -48.474
Timing Path:
#-------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#-------------------------------------------------------------
0.000 0.000 data_cppr data_cppr - - #
0.000 0.000 cppr_DDF4_1/D - 1.000 - #
#-------------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:

November 2023 159 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 clk_cppr clk_cppr - 5.000
12.110 12.110 cppr_CLKBUF_0/Y A->Y 1.211 4.000
12.130 24.240 cppr_CLKBUFA_1/Y A->Y 1.213 4.000
12.130 36.370 cppr_CLKBUFA_2/Y A->Y 1.213 2.000
12.170 48.540 cppr_CLKBUF3_1/Y A->Y 1.217 2.000
0.000 48.540 cppr_DDF4_1/CK - 1.215 2.000
#--------------------------------------------------------------

timing_aocv_analysis_mode clock_only mode (PBA)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
Path 1: VIOLATED (-48.474 ns) Hold Check with Pin cppr_DDF4_1/CK->D
Retime Analysis: Data Path-Slew
View: default_analysis_view_setup
Group: clk_cppr
Startpoint: (F) data_cppr
Clock:
Endpoint: (F) cppr_DDF4_1/D
Clock: (R) clk_cppr

Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 0.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 48.540 (P) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 48.540 0.000

Hold:+ -0.026
AOCV Adjustment:- 0.040
Cppr Adjust:- 0.000
Required Time:= 48.474
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Data Path:+ 0.000
Slack:= -48.474
Slack(original):= -48.474
Timing Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 data_cppr data_cppr - -
0.000 0.000 cppr_DDF4_1/D - 1.000 -
#---------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 clk_cppr clk_cppr - 5.000
12.110 12.110 cppr_CLKBUF_0/Y A->Y 1.211 4.000
12.130 24.240 cppr_CLKBUFA_1/Y A->Y 1.213 4.000
12.130 36.370 cppr_CLKBUFA_2/Y A->Y 1.213 2.000

November 2023 160 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

12.170 48.540 cppr_CLKBUF3_1/Y A->Y 1.217 2.000

0.000 48.540 cppr_DDF4_1/CK - 1.215 2.000
#-------------------------------------------------------------

timing_aocv_analysis_mode separate_data_clock mode (GBA)

Path 1: VIOLATED (-48.474 ns) Hold Check with Pin cppr_DDF4_1/CK->D
View: default_analysis_view_setup
Group: clk_cppr
Startpoint: (F) data_cppr
Clock:
Endpoint: (F) cppr_DDF4_1/D
Clock: (R) clk_cppr
Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 0.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 48.540 (P) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 48.540 0.000
Hold:+ -0.026
AOCV Adjustment:- 0.040
Cppr Adjust:- 0.000
Required Time:= 48.474
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Data Path:+ 0.000
Slack:= -48.474
Timing Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 data_cppr data_cppr - 1.000
0.000 0.000 cppr_DDF4_1/D - 0.814 1.000
#----------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 clk_cppr clk_cppr - 5.000
12.110 12.110 cppr_CLKBUF_0/Y A->Y 1.211 4.000
12.130 24.240 cppr_CLKBUFA_1/Y A->Y 1.213 4.000
12.130 36.370 cppr_CLKBUFA_2/Y A->Y 1.213 2.000
12.170 48.540 cppr_CLKBUF3_1/Y A->Y 1.217 2.000
0.000 48.540 cppr_DDF4_1/CK - 1.215 2.000
#-------------------------------------------------------------

timing_aocv_analysis_mode separate_data_clock mode (PBA)

Path 1: VIOLATED (-48.474 ns) Hold Check with Pin cppr_DDF4_1/CK->D
Retime Analysis: Data Path-Slew
View: default_analysis_view_setup
Group: clk_cppr
Startpoint: (F) data_cppr

November 2023 161 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Clock:
Endpoint: (F) cppr_DDF4_1/D
Clock: (R) clk_cppr
Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 0.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 48.540 (P) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 48.540 0.000
Hold:+ -0.026
AOCV Adjustment:- 0.040
Cppr Adjust:- 0.000
Required Time:= 48.474
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Data Path:+ 0.000
Slack:= -48.474
Slack(original):= -48.474
Timing Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 data_cppr data_cppr - 1.000
0.000 0.000 cppr_DDF4_1/D - 0.814 1.000
#---------------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 clk_cppr clk_cppr - 5.000
12.110 12.110 cppr_CLKBUF_0/Y A->Y 1.211 4.000
12.130 24.240 cppr_CLKBUFA_1/Y A->Y 1.213 4.000
12.130 36.370 cppr_CLKBUFA_2/Y A->Y 1.213 2.000
12.170 48.540 cppr_CLKBUF3_1/Y A->Y 1.217 2.000
0.000 48.540 cppr_DDF4_1/CK - 1.215 2.000
#-------------------------------------------------------------

timing_aocv_analysis_mode launch_capture (GBA)

Path 1: VIOLATED (-48.474 ns) Hold Check with Pin cppr_DDF4_1/CK->D
View: default_analysis_view_setup
Group: clk_cppr
Startpoint: (F) data_cppr
Clock:
Endpoint: (F) cppr_DDF4_1/D
Clock: (R) clk_cppr

Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 0.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 48.540 (P) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 48.540 0.000

Hold:+ -0.026
AOCV Adjustment:- 0.040

November 2023 162 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Cppr Adjust:- 0.000

Required Time:= 48.474
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Data Path:+ 0.000
Slack:= -48.474
Timing Path:

#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 data_cppr data_cppr - 1.000
0.000 0.000 cppr_DDF4_1/D - 0.814 1.000
#---------------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 clk_cppr clk_cppr - 5.000
12.110 12.110 cppr_CLKBUF_0/Y A->Y 1.211 4.000
12.130 24.240 cppr_CLKBUFA_1/Y A->Y 1.213 4.000
12.130 36.370 cppr_CLKBUFA_2/Y A->Y 1.213 2.000
12.170 48.540 cppr_CLKBUF3_1/Y A->Y 1.217 2.000
0.000 48.540 cppr_DDF4_1/CK - 1.215 2.000
#-------------------------------------------------------------

timing_aocv_analysis_mode launch_capture (PBA):

Path 1: VIOLATED (-48.474 ns) Hold Check with Pin cppr_DDF4_1/CK->D
Retime Analysis: Data Path-Slew
View: default_analysis_view_setup
Group: clk_cppr
Startpoint: (F) data_cppr
Clock:
Endpoint: (F) cppr_DDF4_1/D
Clock: (R) clk_cppr

Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 0.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 48.540 (P) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 48.540 0.000

Hold:+ -0.026
AOCV Adjustment:- 0.040
Cppr Adjust:- 0.000
Required Time:= 48.474
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Data Path:+ 0.000
Slack:= -48.474
Slack(original):= -48.474
Timing Path:

November 2023 163 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 data_cppr data_cppr - 1.000
0.000 0.000 cppr_DDF4_1/D - 0.814 1.000
#----------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 clk_cppr clk_cppr - 5.000
12.110 12.110 cppr_CLKBUF_0/Y A->Y 1.211 4.000
12.130 24.240 cppr_CLKBUFA_1/Y A->Y 1.213 4.000
12.130 36.370 cppr_CLKBUFA_2/Y A->Y 1.213 2.000
12.170 48.540 cppr_CLKBUF3_1/Y A->Y 1.217 2.000
0.000 48.540 cppr_DDF4_1/CK - 1.215 2.000
#-------------------------------------------------------------

timing_aocv_analysis_mode combine_launch_capture (GBA)

Path 1: VIOLATED (-48.474 ns) Hold Check with Pin cppr_DDF4_1/CK->D
View: default_analysis_view_setup
Group: clk_cppr
Startpoint: (F) data_cppr
Clock:
Endpoint: (F) cppr_DDF4_1/D
Clock: (R) clk_cppr
Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 0.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 48.540 (P) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 48.540 0.000
Hold:+ -0.026
AOCV Adjustment:- 0.040
Cppr Adjust:- 0.000
Required Time:= 48.474
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Data Path:+ 0.000
Slack:= -48.474
Timing Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 data_cppr data_cppr - 1.000
0.000 0.000 cppr_DDF4_1/D - 0.814 1.000
#--------------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:

#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #

November 2023 164 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 clk_cppr clk_cppr - 5.000
12.110 12.110 cppr_CLKBUF_0/Y A->Y 1.211 4.000
12.130 24.240 cppr_CLKBUFA_1/Y A->Y 1.213 4.000
12.130 36.370 cppr_CLKBUFA_2/Y A->Y 1.213 2.000
12.170 48.540 cppr_CLKBUF3_1/Y A->Y 1.217 2.000
0.000 48.540 cppr_DDF4_1/CK - 1.215 2.000
#-------------------------------------------------------------

timing_aocv_analysis_mode combine_launch_capture (PBA)

Path 1: VIOLATED (-48.474 ns) Hold Check with Pin cppr_DDF4_1/CK->D
Retime Analysis: Data Path-Slew
View: default_analysis_view_setup
Group: clk_cppr
Startpoint: (F) data_cppr
Clock:
Endpoint: (F) cppr_DDF4_1/D
Clock: (R) clk_cppr
Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 0.000 0.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 0.000
Net Latency:+ 48.540 (P) 0.000 (I)
Arrival:= 48.540 0.000
Hold:+ -0.026
AOCV Adjustment:- 0.040
Cppr Adjust:- 0.000
Required Time:= 48.474
Launch Clock:= 0.000
Data Path:+ 0.000
Slack:= -48.474
Slack(original):= -48.474
Timing Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 data_cppr data_cppr - 1.000
0.000 0.000 cppr_DDF4_1/D - 0.814 1.000
#---------------------------------------------------------------
Other End Path:
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
#Delay Arrival Pin Arc Aocv Aocv #
#(ns) (ns) Derate Stage #
# Count #
#--------------------------------------------------------------#
0.000 0.000 clk_cppr clk_cppr - 5.000
12.110 12.110 cppr_CLKBUF_0/Y A->Y 1.211 4.000
12.130 24.240 cppr_CLKBUFA_1/Y A->Y 1.213 4.000
12.130 36.370 cppr_CLKBUFA_2/Y A->Y 1.213 2.000
12.170 48.540 cppr_CLKBUF3_1/Y A->Y 1.217 2.000
0.000 48.540 cppr_DDF4_1/CK - 1.215 2.000
#---------------------------------------------------------------

November 2023 165 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.3.3.9 AOCV Reporting

The Tempus software allows you to generate AOCV reports in both GBA and PBA modes.

If the set_db timing_analysis_aocv true is set, the impact of each reporting command
is as follows:
■ report_timing –retime aocv
PBA stage counting will be used for calculating AOCV derate factor for the given path.
GBA slew will be used for slew propagation.
■ report_timing –retime aocv_path_slew_propagation

In this case, PBA stage counting will be used for calculating the AOCV derate factor for
the given path. PBA slew will be used for slew propagation.
■ report_timing

In this case, GBA stage counting will be used for calculating the AOCV derate factor for
the given path. GBA slew will be used for slew propagation.

4.3.3.10 Reporting with OCV/AOCV Derating

In a timing report there may be a combination of OCV and AOCV derating factors -
aocv_derate and user_derate (OCV) fields of the report. An additional stage_count field
is available to aid in better understanding the derivation of the aocv_derate factor.

In the previous example of an additive combination of OCV and AOCV, one of the reference
points was 0 and the other was 1. In such cases, the software does not make any adjustments
to normalize the final derate factor so the timing report columns are quite intuitive.

In the timing run below, the nominal delay for all arcs has been set to 1.0ns so that the value
in the Delay field indicates the total derate factor applied.
set_db timing_report_fields {instance cell arc stage_count aocv_derate
user_derate delay arrival}
report_timing -net ...

November 2023 166 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

If the derating factors are changed such that both AOCV and OCV are referenced to 1.0, then
an implicit -1 will be used since the mode is still aocv_additive. In this case, the effect of the
‘-1’ will be seen in the aocv_derate value.

For example, set both the reference points to 0, and modify the AOCV library so that it outputs
a value of 0.030ns.
set_db timing_derate_aocv_reference_point 0
set_db timing_derate_ocv_reference_point 0
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dcMax -late -cell_delay 1.01
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dcMax -late -cell_delay 0.02 -add [get_cells U1]

In this case, the +1.0 adjustment to normalize the final derating factor is again accounted for
in the aocv_derate column.

AOCV Derate and Stage Count Properties of Timing Arcs

You can use stage count and AOCV derate properties to report and query on AOCV data. As
an example consider the following path:

November 2023 167 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

set_db timing_report_fields {arc hpin aocv_derate stage_count} -path_type

full_clock

For example, obtaining the various stage counts corresponding to the above path is shown
below:
get_property [get_arcs –from buf133/A –to buf133/Y] aocv_stage_count_data_late
3.000
get_property [get_arcs –from buf11/A –to buf11/Y]
aocv_stage_count_capture_clock_early

To obtain derate corresponding to the above path:

get_property [get_arcs –from buf11/A –to buf11/Y]
aocv_derate_capture_clock_early_rise 0.888

For more information on AOCV derate properties, refer to report_property and

get_property commands in the Tempus Text Command Reference.

November 2023 168 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.3.4 Statistical On-Chip Variation (SOCV) Analysis

4.3.4.1 Overview on page 170
4.3.4.2 Introduction to SOCV on page 170
4.3.4.3 SOCV Data Flow on page 171
4.3.4.4 SOCV Analysis on page 173
4.3.4.5 Enabling SOCV Analysis on page 173
4.3.4.6 SOCV Analysis Reporting on page 174
4.3.4.7 Sample Variation on Delay Template from Liberty 2013.12 on page 181
4.3.4.8 Timing Behaviors in SOCV Analysis Mode on page 183
4.3.4.9 Specifying Statistical Via Variation File on page 183
4.3.4.10 Advanced Timing Tcl Scripting in SOCV Analysis Mode on page 184

November 2023 169 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.3.4.1 Overview
Industrial demand for higher performing digital semiconductor products has highlighted the
clear need to reduce design guard-band without sacrificing time-to-market. Improvements to
on-chip variation modeling are a driving component of the guard band reduction strategy. In
this section we review the current industry approaches to on-chip variation (OCV) modeling
and introduce the Statistical OCV (SOCV) analysis, which utilizes a single statistical
parameter representing sigma variation. The SOCV extends existing single variable statistical
approaches by adding slew and load-dependent sigma per timing arc.

For many years, modeling of the on-chip process variation has been achieved through scaling
of the nominal delays of all instances with a single derating factor. Such a uniform derating,
often referred to as OCV derate, often causes excessive pessimism for some instances while
optimism for others. In order to guarantee conservative analysis, OCV derates were chosen
pessimistically, resulting in over-design and increase of turnaround times for timing closure.

To overcome these setbacks, an advanced OCV (AOCV) approach was introduced. With
AOCV the derating factor is instance specific and depends on the number of logic levels in a
path and/or location of the instance. The AOCV derating factors are pre-characterized for
each cell typically using Monte-Carlo simulation. This methodology reduced pessimism and
optimism of the traditional OCV methodology. However, AOCV presented challenges for
computing of the stage count and distance of the path on a die for a specific path in graph-
based analysis (GBA). In addition, AOCV assumes that the ratio of delay variation to nominal
delay does not depend on the input slew and load.

On the opposite spectrum of the methods modeling variability in STA is statistical static timing
analysis (SSTA). It models delay distributions due to local and global random parameter
variations accurately and is, therefore, much more accurate than other mentioned methods.
However, SSTA is much more expensive in terms of run time and memory, and requires
special timing libraries, which is often too high cost to pay for design houses and foundries.

The SOCV analysis feature is available only for Tempus-XL (TPS200) license. For more
details on licensing, refer to “Product and Licensing Information” chapter.

4.3.4.2 Introduction to SOCV

Statistical OCV (SOCV) is a new analysis technique that provides for a good compromise
between the run time and accuracy for modeling variation.

SOCV computes the impact of local process variations on the delay and slew of each
instance in the design at a given global variation corner. SOCV uses one parameter in SSTA
mode. This single parameter models local cell variations. Similar to SSTA, SOCV propagates
the sigma of arrival and required times through the timing graph, and then computes

November 2023 170 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

statistical characteristics of slack at all timing pins. Modeling on-chip variations in terms of a
single variable is fast, yet it yields better accuracy than modeling the variations as derating
factors.

For accurate SOCV analysis, a special library data is required. It includes arc-level absolute
variations of cell delays, output transitions, and timing checks as functions of input slew and
load. Since SOCV is able to accurately compute the delay and slew variation on each
instance, it solves the two main limitations of simpler methods: (i) cases where delay is close
to zero while delay variation is not, and (ii) impact of input slew variations on delay.

SOCV analysis is currently available in the Cadence Tempus Timing Solution for sign-off
timing analysis and timing closure.

4.3.4.3 SOCV Data Flow

SOCV analysis requires only the addition of variation libraries to the typical timing sign-off and
closure configuration. Variation data can be provided either as a Cadence SOCV library or as
Liberty Variation Format (LVF) library. Tempus fully supports both library formats including
modeling for variation on delay, transition, and constraints.

Figure 4-72 SOCV Data Flow

Reading Variation Library Data

Tempus provides both a single-corner and MMMC use model, which can accommodate
SOCV or LVF format variation libraries.

November 2023 171 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

In single-corner mode, you can use the following parameter to read Cadence SOCV format
libraries:
read_libs -socv_libs [list libA.socv libB.socv … ]
To read Liberty libraries with integrated LVF data, you should read the library in the same
manner as a non-LVF Liberty timing library.
read_libs [list libA-LVF.lib libB-LVF.lib …]

When working in an MMMC environment, you should specify the variation libraries as part of
the create_library_set command in your MMMC configuration file. To incorporate
Cadence SOCV format libraries:
create_library_set -name libsetMax
-timing [list
${library_path_1}/lib1.lib
${library_path_1}/lib2.lib
]
-socv [list
${socv_lib_path}/lib1.socv
${socv_lib_path}/lib2.socv
]

To use Liberty libraries with merged LVF data, simply load the Liberty libraries with the
create_library_set -timing parameter.

Using AOCV Derating Libraries with SOCV Analysis

Tempus allows the option of using AOCV libraries to provide variation modeling data for the
SOCV flow. This method can be used for initial experimentation and testing of the SOCV flow,
but lacks the accuracy required for signoff. Using AOCV as a source will provide only variation
on delay; no variation on transition or constraints.

To utilize the AOCV bootstrap method, you must set the timing attributes to control
transformation of AOCV data. These settings must be made before loading any timing library
data.

To enable the transformation process, use the following command:

set_db timing_library_infer_socv_from_aocv true
The AOCV derating libraries are characterized to a particular sigma value - without additional
guidance the transformation process will consider the AOCV library to be at 3-sigma. To
define the characterization sigma of the AOCV libraries, you can make the following setting:
set_db timing_library_scale_aocv_to_socv_to_n_sigma 4.5

You should specify reading the AOCV libraries in the same way as for normal AOCV analysis.

For single-corner mode, use the following command:

November 2023 172 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

read_libs -aocv_libs {myLib.aocv …}

For a MMMC environment, you can make the following settings:
create_library_set -name libsetMax
-timing [list
${library_path_1}/lib1.lib
${library_path_1}/lib2.lib
]
-aocv [list
${aocv_lib_path}/lib1.aocv
${aocv_lib_path}/lib2.aocv
]

4.3.4.4 SOCV Analysis

The SOCV analysis is essentially an optimized, single parameter statistical analysis, that is
built on the underlying Tempus SSTA analysis engine. From a user-interface point of view, the
software is able to present results in terms of discrete values for delays, arrivals, and slacks.
The interface can also show statistical representation of data.

Enabling SOCV Analysis

The SOCV analysis can be enabled using the timing_analysis_socv attribute, as shown
below:
set_db timing_analysis_socv true timing_analysis_type ocv
timing_analysis_cppr both

Configuring SOCV Max Operation

During arrival and required timing propagation, timing data values are represented
concurrently by statistical mean and sigma values. At the output of multi-input gates, the
statistical arrival times must be merged in a conservative operation. There are several options
for controlling the statistical Max operation.

November 2023 173 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-73 SOCV Max Operation

Selection of the Max operation can be controlled by making the following setting:
set_db timing_socv_statistical_min_max_mode mean_and_three_sigma_bounded
In this mode, the worst-case calculations of mean value and standard deviation are
performed separately.

4.3.4.5 SOCV Analysis Reporting

Reports in SOCV analysis mode will, by default, present timing data in discrete numbers
rather than as statistical quantities. If desired, the timing report can be configured to report
the statistical mean and sigma of the various timing data. The format of the timing report can
be customized by a combination of global settings and report_timing –fields options.

All the timing calculations are performed in the statistical domain. For example, adding delays
along a path to determine an arrival time calculation of slack-based on subtraction of arrival
and required times. Discrete representations of these values are computed as mean +
n*sigma – where n is typically 3.0.

Path Reporting With Discrete Values

The default timing report is configured to report timing quantities as discrete numbers rather
than as statistical quantities. The report_timing fields: slew, delay, and arrival will still report
discrete numeric values.

November 2023 174 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

As a result of calculating arrival times in the statistical realm, adding the current delay to the
previous arrival will generally not add up exactly to the next arrival time in the report:

The statistical mean and sigma representation of timing data is converted to discrete values
by the formula: mean + n-sigma, where n is a user-specifiable value. To control the sigma
multiplier, you can use the set_socv_reporting_nsigma_multiplier command. This
command supports n-sigma specification per view per setup/hold combination.

To apply sigma multiplier to the specified view in setup mode, use the following command:
set_socv_reporting_nsigma_multiplier -setup 2.5 -view std_max_setup

Path Reporting with Statistical Data

The report_timing command now supports additional statistical report fields when
operating in SOCV mode.
■ The delay_mean and delay_sigma fields provide statistical data for each timing arc
■ The slew_mean and slew_sigma fields provide data for transitions
■ The arrival_mean and arrival_sigma fields provide the statistical information for arrival
timing

The conversion of statistical quantities in the report to discrete values is computed by:
■ New mean is the sum of the means: µ3 = µ1 +µ2

November 2023 175 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ New sigma is the root-sum-squared of sigmas:  3 =  1^2 +  2^2

Summary Section Reporting

The summary section of the report_timing report is where the final arrival and required
times are calculated, and the path slack is determined. Other quantities such as CPPR,
Uncertainty, and Setup/Hold checks values are also accounted in this section’s calculations.
Like the detailed path report, all calculations are initially performed using statistical arithmetic
of the mean and sigma values. The discrete representations of these values are reported
based on the via mean +n-sigma conversion.

By default, the report_timing command output will display discrete representations of the
data in the summary section of the report.

MET (1.399 ns) Setup Check with Pin f0/CK->D

View: setup_analysis_view
Group: master
Startpoint: (F) f0/CK
Clock: (F) master
Endpoint: (F) f0/D
Clock: (F) master
N-Sigma: 3.000
Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 3.000 1.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 (0.000, 0.000) 0.000 (0.000, 0.000)
Net Latency:+ 0.067 (0.072, 0.002) (P) 0.098 (0.093, 0.002) (P)
Arrival:= 3.067 (3.072, 0.002) 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)
Setup:- 0.237 (0.237, 0.000)
Cppr Adjust:+ 0.028 (0.021, 0.002)
Required Time:= 2.852 (2.856, 0.002)
Launch Clock:= 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)

November 2023 176 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Data Path:+ 0.365 (0.345, 0.006)

Slack:= 1.399 (1.418, 0.006)

To enable the display of related statistical representation of data in the summary section, you
can set the following attribute to true:
timing_report_enable_verbose_ssta_mode

With this setting, additional details will be added to the report_timing summary section.
The current “n” value for n-sigma conversion is shown, along with the mean and sigma
components for each data value.

Path 1: MET (1.399 ns) Setup Check with Pin f0/CK->D

View: setup_analysis_view
Group: master
Startpoint: (F) f0/CK
Clock: (F) master
Endpoint: (F) f0/D
Clock: (F) master
N-Sigma: 3.000

Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 3.000 1.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 (0.000, 0.000) 0.000 (0.000, 0.000)
Net Latency:+ 0.067 (0.072, 0.002) (P) 0.098 (0.093, 0.002) (P)
Arrival:= 3.067 (3.072, 0.002) 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)
Setup:- 0.237 (0.237, 0.000)
Cppr Adjust:+ 0.028 (0.021, 0.002)
Required Time:= 2.852 (2.856, 0.002)
Launch Clock:= 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)
Data Path:+ 0.365 (0.345, 0.006)
Slack:= 1.399 (1.418, 0.006)

Sample Initialization and Configuration Scripts

Single-Corner Use Model (non-MMMC) - SOCV Native Libraries

set_db timing_socv_statistical_min_max_mode three_sigma_bounded
set_socv_reporting_nsigma_multiplier -setup 2.5
set_db timing_report_enable_verbose_ssta_mode true
set timing_report_fields {pin edge cell transition load \
delay_mean delay_sigma delay \
arrival_mean arrival_sigma arrival}
read_libs ${LIB_DIR}/standard.lib
read_lib -socv_libs [list ${LIB_DIR}/socv/standard.socv]
read_netlist ./test.v
init_design
read_sdc ./test.sdc
set_db timing_analysis_socv true timing_analysis_cppr both
report_timing

November 2023 177 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Single-Corner Use Model (non-MMMC) - LVF Native Libraries

set_db timing_socv_statistical_min_max_mode three_sigma_bounded
set_socv_reporting_nsigma_multiplier -setup 2.5
set_db timing_report_enable_verbose_ssta_mode true
set_db timing_report_fields {pin edge cell transition load \
delay_mean delay_sigma delay \
arrival_mean arrival_sigma arrival}
read_libs ${LIB_DIR}/standard-lvf.lib
read_netlist ./test.v
init_design
read_sdc ./test.sdc
set_db timing_analysis_socv true timing_analysis_cppr both
report_timing

Single-Corner Use Model (non-MMMC) - AOCV Bootstrap Mode

When running in AOCV bootstrap mode, load the AOCV libraries. Before loading any library
information, you must ensure that the required timing library attributes have been set.
set_db timing_library_infer_socv_from_aocv true
set_db timing_library_scale_aocv_to_socv_to_n_sigma 3
set_db timing_socv_statistical_min_max_mode three_sigma_bounded
set_socv_reporting_nsigma_multiplier -setup 2.5
set_db timing_report_enable_verbose_ssta_mode true
set_db timing_report_fileds {pin edge cell transition load delay_mean delay_sigma
delay arrival_mean arrival_sigma arrival}
read_libs ${LIB_DIR}/standard.lib
read_libs -aocv_libs [list ${LIB_DIR}/aocv/standard.aocv]
read_netlist ./test.v
init_design
read_sdc ./test.sdc
set_db timing_analysis_socv true timing_analysis_cppr both
report_timing

MMMC Use Model Using Native SOCV or LVF Libraries

In MMMC configurations, library data is provided through a MMMC library set object, using
the create_library_set command.

In the following examples native SOCV or LVF format library is used to make changes in the
MMMC configuration file.
set_db timing_socv_statistical_min_max_mode three_sigma_bounded
set_socv_reporting_nsigma_multiplier -setup 2.5
set_db timing_report_enable_verbose_ssta_mode true
set_db timing_report_format {pin edge cell transition load \
delay_mean delay_sigma delay \
arrival_mean arrival_sigma arrival}

November 2023 178 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

read_mmmc ./file_name.tcl
read_netlist ./test.v
init_design
set_db timing_analysis_socv true timing_analysis_cppr both
report_timing

Common MMMC Initialization Script With Native SOCV or LVF

create_library_set -name libsetMax \
-timing [list ${library_path_1}/lib1.lib ${library_path_1}/lib2.lib ] \
-socv [list \
${socv_lib_path}/lib1.socv \
${socv_lib_path}/lib2.socv \
]

Portion of MMMC Configuration Script (viewDef.tcl) for Loading Native SOCV

Libraries
create_library_set -name libsetMax \
-timing [list \
${library_path_1}/lib1-lvf.lib \
${library_path_1}/lib2-lvf.lib \
] \

Portion of MMMC Configuration Script (viewDef.tcl) For Loading AOCV Libraries

MMMC Use Model– AOCV Bootstrap Mode

When running in AOCV bootstrap mode, load the AOCV libraries. You must ensure that the
required timing library attributes are set before loading any library information.
set_db timing_library_infer_socv_from_aocv true
set_db timing_library_scale_aocv_to_socv_to_n_sigma 3
set_db timing_socv_statistical_min_max_mode three_sigma_bounded
set_socv_reporting_nsigma_multiplier -setup 2.5
set_db timing_report_enable_verbose_ssta_mode true
set_db timing_report_format {pin edge cell transition load \
delay_mean delay_sigma delay \
arrival_mean arrival_sigma arrival}
read_mmmc./viewDef.tcl
read_netlist ./test.v
init_design
set_db timing_analysis_socv true timing_analysis_cppr both
report_timing

MMMC Initialization Script for AOCV Bootstrap Mode

create_library_set -name libsetMax \
-timing [list \
${library_path_1}/lib1.lib \
${library_path_1}/lib2.lib \
] \
-aocv [list \
${aocv_lib_path}/lib1.aocv \

November 2023 179 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

${aocv_lib_path}/lib2.aocv \
]

Variation Library Formats

The Cadence SOCV library format and the standardized Liberty Variation Format (LVF)
provide essentially the same information: variation sigma for delay, transition, and constraints
per arc, indexed by load and slew.

Liberty Variation Format (LVF)

The detailed specifications of Liberty LVF for variation on delay and transition are available
from OpenSource Liberty Version 2013.12.
cell (cell_name) {
ocv_derate_distance_group: ocv_derate_group_name;
...
pin | bus | bundle (name) {
direction: input | output;
timing() {
...
ocv_sigma_cell_rise(delay_lu_template_name){
sigma_type: early | late | early_and_late;
index_1 ("float, ..., float");
index_2 ("float, ..., float");
values ( "float, ..., float", \
..., \
"float, ..., float");
}
ocv_sigma_cell_fall(delay_lu_template_name){
sigma_type: early | late | early_and_late;
index_1 ("float, ..., float");
index_2 ("float, ..., float");
values ( "float, ..., float", \
..., \
"float, ..., float");
}
...
} /* end of timing */
...
} /* end of pin */
...

November 2023 180 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.3.4.6 Sample Variation on Delay Template from Liberty 2013.12

Cadence SOCV Library Format (.socv)

The SOCV library format is as follows:

November 2023 181 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The following table describes the SOCV Library Attributes:

SOCV Library
Attribute Type Description
Attribute
object_type library | design Use library to indicate that the SOCV data is
with respect to library cells. Use design, for
design-specific data such as spatial derate
multipliers.
object_spec libName/ Specifies the internal library name and library
libCellName cell name that is consistent with a Liberty
timing library that has been loaded in the
session.

The SOCV library is considered an adjunct

library file which inherits certain attributes –
such as PVT from the master Liberty library.

Simple wildcard expressions are allowed for

both the libName and libCellName.
pin pinName The output or constrained pin name of the arc
being represented by this section.
pin_direction rise | fall The direction of the transition at the output pin.
related_pin pinName The related pin name of the arc being
represented by this section.
related_direction rise | fall The direction of the transition at the related
pin.
type delay | slew | Indicates whether the current arc section is
setup | hold | modeling variation on delay, transition, or
recovery| removal constraints.
when Liberty compliant The Liberty ‘when’ attribute string consistent
‘when’ attribute with the same timing arc in the Liberty library.
string
related_transition float+ Comma-separated list of transition indices on
the arc’s related_pin.
output_loading float+ Comma-separated list of output load indices.
constraint_transition float+ For constraint data, a comma-separated list of
transitions on the arc’s constrained pin.

November 2023 182 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

sigma 2-D table of float Table of variation data indexed by transition

and load.
late_distance float+ Comma-separated list of distance values.
late_distance_derate float+ 1-D table of spatial derating factors for
application to late paths.
early_distance float+ Comma-separated list of distance values.
early_distance_derate float+ 1-D table of spatial derating factors for
application to late paths.

4.3.4.7 Timing Behaviors in SOCV Analysis Mode

■ All timing constraint assertions (SDCs) are interpreted as a specification of the mean
value with a sigma value of 0.0.
■ By default, the set_timing_derate factors are applied to both the mean and sigma
values. You can use the -mean/-sigma parameters to apply separate derating to the
mean/sigma components of the delay.
■ The read_sdf values are interpreted as annotations to the mean value – the sigma
value is 0.0.
■ The delay values written out by write_sdf are the mean + n-sigma representation. If
the selected analysis type is SOCV, you can use the -no_variation parameter to
export the SDF delay and check values without including the variation component.
■ All timing reports are in terms of the mean + n-sigma discrete transformation of the value.
■ The report_delay_calculation command by default reports the mean component
of delay.

4.3.4.8 Specifying Statistical Via Variation File

You can specify a via variation file for modeling via variation. The file includes all the via layer
names so that VIA resistance in SPEF can be mapped to their own variation multipliers. For
a single corner design, use the -via_variation_file parameter of the read_spef or
read_parasitics command.

For MMMC designs, specify the file using the -via_variation_file parameter of the
create_rc_corner orupdate_rc_corner command.

You can specify a different via variation file for each RC corner. The syntax is provided below:

November 2023 183 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

read_spef/read_parasitics

-rc_corner rcCornerName \

-via_variation_file viaVariationFileName

create_rc_corner

-rc_corner rcCornerName1 \

-via_variation_file viaVariationFileName1

update_rc_corner

-rc_corner rcCornerName2 \

-via_variation_file viaVariationFileName2

4.3.4.9 Advanced Timing Tcl Scripting in SOCV Analysis Mode

The following properties are added to the timing_arc object and can be specified using the
get_property command:
■ delay_mean_max_fall
■ delay_mean_max_rise
■ delay_mean_min_fall
■ delay_mean_min_rise
■ delay_sigma_max_fall
■ delay_sigma_max_rise
■ delay_sigma_min_fall
■ delay_sigma_min_rise

The following properties are added to the pin object and can be queried using the
get_property command:
■ arrival_mean_max_fall
■ arrival_mean_max_rise
■ arrival_mean_min_fall
■ arrival_mean_min_rise
■ arrival_sigma_max_fall

November 2023 184 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ arrival_sigma_max_rise
■ arrival_sigma_min_fall
■ arrival_sigma_min_rise
■ slack_mean_max
■ slack_mean_max_fall
■ slack_mean_max_rise
■ slack_mean_min
■ slack_mean_min_fall
■ slack_mean_min_rise
■ slack_sigma_max
■ slack_sigma_max_fall
■ slack_sigma_max_rise
■ slack_sigma_min
■ slack_sigma_min_fall
■ slack_sigma_min_rise
■ slew_mean_max_fall
■ slew_mean_max_rise
■ slew_mean_min_fall
■ slew_mean_min_rise
■ slew_sigma_max_fall
■ slew_sigma_max_rise
■ slew_sigma_min_fall
■ slew_sigma_min_rise

November 2023 185 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.4 Path-Based Analysis

4.4.1 Overview on page 187
4.4.2 GBA vs PBA Comparison on page 187
4.4.3 Reporting in Path-Based Analysis on page 187
4.4.4 Path-Based Analysis Reporting Models on page 189
4.4.5 Path-Based Analysis Essence on page 191

November 2023 186 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.4.1 Overview
Static Timing Analysis (STA) software by default uses a pessimistic algorithm for timing, which
is based on the worst slew propagation (slew merging), referred to as graph-based analysis
(GBA). In GBA mode, the software considers both the worst arrival and the worst slew in a
path during timing analysis, even if the worst slew is corresponding to a input pin
different than the relevant pin for the current path. This gives a pessimistic result.

Path-Based Analysis (PBA) involves re-timing the components of a timing path based on the
actual slew that is propagated in this path. This technique primarily aims to remove the
pessimism that is introduced due to slew merging at various nodes in the design when graph-
based analysis is run (represented in timing graph as nodes).

4.4.2 GBA vs PBA Comparison

When path-based analysis is run, the slew merging is not done and the actual slew on the
timing arc of path is propagated. Thus, path-based analysis re-calculates timing in a timing
path without considering side path slews that might otherwise affect the arrival times and slew
values used in the calculation.

To understand slew merging in GBA, consider an example of a AND gate below.

Here, it is assumed that for any input slew, the output slew is 25% more than the input slew.
So for a slew of 100ps at input A, corresponding output slew at Z is 125ps. Similarly, if slew
at B is 500ps, then slew at Z is 625ps. In GBA for calculating delay and slew propagation
through this AND gate, the worse input slew (through B) is always considered, irrespective of
the fact that the path is through pin A or B. But in PBA, the actual slew through the concerned
pin is accounted for in delay calculation and slew propagation.

4.4.3 Reporting in Path-Based Analysis

Commands for PBA Reporting

You can use the following commands to report violations in PBA mode:
report_constraint –retime <option>
report_timing –retime <option>

November 2023 187 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Note: To generate the analysis summary file, you can use the following options with the
report_timing command - to give high value of nworst and max_path to get good
coverage. The report summary will be stored in the pba.summ file.
report_timing -retime path_slew_propagation -max_paths <> -nworst <> -path_type
summary_slack_only -<late/early> -analysis_summary_file pba.summ

Sample Report Showing GBA vs PBA Timing Results

The following example demonstrates GBA vs PBA timing results. Given below is the GBA
report through “A” pin of a AND gate “ua1”:
Path 1: MET (1.399 ns) Setup Check with Pin f0/CK->D
View: setup_analysis_view
Group: master
Startpoint: (F) f0/CK
Clock: (F) master
Endpoint: (F) f0/D
Clock: (F) master
N-Sigma: 3.000

Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 3.000 1.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 (0.000, 0.000) 0.000 (0.000, 0.000)
Net Latency:+ 0.067 (0.072, 0.002) (P) 0.098 (0.093, 0.002) (P)
Arrival:= 3.067 (3.072, 0.002) 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)

Setup:- 0.237 (0.237, 0.000)

Cppr Adjust:+ 0.028 (0.021, 0.002)
Required Time:= 2.852 (2.856, 0.002)
Launch Clock:= 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)
Data Path:+ 0.365 (0.345, 0.006)
Slack:= 1.399 (1.418, 0.006)

#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Load Trans Pin Delay Arrival Cell Arc Required
# (pf) (ns) (ns) (ns) Time
# (ns)
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.005 0.010 f0/CK - 1.098 (arrival) CK 2.511
0.005 0.065 f0/Q 0.280 1.373 DFFX2 CK->Q 2.772
0.003 0.009 p1/Y 0.088 1.458 BUFH_X10M_A9TL_C20 A->Y 2.856
0.003 0.009 f0/D 0.000 1.458 DFFX2 - 2.856
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

The slew through “A” pin of the AND gate “ua1” is 0.093ns and through B pin is 1.068ns (not
shown in the above report). During GBA, the software performs slew merging and uses
1.068ns as the slew through “A” pin. Hence, a lot of pessimism is added in this analysis, which
can be removed if PBA is used.

To enable PBA mode, you can use the following command:

report_timing -retime path_slew_propagation

November 2023 188 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Given below is the result of PBA analysis of the above path. The highlighted red numbers
show how PBA numbers remove pessimism induced due to slew merging in GBA.
Note: To report re-timed numbers, you can add retime_slew, retime_delay, and
retime_incr_delay options to the timing_report_fields attribute or use the with the
report_timing -fields parameter.

Path 1: MET (1.400 ns) Setup Check with Pin f0/CK->D

Retime Analysis: Data Path-Slew SOCV WP EWM
View: setup_analysis_view
Group: master
Startpoint: (F) f0/CK
Clock: (F) master
Endpoint: (F) f0/D
Clock: (F) master
N-Sigma: 3.000

Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 3.000 1.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 (0.000, 0.000) 0.000 (0.000, 0.000)
Net Latency:+ 0.067 (0.072, 0.002) (P) 0.098 (0.093, 0.002) (P)
Arrival:= 3.067 (3.072, 0.002) 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)

Setup:- 0.237 (0.237, 0.000)

Cppr Adjust:+ 0.028 (0.021, 0.002)
Required Time:= 2.852 (2.856, 0.002)
Launch Clock:= 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)
Data Path:+ 0.363 (0.344, 0.006)
Slack:= 1.400 (1.420, 0.006)
Slack(original):= 1.399 (1.418, 0.006)

#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Load Trans Pin Delay Arrival Cell Arc Required
# (pf) (ns) (ns) (ns) Time
# (ns)
#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.005 0.010 f0/CK - 1.098 (arrival) CK 2.513
0.005 0.065 f0/Q 0.280 1.373 DFFX2 CK->Q 2.773
0.003 0.009 p1/Y 0.088 1.457 BUFH_X10M_A9TL_C20 A->Y 2.858
0.003 0.009 f0/D 0.000 1.457 DFFX2 - 2.858
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: The timing_disable_retime_clock_path_slew_propagation attribute

controls whether retiming is done for both data as well as clock paths.

4.4.4 Path-Based Analysis Reporting Models

There are two types of path-based analysis reporting models:
■ Regular
■ Exhaustive

November 2023 189 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Regular

In the regular model of PBA reporting, you can use the report_timing command, as
shown below:
report_timing –retime <retime type> –max_paths ‘N‘ –nworst ‘M‘ –max_slack ‘S’

Tempus performs the following steps:

1. Collect top ‘N’ critical paths with GBA slack less than ‘S’ with maximum of ‘M’ paths per
endpoint picked.
2. Perform PBA on the paths from the above step.
3. Report paths with PBA_Slack < ‘S’, sorted based on GBA slacks.

Exhaustive

Due to the impact of path-based analysis, slack ordering of paths can be changed due to path
re-calculation. The most critical path before re-calculation may not be the most critical path
after re-calculation. This is the reason why exhaustive path-based analysis is performed,
which aims at reporting the true worst path after PBA is performed by examining all the
violating paths in the design.

You can perform exhaustive reporting by using the report_timing -retime_mode

exhaustive parameter.

To ensure optimal path search runtime, you can use the following setting to limit the worst
paths:
set_db timing_pba_exhaustive_path_nworst_limit 'L' (default: 10K)
Tempus performs the steps given below, when you use the following command:
report_timing –retime <retime type> –retime_mode exhaustive –max_paths ‘N’ –nworst
‘M’ –max_slack 0

1. Collect top ‘N’ GBA violating endpoints (max slack less than zero).
2. Perform PBA on top ‘L’ nworst paths for each endpoint in the above step. Whenever the
Lth path on an endpoint is a PBA candidate (GBA violating), Tempus will issue a warning
indicating the lack of full coverage on that end point.
3. Report top ‘N’ paths from step 2 above with PBA_Slack less than 0 - sorted by PBA slack
with maximum of ‘M’ paths per endpoint are picked.

November 2023 190 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.4.5 Path-Based Analysis Essence

The following sections describe the impact of PBA when used with SI and AOCV.

AOCV with PBA

The stage count in AOCV (advanced on-chip variation) is calculated differently in GBA and
PBA, and hence AOCV derates differ in GBA and PBA mode. Further, the
timing_aocv_analysis_mode attribute control in GBA and PBA differs based on the
selected mode. The two methods of AOCV analysis with PBA are:
report_timing –retime aocv
and
report_timing –retime aocv_path_slew_propagation

For more information on AOCV, refer to the Timing Analysis Modes chapter.

Signal Integrity with PBA

PBA has significant impact when performing noise analysis. When PBA is enabled, the actual
timing window of the victim is computed. The attacker timing window is always taken from
GBA. In this way pessimism in SI can be reduced.

Below is sample report which shows change in incr_delay (shown under retime_incr_delay
column) in PBA. For more information, refer to the Signal Integrity Delay and Glitch Analysis.
Path 1: MET (1.399 ns) Setup Check with Pin f0/CK->D
View: setup_analysis_view
Group: master
Startpoint: (F) f0/CK
Clock: (F) master
Endpoint: (F) f0/D
Clock: (F) master
N-Sigma: 3.000
Capture Launch
Clock Edge:+ 3.000 1.000
Src Latency:+ 0.000 (0.000, 0.000) 0.000 (0.000, 0.000)
Net Latency:+ 0.067 (0.072, 0.002) (P) 0.098 (0.093, 0.002) (P)
Arrival:= 3.067 (3.072, 0.002) 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)

Setup:- 0.237 (0.237, 0.000)

Cppr Adjust:+ 0.028 (0.021, 0.002)
Required Time:= 2.852 (2.856, 0.002)
Launch Clock:= 1.098 (1.093, 0.002)
Data Path:+ 0.365 (0.345, 0.006)
Slack:= 1.399 (1.418, 0.006)

November 2023 191 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
#Pin Cell Trans Trans Delay Delay Arrival Incr Retime
# (ns) Retime (ns) Retime (ns) Delay Incr
# Delay
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
f0/CK (arrival) 0.010 0.000 - - 1.098 - 0.000
f0/Q DFFX2 0.065 0.000 0.280 0.280 1.373 0.000 0.000
p1/Y BUFH_X10M_A9TL_C20 0.009 0.000 0.088 0.088 1.458 0.000 0.000
f0/D DFFX2 0.009 0.000 0.000 -0.005 1.458 0.006 0.000
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

November 2023 192 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.5 Analysis Of Simultaneous Switching Inputs - SSI

4.5.1 Overview on page 194
4.5.2 Implementation on page 195
4.5.3 Reporting in SSI Mode on page 197
4.5.4 Considerations for Path-Based Analysis (PBA) on page 198

November 2023 193 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.5.1 Overview
Multiple input cells that have an underlying transistor topology with parallel P or N device
pulling the output up or down respectively, can exhibit accelerated delays when multiple
inputs are switching in the same direction. If a secondary input switches within a specified
delay window with respect to the primary transition, the delay from the initial transition will be
smaller.

The example below shows a NAND gate implementation with parallel PMOS pull-up
transistors, and a NOR gate with parallel NMOS pull-down devices:

Figure 4-74 NAND gate implementation

Simultaneous falling transitions at the NAND gate’s A and B inputs will accelerate the rising
output transition. Conversely, rising transitions of the NOR gate’s A and B inputs within a
specified proximity window will accelerate the output falling delay.

Current characterization approaches typically consider a single-input switching. In real-world

scenarios where multiple inputs of a cell can be switching at the same time, the delay of a
particular arc can be substantially less.

Faster delays on early paths increase pessimism. Guard-banding approaches can be used
to derate the early paths – but doing this globally can lead to overall increased pessimism
over the whole design.

With SSI enabled, simultaneous switching effects can be detected by the software and
specific SSI derating factors provided by the user can be applied in those cases. When these
timing-guided derating assertions are applied, the overall guard-band derating can be
reduced – resulting in an overall less pessimistic analysis.

November 2023 194 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.5.2 Implementation
The implementation of the simultaneous switching input (SSI) derating functionality involves
additional syntax provided to the set_timing_derate constraint, library properties for
defining the switching sensitivity delay window, and a set of heuristics of determining which
input phase arrival times should be considered as interacting, and therefore, subject to
possible SSI derating.

SSI Derating Command Syntax

The SSI derating is controlled by the set_timing_derate –input_switching parameter.

You can use this parameter to configure SSI derating on specific library cells when they are
analyzed on early data paths, typically, the data paths for Hold analysis. For example,
set_timing_derate 0.5 -fall -data -early -input_switching [get_db lib_cells NOR2X]

By using additional set_timing_derate options, you can configure the derate behavior for
different delay corners or operating voltage domains:
set_timing_derate 0.5 -fall -data -early
-delay_corner tt_800 -power_domain pdDefault
-input_switching [get_db_lib_cells NOR2*]

Controlling the SSI Proximity Window

In order for a secondary signal transition to affect the delay from the initial input switching, it
must occur within a certain proximity of the first input’s transition. By default, the proximity
window is equivalent to the early input-to-output delay from the first transitioning input pin.

In the diagram below, pin A is the first input to switch. For a transition at B to affect the delay
from A to Y, it must transition after A has transitioned, but before Y has completed its transition
to the new state.

November 2023 195 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-75 SSI Proximity Window

The switching proximity window can be configured by utilizing library-level user-defined

properties.

The k_input_switching_window_rise and k_input_switching_window_fall

properties need to be first defined using the following syntax:
define_property -type float -object_type lib k_input_switching_window_rise
define_property -type float -object_type lib k_input_switching_window_fall

You can then set the proximity factor on a per library basis:
set_property [get_libs slow] k_input_switching_window_rise 1.1
set_property [get_libs slow] k_input_switching_window_fall 1.1

The property definitions and settings are preserved persistently in the SDC file if the design
is saved.

Heuristics for Selecting Interacting Clock Phases

Based on the clocking relationships of the signals arriving on the input pins of a cell
configured for SSI, the software will determine if the SSI derate should always be applied,
never be applied, or applied based on the evaluation of the proximity window. Conservative
analysis requires applying the SSI derate, unless it can be shown that the inputs are not
interacting. The following table summarizes the situations where SSI should be applied or not
applied:

Condition SSI Behavior Notes

Data are derived from Evaluate SSI switching window
synchronous clock phases of the
same frequency and phase

November 2023 196 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Data are derived from Apply SSI derate always

synchronous clock phases of
different frequency or different
phase
Data are derived from physically- Do not evaluate SSI
exclusive clocks
Data are derived from logically- Evaluate switching window if
exclusive clocks clocks are same period, phase,
and are synchronous
Data are derived from Apply SSI derate always Applied if an
asynchronous clocks asynchronous clock is
present on any input
Data arrival on same pin from Evaluate switching window
multiple clocks that are based on worst-casing of arrival
synchronous, have the same times
period, and phase
Data arrival from two physically Checks for each clock are done
exclusive clocks separately between the inputs to
see if a non-exclusive
relationship exists between
clocks of one input pin versus
clocks of the other

4.5.3 Reporting in SSI Mode

All the deratings applied via the set_timing_derate command are reflected in the “User
Derate” column of the detailed report_timing report output.

In the example below, a nominal derate on early data paths is set as 0.90. An additional
simultaneous switching derate of 0.50 is also specified. The User Derate column will show a
cumulative derate of 0.45 if the simultaneous input switching condition has been met.
set_timing_derate 0.90 –early –data –fall
set_timing_derate 0.50 -early -data -fall \
-input_switching [get_db_lib_cells NOR2X1]

November 2023 197 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

In the timing report shown above, the delay from U_W/A to U_W/Y is subject to SSI derating;
it received the full, cumulative derate of 0.45.

4.5.4 Considerations for Path-Based Analysis (PBA)

In path-based analysis (PBA), a timing path that is found by graph-based analysis (GBA), is
re-timed for increased accuracy. Re-timing can remove pessimism due to slew merging
effects, AOCV stage counts, and so on. During re-timing, only the specific pin-to-pin path of
interest gets a new, focused analysis. If the timing path to one pin of an SSI sensitive gate is
retimed, its arrival time (for an early data path) may come later than that in GBA analysis. The
arrival times of other inputs, which are still based on GBA timing can result in SSI derates
being applied in PBA mode where they are not in GBA, or vice-versa. To preserve GBA
bounding of PBA results, and to ensure conservative analysis, SSI derating will be applied to
a given instance based on the GBA handling. If SSI derates are applied in GBA mode, then
they will also be applied in PBA.

November 2023 198 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.6 Waveform Aware and Rail Swing Checks

4.6.1 Overview on page 200
4.6.2 Rail Swing Checks - An Overview on page 200
4.6.3 Rail Swing Reporting on page 201
4.6.4 Waveform Aware Pulse Width Checks - An Overview on page 201
4.6.5 Waveform Aware Pulse Width Checks Reporting on page 202

November 2023 199 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.6.1 Overview
In high-frequency designs, clock pulses may get distorted or die down during propagation
through the clock tree network. This may be due to slow slews or long waveform tails causing
rise/fall waveforms to not reach the VDD/VSS levels before the opposing transition arrives.

The minimum pulse width checks may not capture such failures, as these checks work based
on the arrivals at delay threshold, so the waveform shapes are not considered.

The Tempus software has a capability to perform the following checks to identify and report
such potential clock distortions:
■ Rail Swing Checks
■ Waveform aware Pulse Width Checks

These are described below.

4.6.2 Rail Swing Checks - An Overview

The Tempus software provides detailed transition waveforms at each pin, which can be used
for performing rail swing checks. This data allows the software to report violations on all the
clock network pins, where the transition does not reach the ~VDD/VSS levels.

The pulse at any pin is formed by aligning the actual rise and fall transition waveforms over
the pulse width (pw), that is computed using regular minimum pulse width checks. The
intersection of these rise and fall transition waveforms defines the rail voltage achieved (v).
The achieved rail voltage (v) is then checked against the user-defined threshold (vt) to check
the violations.

This is illustrated in the diagram below.

November 2023 200 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Use Model

The following attributes can be used to specify the voltage thresholds as a ratio of the VDD:
■ timing_rail_swing_checks_high_voltage_threshold
■ timing_rail_swing_checks_low_voltage_threshold

For example,
set timing_rail_swing_checks_high_voltage_threshold 0.95
set timing_rail_swing_checks_low_voltage_threshold 0.05

4.6.3 Rail Swing Reporting

The rail swing violations can be reported using the following command:
report_constraint -check_type rail_swing -all_violators
The following example shows a sample output report, where all the values are specified as
ratio of [VDD-VSS] supply voltages:
-------------------------------------------------------------------
RAIL SWING VIOLATIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Pin Required Actual Slack Clock View
Signal Level Signal Level Name
-------------------------------------------------------------------
inst8/A (low) 0.05 0.072 -0.022 CLK1 view1
f4/CP (low) 0.05 0.065 -0.015 CLK2 view1
inst1/A (low) 0.05 0.056 -0.006 CLK2 view2
ff2/CP (high) 0.95 0.938 -0.012 CLK1 view2
inst1/A (high) 0.95 0.946 -0.004 CLK1 view1
-------------------------------------------------------------------

4.6.4 Waveform Aware Pulse Width Checks - An Overview

Traditional pulse width checks only check the pulse widths at delay measurement thresholds
and therefore do not provide any information on the waveform shape. To control waveform
shape degradation on clock networks, the Tempus software provides waveform aware pulse

November 2023 201 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

width checks to report minimum pulse width violations on user-specified voltage levels, and
not just delay measurement thresholds. These checks can be applied on clock network pins.

Use Model

You can use the following attributes to specify voltage levels for waveform aware pulse width
checks:
■ timing_waveform_aware_pulse_width_checks_high_voltage_level
■ timing_waveform_aware_pulse_width_checks_high_voltage_level

For example,
set timing_waveform_aware_pulse_width_checks_high_voltage_level 0.75
set timing_waveform_aware_pulse_width_checks_low_voltage_level 0.25

You can use the following command to specify the required pulse width at a user-defined
voltage level:
set_min_pulse_width -waveform_aware_type {absolute | source_width_ratio}
For example,
set_min_pulse_width 0.1 [get_clocks clk1] -waveform_aware_type absolute

To reset these settings, you can use the reset_min_pulse_width command.

4.6.5 Waveform Aware Pulse Width Checks Reporting

To report waveform-aware pulse width checks, you can use the following command:
report_min_pulse_width -waveform_aware_type {regular | waveform_aware | both}
By default, the regular pulse width checks are reported.

November 2023 202 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The following command generates a report as shown below:

report_min_pulse_width -waveform_aware_type waveform_aware -pins FF1/CP -verbose

----------------------------------------------------------------------
Path 1: MET PulseWidth Check with Pin FF1/CP
Ending Clock Edge: FF1/CP (v) checked with trailing edge of 'clk'
Beginning Clock Edge: FF1/CP (^) triggered by leading edge of 'clk'
Other End Arrival Time 1.485000
+ Other End Arrival Time Adjustment -0.05
- Arrival Time Adjustment 0.06
- Pulse Width 0.047190
+ Phase Shift 0.000000
+ CPPR Adjustment 0.032300
= Required Time 1.420110
- Arrival Time 1.013900
= Slack Time 0.346210

The "Arrival Time Adjustment" and "Other End Arrival Time Adjustment" details in the above
report denote the offsets measured over the actual launching transition waveforms and
capturing transition waveforms respectively, as shown below:

These offsets are the time differences between the delay measurement threshold and user-
specified voltage level measured over the actual transition waveforms. The traditional pulse
widths are adjusted by the computed offsets to obtain a width at the user-specified voltage
threshold.

November 2023 203 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.7 Set Instance Library Flow

4.7.1 Iinstance Library Flow Overview on page 205
4.7.2 MMMC set_instance_library Flow on page 205
4.7.3 MMMC Flow Script on page 206
4.7.4 Save and Restore MMMC set_instance_library Flow on page 208
4.7.5 Limitations of set_instance_library on page 209

November 2023 204 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.7.1 Iinstance Library Flow Overview

In MSV designs, if the power intent information is not available in the form of PGV, CPF, or
UPF, the Tempus software does not have the mechanism to bind the correct PVT library. For
this you can use the set_instance_library command to specify the library that you want
to bind to an instance.

In case of macros where different PVT libraries are available and none of those libraries
match with the PVT, the software will attempt to interpolate. You can use the
set_instance_library command to bind it with the closest PVT library.

In MSV designs that have PGV netlist, CPF, or UPF, where power intent information is
present, the set_instance_library command can be used on a handful of instances where
power intent is not correct and can bind it correctly. This feature is useful during the initial
design cycle.

4.7.2 MMMC set_instance_library Flow

Tempus requires timing libraries, netlist as input along with the other essential data required
for static timing analysis. In addition to all these, the MMMC flow requires ViewDefinition
template file. In this template file, you can define all the analysis views required,
corresponding RC corner, constraint mode and delay corner. When you specify the
set_instance_library command in the ViewDefinition file, it overrides the default binding
mechanism for a cell from the library set.

ViewDefinition Template

To apply the set_instance_library command in the MMMC flow, you need to create a file
with all the set_instance_library commands. For this you can use the
create_delay_corner -instance_library_file parameter.

For example,
create_delay_corner -instance_library_file <file1>
create_library_set -name complete_library_set \
-timing [list \
/icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/
NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf2_6_DSH_MP_CP/savedDB.dat/libs/mmmc/
C28SOI_SC_12_CORI_LL_ss28_0.90V_0.00V_m0.60V_0.60V_m40C.lib \
/icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/
NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf2_6_DSH_MP_CP/savedDB.dat/libs/mmmc/
C28SOI_SC_12_CORR_LL_ss28_0.90V_0.00V_m0.60V_0.60V_m40C.lib \
/icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/
NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf2_6_DSH_MP_CP/savedDB.dat/libs/mmmc/
C28SOI_SC_12_SHIFTPBP10_LR_ss28_0.90V_0.95V_m40C.lib \
/icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/

November 2023 205 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf2_6_DSH_MP_CP/savedDB.dat/libs/mmmc/
C32_EPM_EPOD_D12SWSG_LR_ss28_0.90V_m40C.lib \
/icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/
NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf2_6_DSH_MP_CP/savedDB.dat/libs/mmmc/
C32_SC_12_CORE_LL_ss28_0.90V_0.00V_m0.60V_0.60V_m40C.lib \
/icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/
NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf2_6_DSH_MP_CP/savedDB.dat/libs/mmmc/new.lib \
my.lib \
newcell.lib \ ]
create_op_cond -name opcond1 -library_file
/icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/
NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf1_4_DSH_MP_CP/savedDB.dat/libs/mmmc/
C28SOI_SC_12_CORI_LL_ss28_0.90V_0.00V_m0.60V_0.60V_m40C.lib -P 1.228 -V 0.9 -T -40
create_rc_corner -name min_corner
create_rc_corner -name max_corner
create_delay_corner -name slow_max\
-pg_net_voltages {[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected]}\
-library_set complete_library_set \
-opcond_library C28SOI_SC_12_CORI_LL \
-opcond opcond1 \
-rc_corner max_corner \
-instance_library_file sil.tcl
create_delay_corner -name fast_min\
-pg_net_voltages {[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected]}\
-library_set complete_library_set \
-opcond_library C28SOI_SC_12_CORI_LL \
-opcond opcond1 \ -rc_corner min_corner
create_constraint_mode -name func_mode\
-sdc_files\
[list /icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/
NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf2_6_DSH_MP_CP/pgv_data/mmmc/modes/func_mode/
func_mode.sdc]
create_analysis_view -name setup_func_m40 -constraint_mode func_mode -delay_corner
slow_max -latency_file /icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/
NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf2_6_DSH_MP_CP/pgv_data/mmmc/views/setup_func_m40/
latency.sdc
create_analysis_view -name hold_func_m40 -constraint_mode func_mode -delay_corner
fast_min -latency_file /icd/etsproject3/mgarg/aayhis/myur/MSV_DBS/
NW_PGV_paradime_st_ao_buffer_cpf2_6_DSH_MP_CP/pgv_data/mmmc/views/hold_func_m40/
latency.sdc
set_analysis_view -setup [list setup_func_m40 ] -hold [list hold_func_m40]

4.7.3 MMMC Flow Script

The MMMC flow sample script is shown below:
set_multi_cpu_usage -localCpu 16
set timing_library_read_without_power false
read_view_definition setup_func_m40_viewDefinition.tcl
read_verilog pg-explicit.v
set_top_module top

November 2023 206 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

report_instance_library -inst { iP/dff1 iP/and1} > ril_test.rpt

The library that is used for binding instances with the set_instance_library command
must be an active library loaded in the session via active library set defined with the
create_library_set command.

The following command is used in the sil.tcl:

set_instance_library -library newcell.lib -instance {iP/and1 iP/dff1}

You can use the following command to verify whether the instance of the cell is bound with
the library specified with the set_instance_library command:
report_instance_library -inst {iP/and1 iP/dff1} > ril_test.rpt

The output of the report_instance_library command is given below:

Instance : iP/dff1
Cell : C12T32_LL_SDFPQX8
Analysis View : setup_func_m40
Power Domain : Default
Library/Libset : new3cell_C32_SC_12_CORE_LL/complete_library_set
Library File : /it/sjclapa06p5_scratch01/aayhis/expire_2021_03_30/
scratch_dec/SIL_DOC/sil_view/doc_case/newcell.lib
User Setting : True
Op Cond : P->1.228000, V->0.900000, T->-40.000000 (new3cell_C32_SC_12_CORE_LL/
%NOM_PVT)
Cell Type : gateCell
Instance : iP/and1
Cell : C12T32_LL_AND2X8
Analysis View : setup_func_m40
Power Domain : Default
Library/Libset : new3cell_C32_SC_12_CORE_LL/complete_library_set
Library File : /it/sjclapa06p5_scratch01/aayhis/expire_2021_03_30/
scratch_dec/SIL_DOC/sil_view/doc_case/newcell.lib
User Setting : True
Op Cond : P->1.228000, V->0.900000, T->-40.000000
(new3cell_C32_SC_12_CORE_LL/%NOM_PVT)
Cell Type : gateCell

The above output clearly shows the following:

1. The library binding was applied for the instance iP/and1 and iP/dff1 with the help of
the set_instance_library command and the library file reported in the
report_instance_library output is the same as that applied.

2. User setting: True indicates that the set_instance_library command has been
applied.

November 2023 207 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.7.4 Save and Restore MMMC set_instance_library Flow

In the save and restore flow, the set_instance_library command used with the
create_delay_corner command in the viewDefinition file will be saved in the save
session directory.

Save Session Script

The save session sample script is shown below:

set_multi_cpu_usage -localCpu 16
set timing_library_read_without_power false
read_view_definition setup_func_m40_viewDefinition.tcl
read_verilog pg-explicit.v
set_top_module top
update_timing -full
save_design new_test.db

The set_instance_library command used in the above script is saved in the following
format:
set_instance_library \
-library \
" ${::IMEX::silLibVar}/mmmc/newcell.lib " \
-instance \
" iP/and1 \
iP/dff1 "

Restore Session Script

The restore session sample script is shown below:

source new_test.db
report_instance_library -inst { iP/and1 iP/dff1} > ril_restore1_test.rpt

Once the design has been restored from the saved session, the library binding that was
applied for the instance, using the set_instance_library command, in the saved session
script will be the same as in the restored session.

The output of the report_instance_library command after the restore session is shown
below:
Instance : iP/and1
Cell : C12T32_LL_AND2X8
Analysis View : setup_func_m40
Power Domain : Default

November 2023 208 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Library/Libset : new3cell_C32_SC_12_CORE_LL/complete_library_set
Library File : /it/sjclapa06p5_scratch01/aayhis/expire_2021_03_30/
scratch_dec/SIL_DOC/sil_view/doc_case/newcell.lib
User Setting : True
Op Cond : P->1.228000, V->0.900000, T->-40.000000
(new3cell_C32_SC_12_CORE_LL/%NOM_PVT)
Cell Type : gateCell
Instance : iP/dff1
Cell : C12T32_LL_SDFPQX8
Analysis View : setup_func_m40
Power Domain : Default
Library/Libset : new3cell_C32_SC_12_CORE_LL/complete_library_set
Library File : /it/sjclapa06p5_scratch01/aayhis/expire_2021_03_30/
scratch_dec/SIL_DOC/sil_view/doc_case/newcell.lib
User Setting : True
Op Cond : P->1.228000, V->0.900000, T->-40.000000
(new3cell_C32_SC_12_CORE_LL/%NOM_PVT)
Cell Type : gateCell

4.7.5 Limitations of set_instance_library

The voltage scaling is not supported in the set_instance_library command flow.

For example, if there are 4 libraries with different voltages in a design and you bind the
instance that is present in all the 4 libraries, then the set_instance_library command
binds with the first library only.
set_instance_library -library {L1 L2 L3 L4} -instance {i1}

In this example, the set_instance_library command will bind the instance i1 with the first
library that is L1.

November 2023 209 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.8 Inter Power Domain (IPD) Analysis

4.8.1 IPD Analysis Overview on page 211
4.8.2 IPD Analysis Flow on page 212
4.8.3 IPD Path Classification on page 212
4.8.4 Scope-Based IPD Analysis on page 214
4.8.5 Scope-Based IPD Analysis Flow on page 215
4.8.6 IPD Analysis - User Interface on page 216
4.8.7 IPD Analysis Reporting on page 219

November 2023 210 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.8.1 IPD Analysis Overview

The increase in the number of power domains in a design has become a challenging aspect
for designers. This has also led to a significant increase in the number of timing signoff
corners due to cross combinations of voltage corners that are needed to completely signoff
Inter-Power Domain (IPD) paths. For example, a design having two power domains PD1 and
PD2, each operating at 0.9v, 1.0v, 1.1v, may require 9 runs to signoff the IPD paths. This may
led to long cycle times and large compute requirements for timing signoff. Also, a larger part
of netlist may not belong to IPD paths being analyzed, which results in redundant analysis of
large parts of netlist that go through analysis in these IPD analysis runs.

Another important aspect of IPD analysis is that some of the timing constraints, like clock
frequency, can be different between the IPD analysis corners. Multiple frequencies per
domain require additional constraint coding, and increases the number of STA runs and
overall runtime/compute resource requirement.

To reduce the cycle time and computations required for IPD analysis, the Tempus software
provides the capability to run IPD analysis, where only IPD logic in the design can be
analyzed and timing reports only generate data relevant to that logic.

The Tempus IPD Analysis feature analyzes the IPD logic of the design efficiently. The reduced
capacity requirement per IPD run, also enables designers to employ CMMMC capability to
analyze various IPD voltage combinations with differing frequencies (or any timing
constraint).

Salient Features
The following are the main features of IPD analysis:
■ Focused analysis of IPD logic, yields runtime/memory efficiency
■ Enabled through IPD scope creation containing only IPD logic
■ Simplified UI to capture design operating voltage specification
■ Minimum/maximum bounded corner-based IPD scope creation, followed by CMMMC
IPD scope-based analysis
■ Automated exhaustive voltage combinations identification
■ Flexible IPD/DVFS constraint generation/specification
■ Automated CMMMC IPD setup creation and analysis
■ Supports CPF/IEEE-1801/PG-Verilog interface for power intent specification

November 2023 211 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

■ Flexible IPD-only path reporting

■ Tempus-ECO flow support

4.8.2 IPD Analysis Flow

The IPD analysis flow is given below:

Figure 4-76 IPD Analysis Flow

4.8.3 IPD Path Classification

The design logic classification is based on the IPD analysis performed on the power domain
crossing in the timing paths. The scenarios classified as IPD and non-IPD are described
below:
■ Data path crossing more than one power domain will always be considered as an IPD
path (irrespective of the power domains that the clock paths traverse, or the voltages on
the power domains that the data path traverses).
■ Launch and/or capture clock path (launch/capture clock path here refers to the path from
the clock source to start point/endpoint clock pin) crossing more than one power domain
will also be classified as IPD path when:

November 2023 212 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

❑ There is no common (CPPR) point on the clock path

❑ CPPR point has different transition
❑ Power domain transition occurs after the CPPR point of clock path

Figure 4-77 IPD Classification

The cases are not considered as IPD logic when:

■ There is no PD crossing on both clock and data path
■ Power domain transition occurs before the CPPR point of clock path when CPPR point
has the same transition

November 2023 213 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.8.4 Scope-Based IPD Analysis

The IPD analysis checks only the IPD logic in the design, which may be less than 10% of the
total design size. This reduced design is written out in the form of an IPD scope, during the
scope creation step of the flow. The reduced scope can then be loaded and analyzed for
exhaustive combination of voltage covering all the voltage signoff corners.

To address the pessimism with use of infinite timing windows (TW) and default slews for the
aggressors, a bounded corner approach is followed in the scope creation run. The Tempus
software automatically identifies the bounding minimum/maximum (the highest and lowest
voltage corners), for slew and timing window information.

Apart from the reduced netlist, the constraints, parasitics, slew, and timing window
information is stored in the scope. Optionally, the software can also store derate related
information in the scope.

Figure 4-78 Scope Based IPD Analysis

November 2023 214 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.8.5 Scope-Based IPD Analysis Flow

Figure 4-79 Scope Based IPD Analysis Flow

Consider the following illustration of scope-based IPD Analysis:

The design consists of 4 power domains each operating at 2 voltages. The Runs 1 and 16
form the traditional signoff corners, while Run 2-15 cover the IPD corners. To signoff, the
exhaustive combination of Run1-16 needs to be analyzed. The scope creation run which
involves full design analysis generates the minimum (Run 1) and maximum (Run16) bounded
corner IPD scope, which contains IPD logic marking, partial Verilog, partial SPEF, partial
constraints, slew, waveform, arrival windows, AOCV/TW-CPPR data, and constants on side
pins. This data is read during the scope analysis run and is then analyzed for the exhaustive
combination of Run 1-16 for a complete signoff.

November 2023 215 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-80 Scope Based IPD Analysis - Illustration

4.8.6 IPD Analysis - User Interface

To enable IPD Analysis, the following setting is required at the top of the Tempus script:
set_analysis_mode -enable_ipd true

The following commands are required during several steps of the flow, as explained below:
■ set_ipd_rail_voltage
This command is used to specify the power rail specifications and excludes combinations
that do not require analysis. When power intent is specified through CPF/IEEE-1801, the
set_ipd_rail_voltage power rail specification refers to the primary power net of the
power domain. The following command parameters can be used:
❑ -sweep: Specifies the list of power rails and their corresponding voltage values.

❑ -exclude_voltage_signatures: Specifies the list of voltage combinations to be

excluded from IPD Analysis.
In Figure 4-80 on page 216, if Run2 voltage combination is to be excluded from analysis,
the following example shows the usage of set_ipd_rail_voltage command:

November 2023 216 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

set_ipd_rail_voltage -sweep { PD1 {0.7 0.8} PD2 {0.9 1.0} PD3 {1.1 1,2}
PD4 {0.6 0.7} }
set_ipd_rail_voltage -exclude_voltage_signatures { {PD1 0.7 PD2 0.9 PD3
1.2 PD4 0.6} }
■ create_pg_net_group
This command is used to group a set of PG nets. This helps in simplification of the overall
UI of the IPD flow by specifying sweeps for a group rather than a PG net. Also, the
crossings between the nets of the same PG net group are automatically ignored.
In the example shared below, the PG nets pgn1, pgn2, and pgn3 are part of PG net group
PG1 and the sweep voltage specified for PG1 is applicable for the PG nets. The
crossings between pgn1 and pgn2, pgn2 and pgn3, and pgn1 and pgn3 will automatically
be ignored.
create_pg_net_group -name PG1 -pg_nets {pgn1 pgn2 pgn3}
\set_ipd_rail_voltage -sweep { PG1 {0.7 0.8} }
■ create_ipd_configuration
This command is used for creating the IPD configuration or the analysis views in both the
bounded scope generation and the scope analysis session. It auto identifies the corners
based on the user-specified sweep voltages and loads up the view definition for
CMMMC-based analysis.
❑ -bounded_corner parameter is used in the scope creation run to create the
minimum/maximum bounding voltage corners to be used for analysis.
set_ipd_rail_voltage -sweep {PD1 {0.7 0.8} PD2 {0.9 1.0} PD3 {1.1 1.2}
PD4 {0.6 0.7}}
create_ipd_configuration -bounded_corners
Min bounding view: PD1=0.8v PD2=1.0v PD3=1.2v PD4=0.7v
Max bounding view: PD1=0.7v PD2=0.9v PD3=1.1v PD4=0.6v
❑ -load_constraints and -load_derates parameters are optionally used in the
scope analysis session to load the constraints and derates stored in the IPD scope:
set_ipd_rail_voltage -sweep { PD1 {0.7 0.8} PD2 {0.9 1.0} PD3 {1.1 1.2}
PD4 {0.6 0.7} }
set_ipd_rail_voltage -exclude_voltage_signatures { {PD1 0.7 PD2 1.0 PD3
1.2 PD4 0.7} }
create_ipd_configuration -load_derates -load_constraints
❑ Exhaustive number of voltage combinations = 2^4 = 16.
❑ Analyze 15 IPD views after excluding the voltage combination specified by the user.
■ report_ipd_configuration

November 2023 217 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

This command reports the rail sweep information and software created voltage
combinations, that is, the IPD views.
It reports and indicates the valid voltage combinations along the with excluded voltage
combinations.
❑ IPD views are named automatically as “ipd_view<count>”.
❑ “Excluded” column reports “yes” against excluded voltage combinations.
A sample report output is given below:
POWER RAIL/GROUP MAPPING
----------------------------
Mapping Power rail/group
----------------------------
PG1 VDD
PG2 VDDR
PG3 VDDF
VOLTAGE SWEEP
------------------------
Power Sweep
Rail
------------------------
PG1 { 0.9 }
PG2 { 1.1 1.2 }
PG3 { 0.8 0.9 }
VOLTAGE SIGNATURES
-------------------------------------------
PG1 PG2 PG3 View Excluded
-------------------------------------------
0.9 1.1 0.8 ipd_view1 no
0.9 1.2 0.8 ipd_view2 no
0.9 1.1 0.9 ipd_view3 no
0.9 1.2 0.9 ipd_view4 yes
■ write_ipd_scope
This command is used to write out the IPD scope in the scope creation run. The scope
is generated in the directory location specified as command argument. There are options
to control whether constraints and derates are to be written out in the scope or not. Some
of the command parameters used are:
❑ -bounded_corner: Generates a bounded corner scope based on the minimum/
maximum voltage combination analyzed in the scope creation run.
❑ -include_constraints and -include_derates: Controls the writing of derates
and constraints in the IPD scope.
❑ -overwrite: Overwrites an existing scope generated with the same directory name
argument.

November 2023 218 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

write_ipd_scope -include_derates -include_constraints -bounded_corner -

overwrite Bounded_corner_scope
■ read_ipd_scope
This command is used to load scope data in the scope analysis run:
read_ipd_scope Bounded_corner_scope

4.8.7 IPD Analysis Reporting

Due to the complexities involved in the identification of IPD logic, it may not always be
possible to analyze only IPD paths during IPD GBA analysis - some non-IPD logic can also
get analyzed, as part of GBA analysis.

For analysis of non-IPD paths, consider the following scenario:

■ I3 to I2, I1 to I4 are the IPD paths (see figure below)
■ I1 to I2 is a non-IPD path, though every cell in this path is part of another IPD path
■ I1 to I2 path will also get analyzed and reported by default

Figure 4-81 Non-IPD Path Analysis - Illustration

Tempus supports additional settings to filter these non-IPD paths during reporting.

The -ipd parameter of the report_timing command reports only the IPD paths in the
design:
report_timing -ipd

November 2023 219 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The IPD analysis header section in the timing report indicates the crossings that exist in the
IPD paths.
IPD Analysis {pd_PD1 -> pd_PD2(L) pd_PD2 -> pd_PD3(D)}

In the above example, there is transition from power domain PD1 to PD2 in the launch path
(L), post the CPPR point and from PD2 to PD3 in the data path (D).

The following abbreviations are used to identify the type of crossings that exist in a path:
■ CC for the common clock path
■ L for the launch clock path
■ C for the capture clock path
■ D for the data path

Sample Report
Path 1: MET Setup Check with Pin Inst1/regx1/CP
Endpoint: Inst1/regx1/D (^) checked with leading edge of 'clk'
Beginpoint: Inst2/regx8/Q (^) triggered by leading edge of 'clk'
Path Groups: {clk}
Analysis View: low_low_v
Retime Analysis { GBA }
IPD Analysis { pd_PD1 -> pd_PD2(L) pd_PD2 -> pd_PD3(D)}
Other End Arrival Time 0.955
- Setup 0.271
+ Phase Shift 3.000
= Required Time 3.684
- Arrival Time 3.552
= Slack Time 0.132
Clock Rise Edge 0.000
+ Clock Network Latency (Prop) 0.000
= Beginpoint Arrival Time 0.000

Sample Scripts
Scope Creation
read_library <libs>
read_verilog <verilog files>
set_top_module <top name>
update_library_set -timing {list of libs} –append
Reading power information
read_power_intent / read_power_domain (CPF/UPF flow)
infer_pgv_power_intent (PGV flow)
set_analysis_mode -enable_ipd true
create_pg_net_group –group specification
set_ipd_rail_voltage –sweep/-exclude_voltage_signatures specification
create_ipd_configuration –bounded_corners
# specify bounding corner constraints
set_interactive_constraints_modes [all_constraints_modes -active]
source < bounding_corner constraints>

November 2023 220 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

set_timing_derate -cell_delay 0.9 -delay_corner [all_delay_corners -active]

read_spef <spef files>
update_timing –full
write_ipd_scope –include_derates –include_constraints <bounded_corner scope dir>

Scope Analysis
set_analysis_mode -enable_ipd true
read_ipd_scope <bounded_corners scope dir>
create_ipd_configuration –load_constraints –load_derates
update_timing -full
report_timing -ipd

November 2023 221 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.9 Aging-Aware STA Analysis

4.9.1 Aging-Aware STA Analysis - Overview on page 223
❍ Bias Temperature Instability (BTI) Overview on page 223
❍ Hot Carrier Injection (HCI) Overview on page 224
4.9.2 Tempus Aging-Aware STA on page 225
❍ Input Requirements on page 225
❍ Modeling Recovery on page 231
❍ Aging Analysis Flow on page 232
❍ Enabling Aging Analysis on page 232
4.9.3 Aging-Aware Tempus vs SPICE Correlation on page 233
4.9.4 Spice Deck for Aging on page 236

November 2023 222 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

4.9.1 Aging-Aware STA Analysis - Overview

The semiconductor device performance degrades over time due to physical factors, such as
Bias Temperature Instability (BTI), Hot Carrier Injection (HCI), and so on. The following
diagram shows process nodes and the sources of device failures.

Figure 4-82 Process nodes and sources of device failures - Illustration

Earlier, the following two methodologies were adopted to account for aging effects into STA:
■ Flat timing derates to margin for aging impact
■ Perform STA with timing libraries characterized for specific age

However, these methodologies had several limitations. The aging effects on device
performance were never modeled comprehensively and accurately in STA. The Tempus
advanced aging-aware STA addresses the limitations to improve the accuracy and PPA
(power, performance, and area) of a design.

Bias Temperature Instability (BTI) Overview

Within the Si-SiO2 interface region, the silicon bonds are not satisfied and there exist
unsatisfied or dangling bonds, that trap charges. The dangling silicon bonds are passivated
by forming Si-H bonds (annealing the interface). When a transistor is biased in inversion, the
dissociation of Si-H bonds along the silicon-oxide interface causes the generation of interface
traps. The devices will be under higher BTI stress, when they are not switching. The rate of
generation of these traps is accelerated at higher temperature and supply voltage. These

November 2023 223 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

traps cause increase in threshold voltage (V_TH), decrease in drain current (I_d), and
decrease in channel mobility (µ).

Figure 4-83 BTI - Illustration

Hot Carrier Injection (HCI) Overview

When transistor gate length decreases, the electrical field increases. This results in impact
ionization. Some hot electrons (HE) generated by impact ionization are attracted to the gate.
The hot electrons injected into the gate cause oxide damage and lead to device degradation.
These devices are under higher HCI stress when they are switching.

Figure 4-84 HCI - Illustration

November 2023 224 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

The main factors that influence device degradation are:

■ Stress duration
■ Temperature
■ Supply voltage
■ Logic conditions (duty cycle and switching activity)

Both BTI and HCI semiconductor devices degrade over a period of time. Typically, PMOS
devices degrade more than NMOS devices.

4.9.2 Tempus Aging-Aware STA

This section includes:
■ Input Requirements on page 225
❑ Fresh and Aged Libraries on page 226
❑ Power Intent for Design on page 227
❑ User-Defined Stress Profile on page 227
❑ Duty Cycle and Toggle Rate Definition and Propagation on page 228
❑ Duty Cycle Propagation for Data Path (Worst-Case) on page 230
■ Modeling Recovery on page 231
■ Aging Analysis Flow on page 232
■ Enabling Aging Analysis on page 232

Input Requirements
The following diagram shows the input requirements for performing aging-aware STA.

November 2023 225 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-85 Input Requirements

Fresh and Aged Libraries

The fresh libraries refer to the timing libraries in CCSN or ECSM-N format used in regular
STA. The existing CCSN/ECSM-N timing libraries can be used for aging analysis. The
Liberate generated and third-party generated timing libraries are accepted. Along with
standard CCSN/ECSM-N libraries, aging libraries are also required for advanced aging
analysis. These aging libraries contain cell level timing data for aging analysis and they must
be generated by Liberate advanced aging characterization flow.

The aging library name should be the same as the corresponding timing library name for
appropriate mapping of the information between aged library and timing libraries.

The aging libraries can be loaded into the Tempus software using the following commands:

MMMC Flow:
create_library_set -name lib_set1 \
-timing fresh.lib \
-liberty_incremental {{age {age.lib}}}

The MMMC flow with explicitly mapping age.lib to a specific fresh library is given below:
create_library_set -name lib_set1 \
-timing fresh.lib \
-liberty_incremental {{age{{age.lib ff105C}}}}

Where fresh.lib name is ff105C.

November 2023 226 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Non-MMMC Flow:
read_lib fresh.lib -liberty_incremental {{age {age.lib}}}
The MMMC flow with explicitly mapping age.lib to a specific fresh library is given below:
read_lib fresh.lib \
-liberty_incremental {{age {{age.lib ff105C}}}}

Power Intent for Design

The power intent is required to calculate the stress for each instance in the design. The power
intent of a design must be specified using PGV (Power- and Ground-aware Verilog) flow, UPF
(Unified Power Format), or CPF (Common Power Format). The stress voltage specified in
stress profiles for a power rail is allowed to be different than the nominal voltage of power rail
at the given analysis corner.

User-Defined Stress Profile

The stress profile is a key input for aging-aware STA. The profile contains stress duration,
stress temperature, and stress voltage per power rail. You can apply different stress profiles
for different views, and different stress profiles for early/late timing. You can make stress
profile settings using the create_aging_stress_profile command. The use model is
given below.
create_aging_stress_profile [-views {views}] [-early] [-late] \
[-bti_pmos_scale <scale_val>] \
[-bti_nmos_scale <scale_val>]
[-hci_pmos_scale <scale_val>] \
[-hci_pmos_scale <scale_val>] \
{segment1 segment2 …}

where segment1, segement2, etc, specifies the stress duration, voltages, and temperature
information, such as:
{{duration <float>}[{voltage {<pg_net1> <float> <pg_net2> <float> …}}]
[{temperature <float>} ] }

The voltage and temperature details are optional in stress profiles. If not defined, the same
voltage and temperature are used as operating voltage and temperature defined for fresh
analysis. Optionally, BTI and HCI scales for PMOS and NMOS can be specified in the of
range [0,1] (default: 1).

November 2023 227 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-86 Stress Profile

The advanced aging analysis also supports multi-segment stress profile, as shown in the
figure above. As shown in the illustration, you can specify initial 2 years of aging with one
stress condition and the rest of the 8 years with different stress condition for a total 10 years
of aging.

An example of multi-segment stress profile is given below:

create_aging_stress_profile -view view1 \
{{{ duration 2} {voltage {VDD 0.9 VSS 0.0}}{temperature 125}} \
{{duration 8 } {voltage {VDD 0.54 VSS 0.0}}{temperature 25}}}

Duty Cycle and Toggle Rate Definition and Propagation

By default, all the signals in STA are assumed to be 50% of duty cycle at primary pins. The
duty cycle for clock waveforms can be specified in the SDC. The same duty cycle is assumed
at every clock pin associated with that waveform. You can override the duty cycle defaults for
primary ports, as well as force duty cycles on specific nets in the design.

Starting from the initial default values (and user-overrides), Tempus propagates the duty
cycle across the logic. Tempus gives higher priority to user-defined duty cycle than duty cycle
obtained from the SDC, using either constants or clock waveforms.

You can specify duty cycles on nets using the set_aging_activity command, as shown
below:
set_aging_activity [-views {list of views}] \
[-min_duty_cycle <value>] \
[-max_duty_cycle <value>] \
-net <list or collection of nets>

For 50% duty cycle (default), the -min_duty_cycle and -max_duty_cycle values are 0.0
and 1.0, respectively. The duty cycle is propagated downstream from the net where it is

November 2023 228 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

asserted. You can set the default duty cycle using command and options defined in Table 4-4
on page 231.

HCI analysis requires both duty cycle and toggle rate information. Toggle rate is the number
of transitions that a signal makes within (change in logic state) one second. Traditional STA
does not require toggle rate, thus does not assume any defaults.

You can specify toggle rates on nets using the following command:
set_aging_activity [-views {list of views}] \
[-min_toggle_rate <value per second>] \
[-max_toggle_rate <value per second>] \
-net <list or collection of nets>

For aging STA, the defaults for toggle rate are 0.0 (min_toggle_rate) and 1e8
(max_toggle_rate) transitions per second. The clocks specified in SDC are initialized with
toggle rate 2 per period. You can set the default toggle rates using command and options
defined in Table 4-5 on page 231.

The duty cycle and toggle rate assertions can be queried or printed using the
get_aging_activity and report_aging_activity commands, as shown below:
get_aging_activity [-views <list of views>] \
-net <list or collection of nets>
report_aging_activity [-duty_cycle] \
[-toggle_rate] \
[-views <list of views>] \
-net <list or collection of nets> \
[-out_file <filename>]

Tempus supports duty cycle and toggle rate propagation modes, as given below:
■ Probabilistic (statistical average)
■ Worst case

You can set the propagation mode using the following settings:

Probabilistic (statistical average) mode:

set_db delaycal_aging_activity_propagation_mode probabilistic

Worst case mode:

set_db delaycal_aging_activity_propagation_mode worst_case

The activity propagation, by default, resets at sequential cell outputs. At the sequential
outputs, the net duty cycles and toggle rates are initialized using sequential defaults (see

November 2023 229 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Table 4-4 on page 231 and Table 4-5 on page 231 to set defaults). If such a reset is not
required, then you can control activity propagation across sequential cell delay arcs using the
following command:
set_db delaycal_aging_sequential_activity_propagation {true | false}

Figure 4-87 Duty cycle propagation through clock network (Worst-case)

The duty cycle set on clock root propagates until it reaches a special net or clock endpoint. A
clock endpoint is the clock pin of a flop from which a clock does not propagate. A special net
in this case is defined as either a net driven by multi-input cell or a clock net, where the user-
defined duty cycle is applied. The nets driven by multi-input clock cells assume default duty
cycle, which is then propagated through downstream logic until it encounters another special
net or clock endpoint.

Duty Cycle Propagation for Data Path (Worst-Case)

You can set duty cycles and toggle rates on primary data input ports. Tempus propagates
these across the logic until it encounters special nets or data endpoints. Unlike clock network,
a data path does not treat nets driven by multi-input cells as special nets.

Figure 4-88 Duty cycle propagation for data path (Worst-case)

You can force default duty cycles using the following set_db settings:

November 2023 230 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Table 4-4 Setting default duty cycle values

Target Duty Cycle 0.0% 25% 100.0%

delaycal_aging_min_duty_cyc 0.0 0.25 1.0 Sets duty cycle on
le ports and special
delaycal_aging_max_duty_cyc 0.0 0.25 1.0 nets
le
delaycal_aging_sequential_m 0.0 0.25 1.0 Sets duty cycle on
in_duty_cycle sequential cell output
delaycal_aging_sequential_m 0.0 0.25 1.0 pins
ax_duty_cycle

You can define default toggle rates using the following set_db settings:

Table 4-5 Setting default toggle-rate values

Value
Target Toggle Rate
(transitions/second)
delaycal_aging_min_toggle_rate 0.0 Sets toggle rate
on ports and
delaycal_aging_max_toggle_rate 1e8
special nets
delaycal_aging_sequential_min_togg 0.0 Sets toggle rate
le_rate on sequential cell
delaycal_aging_sequential_max_togg 1e8 output pins
le_rate

Modeling Recovery
The OMI and URI Spice models are recovery-aware. The aging libraries characterized by
Liberate include recovery as well. Tempus can model BTI recovery when aging libraries
include recovery models.

You can use the following command for OMI and URI model recovery:
set_db delaycal_aging_recovery true

The TMI Spice models are not recovery aware. To model recovery for technology nodes, you
must provide the recovery scaling factors using the following command:
create_aging_stress_profile …-bti_pmos_scale <value> \

November 2023 231 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

-bti_nmos_scale <value> \
-hci_pmos_scale <value> \
-hci_nmos_scale <value>

Aging Analysis Flow

For enabling aging analysis, the flow is given below:

Figure 4-89 Aging Analysis Flow

Enabling Aging Analysis

The aging analysis can be enabled using the following command:
set_analysis_mode -aging true

The aging feature must be enabled before a timing update and cannot be disabled later in the
same session.

The impact from BTI and HCI can be controlled using following commands:
set_db delaycal_aging_type {bti | hci |all}

The default value of -type parameter is all - both BTI and HCI are enabled.

November 2023 232 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Example Script:
read_view_definition view_def_template.tcl #include Aging libs
read_verilog test.v
set_top_module test
#PGV-Specific flow; below two steps required only for PGV flow
infer_pgv_power_intent
set_analysis_view -setup […] -hold […]
#CPF/UPF testcase; required only for CPF/UPF flow
read_power_domain -cpf <file>
set_analysis_mode -aging true
# Define stress profile
create_aging_stress_profile -view view1 \
{{{duration 2} {voltage {VDD 0.9 VSS 0.0}}{temperature 125 }} \
{{duration 8} {voltage {VDD 0.54 VSS 0.0}}{temperature 100}}}
# Set activity propagation mode
set_aging_analysis_mode -activity_propagation_mode probabilistic
# Run timing analysis
update_timing -full

Enabling Aging of Constraint Arcs

By default, the aging impact is not enabled on constraint arcs. You can enable it using the
following command (aging library should have been characterized with constraint arcs):
set_db delaycal_aging_constraints {true | false}

4.9.3 Aging-Aware Tempus vs SPICE Correlation

The Tempus STA vs Spice correlation is performed at the path level. There are two main
aspects of aging-aware Spice simulations.
■ Stress simulation: Uses Spice simulator's reliability analysis flow to degrade devices.
This requires reliability models from foundry (typically a set of text files and binaries).
■ Aging simulation: Uses device degradation information produced by stress simulation to
run degraded circuit analysis. The delays and slew measured from this simulation
includes aging effects. The delays and slews produced by this may be larger than the
delays and slews produced by fresh (i.e., not aged) circuit simulation.

November 2023 233 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-90 Spice correlation

Spice correlation to Tempus is path-based analysis. The side inputs of instances through
which path does not traverse are tied to the constant values. Consider for example, U2/B, U4/
B, and U4/C pins in the above circuit. Due to this, the real duty cycles cannot be propagated
in Spice. During STA, however, Tempus analysis considers duty cycle propagation from all
inputs of multi-input gates and computes duty cycles at the output. A lack of duty cycle
propagation in Spice can cause miscorrelation with Tempus. This is addressed in a two step
Spice correlation approach.
■ Stress and timing correlation
■ Timing-only correlation

Figure 4-91 Stress and Timing correlation

November 2023 234 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Method 1 (Stress and Timing Correlation)

The side pins in Spice are held at logic constants 0 or 1, so the duty cycle should be fixed for
such pins. A fixed duty cycle is used for all the side pins of a cell in a path under test. Toggle
rate for side pins is set to 0.

Spice simulation is performed in two iterations. In the first iteration, the stress parameters are
computed using the fixed duty cycle at side pins. In the second iteration, those stress
parameters are passed on to run aging simulation in order to get the degraded delays and
slews.

Therefore, both the stress and aging validation are accomplished using this method. The only
validation that is not covered in this method is the stress, which is computed based on the
propagated duty cycles and toggle rates. This method uses the fixed duty cycle at every pin
to compute the stress.

Figure 4-92 Method 1 (Stress and Timing correlation)

Method 2 (Timing-Only Correlation)

This method uses realistic duty cycles and toggle rates to be used for side pins. The device
stress is computed based on the duty cycles and toggle rates used by the Tempus STA
engine. Those device stress parameters are then directly fed to the SPICE deck for aging
analysis.

With this approach, only timing validation is possible. Spice simulation is performed in a single
iteration.

November 2023 235 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

Figure 4-93 Method 2 (Timing-only correlation)

Spice correlation method can be selected using the following command:

write_spice_deck -aging_correlation_type {full | timingonly}
where full is method 1 and timingonly is method 2.

While using method 1, the following command is required for forcing fixed duty cycle:
set_db delaycal_aging_use_fixed_duty_cycle true

4.9.4 Spice Deck for Aging

The write_spice_deck command can be used to generate Spice deck for aging. The use
model is given below.
write_spice_deck
-reliability_model_type { URI | OMI | TMI } \
-aging_correlation_type { full | timingonly } \
[-aging_stress_use_timing_slew {false | true}] \
[-aging_stress_num_cycles <integer greater than 0>] \
-uri_lib_file <file> \
-aginglevel_only "[(<value>) (<value>) ..]" \
-omipath <path> \
[-reliability_commands <string>] \
[-supply_voltage_file_stress <file>]
[-spice_include <string>]

November 2023 236 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Analysis and Reporting

For further details, refer to the Tempus Text Command Reference document.

November 2023 237 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

5
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner
Timing Analysis

5.1 CMMMC Overview on page 239

5.2 Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Licensing on page 239
5.3 Configuring Setup for Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Analysis on page 239
5.4 Library Sets on page 240
5.5 Virtual Operating Conditions on page 243
5.6 RC Corner Objects on page 245
5.7 Delay Corner Objects on page 245
5.8 Power Domain Definitions on page 247
5.9 Constraint Mode Objects on page 248
5.10 Constraint Support in Multi-Mode and MMMC Analysis on page 251
5.11 Analysis Views on page 252
5.12 Saving Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Configuration on page 257
5.13 Configuring Setup for Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Analysis on page 239
5.14 Performing Timing Analysis on page 257
5.15 Generating Timing Reports on page 258

November 2023 238 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

5.1 CMMMC Overview

As feature sizes decrease, it becomes difficult to determine the worst-case combinations of
device corner (timing libraries and PVT operating conditions), RC corners, and constraint
modes at which the designers need to validate timing requirements for a design. Multi-mode
multi-corner analysis and optimization provides the ability to configure the software to support
multiple combinations of modes and corners, and to evaluate them concurrently.

Multi-mode multi-corner analysis uses a tiered approach for defining the required data. It
allows top-level definitions (analysis views) that share common information to be specified by
referencing the same lower-level objects. The active analysis views defined in the software
represent the different design variations that will be analyzed.

5.2 Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Licensing

Multi-corner analysis requires an XL license. Multi-mode analysis does not require a XL
license, and is limited to only one delay corner for setup analysis, and one delay corner for
hold analysis.

5.3 Configuring Setup for Multi-Mode Multi-Corner

Analysis
Multi-mode multi-corner analysis uses a tiered approach to assemble the information
necessary for timing analysis and optimization. Each top-level definition (called an analysis
view) is composed of a delay corner and a constraint mode. The active analysis views defined
in the software represent the different design variations that will be analyzed.

November 2023 239 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Figure 5-1 Hierarchical Analysis View Configuration

5.4 Library Sets

This section includes:
■ Creating Library Sets
■ Updating Library Sets

November 2023 240 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Creating Library Sets

Complex designs might require the specification of multiple library files to define all of the
standard cells, memory devices, pads, and so forth, included in the design. Different library
sets can be defined to provide uniquely characterized libraries for each delay corner or power
domain.

Library sets allow a group of library files to be treated as a single entity so that higher-level
descriptions (delay corners) can simply refer to the library configuration by name. A library set
consists of timing libraries and can also include cdB/UDN models, AOCV, SOCV libraries
which are supported through various options of create_library_set command.

For details on UDN syntax, refer to the cdB Noise Library Format section in the Noise
Library Characterization chapter of the make_cdB Noise Characterizer User Guide.

For more information on UDN model, refer to the User-Defined Noise Model - An
Overview section in the Noise Library Characterization chapter of the make_cdB Noise
Characterizer User Guide.

The same library set can be referenced multiple times by different delay corners.
Note: You can create as many library sets as needed to support for delay corners that will be
included in the multi-mode multi-corner analysis.

To create a library set, use the following command:

create_library_set

Flow Library Requirements

Timing libraries must be read into the system first, using read_libs command. If you want
to create a library set that includes cdB libraries, they also must be read into the system first,
using the read_libs -noise_libs command. This same flow is adopted in single-mode
single-corner (SMSC) analysis.

The order in which you define timing libraries is important. The software considers the first
library in the list as master library, with successive libraries having low priority.

The library sets can be created only after the top module is set. The following figure shows
the creation of a library set that associates timing libraries and cdB libraries with a nominal
voltage of 1 volt with the library name is COM-1V.

November 2023 241 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Figure 5-2 Creation of Library Sets

* Either AOCV or SOCV libraries can be specified at a time. The AOCV and SOCV files can
also be added to the library set by either -aocv [list aocv1.lib aocv2.lib] or –socv
[list socv1.lib socv2.lib] in the create_library_set settings.

Note: You can use the create_library_set -timing parameter and interpolate a set of
timing libraries to perform IR-drop aware delay calculation.

Updating Library Sets

To change the timing and cdB library files for an existing library set, use the following
command:
■ update_library_set

You can update a library set in the GUI mode by using the following ways:

Click the File tab and select Configure MMMC. A new window opens, double-click on one of
the library set objects, where the timing library files need to be updated. A new terminal will
open that allows you to add or delete timing library files. After updating the files, click on
Apply and OK to save the changes.

Or

Click the Timing & SI tab and select MMMC Browser. Select the library set and double-click
on one of the library sets where the timing library files need to be updated. A new terminal
will open where you can add or delete timing library files. After updating the files, click on
Apply and OK to save the changes.
Note:
■ It may not be necessary to update a library set, but Timing/SI libraries under a library set
can be updated.

November 2023 242 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

■ You can use the update_library_set command or the Edit Library Set option (in GUI
Mode), before (or any time later) the multi-mode multi-corner views are loaded into the
design. Once the views are loaded, any change in the library set (using the
update_library_set command (or Edit Library Set form) will reset the timing, RC data,
and delay corner settings for all the analysis views.

5.5 Defining Timing Conditions

You can define new operating/timing conditions using the create_timing_condition
command. This command creates a set of virtual operating conditions in the specified library.

For example, the following command creates a timing condition called TC1 for the library set
fast and for the virtual operating condition oc1:
create_timing_condition -name TC1 -library_sets [list fast] -opcond oc1

Figure 5-3 Define timing conditions

5.6 Virtual Operating Conditions

This section includes:
■ Creating Virtual Operating Conditions
■ Editing Virtual Operating Conditions

November 2023 243 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Creating Virtual Operating Conditions

In general, the process, voltage, and temperature (PVT) point is specified by referring to a
predefined operating condition defined in a timing library. The library operating condition
provides the system with values for P, V, and T. However, there are situations when there are
no predefined operating conditions in user timing libraries, or pre-existing operating
conditions are not consistent with user's operating environment. Instead of modifying timing
libraries to add or adjust operating condition definitions, you can create a set of virtual
operating conditions for a library, to define a PVT operating point. These virtual operating
conditions can then be referenced by a delay corner, as if they actually existed in the library.

The operating conditions scale the delay numbers if there is a mismatch between the PVT
condition of libraries and the virtual operating conditions. To create a virtual operating
condition for a library, use the following command:
■ create_opcond

For example, the following command creates a virtual operating condition called oc1 :
create_opcond -name oc1
-process 1.0
-voltage 1.2
-temperature 120

Editing Virtual Operating Conditions

In GUI mode, you can add or change attributes for a defined virtual operating condition using
the “Add OP Cond” form.

Click the File tab and choose Configure MMMC. A new window opens in which you need
to double-click on the OP Conds tab and add the operating condition. Click Apply and OK
for the changes to take affect.

or

Click the MMMC Browser under the Timing & SI tab, and the double-click on the OP Conds
tab. After adding the operating condition, click Apply and OK for the changes to take affect.

You can edit a virtual operating condition before multi-mode multi-corner view definitions are
loaded into the design or any time later. However, once the software is in multi-mode multi-
corner analysis mode, any changes to an existing object results in the timing, delay
calculation, and RC data being reset for all analysis views.

November 2023 244 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

5.7 RC Corner Objects

This section includes:
■ Creating RC Corner Objects

Creating RC Corner Objects

An RC corner object provides the information necessary to properly annotate, and use the
RCs for delay calculation. In Tempus, you read the RC information using the SPEF files. A
SPEF file contains the parasitic information for a RC corner. In multi-mode multi-corner
analysis, you can use a SPEF file for each view.

RC corner objects are referenced when creating delay calculation corner objects.

To create an RC corner, use the following command:

■ create_rc_corner

For example, the following command creates an RC corner called rc-typ:

create_rc_corner -name rc-typ

5.8 Delay Corner Objects

This section includes:
■ Creating Delay Corner Objects
■ Editing Delay Corner Objects
■ Power Domain Definitions

Creating Delay Corner Objects

A delay corner provides information necessary to control delay calculation for a specific
analysis view. Each corner contains information on the libraries, the operating conditions with
which the libraries should be accessed, and the RC corner for loading the parasitic data.
Delay corner objects can be shared by multiple top-level analysis views.

To create a delay calculation corner, use the following command:

■ create_delay_corner

November 2023 245 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Use separate delay calculation corners to define major PVT operating points (for example,
Best-Case and Worst-Case).

Use the -early_* and -late_* parameters within a single delay calculation corner to
control on-chip variation.

The following figure shows the creation of a delay calculation corner called dcWCCOM.This
corner uses the libraries from IsCOM-1V, sets the operating condition to WCCOM, as defined
in the stdcell_1V timing library, and uses the rc-cworst RC corner:

Figure 5-4 Creation of a delay calculation corner

Editing Delay Corner Objects

To add or change attribute values of an existing delay calculation corner object, use the
following command:
■ update_delay_corner

In GUI mode, you can make changes to a delay calculation corner object by using Add Delay
Corner form.

Click the File tab and choose Configure MMMC. A new window opens, double-click on the
Delay Corners tab. Select the type of analysis mode and specify the rc corner, library set,
OpCond Lib, OpCond, IrDrop File. Once done, click Apply and OK to save the settings.

Or,

November 2023 246 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Click Timing & SI tab and choose MMMC Browser. A new window opens, double-click on
the Delay Corners tab. Select the type of analysis mode and specify the rc corner, Library
set, OpCond Lib, OpCond, IrDrop File. Once done, click Apply and OK to save the settings.

You can use the update_delay_corner command or the “Add Delay Corner” form before (or
any time later) multi-mode multi-corner view definitions are loaded into the design. However,
once the software is in multi-mode multi-corner analysis mode, any changes to an existing
object results in the timing, delay calculation, and RC data being reset for all analysis views.

The following example shows how to create two corners and update the delay corners with
the appropriate information.

Create worst-case RC corner based on the worst-case RC parameters:

create_rc_corner -name rc_cworst
Best-case RC corner based on the best-case RC parameters:
create_rc_corner -name rc_cbest

To associate the best-case and worst-case RC corners with the appropriate delay corner, use
the update_delay_corner command:
update_delay_corner -name AV_HL_FUNC_MIN_RC1_dc -rc _corner rc_cworst
update_delay_corner -name AV_HL_FUNC_MIN_RC2_dc -rc_corner rc_cbest
update_delay_corner -name AV_HL_FUNC_MAX_RC1_dc -rc_corner rc_cworst
update_delay_corner -name AV_HL_FUNC_MAX_RC2_dc -rc_corner rc_cbest
update_delay_corner -name AV_HL_SCAN_MIN_RC1_dc -rc_corner rc_cworst
update_delay_corner -name AV_HL_SCAN_MAX_RC1_dc -rc_corner rc_cworst
update_delay_corner -name AV_HO_FUNC_MIN_RC1_dc -rc_corner rc_cworst
update_delay_corner -name AV_HO_FUNC_MAX_RC1_dc -rc_corner rc_cworst
update_delay_corner -name AV_LO_FUNC_MIN_RC1_dc -rc_corner rc_cworst
update_delay_corner -name AV_LO_FUNC_MAX_RC1_dc -rc_corner rc_cwors

5.9 Power Domain Definitions

Adding Power Domain Definition to Delay Calculation Corners

A single delay calculation corner object specifies the delay calculation rules for the entire
design. If a design includes power domains, the delay calculation corner can contain domain-
specific subsections that specify the required operating condition information, and any
necessary timing library rebinding for the power domain.

You must use the same power domain names that you read in using the power domain file to
define the physical aspects of the domain. For more information about power domain file, see
read_power_intent.

November 2023 247 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

To create a power domain definition for a delay calculation corner, use the following
command:
■ update_delay_corner

For example, the following command adds definitions for the power domain domain-3V to the
dcWCCOM delay calculation corner:
update_delay_corner -name dcWCCOM
-power_domain domain-3V
-library_set libs-3volt
-opcond_library delayvolt_3V
-opcond slow_3V

Editing Power Domain Definitions

To add or change attribute values for an existing power domain definition, use the following
command:
■ update_delay_corner

In GUI mode, you can make changes to a power domain definition using the Edit Power
Domain form:

Click the File tab and choose Configure MMMC. A new window opens, double-click on the
Delay Corners tab. In the “Power Domain List” column, click Add. A new Add Power
Domain window opens, you can enter the details for library set, OpCond Lib, OpCond, IrDrop
File. Once done, click Apply and OK to save the settings.

or:

Click Timing & SI tab and choose MMMC Browser. A new window opens, double-click on
the Delay Corners tab. In the “Power Domain List” column, click Add. A new “Add Power
Domain” window opens, you can enter the details for library set, OpCond Lib, OpCond,
IrDrop File. Once done, click Apply and OK to save the settings.

You can use the update_delay_corner command or the Add Delay Corner form before (or
any time later) multi-mode multi-corner view definitions are loaded into the design. However,
after the software is in multi-mode multi-corner analysis mode, any changes to an existing
object results in the timing, delay calculation, and RC data being reset for all analysis views.

5.10 Constraint Mode Objects

This section includes:
■ Creating Constraint Mode Objects

November 2023 248 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

■ Editing Constraint Mode Objects

■ Entering Constraints Interactively
■ Constraint Support in Multi-Mode and MMMC Analysis

Creating Constraint Mode Objects

A constraint mode object defines one of possibly many different functional, test, or Dynamic
Voltage and Frequency Scaling (DVFS) modes of a design. It consists of a list of SDC
constraint files that contain timing analysis information, such as the clock specifications, case
analysis constraints, I/O timings, and path exceptions that make each mode unique. SDC files
can be shared by many different constraint modes, and the same constraint mode can be
associated with multiple analysis views.

To create a constraint mode object, use the following command:

■ create_constraint_mode

The following figure shows that the constraint mode “missionSetup” reads in 3 constraint
mode files “io.sdc”, “mission1-clks.sdc” and “mission1-except.sdc”:

Figure 5-5 Constraint Mode Objects

Editing Constraint Mode Objects

To change the SDC constraint file information for an existing constraint mode object, use the
following command:
■ update_constraint_mode

In the GUI mode, you can make changes to a constraint mode object using the Add
Constraint Mode form.

November 2023 249 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Click the File tab and choose Configure MMMC. A new window opens, double-click on the
Constraint Modes tab and add the “SDC Constraint File(s)”. Once done, click Apply and
OK to save the settings.

Or,

ClickTiming & SI tab and choose MMMC Browser. A new window opens, double-click on
the Constraint Modes tab and add the “SDC Constraint File(s)”. Once done, click Apply
and OK to save the settings.

You can use the update_constraint_mode command or the Add Constraint Mode form
before (or any time later) multi-mode multi-corner view definitions are loaded into the design.
However, once the software is in multi-mode multi-corner analysis mode, any changes to an
existing object results in the timing, delay calculation, and RC data are reset for all the
analysis views.

Entering Constraints Interactively

The Tempus software allows you to update assertions for a multi-mode multi-corner
constraint mode object, and have those changes take immediate effect, use the following
command:
■ set_interactive_constraint_modes

Specifying set_interactive_constraint_modes puts the software into interactive mode

for the specified constraint mode objects. Any constraints that you specify after this command
will take effect immediately on all active analysis views that are associated with these
constraint modes. By default, no constraint modes are considered active.

For example, the following commands put the software into interactive constraint entry mode,
and apply the set_propagated_clock assertion on all views in the current session that
are associated with the constraint mode func1:
set_interactive_constraint_modes func1
set_propagated_clock [all_clocks]

The software stays in interactive mode until you exit it by specifying the
set_interactive_constraint_modes command with an empty list:
set_interactive_constraint_modes { }

All the new constraints are saved in the SDC file for the specified constraint mode when you
save the design.

You can use the get_interactive_constraint_modes command to return a list of the

constraint mode objects in interactive constraint entry mode.

November 2023 250 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Note: Interactive constraint mode only works when the software is in regular multi-mode
multi-corner timing analysis mode. You cannot use it in distributed multi-mode multi-corner
analysis. In min/max analysis mode, constraints are always accepted interactively.

5.11 Constraint Support in Multi-Mode and MMMC

Analysis
The Tempus software isolates the following SDC constraints from conflicting with each other,
in both multi-mode and multi-mode multi-corner analysis modes:
■ create_clock
■ create_generated_clock
■ set_annotated_check
■ set_annotated_delay
■ set_annotated_transition
■ set_case_analysis
■ set_clock_gating_check
■ set_clock_groups
■ set_clock_latency
■ set_clock_sense
■ set_clock_transition
■ set_clock_uncertainty
■ set_disable_timing
■ set_drive
■ set_driving_cell
■ set_false_path
■ set_fanout_load
■ set_input_delay
■ set_input_transition
■ set_load
■ set_max_delay
■ set_max_time_borrow

November 2023 251 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

■ set_max_transition
■ set_min_delay
■ set_min_pulse_width
■ set_multicycle_path
■ set_output_delay
■ set_propagated_clock
■ set_resistance

Note: Path groups defined with group_path are considered to be global definitions across
all analysis views.

5.12 Analysis Views

This section includes:
■ Creating Analysis Views
■ Editing Analysis View Objects
■ Setting Active Analysis Views
■ Guidelines for Setting Active Analysis Views

Creating Analysis Views

An analysis view object provides all of the information necessary to control a given multi-
mode multi-corner analysis. It consists of a delay calculation corner and a constraint mode.

To create an analysis view, use the following command:

■ create_analysis_view

The following figure shows the creation of the analysis view missionSetup:

November 2023 252 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Figure 5-6 Creation of New Analysis View

Editing Analysis View Objects

To change the attribute values for an existing analysis view, use the following command:
■ update_analysis_view

In the GUI mode, you can make changes to an analysis view using the Add Analysis View
form:

Click the File tab and choose Configure MMMC. A new window opens, double-click on the
Analysis Views tab and specify the constraint mode, delay corner, and analysis view. Click
Apply and OK to save the settings.

Or,

Click Timing & SI tab and choose MMMC Browser. A new window opens, double-click on
the Analysis Views tab and specify the constraint mode, delay corner, and analysis view.
Click Apply and OK to save the settings.
Note: You can use the update_analysis_view command or the Add Analysis View form
before (or any time later) multi-mode multi-corner view definitions are loaded into the design.
However, once the software is in multi-mode multi-corner analysis mode, any changes to an
existing object in the timing, delay calculation, and RC data are reset for all the analysis views.

November 2023 253 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Setting Active Analysis Views

After creating analysis views, you must set which views the software should use for setup and
hold analysis. These "active" views represent the different design variations that will be
analyzed. Active views can be changed throughout the flow to utilize different subsets of
views. Libraries and data are loaded into the system, as required to support the selected set
of active views.

To set active analysis views, use the following command:

■ set_analysis_view
Note: You must define at least one setup and one hold analysis view.

For example, the following command sets missionSlow and mission2Slow as the active
views for setup analysis, and missionFast and testFast as the active views for hold
analysis:
set_analysis_view
-setup {missionSlow mission2Slow}
-hold {missionFast testFast}

Guidelines for Setting Active Analysis Views

The order in which you specify views, using the set_analysis_view command, is
important. By default, the first view defined in the -setup and -hold lists is the default view.

Changing the Default Active Analysis View

For example, if the analysis view missionSlow is currently the default active setup view in the
design, the following command temporarily changes the default view to mission2Slow:
set_default_view -setup mission2Slow

Checking the Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Configuration

Use the following command to generate a hierarchical report of your current multi-mode multi-
corner configuration:
■ report_analysis_views

November 2023 254 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

5.13 Design Loading and MMMC Configuration Script

The script to load a design must contain design loading as well as all MMMC configuration
commands, such as, create_library_set, create_delay_corner, and
create_constraint_mode.

A sample common_init.tcl script is shown below:

################ common_init.tcl #############
read_mmmc INPUT/viewDefinition.tcl
read_physical -lef "
lib/lef/gsclib045.fixed.lef
lib/lef/MEM1_256X32.lef
lib/lef/MEM1_1024X32.lef
lib/lef/MEM1_4096X32.lef
lib/lef/MEM2_128X16.lef
lib/lef/MEM2_128X32.lef
lib/lef/MEM2_136X32.lef
lib/lef/MEM2_512X32.lef
lib/lef/MEM2_1024X32.lef
lib/lef/MEM2_2048X32.lef
lib/lef/MEM2_4096X32.lef
lib/lef/pdkIO.lef
"
read_netlist INPUT/asic_entity.v.gz
#read_def aa.def
#read_power_intent
init_design
if {[get_db program_short_name] == "tempus"} {
read_db -physical_data tempus_test.db
}

A sample viewDefinition.tcl script is shown below:

################# viewDefinition.tcl ############
create_library_set -name fast\
-timing\
[list ${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/fast.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/pdkIO.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_4096X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_2048X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_1024X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM1_4096X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM1_1024X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM1_256X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_512X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_136X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_128X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_128X16_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/leon.lib]
create_library_set -name slow\
-timing\
[list ${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/pdkIO.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_4096X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_2048X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_1024X32_slow.lib\

November 2023 255 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM1_4096X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM1_1024X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM1_256X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_512X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_136X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_128X32_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/MEM2_128X16_slow.lib\
${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/leon.lib]
create_timing_condition -name default_mapping_tc_2\
-library_sets [list fast]
create_timing_condition -name default_mapping_tc_1\
-library_sets [list slow]
create_rc_corner -name rc_min\
-cap_table ${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/capTable\
-pre_route_res 1.34236\
-post_route_res 0.994125\
-pre_route_cap 1.10066\
-post_route_cap 0.960235\
-post_route_cross_cap 1.22327\
-pre_route_clock_res 0\
-pre_route_clock_cap 1.105\
-post_route_clock_cap 0.969117\
-temperature 0\
-qrc_tech ${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/qrcTechFile\
create_rc_corner -name rc_max\
-cap_table ${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/capTable\
-pre_route_res 1.34236\
-post_route_res 0.994125\
-pre_route_cap 1.10066\
-post_route_cap 0.960234\
-post_route_cross_cap 1.22327\
-pre_route_clock_res 0\
-pre_route_clock_cap 0.967898\
-post_route_clock_cap 0.969117\
-temperature 125\
-qrc_tech ${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/qrcTechFile\
create_opcond -name PVT1 \
-process 1 \
-voltage 2 \
-temperature 120 \
create_delay_corner -name slow_max\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_1}\
-rc_corner rc_max
create_delay_corner -name fast_min\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_2}\
-rc_corner rc_min
create_constraint_mode -name functional\
-sdc_files\
[list ${::IMEX::libVar}/mmmc/eagle.sdc]
create_analysis_view -name func_slow_max -constraint_mode functional -delay_corner
slow_max
create_analysis_view -name func_fast_min -constraint_mode functional -delay_corner
fast_min
set_analysis_view -setup [list func_slow_max] -hold [list func_fast_min]

November 2023 256 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

5.14 Saving Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Configuration

The software stores multi-mode multi-corner configuration as Tcl commands in the
tempus.cmd file. This file contains information on all the library sets, RC corners, delay
corners, constraint modes, and analysis view definitions that you created. You can reload the
configuration information into a design session by sourcing the tempus.cmd file.

You can also save the design using the write_db command. If constraints are sourced
interactively then a designer can save the design after interactive reading of constraints
through this command.

5.15 Controlling Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Analysis

through the Flow
The following table describes how Tempus applications behave in multi-mode multi-corner
analysis mode throughout the flow:

Table 5-1 Application Behavior in Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Analysis Mode

Flow Step Commands Application Behavior

Delay calculation write_sdf -view Uses the early and late delays for the
specified analysis view to populate the min
and max SDF triplet slots.
Timing report_timing -view Analyzes all active analysis views in the
design, or for a specified view (-view)
concurrently.

5.16 Performing Timing Analysis

The software performs multi-mode multi-corner timing analysis concurrently on all active
analysis views in the design. To run multi-mode multi-corner timing analysis, you use the
following command:
■ report_timing

By default, the report_timing command analyzes all active analysis views in the design
concurrently. The timing report details indicate the views that are responsible for a path. By
default, the software returns only one path per end point.

November 2023 257 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Concurrent Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

If you have a large number of views, you can use the report_timing -view command to
process multiple views. The software stores results for each view, along with an aggregated
report in machine-readable timing reports (.mtarpt). You can view the results graphically in
the Tempus Timing Debug environment. You can use this procedure to determine the critical
view subsets that should be used to drive the implementation flow.
Note: The SPEF data is only read after a view is created to avoid multi-corner errors.

5.17 Generating Timing Reports

The software can generate various reports that contain timing information for each active
analysis view.

For more information on timing reports, see the report_timing Sample Reports section in
the Tempus Stylus Text Command Reference.

For other reports, see the report_* commands in the “Timing Analysis Commands”
chapter.

November 2023 258 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

6
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner
Timing Analysis

6.1 DMMMC Overview on page 260

6.2 Performing Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Analysis on page 261
6.3 Performing Concurrent MMMMC Analysis in DMMMC Mode on page 273
6.4 Setting Up MSV/CPF-Based Design in DMMMC Mode on page 274
6.5 Performing Setup/Hold View Analysis and Reporting on page 277
6.6 Running Single Interactive User Interface in DMMMC Mode on page 278
6.7 Running Interactive ECO on Multiple Views in DMMMC Mode on page 280
6.8 Important Guidelines and Troubleshooting DMMMC on page 283

November 2023 259 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

6.1 DMMMC Overview

The multi-mode multi-corner (MMMC) timing analysis can be run in distributed mode also.
Distributed multi-mode multi-corner (DMMMC) enables controlled distribution of various
analysis views to a selected or shared group of machines, and then merges the reports
generated for timing and signal integrity across the views.

This chapter describes how an existing MMMC setup can be transitioned to distributed
MMMC (that is, to multiple machines/CPUs). These multiple machines/CPUs will be referred
as Tempus clients in this chapter.

Distributed MMMC is a method of processing timing analysis views where the runs are
distributed on several Tempus clients. This allows you to run Timing/SI analysis for different
analysis views on multiple Tempus clients and then merge/aggregate the generated reports
from various views into a single report. The flow is shown in the figure below.

Figure 6-1 DMMMC Flow

The Tempus master invokes a set of Tempus clients on the specified machines/CPUs, using
the set_distributed_hosts command. Besides tracking the activity on Tempus clients,

November 2023 260 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

the Tempus master also governs the responsibility of adjusting queued analysis jobs to active
Tempus clients, in case some Tempus clients fail due to an unexpected event.

Distributed MMMC in Tempus enables:

■ Parallel analysis of multiple MMMC views running simultaneously on multiple Tempus
clients controlled via a Tempus Master session.
■ Merging of timing reports.
■ Saving a significant amount of real time as compared to sequential runs when there are
a large number of views to analyze.
■ Accelerated utilization of available computing power (multiple CPU cores) on local or
remote machines/hardware via super threading.

Licensing Requirements

Refer to “Tempus License Options for Distributed MMMC (DMMMC)” in the “Product and
Licensing Information” chapter.

Restrictions

The following restriction applies to distributed MMMC analysis:

■ Distributed MMMC analysis is supported in GUI mode. However, the GUI menu and
forms are not available for DMMMC commands.

6.2 Performing Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner

Analysis
Distributed multi-mode multi-corner analysis is performed by reading a flow script into the
master Tempus server, which then distributes the analysis runs to the user-specified
machines. Analysis can further be multi-threaded on these machines.

The software saves all data from the distributed analysis runs in a user-specified output
directory (specified with the distribute_read_design command).
■ The software generates view-specific reports in directories with the corresponding view
name within this directory.
When concurrent multi-mode multi-corner timing analysis (CMMMC) is enabled, within a
DMMMC framework, the software generates CMMMC session-specific reports in
directories that have the corresponding CMMMC session names, under a user-defined

November 2023 261 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

output directory (specified using the distribute_read_design –out_dir parameter).

The CMMMC session names are cmmmc_1, cmmmc_2 and so on. The software creates
a mapping file (views_dir_map.rpt) to show the mapping of CMMMC session names with
a list of the combined views. The master log file contains messages that refer to the
mapping file. If the mapping file already exists in the run directory, software will create
the mapping file with name views_dir_map.rpt1, views_dir_map.rpt2 and so on.

An example of views_dir_map.rpt file is given below:

Dir: cmmmc_1 Views: {view1 view2}
Dir: cmmmc_2 Views: {view3 view4}
Dir: cmmmc_3 Views: {view5}

For more information on how to enable CMMMC, you can refer to the
distribute_views command.
■ In the DMMMC analysis flow, client monitoring is enabled by default. This feature enables
robust master/client resource monitoring and re-launches the clients when they fail due
to resource overloading. The master monitors the health of clients at regular intervals
and writes the information about per client resources (cpu/memory/tmp) in the host-
monitor.log file. If the host-monitor log file already exists in the run directory, software will
create the new file with name host-monitor.log1, host-monitor.log2 and so on.
An example report is given below:
######################
Status keys: E excellent, G good, B bad, T terrible.
Memory values:
total = Real memory of host
progs = Real memory used by processes, including swappable cache
used = Real memory used by processes, excluding swappable cache
Started at: 19/09/03 23:45:37
sj-etam(0) TMPDIR is : /tmp/ssv_tmpdir_3160_U03VpI

============ ======== ==================== ======================

Host CPU Memory (GB) TMPDIR (GB) (Mb/s)
name(id) util % total progs used %used total avail rate
============ ======== ===== ===== ===== ====== =====================
23:45:37
sj-etam(0) 10 E 3 3 3 100 T 44.29 27.45 E N/A
23:46:37
sj-etam(0) 3 E 3 3 3 100 T 44.29 27.47 E 376 E
######################

The software checks for overloading of client resources and issues appropriate warning
messages for over-utilization of client resources. If client resources are over-utilized and view
analysis is not able to proceed, the software will automatically terminate the view job and
restart it on another client.

November 2023 262 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

The DMMMC flow enables re-launch of clients using the same LSF configuration in the LSF
mode, if any overloading (cpu/mem) occurs in clients during view analysis. When
set_distributed_hosts -local mode is set, the re-launch feature is disabled.

Handling Scripts

For distributed MMMC analysis the following Tcl scripts are required:
■ Master Script on page 263
■ Design Loading and MMMC Configuration Script on page 266
■ Parasitic Information, Analysis, and Report Generation Script on page 269

Master Script

The master script is the overall flow script that runs the entire Tempus distributed MMMC
session. This script includes all generic environment variables, distribution commands, and
commands for specifying CPU usage, running DMMMC analysis, and merging reports.

The master script is read into the master Tempus server, which then distributes the analysis
runs to the user-specified machines.

Creating the Master Script

The following steps list the order in which you should define the commands in the master
script that are necessary for running a distributed MMMC analysis session.
1. Specify environment variables or shell variables to be used in the flow.
2. Specify distribution infrastructure like machine names, mode of execution (LSF or rsh),
by using the set_distributed_hosts command.
For example:
set_distributed_hosts -rsh -add {hostName1 hostName2 hostName3
hostName4}
3. Specify the Tempus client usage by using the set_multi_cpu_usage -remote_host
command. The number specified here must be less than or equal to the number of
machines specified in step 2, (if specific machines have been requested using the –rsh
parameter of the set_distributed_hosts command).
For example:
set_multi_cpu_usage -remote_host 4

November 2023 263 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

The following example shows that jobs on each remote host can further be multi-
threaded:
set_multi_cpu_usage -remote_host 4 -cpu_per_remote_host 4
If LSF distribution is used, then you can specify the number of Tempus clients to be used.
The software needs CPU usage information in order to figure out how many licenses the
system can use for distribution.
4. Load the design in distributed mode using the distribute_read_design command.
This requires providing an input script that contains all the design loading commands,
except the read_spef and read_parasitics command. The
distribute_read_design command opens up N number of Tempus clients (as
specified with the set_multi_cpu_usage -remote_host) for the Tempus distributed
processing session, and loads the design script into the Tempus clients.
For example:
distribute_read_design
-design_script $rootDir/design_load.tcl
-outdir $output_directory
5. Specify the active setup and hold analysis views.
For example:
set Views [list func_ss_rcmax test_ss_rcmax func_ss_rctyp]
6. Distribute and analyze views using the distribute_views command. This command
distributes the active setup and hold analysis views to Tempus clients, and sources the
specified command script to perform timing and signal integrity analysis.
For example:
distribute_views
-views $Views
-script $rootDir/analysis.tcl
7. Merge the timing and noise reports generated from various servers using the
merge_timing_reports command.
8. Close all the Tempus clients using the reset_servers command to end the distributed
processing session.

The following sample master script needs to be provided as input to the Tempus master.

Example: Sample Master Script

#################### Script 1: run.tcl ###############################

# Setup the environment variables or shell variables to be used in the flow.

November 2023 264 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

set runLocal 0
set cwd [exec pwd]
set outDir "$cwd/dmmmc_logs"

# Instructs Tempus to launch jobs in rsh. You can specify the list of machines that can be used
to launch utility servers. You can also specify LSF queue (refer to the Tempus Text Command
Reference).
set_distributed_hosts -rsh -add {hostname1 hostname2}
or
set_distributed_hosts -time_out 300 -lsf -queue lnx64 -args "-P
TEMPUS:15.1:PE:build -n ${threadCnt}" -resource "span\[hosts=1\]
select\[OSNAME==Linux \]"

# Instructs 3 Tempus clients to be used for this session run. Each Tempus client will use 8
CPUs for multi-threading.
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 2 -remote_host 2 -cpu_per_remote_host 4
# Invokes the Tempus clients based on the above information and loads Script-2
(design_load.tcl) on each client. Specified “outDir” is the area where the Tempus client log
files will be generated. All the outputs relevant to this session will be created here. The master
log will reside in the directory where the run is launched.
distribute_read_design -design_script sta_dmmmc.tcl -outdir $outDir
# Distributes list of specified analysis views to Tempus clients and processes the commands
specified in Script-3 (analysis.tcl) on each client.
set setupViews [list \
func_fast_RCMAX \
func_slow_RCMAX \
func_fast_RCMIN \
func_slow_RCMIN \
scan_fast_RCMAX \
scan_slow_RCMAX \
scan_fast_RCMIN \
scan_slow_RCMIN \
]
distribute_views -views $setupViews -script sta_dmmmc.tcl

# Merges the timing report (machine readable format) files from specified views and
generates a merged view file. The paths are sorted based on the slack value.
merge_timing_reports -view $setupViews -base_report setup_maxpath_machine.rpt
-base_dir $outDir > merged_setup_maxpath.rpt
merge_timing_reports -view $setupViews -base_report setup_nworst_machine.rpt -
base_dir $outDir > merged_setup_worst.rpt
merge_timing_reports -view $setupViews -base_report hold_maxpath_machine.rpt -
base_dir $outDir > merged_hold_maxpath.rpt
merge_timing_reports -view $setupViews -base_report hold_nworst_machine.rpt -
base_dir $outDir > merged_hold_worst.rpt

November 2023 265 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

#Close Tempus session

exit_servers

For more information on loading a MMMC configuration script, see Design Loading and MMMC
Configuration Script on page 266.

For more information on parasitics, see Parasitic Information, Analysis, and Report
Generation Script on page 269.

6.2.1 Design Loading and MMMC Configuration Script

This script contains the common information that needs to be shared by all Tempus clients.
The script must include the design loading commands, as well as all MMMC configuration
commands, for example, create_library_set, create_delay_corner, and
create_constraint_mode.

The analysis views are specified with the distribute_views command, which distributes
them internally to the Tempus clients for processing.This command is automatically issued by
Tempus master via a distribution method (distribute_views).
Note: The script must not include parasitic file loading commands (read_spef) and analysis
view setting commands (set_analysis_view). If specified, these commands will be ignored
by the distribution mechanism.

This script is loaded using the distribute_read_design command.

Example: Sample MMMC Configuration Script

###############Script 2 : "viewDefinition.tcl" ##################
##################################################
# Define the available libraries
##################################################
create_library_set -name libset_slow\
-timing\
[list ../../libs/liberty/FreePDK45_lib_v1.0_worst.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/pllclk.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/ram_256x16A.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/rom_512x16A.lib]
create_library_set -name libset_fast\
-timing\
[list ../../libs/liberty/FreePDK45_lib_v1.0_typical.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/pllclk.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/ram_256x16A.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/rom_512x16A.lib]
##################################################
# Define the available PVT corners
##################################################
create_rc_corner -name corner_worst_RCMAX\
-pre_route_res 1.2\
-post_route_res {1.2 1.2 1.2}\

November 2023 266 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

-pre_route_cap 1.2\
-post_route_cap {1.2 1.2 1.2}\
-post_route_cross_cap {1.2 1.2 1.2}\
-pre_route_clock_res 0\
-pre_route_clock_cap 0
create_rc_corner -name corner_worst_RCMIN\
-pre_route_res 0.8\
-post_route_res {0.8 0.8 0.8}\
-pre_route_cap 0.8\
-post_route_cap {0.8 0.8 0.8}\
-post_route_cross_cap {0.8 0.8 0.8}\
-pre_route_clock_res 0\
-pre_route_clock_cap 0
##################################################
#Create the timing conditions
#################################################
create_timing_condition -name default_mapping_tc_2\
-library_sets [list libset_fast]
create_timing_condition -name default_mapping_tc_1\
-library_sets [list libset_slow]
##################################################
# Create the possible delay corners
# These are combinations of timing conditions and corners
##################################################
create_delay_corner -name dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_1}\
-rc_corner corner_worst_RCMAX
create_delay_corner -name delay_corner_fast_RCMAX\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_2}\
-rc_corner corner_worst_RCMAX
create_delay_corner -name delay_corner_slow_RCMIN\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_1}\
-rc_corner corner_worst_RCMIN
create_delay_corner -name delay_corner_fast_RCMIN\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_2}\
-rc_corner corner_worst_RCMIN
##################################################
# Define the available constraint types
##################################################
create_constraint_mode -name functional_mode -sdc_files [list ../../design/
dtmf_recvr_core.pr.sdc]
create_constraint_mode -name scan_mode -sdc_files [list ../../design/
dtmf_recvr_core.scan.sdc]
##################################################
# Create the possbile views
# These are combinations of constraints, and delay corners
##################################################
create_analysis_view -name func_slow_RCMAX -constraint_mode functional_mode -
delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX
create_analysis_view -name func_fast_RCMAX -constraint_mode functional_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_fast_RCMAX
create_analysis_view -name func_slow_RCMIN -constraint_mode functional_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_slow_RCMIN
create_analysis_view -name func_fast_RCMIN -constraint_mode functional_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_fast_RCMIN
create_analysis_view -name scan_slow_RCMAX -constraint_mode scan_mode -
delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX
create_analysis_view -name scan_fast_RCMAX -constraint_mode scan_mode -

November 2023 267 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

delay_corner delay_corner_fast_RCMAX
create_analysis_view -name scan_slow_RCMIN -constraint_mode scan_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_slow_RCMIN
create_analysis_view -name scan_fast_RCMIN -constraint_mode scan_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_fast_RCMIN
##################################################
# Turn on the views that you want to use.
# Not all created views need to be used every time.
##################################################
set_analysis_view -setup [list \
func_slow_RCMAX \
func_fast_RCMAX \
func_slow_RCMIN \
func_fast_RCMIN \
scan_slow_RCMAX \
scan_fast_RCMAX \
scan_slow_RCMIN \
scan_fast_RCMIN \
] -hold [list \
func_slow_RCMAX \
func_fast_RCMAX \
func_slow_RCMIN \
func_fast_RCMIN \
scan_slow_RCMAX \
scan_fast_RCMAX \
scan_slow_RCMIN \
scan_fast_RCMIN \
]

Handling TCL Vars in DMMMC Setup

Note the following points for handling Tcl variables:

■ Tcl Variables defined in run.tcl are available in Tempus master.
■ Tcl Variables defined in loadDesign.tcl or sta_dmmmc.tcl will be available in Tempus
clients.
■ Tempus software attributes are available in both master and clients. These global
variables will have an impact on the analysis only when they are set inside the
loadDesign.tcl or sta_dmmmc.tcl file.

■ Variables set by either distribute_command { …} or in interactive mode (enabled with

the set_distributed_mmmc_mode –interactive true setting) will be available or
changed only on Tempus clients.
Note: For more information on interactive mode, refer to sections “Running Interactive
User Interface in DMMMC” and “Interactive ECO on Multiple Views in the Tempus User
Guide.
■ Use the get_distribute_variables command to fetch the value of a Tempus client
Tcl variable from the Tempus master session.

November 2023 268 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Example: Setting Tcl vars on Tempus clients from master

# Create scripts to be run on client/slaves
distribute_command {
set clocks [get_clocks *]
set clock_names [get_object_name $clocks]
set totalClocks [sizeof_collection $clocks]
}
# Fetch client variable as array back to master
# Specify name of client variables w/o '$'
get_distribute_variables "totalClocks clock_names"
foreach viewName [array names totalClocks] {
Puts "View '$viewName' has total '$totalClocks($viewName)' clocks named
'$clock_names($viewName)'"
}
distribute_command {report_timing}

Parasitic Information, Analysis, and Report Generation Script

This script contains commands for SPEF reading, analysis, reporting, and ECO DB
generation (for Tempus ECO flow, if needed).

The commands for reading parasitic information must be specified in the script before the
reporting commands. You must specify parasitic files for all the RC corners. For example:
read_spef -rc_corner corner1 rc1.spef
read_spef -rc_corner corner2 rc2.spef
read_spef -rc_corner corner3 rc3.spef
read_spef -rc_corner corner4 rc4.spef

If the file includes report commands that redirect their output to a specified file (for example,
report_timing >rt.rpt), then the software generates the file in the active view directory
(output directory specified with the distribute_read_design command). For report
commands with no specified redirection, the software generates the report in the
corresponding log file.

This script is loaded using the distribute_views command.

Example: Sample Parasitic Information and Report Generation Script

####################### Script 3 : "sta_dmmmc.tcl" ##########################
read_spef -rc_corner corner_worst_RCMAX ../../design/SPEF/
corner_worst_RCMAX.spef.gz
read_spef -rc_corner corner_worst_RCMIN ../../design/SPEF/
corner_worst_RCMIN.spef.gz
set_db delaycal_enable_si true
################################
# Setup threading
################################
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 2 ;# Not using multiple machines
################################
# Setup some global timer variables

November 2023 269 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

################################
set_db delaycal_enable_si true ;# Turn on SI analysis
set_db si_glitch_enable_report true ;# Turn on glitch analysis
# set_global timing_write_sdf_allow_negative_setuphold_sum true ;# Enable SDF to
have negative delays
################################
# Select report formatting
################################
set_db timing_report_precision 3
set_table_style -name report_timing -max_widths {70}
set_db timing_report_fields {hpin edge cell transition load delay incr_delay
arrival required}
################################
# set timing derates here if you have them
################################
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -cell_delay -data -early 0.82
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -cell_delay -data -late 1.01
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -cell_delay -clock -early 0.9
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -cell_delay -clock -late 1.1
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -net_delay -data -early 0.82
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -net_delay -data -late 1.01
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -net_delay -clock -early 0.9
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -net_delay -clock -late 1.1
update_timing -full
report_constraint -all_violators > rep.vio.gz
report_analysis_coverage > rep.coverage
report_timing -path_type endpoint -max_slack 0 > setup.rpt
report_timing -path_type endpoint -max_slack 0 -early > hold.rpt

Saving and Restoring DMMMC Sessions

You can save and restore distributed MMMC sessions.

The save/restore flow is as follows:

1. The Tempus software reads the distributed MMMC data using the following command:
distribute_read_design -design_script design_load.tcl
2. You can save the design using the following command:
distribute_views -write_design list_of_views (or you can specify all)
The distribute_views -write_design parameter creates N parallel saved design
databases, where N is the number of views specified in the list of views. You can provide
a list of views for which the saved session is required.
3. Start another Tempus master session to restore the above saved sessions. You can also
restore individual saved sessions in a non-distributed Tempus run.
4. You can use the following command to create N Tempus clients, each of which will load
one saved session:

November 2023 270 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

distribute_read_design -read_db list_of_views -read_dir

pathname_of_directory_of_saved_session
5. The -read_db parameter specifies the design views to be restored.

The following script examples show distributed MMMC save and restore flows:

Distributed MMMC Save Flow

The following example saves sessions for N views:

set_distributed_hosts -local | -rsh ...
set_multi_cpu_usage -remote_hosts N
distribute_read_design -design_script design_load.tcl -out_dir Output
set Views [list func_rmax func_rcmin test_rcmax]
distribute_views -views $Views -script analysis.tcl –save_design all

Distributed MMMC Restore Flow

The following example restores saved sessions for N views:

set_distributed_hosts -local
set_multicpu_usage -remote_hosts N
set Views [list func_rmax func_rcmin test_rcmax]

# output is the same directory used in the above example where views were saved.
distribute_read_design -restore_design $Views -restore_dir Output -outdir
new_output
distribute_command {report_timing}

To restore a single view from DMMMC saved session on a single machine environment use
the following commands:
read_db Output/view1.enc.dat <topcell>
report_timing

The Output File Structure

The MMMC commands generate output data in directories as view names inside the
specified output directory. You can specify the output directory in the
distribute_read_design command with the -out_dir parameter. For example, consider
the following scenario:
1. A design containing three views (view1, view2, and view3).
2. Run distribute_read_design –design_script design_load.tcl –outdir
Output command.

3. Specify the following commands in sta_dmmmc.tcl (script-3):

report_constraint -all_violators > rep.vio.gz

November 2023 271 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

report_analysis_coverage > rep.coverage

report_timing -path_type endpoint -max_slack 0 > setup.rpt
report_timing -path_type endpoint -max_slack 0 -early > hold.rpt

The software will generate the following three reports inside each view's directory:
/dmmmc_logs/func_fast_RCMAX/setup.rpt
/dmmmc_logs/func_fast_RCMAX/setup.rpt

All the Tempus client-specific .log/.cmd files reports will be saved in the ./dmmmc_logs
directory. The directory structure is shown in the figure below.

Figure 6-2 Output directory structure in DMMMC mode

Aggregating Timing Reports

After processing the views in distributed mode, segregated reports will be available for each
view in a specific directory that is to be analyzed. One of the prime requirements is to have a
holistic look of all the analysis views for further action.

The merge_timing_reports command can be used to merge reports that are generated
using the reporting commands, such as, report_timing and report_constraint.

November 2023 272 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

You can merge view specific standard timing reports that can be generated using the
report_timing and report_constraints commands.

For GUI-based timing analysis, you can merge view-specific timing reports generated in
machine readable format (using report_timing –output_format gtd command in
analysis.tcl), to create a single merged report, which can be loaded in Tempus Global Timing
Debug (GTD).

Merging of timing reports is done based on slack criticality. As each path will contain the
“view” field that represents the view to which a path belongs, so analysis of critical views
becomes easier.
■ Output generated from the merge_timing_reports command will be saved in a user-
specified output file.

6.3 Performing Concurrent MMMMC Analysis in

DMMMC Mode
By default, the distribute_views command distributes a single view for each Tempus
client. The command can also perform concurrent multi-mode multi-corner (CMMMC) timing
analysis within the DMMMC framework. You can combine the analysis views for CMMMC
analysis on Tempus client(s). This can be done in the following two ways:
■ Delay Corner-Based Auto Grouping:
You can specify a simple list of view names using the distribute_views -view option
and use the -combine_num_views option to specify the maximum number of views to be
combined per Tempus client. For example:
distribute_views -combine_num_views 4 -views {setup1 setup2 setup3
setup4 setup5 setup6 setup7 setup8} -script ...
Assuming setup1 to setup4 to have delay corner dc1 and setup5 to setup8 to have
delay corner dc2, then the above example will group setup1 to setup4 to Tempus
client1, and setup5 to setup8 will be grouped to Tempus client2.

■ User-Controlled View Grouping:

You can specify a list of list formats for combining multiple concurrent views on Tempus
client(s). For example,
distribute_views -views {{setup1 setup2 setup3 setup4} {setup5 setup6
setup7 setup8}} -script ...
The above command will group setup1 to setup4 views to Tempus client1 and will
group setup5 to setup8 views to Tempus client2, irrespective of the delay corner.

November 2023 273 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

To get optimum run time while using view grouping, it is recommended to use delay corner-
based auto grouping, as mentioned in the example above.

6.4 Setting Up MSV/CPF-Based Design in DMMMC

Mode
In this flow, the common power format (CPF) file should not contain any timing related
information. All the library data is present in the viewdefinition.tcl file.

Script -1 (master.tcl):

Same as in non-MSV DMMMC flow.

Script -2 (loadDesign.tcl):

The following points should be noted while migrating to this flow:

1. All the library related data and operating conditions are defined in the viewdefinition.tcl
file.
2. Power domains are created in the power.cpf file. This file should not contain any timing
or operating conditions related information.
3. Timing data and PVT conditions are linked to power domains, by using the
update_delay_corner –power_domain command in the viewdefinition.tcl file.
4. Before reading the CPF, the update_delay_corner command can be used to:
a) Create place-holder domains.
b) Populate domains with appropriate MSV data during CPF loading.

Sample design_load.tcl:
####################### Script 2 : "loadDesign.tcl" #########################
##### View definition file does not have LEFs.
read_physical -lef { ../../libs/lef/FreePDK45_lib_v1.0.lef \
../../libs/MACRO/LEF/pllclk.lef \
../../libs/MACRO/LEF/ram_256X16A.lef \
../../libs/MACRO/LEF/rom_512x16A.lef}
read_mmmc viewDefinition.tcl
set_interactive_constraint_modes functional_mode
# MANUALLY TRANSLATE (WARN-12): Argument '-ignore_undefined_cell' for command
'set_top_module' is obsolete in common UI and is removed.
set_db init_read_netlist_allow_undefined_cells false
read_netlist "../../design/dtmf_recvr_core.v.gz" -top dtmf_recvr_core
init_design
read_def "../../design/full.def"
########################## viewdefinition.tcl ############################

November 2023 274 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

##################################################
# Define the available libraries
##################################################
create_library_set -name libset_slow\
-timing\
[list ../../libs/liberty/FreePDK45_lib_v1.0_worst.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/pllclk.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/ram_256x16A.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/rom_512x16A.lib]
create_library_set -name libset_fast\
-timing\
[list ../../libs/liberty/FreePDK45_lib_v1.0_typical.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/pllclk.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/ram_256x16A.lib\
../../libs/MACRO/LIBERTY/rom_512x16A.lib]

##################################################
# Define the available PVT corners
##################################################
create_rc_corner -name corner_worst_RCMAX\
-pre_route_res 1.2\
-post_route_res {1.2 1.2 1.2}\
-pre_route_cap 1.2\
-post_route_cap {1.2 1.2 1.2}\
-post_route_cross_cap {1.2 1.2 1.2}\
-pre_route_clock_res 0\
-pre_route_clock_cap 0
create_rc_corner -name corner_worst_RCMIN\
-pre_route_res 0.8\
-post_route_res {0.8 0.8 0.8}\
-pre_route_cap 0.8\
-post_route_cap {0.8 0.8 0.8}\
-post_route_cross_cap {0.8 0.8 0.8}\
-pre_route_clock_res 0\
-pre_route_clock_cap 0

##################################################
#Create the timing conditions
#################################################
create_timing_condition -name default_mapping_tc_2\
-library_sets [list libset_fast]
create_timing_condition -name default_mapping_tc_1\
-library_sets [list libset_slow]

##################################################
# Create the possible delay corners
# These are combinations of timing conditions and corners
##################################################
create_delay_corner -name dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_1}\
-rc_corner corner_worst_RCMAX
create_delay_corner -name delay_corner_fast_RCMAX\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_2}\
-rc_corner corner_worst_RCMAX
create_delay_corner -name delay_corner_slow_RCMIN\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_1}\
-rc_corner corner_worst_RCMIN
create_delay_corner -name delay_corner_fast_RCMIN\
-timing_condition {default_mapping_tc_2}\

November 2023 275 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

-rc_corner corner_worst_RCMIN

##################################################
# Define the available constraint types
##################################################
create_constraint_mode -name functional_mode -sdc_files [list ../../design/
dtmf_recvr_core.pr.sdc]
create_constraint_mode -name scan_mode -sdc_files [list ../../design/
dtmf_recvr_core.scan.sdc]

##################################################
# Create the possbile views
# These are combinations of constraints, and delay corners
##################################################
create_analysis_view -name func_slow_RCMAX -constraint_mode functional_mode -
delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX
create_analysis_view -name func_fast_RCMAX -constraint_mode functional_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_fast_RCMAX
create_analysis_view -name func_slow_RCMIN -constraint_mode functional_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_slow_RCMIN
create_analysis_view -name func_fast_RCMIN -constraint_mode functional_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_fast_RCMIN
create_analysis_view -name scan_slow_RCMAX -constraint_mode scan_mode -
delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX
create_analysis_view -name scan_fast_RCMAX -constraint_mode scan_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_fast_RCMAX
create_analysis_view -name scan_slow_RCMIN -constraint_mode scan_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_slow_RCMIN
create_analysis_view -name scan_fast_RCMIN -constraint_mode scan_mode -
delay_corner delay_corner_fast_RCMIN
##################################################
# Turn on the views that you want to use.
# Not all created views need to be used every time.
##################################################
set_analysis_view -setup [list \
func_slow_RCMAX \
func_fast_RCMAX \
func_slow_RCMIN \
func_fast_RCMIN \
scan_slow_RCMAX \
scan_fast_RCMAX \
scan_slow_RCMIN \
scan_fast_RCMIN \
] -hold [list \
func_slow_RCMAX \
func_fast_RCMAX \
func_slow_RCMIN \
func_fast_RCMIN \
scan_slow_RCMAX \
scan_fast_RCMAX \
scan_slow_RCMIN \
scan_fast_RCMIN \
]

Script - 3 (sta_dmmmc.tcl):

This script contains all the SPEF reading, analysis, and reporting commands.

November 2023 276 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

####################### Script 3: "sta_dmmmc.tcl" ##########################

read_spef -rc_corner corner_worst_RCMAX ../../design/SPEF/
corner_worst_RCMAX.spef.gz
read_spef -rc_corner corner_worst_RCMIN ../../design/SPEF/
corner_worst_RCMIN.spef.gz
set_db delaycal_enable_si true
################################
# Setup threading
################################
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 2 ;# Not using multiple machines
################################
# Setup some global timer variables
################################
set_db delaycal_enable_si true ;# Turn on SI analysis
set_db si_glitch_enable_report true ;# Turn on glitch analysis
# set_global timing_write_sdf_allow_negative_setuphold_sum true ;# Enable SDF to
have negative delays
################################
# Select report formatting
################################
set_db timing_report_precision 3
set_table_style -name report_timing -max_widths {70}
set_db timing_report_fields {hpin edge cell transition load delay incr_delay
arrival required}
################################
# set timing derates here if you have them
################################
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -cell_delay -data -early 0.82
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -cell_delay -data -late 1.01
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -cell_delay -clock -early 0.9
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -cell_delay -clock -late 1.1
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -net_delay -data -early 0.82
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -net_delay -data -late 1.01
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -net_delay -clock -early 0.9
set_timing_derate -delay_corner dly_crnr_slow_RCMAX -net_delay -clock -late 1.1
update_timing -full
report_constraint -all_violators > rep.vio.gz
report_analysis_coverage > rep.coverage
report_timing -path_type endpoint -max_slack 0 > setup.rpt
report_timing -path_type endpoint -max_slack 0 -early > hold.rpt
# Merge these reports later in the main script
report_timing -output_format gtd -max_path 10 -max_slack 10
>setup_maxpath_machine.rpt
report_timing -output_format gtd -nworst 1 > setup_nworst_machine.rpt
report_timing -output_format gtd -max_path 10 -max_slack 10 >
hold_maxpath_machine.rpt
report_timing -output_format gtd -nworst 1 > hold_nworst_machine.rpt

6.5 Performing Setup/Hold View Analysis and

Reporting
You can perform view specific analysis and reporting in DMMMC mode.

November 2023 277 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

The script example below demonstrates how to perform view-specific reporting. The following
example shows 4 views. The section in the analysis.tcl script, which is provided as input to
the distribute_views command, generates setup.rpt and hold.rpt reports for two views
each:

Example: Performing view-specific reporting

set mySetupViews "view1 view2"
set myHoldViews "view3 view4"

#Reports For Setup Analysis Views

set currentView [all_setup_analysis_views]
set reportSetup 0
foreach vName $currentView { if { [lsearch $mySetupViews $vName ] != -1 } { set
reportSetup 1 ; break; } }
if { $reportSetup } {

# All Setup View reporting Commands

report_timing -late > setup.rpt}

#Reports for hold analysis views

set currentView [all_hold_analysis_views] ;
set reportHold 0
foreach vName $currentView { if { [lsearch $myHoldViews $vName ] != -1 } { set
reportHold 1 ; break; } }
if { $reportHold } {

## All Hold View reporting Commands.

6.6 Running Single Interactive User Interface in

DMMMC Mode
The Tempus software supports distributed MMMC interactive interface mode. In this mode,
some commands that are run in a master session are also implemented to all the Tempus
clients.

The following are distributed MMMC interactive interface commands:

■ set_distributed_mmmc_mode
■ distribute_command
■ get_distribute_variables

The DMMMC interactive interface is available only after the views have been dispatched to
Tempus clients.

November 2023 278 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

The DMMMC interactive mode is successfully enabled when the Tempus shell prompt
changes from the standard tempus> to tempus_dmmmc>. Once in interactive mode (set using
set_distributed_mmmc_mode –interactive true setting), the commands are no longer
needed to be dispatched using the distribute_command {}, and can be directly run in the
Tempus master session.

The DMMMC interactive mode supports reporting commands, timing constraints, file writing
commands (such as write_sdc) and ECO commands.

The DMMMC interactive interface is available only after the distribute_views commands
are run.

Example: Distributed MMMC Interactive Flow

The following example shows the distributed MMMC interactive flow:

tempus> set viewnames {view01 view02 ...}
tempus> distribute_read_design -restore_design (or you can use distribute_views –
views $viewnames)

# To enable DMMMC interactive mode.

tempus> set_distributed_mmmc_mode -views $viewnames -interactive true

# Displays timing for each selected view on master console.

tempus_dmmmc> report_timing

### Run some ECO commands on interactive views.

# Performs ECO in each view-server independently.
tempus_dmmmc> change_cell -inst U1 -upsize

### Run some reporting commands on interactive views.

# Displays updated timing for each view on the master console.
tempus_dmmmc> report_timing
tempus_dmmmc> report_timing -view view01

# Will turn on all the loaded view-servers for interactive mode.

tempus> set_distributed_mmmc_mode -interactive true -views all

### Apply constraint commands on interactive views.

tempus_dmmmc> set_interactive_constraint_modes [all_constraint_modes –active]
tempus_dmmmc> set_input_delay -clock CK 0.2 {EN}
tempus_dmmmc> set_case_analysis 0 SEL

The distribute_command can be run several times to create a synchronized flow with
multiple commands.

November 2023 279 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

6.7 Running Interactive ECO on Multiple Views in

DMMMC Mode
You can perform the following steps interactively by using the interactive DMMMC feature,
after basic distributed analysis has been performed:
■ Perform What-If ECO and check results from multiple views using -evaluate_all or
evaluate_only parameters of ECO commands.

■ Perform ECO commit operation in Tempus on multiple views in parallel environment.

■ Run get_property query to know the slack and other property values with ECO
commands from multiple views.
■ Save distributed session with ECO.

The above steps can be executed on the interactive prompt, or directly from the master in the
distributed environment.

Example: Interactive ECO Usage in Distributed MMMC Environment on Interactive

prompt

#MultiCore Machine : Local mode (Default)

tempus> set_distributed_host -local

#RSH mode
tempus> set_distributed_host -rsh -add {machine1 machine2}\

OR

#LSF mode useful for getting a machine from a remote farm environment
tempus> set_distributed_host -lsf -queue normal –lsf Resource "OSNAME==Linux &&
OSREL==EE50"
tempus> set_multi_cpu_usage -remote_host 2 -cpu_per_remote_host 8

# Create servers with basic MMMC design

tempus> distribute_read_design -design_script design_load.tcl -out_dir output
tempus> set views [list view01 view02]

# Run analysis script on select views at remote machines

tempus> distribute_views -views $views -script analysis.tcl

# Distribute Interactive Mode commands, scripting, and so on

tempus> set_distributed_mmmc_mode -interactive true -views all

# Get reports back on master console

November 2023 280 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

tempus_dmmmc> report_timing -through [get_cells i2]

# Scripts examples to be run on remote hosts

tempus_dmmmc> set clocks [get_clocks *]
tempus_dmmmc> set clock_names [get_object_name $clocks]
tempus_dmmmc> set totalClocks [sizeof_collection $clocks]

# Perform What-If ECO and check results from multiple views using -evaluate_all / -
eavalute_only options of ECO commands
tempus_dmmmc> change_cell -inst i2 -upsize -evaluate_all
tempus_dmmmc> change_cell -inst i2 -upsize -evaluate_only

# Perform ECO commit operation in Tempus on multiple views in parallel environment

tempus_dmmmc> change_cell -inst i2 -upsize

# Perform get_property query to know slack and other property values with ECO
commands from multiple views
tempus_dmmmc> report_timing -through [get_cells i2]
tempus_dmmmc> set newSlack [get_property [get_pins i2/A] slack_max_rise]
tempus_dmmmc> set_distributed_mmmc_mode -interactive false
tempus> get_distribute_variables newSlack

# Save distributed session with ECO

tempus> distribute_views -write_design all
tempus> puts "Waiting remote servers to exit"

# Merge Analysis reports

tempus> merge_timing_reports -view_dirs {view01 view02} -base_report setup_sta.rpt
-base_dir output > merged_setup.rpt
tempus> merge_timing_report -view_dirs {view01 view2} -base_report hold_sta.rpt -
base_dir output > merged_hold.rpt

LOG Snapshot from Interactive ECO

tempus_dmmmc 13> change_cell -inst i2 -upsize -evaluate_all
Variable ::_dmi_result(view01) on master session updated with value '1'.
Variable ::_dmi_result(view02) on master session updated with value '1'.
### RESULTS FROM VIEW view02 ###
---- Cell: slow/INVX16 (view: view02) ----
Through-object Slack: 1.842
Max Tran Slack: 4.3224
---- Cell: slow/INVX12 (view: view02) ----
Through-object Slack: 1.831
Max Tran Slack: 4.3495
---- Cell: slow/INVX8 (view: view02) ----
Through-object Slack: 1.784
Max Tran Slack: 4.0948
### RESULTS FROM VIEW view01 ###
---- Cell: slow/INVX16 (view: view01) ----
Through-object Slack: 0.542
Max Tran Slack: 4.3224
---- Cell: slow/INVX12 (view: view01) ----

November 2023 281 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

Through-object Slack: 0.530

Max Tran Slack: 4.3495
---- Cell: slow/INVX8 (view: view01) ----
Through-object Slack: 0.484
Max Tran Slack: 4.0948
tempus_dmmmc 14> change_cell -inst i2 -upsize -evaluate_only
Variable ::_dmi_result(view01) on master session updated with value '1'.
Variable ::_dmi_result(view02) on master session updated with value '1'.
### RESULTS FROM VIEW view02 ###
---- Cell: slow/CLKINVX1 (view: view02) ----
Through-object Slack: 1.671
Max Tran Slack: 4.3935
### RESULTS FROM VIEW view01 ###
---- Cell: slow/CLKINVX1 (view: view01) ----
Through-object Slack: 0.371
Max Tran Slack: 4.3935
0

tempus_dmmmc 15> change_cell -inst i2 -upsize

Variable ::_dmi_result(view01) on master session updated with value '1'.
Variable ::_dmi_result(view02) on master session updated with value '1'.
### RESULTS FROM VIEW view02 ###
Resize i2 (INVX1) to CLKINVX1.
### RESULTS FROM VIEW view01 ###
Resize i2 (INVX1) to CLKINVX1.
0
tempus_dmmmc 18> set newSlack [get_property [get_pins i2/A] slack_max_rise]
Variable ::_dmi_result(view01) on master session updated with value '1.3085'.
Variable ::_dmi_result(view02) on master session updated with value '-0.9915'.
0
tempus_dmmmc 21> set_distribute_mmmc_mode -interactive false
tempus 22> distribute_views -save_design all
CPUs with views 'view01 view02' have been enabled for interactive distributed
mmmc mode.
Variable ::_dmi_result(view01) on master session updated with value '1'.
Variable ::_dmi_result(view02) on master session updated with value '1'.
### RESULTS FROM VIEW view02 ###
Writing Netlist "output_di_mmmc/view02/mmmc.enc.dat/mmmc.v.gz" ...
Saving timing graph ...
Saving configuration ...
Saving preference file output/view02/mmmc.enc.dat/enc.pref.tcl ...
Saving parasitic data in file 'output/view02/mmmc.enc.dat/mmmc.rcdb.d' ...
Writing RC database file using in-memory parasitic updation done by ECO commands.
Creating parasitic data file 'output/view02/mmmc.enc.dat/mmmc.rcdb.d/header.da' in
memory efficient access mode for storing RC.

### RESULTS FROM VIEW view01 ###

Writing Netlist "output_di_mmmc/view01/mmmc.enc.dat/mmmc.v.gz" ...
Saving timing graph ...
Saving configuration ...
Saving preference file output/view01/mmmc.enc.dat/enc.pref.tcl ...
Saving parasitic data in file 'output/view01/mmmc.enc.dat/mmmc.rcdb.d' ...
Writing RC database file using in-memory parasitic updation done by ECO commands.
Creating parasitic data file 'output/view01/mmmc.enc.dat/mmmc.rcdb.d/header.da' in
memory efficient access mode for storing RC.

November 2023 282 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

6.8 Important Guidelines and Troubleshooting DMMMC

This section provides information on various kinds of error scenarios.

Specify all the parasitic file loading commands (pertinent to all RC corners used in the design)
in the analysis.tcl (Script 3) script that are accepted as an argument to the
distribute_views command.
■ If distributed MMMC session is not getting launched, you need to check the following:
❑ There are no errors in your design loading file (loadDesign.tcl) that is used as an
argument to the distribute_read_design command.
❑ If the error message “Unable to open socket, connection refused” is
displayed, then check for items listed in bullets ‘c’ to ‘g’. In all these cases, the
DMMMC system will issue the appropriate error/warning messages.
❑ Log on to the machines specified as resources to the DMMMC session. You must
have direct login access to these machines (that is, without requiring a password at
the time of login). Update your rhosts settings to avoid this issue.
❑ Make sure that the specified Tempus clients in the DMMMC setup are not heavily
loaded. Enough resources should be available on each Tempus client to process a
view.
❑ If using LSF mode, then the required LSF variable and environmental settings
should be done prior to the launch. Similarly, for rsh the DMMMC system assumes
you have configured the RSH access to the Tempus client properly.
❑ The commands that are supported beyond timing and noise analysis flow are not
used in the scripts. The MMMC parameters and options related to RC extraction
must be removed from the loadDesign.tcl to run the flow smoothly.
■ The set_analysis_view command is not allowed in any of the scripts that are
accepted as input to the DMMMC system. Specify a list of views using the
distribute_views command. This command will distribute these views internally to the
Tempus clients for processing.
■ All merging commands work on the Tempus master and the output of these commands
will be placed in the specified output file. These merge commands will not follow the
protocol of moving the output reports to the specific output area, as mentioned above.
This applies to any command that is capable of generating an output specific to a view.
■ Single machine MMMC and distributed MMMC cannot be used concurrently in the same
Tempus master session.

November 2023 283 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Timing Analysis

■ DMMMC is a batch mode execution feature - distributed save/restore and interactive

command entry capabilities are supported in Tempus.
■ Merged noise report will not specify the view name for each record of delay/glitch. You
will see multiple entries of records where each record will correspond to a specific
Tempus client. To match the record to a view and make noise reports handy, you need
to generate text reports along with the merged view text report.

November 2023 284 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

7
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

7.1 Tempus Timing Analysis Overview on page 286

7.2 Static Timing Analysis (STA) on page 286
7.3 Distributed Static Timing Analysis (DSTA) on page 286
7.4 Converting STA to DSTA on page 288
7.5 Hardware Recommendations for DSTA on page 289
7.6 Accessing Specific Machines using LSF on page 290
7.7 DSTA Log Files on page 291
7.8 DSTA Operational Tips on page 292
7.9 Distributed Static Timing Analysis Flow on page 295
7.10 Additional Commands Supported in DSTA on page 296
7.11 Commands Not Supported in DSTA Mode on page 299

November 2023 285 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

7.1 Tempus Timing Analysis Overview

The Tempus Timing Analysis tool provides enhanced performance and capacity to real world
designs by using an innovative massive parallel computer architecture. Timing Analysis has
two modes of operation:
■ Static Timing Analysis (STA)
■ Distributed Static Timing Analysis (DSTA)

These are described below.

7.1.1 Static Timing Analysis (STA)

Static timing analysis (STA) refers to a traditional single-machine, multi-threaded use model.
Tempus operates efficiently in the STA model with improved performance due to highly
optimized multi-threaded routines.

To launch Tempus in the GUI environment, use the following command:

tempus -stylus
Use the following command to launch Tempus without the GUI:
tempus -stylus -no_gui

7.1.2 Distributed Static Timing Analysis (DSTA)

Distributed static timing analysis (DSTA) refers to the master/client architecture that fully
leverages multiple threads on master/client processes allowing maximum scalability for
growing and complex designs. Apart from the overall run time reduction, another significant
advantage of the DSTA master/client architecture is the overall per-process memory usage
reduction. The master holds the entire design while each of the clients hold a portion of the
current timing graph.

You must execute the main script on the master machine - work is shared between multiple
client machines.

To launch Tempus in DSTA mode, use the following command:

tempus -stylus -distributed

Distributed Tempus does not have a GUI mode.

To run the DSTA flow, you must specify the following additional commands:

November 2023 286 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

■ set_distributed_hosts
■ distribute_start_clients
■ distribute_partition
Note: All the STA commands are not supported in the DSTA mode. For more details, see
section Commands Not Supported in DSTA Mode on page 299.

Using STA Versus DSTA

The following table describes some of the key features of STA and DSTA:

STA DSTA
■ Utilizes a single machine and supports ■ Utilizes multiple parallel machines and
multi-threading. supports multi-threading.
■ Multi-threaded performance has ■ Leverages large number of less powerful
improved over the earlier machines.
timing analysis solution - Encounter
■ Reduces overall runtime on large
Timing System (ETS).
designs.
■ Maintains signoff accuracy.
■ Reduces per-process memory footprint
■ Ideal for small designs (<15M on large designs.
instances).
■ Maintains signoff accuracy.
■ Requires minor script changes.
■ Ideal for large designs (>15M instances).

The choice of the static timing analysis mode depends on the design size and runtime.
■ A one million instance design may not realize the benefits of DSTA.
■ A 200 million instance design is not possible using a single machine STA.
■ A 15 million instance design may choose STA or DTSA based on runtime expectations.

If you need to reduce the run time, and have already maximized the threading of STA, then
Tempus DSTA is the best choice. Alternatively, if the run time is less than an hour and your
memory requirements are not a limiting factor, then STA should be selected. Running STA on
a large design will cause longer run time and memory usage. Similarly, running DSTA on a
small design will consume processors with no significant gain.

November 2023 287 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

Performance Considerations for STA and DSTA

Use the following to improve performance of static timing analysis:

■ LDB for libraries
■ RCDB for parasitics
■ Pre-defined Tcl constraints
■ Local disks with fast read/write speed

7.2 Converting STA to DSTA

The procedure to convert a STA script to a DSTA script is given below:
■ Run a single view in the STA mode (single machine, 8 threads).
■ Investigate if there are any errors.
■ Read the library file.
■ Read the verilog file.
■ Read the SPEF file.
■ Read constraints.
■ Update timing.
■ Custom reporting.

The table below shows sample scripts for STA and DSTA flows:

STA Script DSTA Script

# Non-distributed script # Distributed script
puts “Starting script: puts “Starting script:
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 4 set_multi_cpu_usage …
set_distributed_hosts …
read_netlist distribute_start_clients
read_libs
set_top_module read_verilog
read_spef read_libs
set_top_module
read_sdc
read_spef
update_timing
report_timing distribute_partition
read_sdc
update_timing
report_timing

November 2023 288 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

The basic scripting rules for DTSA are:

■ You must have at least 2 clients.
■ Use the set_multi_cpu_usage command before starting a client(s).
■ Load parasitics before running the distribute_partition command.
■ Load constraints after the distribute_partition command.

The set_multi_cpu_usage command can be specified as shown below:

set clientCnt 2
set threadCnt 4
set_multi_cpu_usage -cpuPerRemoteHost $threadCnt \
-localCpu $threadCnt -remoteHost $clientCnt

You can specify the LSF parameters using the set_distributed_hosts command:
set_distributed_hosts -timeout 300 -lsf -queue lnx64 \
-args {-n 4 –R “(CPUS>=4) span[hosts=1] rusage[mem=15000]"}

7.3 Hardware Recommendations for DSTA

The following are the guidelines for running DSTA:
■ Start with 4 clients, 8 threads per client. Typically, 4 client DSTA will have half the run time
of a 0 client STA.
■ Add clients for each additional ~15 million instances.
■ All clients must have similar performance architecture. The heterogeneous machines will
result in dissimilar client run times – slowest client dictates overall run time.
■ Memory allocation - 1.5GB peak memory per million instances (master and client).

An example of a 100 million instance design is given below:

■ 5 - 10 machines
■ 8 - 16 CPUs per machine
■ 128 GB RAM per client
■ Run time 3-5 hours

November 2023 289 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

The following table shows reasonable client counts and thread counts for various sizes of
designs:

Design Client Master Resulting

Client
Instance Thread Thread Processor Comments
Count
Count Count Count Count
A few 2 2 2 6 For a small tutorial design
million
20 million 4 4 4 20 -
50 million 4 8 8 40 -
100 million 8 8 8 72 -
200 million 12 8 12 108 ■ Increased client count
saves memory
400 million 12 12 16 160 ■ Increased client count
saves memory

7.4 Accessing Specific Machines using LSF

You can specify the following LSF parameters to use specific machines:
■ To avoid a bad machine, use:
bsub -q ssv -m ssvpe -n 4 \
-R “(hname != sjfsb416) rusage[mem=3000] " "xterm"
■ To target a specific machine, use:
bsub -q ssv -m ssvpe -n 4 \
-R "hname = sjfsb416 rusage[mem=3000] " "xterm"
■ To target a group of machines, use:
bsub -q ssv -m ssvpe -n 4 \
-R "(hname == sjfsb415 || hname == sjfsb416 || \
hname == sjfsb417 || hname == sjfsb418 || \
hname == sjfsb419) rusage[mem=30000] "xterm"

November 2023 290 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

7.5 DSTA Log Files

Master Log

Master logs are unique to DSTA. You can name a log file using the following command:
tempus -log

The default log file name is ./tempus.log. The file naming increments to tempus.log1 in
the next run. If you do not want to increment, but want to overwrite the existing log file, use
the tempus -overwrite command.

The master log shows that the master machine starts the clients, and loads the design. The
client machines do most of the work with constraints, timing, and reports.

Sample Master Log File

--- Running on machine1(x86_64 w/Linux 2.6.18-308.el5) ---
This version was compiled on Sun Sep 1 14:53:30 PDT 2013.
INFO (DSTA-1025): Sourcing /icd/flow/ETS/ETS132/13.20-b059_1/lnx86/share/
tcltools/icd8.5.9/lib/tcl8.5/history.tcl
INFO (DSTA-1025): Sourcing ../blank/run_dsta.tcl
INFO (DSTA-1017): Starting 2 client processes.
INFO (DSTA-1013): Reading verilog file: ./zondammav10gs80.final.v
INFO (DSTA-1600): Loading library file: ./GS80_W_-40_0.92_0.92_CORE.lib.gz
INFO (DSTA-1025): Sourcing ./tim_ets_settings.tcl
INFO (DSTA-1193): Reading spef file: ./zondammav10gs80.spef.maxc_maxvia_-40.gz
INFO (DSTA-1421): After generating partitions: Cpu=00:01:43 Real=00:01:40
Peak_mem=4257meg Cur_mem=4257meg
INFO (DSTA-1020): Running command: update_timing -full
INFO (DSTA-1389): Cond arc const client 1 starts at 1378131471.
INFO (DSTA-1389): Cond arc const client 0 starts at 1378131522.
INFO (DSTA-1389): Cond arc const client 0 all done at 1378131523.
INFO (DSTA-1389): Cond arc const client 1 all done at 1378131523.

Client Log

The client log files are the same as the Tempus STA log files. Each client runs a copy of
Tempus. The client machine has its own directory and log file, as shown below:
partOutput_0/tempus.log
partOutput_1/tempus.log

The log files will increment to tempus.log1 in the next run.

Note: It is possible that you have client logs that are numbered in an unordered manner, as
shown below:

November 2023 291 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

partOutput_0/tempus.log12
partOutput_1/tempus.log6

This is caused due to multiple runs with different number of clients. It is recommended that
you check the time stamp to ensure that the logs are for the specific master/client set.

Sample Client Log File

--- Starting "Tempus Timing Solution v13.20-b059_1" on Mon Sep 2 12:38:07 2013
(mem=70.9M) ---
Server is up on machine1 ( PID=830 )
Multi-CPU acceleration using 4 CPU(s).

Scheduling LEF file(s) ./uc_CS402LND.lef to be loaded when the set_top_module

command is issued.
Scheduling LEF file(s) ./uc_CS402LZD.lef to be loaded when the set_top_module
command is issued.
Scheduling timing library file(s) ./LIB/scIMux_f_worst.lib to be loaded when the
set_top_module command is issued.
Scheduling timing library file(s) ./LIB/scxOpt_f_worst.lib to be loaded when the
set_top_module command is issued.

Set top cell to scTop.

** info: there are 406704 modules.
** info: there are 13891666 stdCell insts.
** info: there are 53 Pad insts.
** info: there are 293926 macros.

<CMD> report_timing
Analyzing view default_emulate_view with delay corner[0]
default_emulate_delay_corner, rc corner[0] ...
All-RC-Corners-Per-Net-In-Memory is turned ON...
Analyzing view default_emulate_view with delay corner[0]
default_emulate_delay_corner, rc corner[0] ...
Analyzing view default_emulate_view with delay corner[0]
default_emulate_delay_corner, rc corner[0] …

7.6 DSTA Operational Tips

Although the operating environment of DSTA is similar to STA, you need to manage the new
operational requirements in the distributed mode to maximize the DSTA performance. This
section provides operating tips for the DSTA environment:

Name the Master and Client Logs

Master
■ To name the master log and overwrite the old log file, use the following command:
tempus -distributed -overwrite -log tempus.log
■ Consider using 4c8t to indicate 4 clients 8 threads, use:

November 2023 292 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

tempus -distributed -overwrite -log tempus_4c8t.log

Client

To avoid randomly numbered log file names, delete, or rename the old directories before the
next run, use the following command:
rm -rf partOutput*

Save the DSTA Logs

Saving the master and client log files allows comparison of various client/thread
configurations and scripts. To save logs, use the following commands:
mkdir saveLog1
cp –rfp tempus*.log pathOutput* saveLog1

Master Log Completion

Add a print message at the end of the script to confirm completion of DSTA.
# Master run.tcl Script
. . .
. . .
puts “All done”

Use a Single run.tcl for both STA and DSTA

You can use a single run.tcl file for both STA and DSTA. This can ensure that there are no
errors when DSTA is selected over STA. This can be done by wrapping the DSTA commands
with a 'if' statement, and allowing STA to skip these commands and DSTA to use them.

For example,
if {[info command distribute_partition] != "" } {
puts "You are using Tempus DSTA“
set_multi_cpu_usage -localCpu 4 -cpuPerRemoteHost 4 -remoteHost 2
} else {
puts "You are using Tempus STA“
set_multi_cpu_usage -localCpu 4
}

When you start Tempus, it automatically triggers the 'if' statement.

November 2023 293 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

Configure the Script for both Batch and Interactive Modes

You can run a script in both the batch and interactive modes without changing the Tcl
commands, by specifying the following in the run.tcl file:
# Master run.tcl Script
. . .
. . .
return ; # Stops the script if it is in the interactive mode but does not exit
exit ; # Exits Tempus if it is in the batch mode

Tracking Master Runtime

You can use the following command to track the start to finish runtime:
# Initalize at the top of the master run.tcl
set initTimeTick [clock seconds]
. . .
. . .
. . .
# Calculate runtime at the bottom of the master run.tcl
set lastTimeTick [clock seconds]
set totalTime [expr $lastTimeTick - $initTimeTick]
set totalMin [format "%4.1f" [expr $totalTime / 60.0]]
puts “The total walltime minutes was: $totalMin minutes”

Tracking Master Memory

You can track the master current and peak memory using the following command:
report_resource

This command will print the resource usage for the master. The following is an example
output:
Cpu=03:02:02 Real=02:31:31 Peak_mem=70502meg Cur_mem=70494meg

Tracking Client Runtime and Memory

To print the resource usage for each client, you can use the following command:
distribute_print_client_usage

This command does not interrupt or wait for whatever the client is currently doing.

A sample output of this command is given below:

INFO (DSTA-1039): Client resource usage:
Client 0: Cpu=00:44:25 Real=01:25:57 Peak_mem=11095meg Cur_mem=9816meg
Client 1: Cpu=00:44:29 Real=01:25:58 Peak_mem=11338meg Cur_mem=10072meg

November 2023 294 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

Client 2: Cpu=00:44:25 Real=01:25:57 Peak_mem=11095meg Cur_mem=9816meg

Client 3: Cpu=00:44:29 Real=01:25:58 Peak_mem=11338meg Cur_mem=10072meg

Monitoring tmp Disk Space

You can measure the /tmp free disk space by inserting the following code at the beginning
and at the end of the script:
set dir /tmp
set a [lindex [lindex [split [exec df -k $dir] \n] end] end-2]
set a [expr {$a / 2.0**20 }]
set localTmpGigs [format "%0.1f" $a ]
puts “The /tmp disk has $localTmpGigs gigs free”

7.7 Distributed Static Timing Analysis Flow

The DSTA flow consists of the following steps:
■ Define and start DSTA clients:
set_multi_cpu_usage ...
set_distribute_host ...
}
distribute_start_clients
■ Load the design. The constraints must be read after the parasitics.
source load_libs.tcl
source load_netlist.tcl
source load_parasitics.tcl
■ Initiate DSTA partitioning:
distribute_partition
■ Load constraints and time the design:
source load_constraints.tcl
update_timing –full
distribute_print_client_usage
■ Generate PBA reports:
set reportName rt_max_200K.rpt.gz
report_timing -late -max_paths 200000 -nworst 1 -path_type \
full_clock -net > $reportName
set reportName rt_max_pba_200K.rpt.gz
set maxPathCnt 200000

November 2023 295 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

set nWorstCnt 1
report_timing -retime path_slew_propagation -max_paths $maxPathCnt \
-nworst $nWorstCnt -path_type full_clock > $reportName

If a pre-defined sorting criteria is not defined, then the timing report output is displayed
in any order.
Note: The path numbers that are assigned to each path in the timing report are not
reported in DSTA output reports.

7.8 Additional Commands Supported in DSTA

The following commands are supported in both non-distributed Tempus and DSTA:
■ write_sdf
■ write_twf
■ read_db
■ write_db
■ report_disk

The use models of write_sdf and write_twf commands are the same for both DSTA and
non-distributed Tempus. The use models of these commands have been modified for DSTA,
as given below:
■ write_db: Allows you to save a snapshot of the design in the distributed timing analysis
mode. All the design data, partitioning information, and client sessions are saved in the
directory specified using the write_db command. The saved data size can be 2 times
the size of the flat saved session due to partition overlap.
■ The command usage of write_db is:
Usage: write_db [-help] <out_dir> [-oa_lib_cell_view {libname
cellname viewname} ] [-no_rc] [-overwrite]
Where -oa_lib_cell_view and -no_rc parameters are not supported in DSTA.
Example
## DSTA setup
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 4 -remote_host 2 -cpu_per_remote_host 4
set_distributed_hosts -local -time_out 300
## Start clients

November 2023 296 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

distribute_start_clients
read_libs
read_netlist
set_top_module
read_spef/read_rcdb
distribute_partition
read_sdc
report_timing
## Save current session
save_design <session> –overwrite
■ read_db: Enables you to restore the analyzed design in the distributed mode for further
reporting (or analysis).
The command usage of read_db is:
Usage: read_db [-help] [-oa_lib_cell_view {libname cellname
viewname}][-physical_data]
Where -oa_lib_cell_view and -physical_data parameters are not supported in
DSTA.
Example
## DSTA setup
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 4 -remote_host 2 -cpu_per_remote_host 4
set_distributed_hosts -local -time_out 300
## restore saved session
read_design distSave -cell <cellname>
## Design is now in fully analyzed state
The number of clients must be same for the saved and restored sessions. The number
of master and client threads can be changed in the read_db from that used in the
write_db.

■ report_disk: Measures the disk metrics of the current working directory and the /tmp
directory. The output of this command allows you to investigate Mb/sec throughput of the
disk and disk I/O requirements. This command is supported in both distributed (DSTA)
and non-distributed Tempus.
The command usage of report_disk is:
report_disk [-help] [-dir directory_name]
Example
dsta> report_disk
DISK_INFO : 206.66 Mb/S 381G total 1.1G used 359G free /tmp
{206.66 381G 1.1G 359G}

November 2023 297 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

dsta> distribute_start_clients -count 2

INFO (DSTA-1017): Starting 2 client processes.
Connected to sjfsb439 39262 1 ( PID=31660 )
Connected to sjfsb439 35186 0 ( PID=31658 )
INFO (DSTA-1019): Received application variables on master.
0
dsta> report_disk
DISK_INFO (Master) : 182.53 Mb/S 381G total 1.1G used 359G
free /tmp
DISK_INFO (Client 0) : 94.90 Mb/S 381G total 1.1G used 359G
free /tmp
DISK_INFO (Client 1) : 104.28 Mb/S 381G total 1.1G used 359G
free /tmp
{182.53 381G 1.1G 359G} {94.90 381G 1.1G 359G} {104.28 381G 1.1G 359G}

Sample Scripts

STA

The following is a sample STA Tcl script:

# Non-distributed script
puts “Starting script:

set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 4
read_netlist
read_libs
read_spef
read_sdc
update_timing
report_timing

DSTA
set clientCnt 4
set threadCnt 2
set lsfQueue ssv
set hostGroup ssvpe
set maxMem 91000
set_multi_cpu_usage -cpu_per_remote_host $threadCnt –local_cpu \
$threadCnt -remote_host $clientCnt
set_distributed_hosts -time_out 300 -lsf \
-queue ${lsfQueue} -args "-m ${hostGroup} -n ${threadCnt} \
-R \"(CPUS>=${threadCnt}) span\[hosts=1\] \
rusage\[mem=${maxMem}\]\""
}
distribute_start_clients

November 2023 298 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

source load_libs.tcl
source load_netlist.tcl
source load_parasitics.tcl
distribute_partition
source load_constraints.tcl
update_timing –full
distribute_print_client_usage
set reportName rt_max_200K.rpt.gz
report_timing -late -max_paths 200000 -nworst 1 -path_type \
full_clock -net > $reportName
set reportName rt_max_pba_200K.rpt.gz
set maxPathCnt 200000
set nWorstCnt 1
report_timing -retime path_slew_propagation -max_paths $maxPathCnt \
-nworst $nWorstCnt -path_type full_clock > $reportName

7.9 Commands Not Supported in DSTA Mode

The following commands are not supported in DSTA mode:

System Commands - Basic Tool-Tcl Commands

■ gui_show
■ gui_hide

General Commands
■ update_inst_name
■ get_metric
■ write_testcase
■ set_preference
■ write_flow_template

Design Import Commands

■ reset_design
■ read_def
■ set_license_check
■ write_def
■ write_rcdb

Multiple-CPU Processing Commands

November 2023 299 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

■ check_multi_cpu_usage

Distributed MMMC Commands

■ distribute_command
■ distribute_design_views
■ distribute_read_design
■ distribute_views
■ exit_serversreset_servers
■ get_distribute_variables
■ reset_distributed_views
■ set_distribute_variables

Timing Constraint Commands

■ write_load

Timing Analysis Commands

■ create_boundary_model
■ create_path_scope
■ gui_show_timing_map
■ get_constant
■ get_propagated_clock
■ merge_scope
■ merge_timing_reports
■ read_boundary_model
■ read_scope
■ read_scope_model
■ read_scope_spef
■ read_scope_verilog
■ report_annotated_assertions
■ report_cell_instance_timing
■ report_clock_sense

November 2023 300 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

■ report_critical_insts
■ report_freq_violation
■ report_lib_cells
■ report_slack_histogram
■ report_statistical_timing_derate_factors
■ report_wire_load
■ write_annotated_transition
■ write_loop_break_sdc

Tcl Interface Commands

■ get_activity
■ get_power

Signal Integrity Commands

■ report_voltage_scaling
■ report_voltage_swing
■ write_noise_eco_nets

Timing Model Commands

■ check_timing_model
■ write_timing_model
■ merge_model_timing
■ report_timing_model

Interface Logic Models - ILM

■ create_ilm_from_files
■ read_ilm
■ set_ilm_mode
■ set_ilm
■ write_ilm

Timing Debug Commands

■ analyze_paths_by_default_path_group

November 2023 301 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

■ analyze_paths_by_bottleneck
■ analyze_paths_by_clock_domain
■ analyze_paths_by_critical_false_path
■ analyze_paths_by_drv
■ analyze_paths_by_hier_port
■ analyze_paths_by_hierarchy
■ analyze_paths_by_view
■ create_path_category
■ delete_path_category
■ write_histogram_view
■ gui_gtd_highlight_timing_report
■ read_path_categories
■ read_timing_debug_report
■ write_path_categories
■ write_category_summary
■ write_text_timing_report

Manual ECO Commands

■ attach_module_portconnect_hpin
■ delete_nets
■ disconnect_hpin

Clock Tree Debugger Commands

■ gui_ctd_close
■ gui_ctd_highlight
■ gui_ctd_open
■ gui_ctd_get_window_id
■ gui_ctd_get_title
■ gui_ctd_set_title

RC Extraction Commands

November 2023 302 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Distributed Static Timing Analysis

■ extract_parasitics
■ write_parasitics
■ report_rcdb
■ report_unit_parasitics

Power Calculation Commands

■ report_unannotated_nets
■ read_activity_map_file
■ propagate_activity
■ read_activity_file
■ report_inst_power
■ report_power
■ report_vector_profile
■ reset_power_activity
■ read_power_db
■ set_default_switching_activity
■ set_dynamic_power_simulation
■ set_instance_temperature_file
■ set_power
■ set_power_analysis_temperature
■ set_power_include_file
■ set_power_output_dir
■ set_twf_attribute
■ set_virtual_clock_network_parameters
■ write_power_constraints
■ write_tcf

Unsupported Parameters

The -tcl_list parameter of all the report_* commands, is not supported in the DSTA mode.

November 2023 303 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

8
Signoff ECO

8.1 Signoff ECO Overview on page 306

8.2 Key Features of Signoff ECO on page 307
8.3 Signoff ECO Flow on page 308
8.4 Setting Up Signoff ECO Environment on page 309
❑ Starting ECO on page 310
❑ Terminating ECO on page 311
8.5 Signoff Optimization Use Models on page 311
❑ Generating ECO Timing DB and Running ECO Timing Closure in Separate
Sessions on page 311
❑ Running Signoff Optimization with ECO Timing Generated in Batch Mode Using
DMMMC on page 313
❑ Running Signoff Optimization with ECO Timing Generated Using CMMMC on
page 313
❑ Parallel Distributed Interactive MMMC Analysis and ECO (PARADIME) Flow on
page 314
❑ Running Signoff Timing/Power Optimization from Innovus on page 320
8.6 Basic Signoff ECO Optimization Techniques on page 323
8.7 Fixing SI Violations in Tempus Signoff ECO on page 326
❑ SI Glitch Violations on page 326
❑ SI Slew Violations on page 327
❑ SI Crosstalk Delta Delay Violations on page 328
8.8 Fixing IR Drop in Tempus Signoff ECO on page 329

November 2023 304 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

8.9 Path-Based Analysis (PBA) Mode Optimization on page 330

8.10 Total Power Optimization on page 331
8.11 Setup Timing Recovery After Large Leakage or Total Power Optimization on
page 332
8.12 Recommendations for Getting Best Total Power Optimization on page 333
8.13 Hierarchical ECO Optimization on page 334
❑ Sample Script for Hierarchical Flow on page 335
❑ Optimization of Master/Clone Designs on page 335
8.14 High Capacity ECO Flow for Timing and Power Closure on page 338
8.15 Generating Node Locations in Parasitic Data on page 345
❑ Using Innovus Engines on page 345
❑ Using Standalone QRC on page 345
❑ Using a Third-Party Tool on page 345
8.16 Optimization Along Wire Topologies on page 346
8.17 Optimization using Endpoint Control on page 347
8.18 Metal ECO Flow on page 350
8.19 Handling Large Number of Active Timing Views Using SmartMMMC on page 351
8.20 Performing Clock Skewing for Setup Timing Closure on page 353

November 2023 305 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

8.1 Signoff ECO Overview

Tempus ECO is a licensed feature available in Tempus to address certain signoff concerns.
Tempus ECO is easy to plug in any Signoff analysis flow and allows the user to clean up the
remaining timing violations as well as reducing the power consumption of the netlist. Also, this
feature allows fixing timing violations on large designs (multi-million instances) with many
analysis views. You can run the ECO feature in Tempus by invoking Tempus using the -eco
option.

In Signoff environment, designers always find some remaining timing violations that must be
cleaned up. These violations can be due to many reasons:
■ Block-level versus top-level timing analysis do not match.
■ Imprecise Timing budgeting, which has generated the setup/hold/drv/cap/glitch
violations.
■ Timing was not optimized across all the analysis views during implementation flow to
avoid over-fixing, and the designer is relying on the Signoff stage to catch final violations.
The final violations are identified at the Signoff stage for which the absolute number can
be slightly different in the implementation flow.
■ Often additional corners and/or modes are added at the time of signoff.
■ There may be timing model differences.
■ Implementation tools cannot optimize timing with full Signoff STA precision.

Instead of back-annotating the timing into the implementation tool, it is much easier to stay in
the Signoff environment and perform various transforms to fix the remaining violations. In the
Signoff stage, the netlist changes committed are written in an ECO file, which will be used in
the implementation tool to perform incremental place and route.

In addition to timing closure, Tempus ECO is also a solution to reduce overall power
consumption of the netlist. At Signoff stage, some amount of timing pessimism is removed
due to Path Based Analysis (PBA), also called as retiming, and that extra timing margin can
be used to perform netlist change leading to overall power reduction. This is especially
beneficial when AOCV or SOCV timing modes are enabled.

Related Topics
■ Key Features of Signoff ECO
■ Signoff ECO Flow
■ Setting Up Signoff ECO Environment

November 2023 306 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

■ Signoff Optimization Use Models

■ Basic Signoff ECO Optimization Techniques

8.2 Key Features of Signoff ECO

The key features of Tempus ECO are as follows:
■ Focus on timing and power optimization while being MMMC-aware, STA Signoff aware,
SI-aware, and Physical-aware (optional).
■ Concurrent and distributed timing analysis. Highly scalable.
■ Supports PBA timing and power optimization to benefit from reduced timing pessimism
■ Targets minimal netlist change for timing closure.
■ Local density and routing congestion will be considered when adding buffers in Physical-
aware mode.
■ Supports MSV designs and hierarchical based designs (including different row height).
■ Supports replicated hierarchies (also named as Master/Clone optimization).
■ Honors all modules/instances/cells/nets/clocks specific attributes.
■ Requires only a single ECO loop to close timing.
■ Supports large capacity in netlist size (>200M gates) and number of active views timed
(>100).
■ Supports multi-threaded ECO optimization, on-route buffering, clock skewing, and
dummy load cell insertion.

Usage of Signoff ECO Features

These features can be used in the scenarios mentioned below to fix timing violations:

Full flat assembled design in hierarchical flow

The goal is to fix the inter-partition timing violations after assembling the design on full flat DB.

In this scenario, the timing violations to be fixed can be large but their number should not be
big. This means that you can have some paths with negative slack because those are inter-
partitions paths, which might not have optimized correctly earlier in the flow. But the number
of such violations is usually not too much because there are not many such paths.

November 2023 307 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Block implementation flow

At the block level, there may be remaining violations at the Signoff stage. This is because one
methodology is to remove any pessimism in the timing constraints used by the
implementation tool, and then rely on the Signoff STA tool to fix the real remaining violations.

In this scenario, since optimization is already performed once in the flow, thus the timing
violations to fix are probably small.

Here the challenge is to perform precise fixing across all analysis views without creating any
new violations.

This is typically where Path Based Analysis mode would be applied in order to allow Power,
Performance, Area push with Signoff timing analysis accuracy.

Related Topics
■ Signoff ECO Overview
■ Signoff ECO Flow
■ Setting Up Signoff ECO Environment
■ Signoff Optimization Use Models
■ Basic Signoff ECO Optimization Techniques

8.3 Signoff ECO Flow

The diagram below shows how Tempus ECO fits in the flow. The design is first loaded in
Tempus for signoff timing analysis. To fix any remaining timing violations, Tempus ECO is
run, which generates an ECO file. That is then taken to the implementation tool to implement
the Tempus ECOs in the design. After the Tempus ECO is implemented, ECO place and route
is done and then the design is re-extracted. The design or Verilog netlist after Tempus ECO
implementation and the re-extracted SPEF files are then brought back into Tempus to run
signoff timing analysis.

November 2023 308 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Figure 8-1 ECO Flow

Related Topics
■ Signoff ECO Overview
■ Key Features of Signoff ECO
■ Setting Up Signoff ECO Environment
■ Signoff Optimization Use Models
■ Basic Signoff ECO Optimization Techniques

8.4 Setting Up Signoff ECO Environment

This topic describes the tasks that you perform to set the ECO environment, and the
commands to start and terminate ECO.

November 2023 309 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

The input and output data, and various fixing methodologies and targets for setting up the
ECO environment are as follows:

Input Data
■ Technology data (timing libraries)
■ Design data (Verilog, MMMC, SPEF)
■ Optional design data (DEF, CPF/UPF, ILM, and LEF)

Timing and Power Optimization Methodology and Targets

■ Uses cell swapping, cell resizing, and buffer/inverter insertion and deletion.
■ Fixes timing violations, such as:
❑ Hold timing
❑ Setup timing
❑ Design Rule (max_cap/max_tran)
❑ SI violations (SI Slew, SI Xtalk and SI Glitch)
❑ Reduces Power and Area:
❑ Area reduction
❑ Leakage power reduction
❑ Dynamic power reduction
❑ Leakage and dynamic power reduction concurrently

Output Data
■ Detailed reporting on all the ECOs being performed.
■ Detailed diagnostic reports on the remaining violations that are not fixed.
■ Standard format ECO file.
■ Final timing summary reports.

Starting ECO

To start a ECO session, type the following command with the appropriate parameters on the
UNIX/Linux command line.

November 2023 310 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

tempus > tempus -stylus -files <file_name> -tso

Terminating ECO

To end a ECO session, type "exit" in the Tempus shell.

Related Topics
■ Signoff ECO Overview
■ Key Features of Signoff ECO
■ Signoff ECO Flow
■ Signoff Optimization Use Models
■ Basic Signoff ECO Optimization Techniques

8.5 Signoff Optimization Use Models

The following section describes the various signoff optimization use models:
■ Generating ECO Timing DB and Running ECO Timing Closure in Separate Sessions
■ Running Signoff Optimization with ECO timing generated in batch mode using DMMMC
■ Running Signoff Optimization with ECO timing generated using CMMMC
■ Parallel Distributed Interactive MMMC Analysis and ECO (PARADIME) Flow
■ Running Signoff Optimization from Innovus

Generating ECO Timing DB and Running ECO Timing Closure in Separate Sessions

ECO Timing DB is a lightweight timing graph built using the design input data. Since this
timing graph is lightweight compared to the complete timing graph and stores only the data
that is required for ECO fixing, it reduces the memory.

Within ECO fixing, Timing analysis is based on the hold and setup light-weight timing graph.
Evaluation and commit time are also reduced when done on light-weight timing graphs.
Therefore, it reduces both memory as well as turnaround time (TAT) significantly.

The write_eco_opt_db command will save the ECO Timing DB after timing analysis, in
non-distributed mode or in a distributed-MMMC session. In case several views are active at

November 2023 311 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

the same time, ECO Timing DB for each of them will be saved. The data will be saved in the
directory pointed to by the set_db opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db option.

Example
tempus > set_db opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db mySignOffTGDir
tempus> write_eco_opt_db

This will save the ECO Timing DB information in the mySignOffTGDir directory.

The write_eco_opt_db command is also supported in the concurrent MMMC analysis

mode. In addition, ECO Timing DB are saved in a directory that contains all active views'
timing graph. So if the ECO Timing DBs are generated in a separate session, you can
assemble them by simply copying into the same directory and use the following naming
convention:
<topModuleName>_<viewName>.tgd and <topModuleName>_<viewName>.ckd

Example

The below figure shows that in Session 1, the clients performing timing analysis in parallel
can be launched on the local machine, but can also be distributed on LSF farm
(set_distributed_hosts -lsf).

Figure 8-2 ECO Timing Closure in Separate Sessions

November 2023 312 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Running Signoff Optimization with ECO Timing Generated in Batch Mode Using
DMMMC

When opt_signoff is called without providing a pointer to ECO Timing DB database

through set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db name , it will automatically generate the
ECO Timing DB in batch mode.

Example of Hold fixing with embedded Distributed timing analysis:

read_libs $liberty
read_physical -lefs $lef
read_netlist $netlist
init_design
source viewDefinition.tcl
read_def $def_file
source spef.tcl
set_distributed_hosts -local
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 8 -remote_host 2 -cpu_per_remote_host 4
opt_signoff -hold

Note: spef.tcl must contain the read_spef or read_parasitics commands so that every
active rc_corner is parasitic annotated.

Running Signoff Optimization with ECO Timing Generated Using CMMMC

For small to medium size designs where not many views are active (below 8), you can
generate ECO Timing DB in CMMMC and perform ECO fixing in one single Tempus session,

Example of Hold fixing with ECO Timing DB generation and ECO fixing in one single Tempus
CMMMC session:
read_libs $liberty
read_physical -lefs $lef
read_netlist $netlist
init_design
source viewDefinition.tcl
read_def $def_file
source spef.tcl
set_distributed_hosts -local
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 8
set_db opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db myEcoTimingDB
write_eco_opt_db
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db myEcoTimingDB
opt_signoff -hold

Note: spef.tcl must contain the read_spef or read_parasitics commands so that every
active rc_corner is parasitic annotated.

November 2023 313 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Parallel Distributed Interactive MMMC Analysis and ECO (PARADIME) Flow

The PARADIME flow allow you to perform various tasks, such as distributed timing analysis,
ECO, and any interactive debugging (such as, reporting, what-if analysis) in a single Tempus
session leading to improved usability of the tool. The licensing requirements for this flow
require Tempus to be invoked with the -eco license option for performing optimization in
addition to the Tempus Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner licensing requirements.

The following diagram shows the launch of the PARADIME flow, where Tempus master is
used for ECO runs and clients are used for timing analysis runs.

Figure 8-3 The PARADIME Flow

Enabling the PARADIME Flow

To enable this flow, you need to make the following setting in the script provided to the Tempus
master.
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco true

November 2023 314 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

In this flow, the number of remoteHost should be equal to number of views.

Running the PARADIME Flow

The Tempus master and clients load the design data for running either of the following flows:
■ Full analysis
■ Restored analysis

Full Analysis Flow

To run the full analysis flow, you need to make the following settings:
distribute_read_design -design_script design_loading.tcl -out_dir output
distribute_views -script report.tcl -views {view1 view2}

Tempus master launches multiple DMMMC clients to load the design data as specified in
design_loading.tcl and run report.tcl in order to perform full timing analysis runs and
generate timing reports. Meanwhile, Tempus master also loads MMMC design for all active
views of interest.

Once the design loading and timing analysis is done on the clients, the software is available
with an interactive dmmmc> prompt with access to live clients. You can do the following:
■ Perform merging of report after full timing analysis run or run manual commands to find
out critical views of interest.
■ Perform interactive querying and debugging on one, few, or all views of clients.

By default, all active views will be specified as setup and hold views for Tempus ECO run on
master. If setup and hold views for Tempus ECO run are different, they can be specified using
the variables below:
set_db eco_setup_view_list "<list of setup views>" # To specify setup views for
ECO run
set_db eco_hold_view_list "<list of hold views>" # To specify hold views for
ECO run

Sample Script
# To configure multiple CPUs
set_distributed_hosts -local set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 8 -remote_host 2
-cpu_per_remote_host 8
# To enable the flow
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco true
# To specify different Tempus version for DMMMC client runs
set_db eco_client_tempus_executable "/icd/flows/142_tempus/bin/tempus"

November 2023 315 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

# Variables to specify list of setup and hold view for Tempus ECO (in case different
than the views restored on clients). By default, all clients’ views will be in
setup/hold view list
set_db eco_setup_view_list "view1"
set_db eco_hold_view_list "view2"
# Variables to specify physical data
set_db eco_lef_file_list "tech.lef design.lef"
set_db eco_def_file_list "design.def"
set_db data_dir /a/b/c
distribute_read_design -design_script design_loading.tcl -out_dir
eco_restore_output_dmmmc
distribute_views -script report.tcl -views {view1 view2}
report_timing > before_ECO.rpt
opt_signoff -hold
report_timing > after_ECO.rpt
The design_loading.tcl script is the following:
read_mmmc <view definition file>
read_netlist design.v
init_design
The report.tcl script is the following:
read_spef <all corner spef files>
update_timing –full
report* commands (optional)

Restored Analysis Flow

In this flow, saved sessions from individual STA runs are restored. These individual SMSC
STA runs have unique view names and are saved in MMMC configuration using a view
definition file with a unique library set, delay-corner, rc-corner, constraint-mode, analysis-
view, and so on. This flow uses the saved SMSC sessions as clients. This is done by setting
up the compatible DMMMC sessions to restore the flow structure, as shown below:
set_db Views [list func_rmax func_rcmin test_rcmax]
distribute_read_design -restore_design $Views -restore_dir
<pathname_of_directory_of_saved_session> -out_dir Output

Alternatively, a way to restore saved SMSC sessions is available if sessions are not saved in
compatible DMMMC restore flow structure. You can provide a list of sessions’ directories and
corresponding view names as input in pairs as mentioned below:
set_db data_dir <unix path>
distribute_read_design -restore_design { {view1 $data_dir/view1/session.enc}
{view2 $data_dir/view2/session.enc} ...{viewN $data_dir/viewN/session.enc} } -
out_dir Output

Same number of clients are required as the number of sessions to be restored. Each saved
session can have data for one MMMC view.

Data from same restored sessions is loaded on the master for all views together. List of setup
and hold views for Tempus ECO run can be specified using the variables below:

November 2023 316 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

set_db eco_setup_view_list “<list of setup views>” # To specify setup views for

Tempus ECO run
set_db eco_hold_view_list “<list of hold views>” # To specify hold views for Tempus
ECO run

All data for master is picked from the saved sessions, including constraints and parasitic
information. Only the libraries are picked from the UNIX path that are given in the view
definition file because the library data is not saved in saved sessions. In the scenario where
there is no common view definition file for restore sessions, you can auto-merge (or
concatenate) all the view definition files, and create a single view definition file (which is the
superset of all the individual sessions’ view definition files) to load on the master.

If there is no common view definition file, you need to do the following settings:
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco_merge_mmmc

Sample Script
# To configure multiple CPUs
set_distributed_hosts -local/-rsh/-lsf … set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 8 -
remote_host 2 -cpu_per_remote_host 8
# To enable the flow
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco true
# To specify different Tempus version for DMMMC client runs
set_db eco_client_tempus_executable "/icd/flows/142_tempus/bin/tempus" -
# Variables to specify list of setup and hold view for Tempus ECO (in case different
than the views restored on clients). By default, all clients’ views will be in
setup/hold view list.
set_db eco_setup_view_list "view1"

set_db eco_hold_view_list "view2"

# Variables to specify physical data

set_db eco_lef_file_list "tech.lef design.lef"

set_db eco_def_file_list "design.def

set_db data_dir /a/b/c

# Restoring SMSC saved sessions (not saved in DMMMC compatible directory structure)
distribute_read_design -restore_design { {view1 $data_dir/setup_view1.enc}
{view2 $data_dir/hold_view2.enc} } -out_dir eco_restore_output_dmmmc
# Interactive DMMMC prompt pre-Tempus ECO
dmmmc> report_timing > before_ECO.rpt

opt_signoff -hold
# Interactive DMMMC prompt post-Tempus ECO

November 2023 317 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

dmmmc> report_timing > after_ECO.rpt

Sample Script with Interactive Commands

# To configure multiple CPUs
set_distributed_hosts -local/-rsh/-lsf … set_multi_cpu_usage -local_Cpu 8 -
remote_host 2 -cpu_per_remote_host 8
# To enable the flow
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco true
# To specify different Tempus version for DMMMC client runs
set_db eco_client_tempus_executable "/icd/flows/142_tempus/bin/tempus" -
# Variables to specify list of setup and hold view for Tempus ECO (in case different
than the views restored on clients). By default, all clients’ views will be in
setup/hold view list.
set_db eco_setup_view_list "view1"
set_db eco_hold_view_list "view2"
# Variables to specify physical data
set_db eco_lef_file_list "tech.lef design.lef"
set_db eco_def_file_list "design.def"
set_db data_dir /a/b/c
# Restoring SMSC saved sessions (not saved in DMMMC compatible directory structure)
distribute_read_design -restore_design { view1 view2 } -restore_dir $data_dir -
out_dir eco_restore_output_dmmmc
# Interactive DMMMC prompt pre-Tempus ECO
dmmmc> report_timing > before_ECO.rpt
# Perform some manual ECOs
dmmmc> eco_update_cell inst1 -up_size
dmmmc> eco_add_repeater -pins inst2/Y -cell BUFX6
dmmmc> set_db opt_signoff_add_inst false
opt_signoff -hold
# Interactive DMMMC prompt pre-Tempus ECO
dmmmc> report_timing > after_hold_ECO.rpt
opt_signoff -setup

Pre-ECO Interactive Shell

After the design loading and analysis (relevant only in full analysis flow) is done on clients,
the interactive prompt is available to user. You can do report merge after full timing analysis
run or run manual commands to find out critical views of interest. Any pre-requisite
commands/setting for Tempus ECO run should be applied by this stage.

Interactive querying and debugging can be done on any number (one, few or all) of clients.
To select few views, use:
distribute_command –views { <list of views to select>} { <list of commands>}

If any command (s) are to run on all views, use:

distribute_command { <list of commands>}

November 2023 318 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Manual ECOs (if any) must be done on Tempus master directly without
distribute_command. Netlist update is done for all clients and master database. Tempus
software detects if manual ECOs are performed using distribute_command and errors out.

Running ECO

When you run ECO file written by Tempus ECO, it is sent automatically to clients for post ECO
signoff timing report generation. On completion of the Tempus ECO run, the master will return
to interactive prompt with access to Tempus clients for signoff timing report generation and
manual what-if analysis. You can also do successive Tempus ECO runs.

Note that running Tempus ECO as part of the paradime flow is different from running normal
ECO (when invoked from outside this flow) where all the set_db attributes are available in
this flow except for the attributes below:
■ opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db: ECO cannot accept pre-generated ECO Timing DB
from outside.
■ opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db: This parameter is ignored and ECO Timing DBs are
stored in DMMMC output directory.

Post ECO, you can generate sign-off reports, debugging, perform manual what-if analysis
and so on.

Post-ECO Interactive Shell

The interactive prompt after ECO is available to the user. It can be used for generating sign-
off reports, debugging, doing manual what-if analysis, and so on. You can also run another
Tempus ECO run at this stage.

Use Model
■ Master does not have any timing information available. There is check in software to
ensure that timer update is never triggered in master session.
■ All timing related queries are to be done from clients using two ways
❑ Use distribute_command in non-interactive mode. You can also make selected
views active in this mode.
distribute_command –views { <list of views | all}

❑ Use set_distributed_mmmc_mode in interactive mode. You can also make

selected views active in this mode.

November 2023 319 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

set_distributed_mmmc_mode[-interactive {true | false} [-views

{list_of_views | all}]]

■ If any command needs to apply to both master and clients, it needs to be specified for
both master and clients using separate commands. For example, if user needs to specify
timing derates, it needs to be done for master as well as clients
❑ For master: Use set_timing_derate….
❑ For clients: Use distribute_command {set_timing_derate …}

Any settings/commands, which affect timing analysis should be applied to clients using
distribute_command { list of commands}

Different Tempus version can be specified for client runs. This is useful in scenarios where
timing analysis and ECO need to be run with different Tempus versions.
set_db eco_client_tempus_executable "tempus executable path"

Running Signoff Timing/Power Optimization from Innovus

Signoff Timing Optimization feature allows you to run timing and power optimization within
Innovus on Signoff parasitic from Quantus QRC and Signoff timing from Tempus. This feature
gives a complete automated solution for using the entire signoff tools through one high-level
super command.

In a good timing closure methodology, at the implementation stage the timing targets that are
set by the signoff Static Timing Analysis (STA) tool should be met. In order to ensure that the
design state is close to sign-off quality, the timing reported by the implementation tool must
correlate as much as possible to the signoff STA tool. From that stage, signoff timing
optimization provides the following features:
■ Allows you to run timing and power optimization on signoff timing within Innovus.
■ Maximizes the usage of Cadence tools - Innovus will enable you to run extraction
(Quantus QRC) and Tempus without extra effort.
■ To provide signoff timing report in Innovus using Tempus, you can use the
time_design_signoff command of Innovus. This command uses Quantus QRC and
Tempus in standalone mode to perform signoff STA using the DMMMC infrastructure and
saves an ECO Timing DB per view. This signoff timing can be optimized using
opt_signoff. Similarly, the opt_signoff command can be used to perform power
optimization on this signoff timing.

The following diagram illustrates the flow and the architecture of each signoff command:

November 2023 320 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Figure 8-4 Signoff Timing Optimization Flow

In case the ECO Timing DB is not available when the opt_signoff command is run, then the
super command will automatically run time_design_signoff, as shown in the figure below:

November 2023 321 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Figure 8-5 Signoff Timing Optimization Flow

Signoff Timing Optimization provides a flexible flow to accommodate any specific

methodology:

If parasitics should be extracted using TQuantus or IQuantus, this can be done manually by
you. Then time_design_signoff can be used with the -report_only option to reuse those
parasitics and skip the Quantus QRC call.

November 2023 322 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

In case specific steps/options should be performed before/during Tempus ECO routing, this
step can be performed manually after running opt_signoff with the -no_eco_route option.

When specific signoff STA commands/options/attributes should be applied, you can set these
in a file and pass it to Tempus through set_db opt_signoff_pre_sta_tcl FILE parameter.

The syntax below is the basic template flow when user runs parasitic extraction and ecoRoute
manually:
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 16 -remote_host 4 -cpu_per_remote_host 4
set_db extract_rc_effort_level high
extract_parasitics
time_design_signoff -report_only -report_dir RPT_initial
time_design_signoff -hold -no_eco_route ecoRoute
extract_parasitics

time_design_signoff -report_only -report_dir RPT_initial

Related Topics
■ Signoff ECO Overview
■ Key Features of Signoff ECO
■ Signoff ECO Flow
■ Setting Up Signoff ECO Environment
■ Basic Signoff ECO Optimization Techniques

8.6 Basic Signoff ECO Optimization Techniques

Tempus ECO is able to optimize timing/DRV/Leakage/Area/Hold/Power/Setup. The main
command to perform those different optimizations is opt_signoff and you can select the
targeted optimization using the following options:
opt_signoff [-area] [-drv] [-dynamic] [-hold] [-leakage] [-power] [-setup]
This command will generate the eco_innovus.tcl file, which should be used in Innovus to
perform place and route. It also generates the eco_tempus.tcl file, which can be sourced in
Tempus to perform timing analysis after ECOs. Each optimization engine always ensures no
new violations. For example, when fixing Setup timing, the tool ensures no new DRV/Hold
violations, or when fixing Hold timing, the tool ensures no new DRV/Setup violations. This is
the key to ensure good timing convergence in a minimum of ECO loops.

Notes before running opt_signoff:

November 2023 323 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

■ It is mandatory to provide parasitic before running opt_signoff. The syntax below

shows how to load the SPEF files for every active RC corner:
read_spef -rc_corner rc_max max.spef.gz
read_spef -rc_corner rc_min1 min1.spef.gz
read_spef -rc_corner rc_min2 min2.spef.gz

To perform SI analysis/fixing, SPEF must contain the coupling capacitance data.

■ All timing derates, AOCV tables, delay calculation settings, CTE attributes must also be
provided before running the opt_signoff since those will the timing updates done
during ECO fixing.
■ It is important to correctly set up the timing environment and multi-CPU settings before
running opt_signoff to avail the benefit of DMMMC timing analysis and Multi-threading
during timing/leakage/area optimization.
■ In case there are filler cells in the design, opt_signoff will automatically delete them at
the start. To implement this, it is mandatory to specify the filler cells that need to be
removed by using the command, set_db add_fillers_cells {{list-of-cells1}
{list-of-cells2} …}.

By default, opt_signoff will use buffering/resizing/swapping techniques to improve timing/

DRC/Leakage/Area. For Setup timing closure, opt_signoff is also able to insert pairs of
inverters. Additionally, sequential elements can also be sized by enabling set_db
opt_signoff_optimize_sequential_cells true and buffer deletion can be enabled
during area recovery by enabling set_db opt_signoff_delete_inst true.

Examples
■ Example 1:
opt_signoff –hold

This will perform Hold fixing by using Vth swapping, buffering, and resizing techniques on the
combinational cells.
■ Example 2:
set_db opt_signoff_optimize_sequential_cells true
opt_signoff –leakage

This will perform Leakage recovery by using Vth swapping technique on both the
combinational and sequential cells.
■ Example 3:
set_db opt_signoff_delete_inst true
opt_signoff –area

November 2023 324 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

This will perform Area recovery by using downsizing on both the combination and sequential
cells in addition to buffer removal.

At the signoff stage, you can optimize all remaining violations, such as DRV, Setup, and Hold,
but also to recover Power or Area when needed. This can be achieved in one single Tempus
session using the incremental optimization feature enabled with set_db
opt_signoff_allow_multiple_incremental true.

Figure 8-6 Examples

Notes about incremental optimization are as follows:

The recommended flow is the one described in Example 2 above. In case, area optimization
is needed, it should be called as the first flow step.

Note that if more Tempus ECOs are done in a session then more routing changes will be
needed when implementing those ECOs and therefore larger is the risk to get timing
degradation.

Each optimization step will output an ECO file so in order to avoid overwriting the previous
one, you should apply a unique prefix for each with the set_db
allow_multiple_incremental prefixName option.

Example
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db ECOdb
set_db opt_signoff_allow_multiple_incremental true
set_db opt_signoff_eco_file_prefix DRV_FIX
opt_signoff -drv

November 2023 325 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

set_db opt_signoff_eco_file_prefix HOLD_FIX

opt_signoff -hold

This will perform DRV fixing followed by Hold fixing, while giving a different prefix for the ECO
files.

Related Topics
■ Signoff ECO Overview
■ Key Features of Signoff ECO
■ Signoff ECO Flow
■ Setting Up Signoff ECO Environment
■ Signoff Optimization Use Models

8.7 Fixing SI Violations in Tempus Signoff ECO

Tempus ECO is able to fix different violations related to SI glitch, SI slew, and SI crosstalk
delta delay.

SI Glitch Violations

A signal integrity noise glitch, also called as voltage bump, generated by crosstalk coupling
can propagate and amplify while traveling along a path. As a result, this glitch can cause
incorrect signal state change. Tempus provides the ability to fix SI glitch violations in Tempus
ECO. This is done using the opt_signoff_fix_glitch attribute of the set_db command.

Syntax:
set_db opt_signoff_fix_glitch true|false

When set to true, the software performs SI glitch fixing during DRV fixing using resizing and
buffering techniques.

The default value is false.

Note:
■ This parameter must also be set during ECO DB generation.
■ The glitch fixing is done before max_tran/max_cap fixing.

November 2023 326 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

■ It is mandatory to set set_db si_glitch_enable_report true and use the

report_noise command to analyse and get a signoff glitch report.

■ In case remaining SI glitch could not be fixed using resizing and buffering techniques, it
is recommended to select those nets and re-route them with extra SI property.

Example

The below example shows fixing Si glitch violations only:

set_db opt_signoff_fix_max_cap false

set_db opt_signoff_fix_max_transition false
set_db opt_signoff_fix_glitch true

The below example shows fixing of SI glitch violations using DRV fixing in addition to regular
max_tran/max_cap violations:
set_db opt_signoff_fix_glitch true
opt_signoff -drv

SI Slew Violations

Crosstalk effects caused by parasitic capacitance between adjacent nets can lead to a larger
signal transition (SI slews) on the victim nets. Tempus provides the ability to consider SI slews
apart from base slews while performing transition violation fixing during DRV optimizations.
All other optimizers that include setup, hold, leakage, area, power, and dynamic do
not consider SI slews. You must run this as the first step of optimization before proceeding for
any other incremental optimization.

This is done using the opt_signoff_fix_si_slew attribute of the set_db command.

Syntax
set_db opt_signoff_fix_si_slew true|false

When this parameter is set to true, the tool checks max_tran rule against SI slew and such
violations will be resolved during DRV fixing using resizing and buffering techniques.

The default value is false.

Note: This parameter must also be set during ECO DB generation in addition to set_db
si_enable_drv_with_delta_slew true.

To analyse and report SI slew violations:

set_db timing_use_incremental_si_transition true
set_db si_enable_drv_with_delta_slew true
report_constraint -drv_violation_type max_transition -all_violators

November 2023 327 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Examples:

The below example shows fixing SI slews violations only:

set_db opt_signoff_fix_max_cap false

set_db opt_signoff_fix_si_slew true

To analyze and report SI slew violations:

set_db timing_use_incremental_si_transition true
set_db si_enable_drv_with_delta_slew true
report_constraint -drv_violation_type max_transition -all_violators

SI Crosstalk Delta Delay Violations

In Tempus when attackers are transitioning opposite the victim, it causes the arrival time to
increase (positive delta delay). And, when attackers are transitioning at the same time as the
victim, it causes the arrival time to reduce (negative delta delay).

Tempus provides the ability to fix crosstalk delta delay in Tempus ECO. This helps in
improving the design robustness, SI-delay fixing convergence, and minimizing the Setup
versus Hold timing conflicts on critical paths.

This is done using the opt_signoff_fix_xtalk parameter of the set_db command.

Syntax:
set_db opt_signoff_fix_xtalk true|false

When set to true, the software reduces the crosstalk on the net that violates the thresholds
set by you.

The default value is false.

Note:
■ This parameter must also be set during ECO DB generation.
■ xtalk delta delay fixing is done after max_tran/max_cap fixing as a separate phase.
■ It is mandatory to set the below SI mode options:
set_db si_delay_separate_on_data true si_delay_delta_annotation_mode
lumpedOnNet

In addition, the following parameters of the set_db command are used to select nets for
xtalk fixing during optimization:

November 2023 328 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

■ To fix the nets with the crosstalk delta delay value equal to or greater than a specified
threshold value:
❑ For setup views: set_db opt_signoff_setup_xtalk_delta_threshold <value
in ns> (default 0.3 ns)

❑ For hold views: set_db opt_signoff_hold_xtalk_delta_threshold <value

in ns> (default 0.3 ns)

■ To fix the nets with the slack threshold value equal to or less than a specified threshold
value:

For setup views:

set_db opt_signoff_setup_xtalk_slack_threshold <value in ns> (default 1000
ns)

For hold views:

set_db opt_signoff_hold_xtalk_slack_threshold <value in ns> (default 1000
ns)

Example

The following example uses DRV fixing to reduce the crosstalk delay on all nets that violated
the 300ps threshold rule in setup views:
set_db opt_signoff_setup_xtalk_slack_threshold 0.3
set_db opt_signoff_fix_xtalk true

opt_signoff -drv

Related Topics
■ Fixing IR Drop in Tempus Signoff ECO

8.8 Fixing IR Drop in Tempus Signoff ECO

Tempus ECO provides the ability to fix IR drop voltages for all instances in the design. The IR
drop files that are generated through rail analysis in Voltus include victim and attacker data
within hotspots and IR drop voltages. The IR drop hotspot information includes victim
instance names, voltage drop, and the current drawn by each of the instances. These IR drop
files are then read into the Tempus-specified directory.

The software picks the worst victim and its attackers from ECO-DB. If the victim is violating
then the attackers with positive slack are identified and downsized to avoid any new timing
violations. Else, non-violating victims are ignored.

November 2023 329 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

To fix IR drop in Tempus ECO, use the opt_signoff_fix_ir_drop and

opt_signoff_read_irdrop_db parameters of the set_db command. When enabling the
opt_signoff_fix_ir_drop parameter along with providing an IR Drop DB using the
opt_signoff_read_irdrop_db parameter, opt_signoff -drv performs an IR drop fixing
by downsizing instances without creating any Setup/Hold/DRV violations.

For more information, refer to the “Timing-aware IR Drop Fixing” section in the Voltus User
Guide.

Related Topics
■ Fixing SI Violations in Tempus Signoff ECO

8.9 Path-Based Analysis (PBA) Mode Optimization

At implementation stage, tools are using the Graph Based Analysis (GBA) mode because
that allows fast turnaround time to analyze timing and to update timing incrementally. The
drawback is that the GBA mode is generating pessimistic timing. At the signoff stage, where
perfect accuracy is needed, you can enable the PBA mode and perform final pass of timing
closure. In addition, it is recommended to run the area or power recovery engine to reach the
best possible Power Performance Area (PPA) metrics. When enabling PBA, each timing path
is timed in its own context so that the slews or AOCV factors are computed based only on the
path being timed.

The following five options are specific to the PBA mode for Tempus ECO:

To enable PBA and select the retiming mode:

set_db opt_signoff_retime #default "none"

To select whether PBA is applied to Setup or Hold or both:

opt_signoff_check_type #default "early"
To specify the maximum slack to be considered for retiming:
opt_signoff_max_slack #default 0
To specify the maximum number of paths to be retimed in total:
opt_signoff_max_paths #default -1

To specify the number of paths to be retimed for each endpoint:

opt_signoff_nworst #default -1

The following is an example of SOCV PBA based Leakage optimization:

November 2023 330 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

read_db -physical_data postroute.enc.dat topChip

<set all signoff STA views>
<apply signoff STA settings/options/globals>
<load parasitic>
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 16
set_db opt_signoff_retime path_slew_propagation
set_db opt_signoff_check_type both
set_db opt_signoff_max_slack 10
set_db opt_signoff_max_paths 5000000
set_db opt_signoff_nworst 50
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high
set_db opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db ECO-DB-PBA
write_eco_opt_db
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db ECO-DB-PBA
opt_signoff -leakage

Note: In above example, the -max_slack option is set to 10 (DB timing unit) so that positive
GBA slack paths are also getting retimed in order to get even more positive setup slack on
those paths. That extra positive slack can be then used to perform even more power recovery.

Related Topics
■ Total Power Optimization
■ Setup Timing Recovery After Large Leakage or Total Power Optimization
■ Recommendations for Getting Best Total Power Optimization
■ Hierarchical ECO Optimization

8.10 Total Power Optimization

ECO performs total power optimization to reclaim total power in the design. This is done using
the -power parameter of the opt_signoff command. Using this parameter, the tool
replaces the need to run the leakage and dynamic power optimizations in consecutive steps.
During Total Power optimization, the engine will concurrently minimize leakage, switching,
and internal power in order to achieve the lowest overall power consumption.

During total power optimization, report_power needs to be run before opt_signoff. The
netlist activity can either be computed using default toggling rate on the inputs or input from
an external VCD/SAIF file. In addition, the software performs swapping and sizing on both the
combinational and sequential cells, and also does buffer removal when enabled.

Example:
report_power
set_db opt_signoff_delete_inst true
set_db opt_signoff_optimize_sequential_cells true
opt_signoff -power

November 2023 331 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

In order to allow sequential elements to be resized during power optimization, ensure that
there is no Fixed attribute applied on them. If you measure Setup timing degradation after
doing a Power optimization, see section Setup Timing Recovery After a Large Leakage
or Power Optimization.

Related Topics
■ Path-Based Analysis (PBA) Mode Optimization
■ Setup Timing Recovery After Large Leakage or Total Power Optimization
■ Recommendations for Getting Best Total Power Optimization
■ Hierarchical ECO Optimization

8.11 Setup Timing Recovery After Large Leakage or Total

Power Optimization
It is quite common to get large number of ECOs generated when doing Power optimization.
This means that 30 percent to 80 percent of the netlist has been changed. Although the tool
is doing an accurate timing estimation for each of the ECOs generated; however, it will not be
able to guarantee zero impact on Setup timing. In order to recover the Setup timing up to an
initial value, a few ECOs might be needed having low or no power cost. This Setup timing
recovery can be achieved by running a new signoff timing analysis and then calling Setup
optimization with set_db opt_signoff_setup_recovery true. The recovery will be done
with Vth swapping only, which means that same size and same pin geometry cell sizing.
Because of this there is no need to re-route the design and final timing can be generated.

Related Topics
■ Path-Based Analysis (PBA) Mode Optimization
■ Total Power Optimization
■ Recommendations for Getting Best Total Power Optimization
■ Hierarchical ECO Optimization

November 2023 332 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

8.12 Recommendations for Getting Best Total Power

Optimization
For Total Power optimization, here are the main recommendations to achieve the best QOR:
■ Timing analysis must be done in PBA mode.
■ Re-timing in PBA mode must be done on positive GBA slack paths.
■ The set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort parameter must be set to high.
■ Ensure that the list of usable cells is as large/rich as possible, and remove any Fixed
placement attribute on the sequential elements to allow their resizing.
■ Verify that all the sequential elements are not Fixed, otherwise they will not be the
candidates for resizing.
■ When doing aggressive Power optimization, a large amount of netlist changes is
generated and the timing histogram attains a huge peak at around 0ns slack.

In this context, the software cannot completely avoid Setup timing degradation and a light
Setup recovery based on the Vth cell swapping will help to get back to the initial timing.
The solution is to perform a setup timing recovery optimization after generating a fresh
signoff timing post-power optimization.

Template Script for Total Power Optimization in Tempus Cockpit

read_db physical_data postroute.enc.dat top
<set all signoff STA views>
<apply signoff STA settings/options/globals >
<load parasitics>
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 16
set_db opt_signoff_allow_multiple_incremental true
set_db opt_signoff_retime path_slew_propagation \
opt_signoff_check_type both \ opt_signoff_pba_effort high \
opt_signoff_max_slack 10 \ opt_signoff_max_paths 10000000 \
opt_signoff_nworst 50 \ opt_signoff_delete_inst true\
opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db ECO-DB-PBA
write_eco_opt_db
report_power
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db ECO-DB-PBA
opt_signoff -power
set_db opt_signoff_max_slack 0 opt_signoff_max_paths 10000000 opt_signoff_nworst
50 \ opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db ECO-DB-PBA2
write_eco_opt_db
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db ECO-DB-PBA2
opt_signoff_setup_recovery true
opt_signoff -setup
update_timing -full

November 2023 333 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Related Topics
■ Path-Based Analysis (PBA) Mode Optimization
■ Total Power Optimization
■ Setup Timing Recovery After Large Leakage or Total Power Optimization
■ Hierarchical ECO Optimization

8.13 Hierarchical ECO Optimization

Very large netlists are usually not implemented flat since the memory usage and runtime
would be too large to be productive. In such a case, you apply a hierarchical flow
methodology, either bottom-up or top-down, where the top-level netlist and the block-level
netlist are implemented in parallel. Once those independent netlists are implemented, you
have to assemble the design to perform signoff timing analysis in full flat mode, meaning that
the entire design is timed. Most of the time this full flat signoff timing analysis will reveal timing
violations on the timing path between top-level and partitions, or even only between partitions.
This can be explained by the fact that the input/ouput timing constraints at the block level
never models the required time from the top level perfectly, but also because at the top level,
each partition is represented by a timing model, which is also never fully accurate. In order to
fix those timing violations, the solution is to run the Tempus ECO feature to perform
hierarchical chip finishing.

On a hierarchical design, you have the flexibility to optimize timing only at the top level, or on
the top-level and block-level netlists. You can apply the dont_touch attribute on the modules
that should not be touched by ECO fixing. The output of the opt_signoff command is an
ECO file for the top level and for each identified partition, so that you can go back to
implement those ECOs in each of the respective netlists.

On a hierarchical design, the buffering happens in logical and physical hierarchy-aware mode.
This also implies that the partitions' interface remain unchanged.

In order to perform hierarchical chip finishing in Tempus, there are two main phases that need
to be correctly set up:
■ Assembling the design
First, the top-level and all block-level verilog must be loaded in Tempus. Then, the
read_hierarchical_def command will merge the top-level DEF and all the block-
level DEF files. Next, the read_spef command loads the top-level SPEF and all block-
level DEFs for every corner.
■ Specifying which modules should be treated as partitions
In order for the tool to know which modules should be treated as partitions, you have to

November 2023 334 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

provide the list of those module cells through an external file. This is done using set_db
opt_signoff_partition_list_file file.

Sample Script for Hierarchical Flow

read_libs $liberty
read_mmmc filename.tcl
read_netlist "my_top.v pnt1.v pnt2.v"
init_design
source timing_settings_and_derating.tcl
read_hierarchical_def "my_top.def pnt1.def pnt2.def"
read_spef -rc_corner rc_max "my_top_max.spef ptn1_max.spef ptn2_max.spef"
read_spef -rc_corner rc_min1 "my_top_min1.spef ptn1_min1.spef ptn2_min1.spef"
read_spef -rc_corner rc_min2 "my_top_min2.spef ptn1_min2.spef ptn2_min2.spef"
set_db opt_signoff_buffer_cell_list "BUFX1 BUFX2 BUFX8 DLYX1 DLYX4"
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db myECODB
set_db opt_signoff_partition_list_file partition.txt
opt_signoff -hold

Note: You must provide the pointer to the ECO Timing database using set_db
opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db since opt_signoff cannot do it in batch mode for
hierarchical designs.

Optimization of Master/Clone Designs

The intent of the Master/Clone design methodology is to build common blocks once and
instantiate them multiple times. It is also called a hierarchical implementation with Master/
Clones. This methodology allows the duplicated functionality within a chip to be built and
verified once, and then instantiated multiple times, thus reducing work load and data storage.
Keeping a non-uniquified netlist makes the scope and breadth of late logic changes easier.
The logic changes would then be limited to a subset of the chip, reducing the critical path
turnaround time and amount of re-verification required to achieve final signoff.

A cloned block is implemented so that it can operate in the worst-case corner scenario in any
of its instantiation but once assembled in its top level, the full flat STA might reveal new timing
violations. Master/Clone timing optimization is needed because each clone can have:
■ Different physical environments (such as different IO loads )
■ Different timing environments (such as change in clock slew/skew/OCV between blocks
and flat)
■ Different signal integrity environments

The Master/Clone timing optimization capability in Signoff ECO is able to fix timing violations
and optimize timing in the replicated modules while earlier those would have been treated as
dont_touch. Any netlist change will be checked against each clone’s timing and physical

November 2023 335 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

context to ensure that no violations are created. Some of the benefits of Master/Clone timing
optimization are:
■ Top and CPUs are optimized

■ One ECO file for all CPUs

■ Generated ECOs are valid for each CPU's timing context
■ Optimal timing closure for full flat timing

The use model for running ECO timing closure on a hierarchical design with unique or
replicated instances is the same.

Figure 8-7 : Illustration of Master Clone Implementation

■ Physical/timing context is different for every clone boundary

■ Timing optimization works on any kind of path:

November 2023 336 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

❑ from FF1 to FF2 on all clones or inter-clones paths too (if any)
❑ from Top/T1 to Block1/FF1 and from Top/T1 to Block2/FF2
❑ from Block/FF2 to Top/Z1 and from Block/FF2 to Top/Z2
❑ Paths crossing multiple clones such as Block1/FF2 to Block2/FF1
■ Buffering can happen on any of the nets, even the nets crossing the clone boundary

The Master/Clone use model for a design with 2 clones block 1 and block 2 is given below:
read_libs $liberty
read_physical -lefs "$techno_lef $all_lef"
read_netlist "my_top.v cellA.v"
init_design
read_hierarchical_def "my_top.def cellA.def"

Instead of the above commands, you can specify the command:

read_db physical_data top.enc.dat my_top
source viewDefinition_and_derating.tcl
read_spef -rc_corner rc_max “my_top_max.spef cellA_max.spef”
read_spef -rc_corner rc_min1 “my_top_min1.spef cellA_min1.spef”
read_spef -rc_corner rc_min2 “my_top_min2.spef cellA_min2.spef”
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db myECODB
set_db opt_signoff_partition_list_file partition.txt
Content of partition.txt is:

cellA
set_db opt_signoff_optimize_replicated_modules true
opt_signoff -hold

To run this flow, you must do the following:

■ Specify the opt_signoff_optimize_replicated_modules true attribute of the
set_db command to optimize timing in the replicated modules. This also enables
leakage optimization in the Master/Clone mode. When this command is specified, a
single ECO file is generated for each set of clone.
■ Specify an ECO Timing database using set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db since
opt_signoff cannot generate it automatically when the design is hierarchical.

■ When replicated instances have different orientations, the design must be assembled in
Tempus because loading one full flat DEF/Verilog will not work. Or you can also load an
assembled DB from Innovus.

Related Topics
■ Path-Based Analysis (PBA) Mode Optimization
■ Total Power Optimization

November 2023 337 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

■ Setup Timing Recovery After Large Leakage or Total Power Optimization

■ Recommendations for Getting Best Total Power Optimization

8.14 High Capacity ECO Flow for Timing and Power

Closure
The High Capacity ECO flow is used to perform timing and power closure on large netlists.
This flow allows huge reduction of the database being used during ECO phase, and therefore
reduces the memory peak and runtime significantly.

Based on the user-defined settings, the database is reduced using any of the following
methods:
■ Reduction based on the timing violations seen during STA (Setup/Hold/DRV).
■ Reduction based on list of partitions to be optimized for inter or intra timing paths.
■ Reduction based on the user-defined path groups and list of DRV violated nets or pins.

To use this flow, Tempus ECO follows two approaches:

■ Run STA in independent Tempus sessions (SMSC or C-MMMC or D-MMMC) in order to
collect the ECO timing DB. And, then run an ECO session (MMMC) with Physical data
to perform timing/power closure. This methodology is known as the Two Sessions flow.
In this flow, the settings must be provided during the STA sessions before performing
ECO DB generation in order to decide on what criteria the database should be reduced.
Note: This methodology also allows supports D-STA for ECO timing DB generation.

The following figure describes the different flow steps required for the user to complete initial
STA for ECO DB generation, ECO physical-aware timing/power closure, ECO implementation
at block and top only levels, and final STA with ECO implemented.

November 2023 338 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Figure 8-8 Steps for Completing STA

Step 1: Run full flat timing analysis and ECO DB generation for each view.

Step 2: Physical aware timing closure in MMMC mode on reduced violating zone database.

Step 3: Implement ECOs independently at top-level and block-level in P&R tool.

Step 4: Run full flat final timing analysis.

■ Run Tempus Paradime, which will boot Tempus clients (one per view) and each client
collects data so that the master session can run ECO fixing in MMMC mode with Physical
data to perform timing/power closure. This methodology is known as the Paradime flow.
In this flow, the settings must be provided before the distributed design loading on clients
in order to decide on what criteria the database should be reduced.

The following figure describes the different flow steps required for the user to run Tempus
Paradime for ECO physical aware timing/power closure, ECO implementation at block and
top only levels, and final STA with ECO implemented.

Figure 8-9 Steps for Running Tempus Paradime

Step 1: Start Paradime with Physical data on saved sessions, and select the desired sub-
part of the design to focus on (for example, top-only, or some partitions, or some path groups,
or some endpoints..)

November 2023 339 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Step 2: Implement ECOs independently at top-level or block-level in P&R tool.

Step 3: Run full flat final timing analysis.

In order to use the flow set up, below are the templates for the Two Sessions and Paradime
flows, which uses three different database reduction mode:

Template 1: The Two Sessions flow to perform full chip Hold timing closure on a reduced
database based on timing violations seen during STA. You can decide to enable GBA or PBA
mode.

Session1: The STA session can be SMSC, MMMC, or D-MMMC.

<load_design_logical_mode_with_SPEF>
set_db opt_signoff_enable_high_capacity_eco true
set_db opt_signoff_retime path_slew_propagation
set_db opt_signoff_max_path 5000000
set_db opt_signoff_nworst 50
set_db opt_signoff_max_slack 0
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high
set_db opt_signoff_save_eco_opt_db HC-ECO-DB
set_db power_dynamic_power_view setup_ss_1p170v
set_db opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db HC-ECO-DB
write_eco_opt_db

Session2: The ECO DB directory must be provided in the script before the design is loaded.
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 32
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db HC-ECO-DB
read_physical -lefs {../libs/lef/FreePDK45_lib_v1.0.lef\ ../libs/MACRO/LEF/
pllclk.lef \ ../libs/MACRO/LEF/ram_256X16A.lef \ ../libs/MACRO/LEF/
rom_512x16A.lef }
read_mmmc viewDefinition.tcl
read_netlist “top.v blockA.v blockB.v”
init_design
set_db add_fillers_cells_<options>
read_hierarchical_def top.def blockA.def blockB.def
<load SPEFs>
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high
set_db opt_signoff_partition_list_file partition.txt
set_db opt_signoff_optimize_replicated_modules true
opt_signoff –hold

Template 2: The Two Sessions flow to perform inter-partition Hold timing closure on a
reduced database based on user-defined partition during STA.

November 2023 340 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

Session1: The STA session can be SMSC, MMMC or D-MMMC.

<load_design_logical_mode_with_SPEF>
set_db opt_signoff_enable_high_capacity_eco true
set_db opt_signoff_inter_partition {blockA blockB}
set_db opt_signoff_intra_partition {}
set_db opt_signoff_retime path_slew_propagation
set_db opt_signoff_max_path 5000000
set_db opt_signoff_nworst 50
set_db opt_signoff_max_slack 0
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high
set_db opt_signoff_save_eco_opt_db HC-ECO-DB
set_db power_dynamic_power_view setup_ss_1p170v
set_db opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db HC-ECO-DB
write_eco_opt_db

Session2: The ECO DB directory must be provided in the script before the design is loaded.
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 32
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db HC-ECO-DB
read_physical -lefs {../libs/lef/FreePDK45_lib_v1.0.lef\ ../libs/
MACRO/LEF/pllclk.lef \ ../libs/MACRO/LEF/ram_256X16A.lef \
../libs/MACRO/LEF/rom_512x16A.lef }
read_mmmc viewDefinition.tcl
read_netlist “top.v blockA.v blockB.v”
init_design
set_db add_fillers_cells_<options>
read_hierarchical_def top.def blockA.def blockB.def
<load SPEFs>
set_db opt_signoff_inter_partition {blockA blockB}
set_db opt_signoff_intra_partition {}
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high
set_db opt_signoff_partition_list_file partition.txt
set_db opt_signoff_optimize_replicated_modules true
opt_signoff –hold

The same template can be used to perform inter-partition Power recovery.

Template 3: The Two Sessions flow to perform DRV, Setup, Hold timing closure on a reduced
database based on user-defined Setup/Hold path_groups and list of DRV pins during STA.

Session1: The STA session can be SMSC, MMMC or D-MMMC.

<load_design_logical_mode_with_SPEF>
<TCL script which creates mySetupPG and myHoldPG path_groups>

November 2023 341 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

set_db opt_signoff_enable_high_capacity_eco true

set_db opt_signoff_include_setup_path_groups {mySetupPG}
set_db opt_signoff_include_hold_path_groups {myHoldPG}
set_db opt_signoff_select_drv_pin_file {myDRVPinList.txt}
set_db opt_signoff_retime path_slew_propagation
set_db opt_signoff_max_path 5000000
set_db opt_signoff_nworst 50
set_db opt_signoff_max_slack 0
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high
set_db opt_signoff_save_eco_opt_db HC-ECO-DB
set_db power_dynamic_power_view setup_ss_1p170v
set_db opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db HC-ECO-DB
write_eco_opt_db

Session2: The ECO DB directory must be provided in the script before the design is loaded.
set_multi_cpu_usage -localCpu 32
set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db HC-ECO-DB
read_physical -lefs {../libs/lef/FreePDK45_lib_v1.0.lef\ ../libs/MACRO/LEF/
pllclk.lef \ ../libs/MACRO/LEF/ram_256X16A.lef \ ../libs/MACRO/LEF/
rom_512x16A.lef }
read_mmmc viewDefinition.tcl
read_netlist “top.v blockA.v blockB.v”
init_design
set_db add_fillers_cells_<options>
read_hierarchical_def top.def blockA.def blockB.def
<load SPEFs>
set_db opt_signoff_include_setup_path_groups {mySetupPG}
set_db opt_signoff_include_hold_path_groups {myHoldPG}
set_db opt_signoff_select_drv_pin_file {myDRVPinList.txt}
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high
set_db opt_signoff_partition_list_file partition.txt
set_db opt_signoff_optimize_replicated_modules true
opt_signoff –drv; opt_signoff –setup; opt_signoff -hold

Template 4: The Paradime flow to perform full chip Hold timing closure on a reduced
database based on timing violations from the STA clients. You can decide to enable GBA or
PBA mode.

The STA saved session can be SMSC or MMMC.

set_distributed_hosts -local -time_out 10000
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 24 -remote_host 4 -cpu_per_remote_host 4
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco true

November 2023 342 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco_merge_mmmc
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -enable_high_capacity_eco
set_db eco_setup_view_list {setup_1v setup_2v setup_3v setup_4v}
set_db eco_hold_view_list {hold_1v hold_2v hold_3v hold_4v}
set_db eco_dynamic_view {setup_3v} ; set_db eco_leakage_view {setup_3v}
set_db eco_lef_file_list “tech.lef std.lef ram_256X16A.lef"
set_db eco_def_file_list “top.def blockA.def blockB.def "
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -set_filler_mode {-corePrefix FILL}
distribute_read_db -restore_design all -restore_dir PARADIME_SESSIONS_211/ -
out_dir reports_Paradime
set_db opt_signoff_retime path_slew_propagation
set_db opt_signoff_max_path 5000000
set_db opt_signoff_nworst 50
set_db opt_signoff_max_slack 0
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high
set_db opt_signoff_partition_list_file partition.txt
set_db opt_signoff_optimize_replicated_modules true
opt_signoff –hold

Template 5: The Paradime flow to perform inter-partition Hold timing closure on a reduced
database based on user-defined partition seen on the STA clients.

The STA saved session can be SMSC or MMMC. Same template can be used to perform
inter-partition Power recovery.

set_distributed_hosts -local -time_out 10000

set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 24 -remote_host 4 -cpu_per_remote_host 4
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco true
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco_merge_mmmc
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -enable_high_capacity_eco
set_db opt_signoff_inter_partition {blockA blockB}
set_db opt_signoff_intra_partition {}
set_db eco_setup_view_list {setup_1v setup_2v setup_3v setup_4v}
set_db eco_hold_view_list {hold_1v hold_2v hold_3v hold_4v}
set_db eco_dynamic_view {setup_3v} ; set_db eco_leakage_view {setup_3v}
set_db eco_lef_file_list “tech.lef std.lef ram_256X16A.lef"
set_db eco_def_file_list “top.def blockA.def blockB.def "
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -set_filler_mode {-corePrefix FILL}
distribute_read_db -restore_design all -restore_dir PARADIME_SESSIONS_211/ -
out_dir reports_Paradime
set_db opt_signoff_retime path_slew_propagation
set_db opt_signoff_max_path 5000000

November 2023 343 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

set_db opt_signoff_nworst 50
set_db opt_signoff_max_slack 0
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high
set_db opt_signoff_partition_list_file partition.txt
set_db opt_signoff_optimize_replicated_modules true
opt_signoff –hold

Template 6 : The Paradime flow to perform DRV, Setup, Hold timing closure on a reduced
database based on user-defined Setup/Hold path_groups and list of DRV pins.

The STA saved session can be SMSC or MMMC.

Related Topics
■ Signoff ECO Flow
■ High Capacity ECO Flow for Timing and Power Closure
■ Metal ECO Flow
set_distributed_hosts -local -time_out 10000
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 24 -remote_host 4 -cpu_per_remote_host 4
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco true
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco_merge_mmmc
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -enable_high_capacity_eco
set_db opt_signoff_path_group_file_name {TCL script which creates mySetupPG and
myHoldPG path_groups}
set_db opt_signoff_include_setup_path_groups {mySetupPG}
set_db opt_signoff_include_hold_path_groups {myHoldPG}
set_db opt_signoff_select_drv_pin_file {myDRVPinList.txt}
set_db eco_setup_view_list {setup_1v setup_2v setup_3v setup_4v}
set_db eco_hold_view_list {hold_1v hold_2v hold_3v hold_4v}
set_db eco_dynamic_view {setup_3v} ; set_db eco_leakage_view {setup_3v}
set_db eco_lef_file_list “tech.lef std.lef ram_256X16A.lef"
set_db eco_def_file_list “top.def blockA.def blockB.def "
set_distributed_mmmc_mode -set_filler_mode {-corePrefix FILL}
distribute_read_db -restore_design all -restore_dir PARADIME_SESSIONS_211/ -
out_dir reports_Paradime
set_db opt_signoff_retime path_slew_propagation
set_db opt_signoff_max_path 5000000
set_db opt_signoff_nworst 50
set_db opt_signoff_max_slack 0
set_db opt_signoff_pba_effort high

November 2023 344 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

set_db opt_signoff_partition_list_file partition.txt

set_db opt_signoff_optimize_replicated_modules true
opt_signoff –drv; opt_signoff –setup; opt_signoff -hold

8.15 Generating Node Locations in Parasitic Data

To be able to use set_db opt_signoff_along_route_buffering true, the parasitic must
contain information about the node location. You can generate the location of nodes in the
parasitic data using the following modes:
■ Using Innovus Engines
■ Using Standalone QRC
■ Using Third-Party Tool
Note: Once you have the SPEF file containing the node locations, you can load them using
the -starN option of the read_spef command.

Using Innovus Engines

Generating node locations is done by default using the Innovus RC/TQuantus/

IQuantus engines. The information is saved automatically inside the RCDB file.

Using Standalone QRC

You can generate SPEF along with node locations using the following option in the QRC
command file:
output_db -type spef -subtype standard -disable_subnodes false

Note: Use the following command to pass a command file to Quantus QRC when running it
from the Innovus cockpit.
set_db extract_rc_qrc_cmd_file <file>

Using a Third-Party Tool

You can use a third-party tool to generate SPEF with node locations.

Example:

The syntax below shows how node locations are saved in a SPEF file. A SPEF file with the
node locations has extra lines with the *N prefix in the CONN section.

November 2023 345 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

*CONN
*I *15488:z O *C 71.65 237.505 *L 0 *D MUX2_X1
*I *15465:D I *C 73.035 236.08 *L 0.00316 *D SDFFR_X1
*N *907:2 *C 72.675 236.95 //CDNZ 1
*N *907:3 *C 72.675 236.95 //CDNZ 2
*N *907:4 *C 72.675 235.76 //CDNZ 2

Related Topics
■ Optimization Along Wire Topologies

8.16 Optimization Along Wire Topologies

By default, buffers are inserted only at the start or/and end points of a net. This limits the
scope of timing optimization, especially for DRV and Setup optimizations. So to improve the
delay of a net, Tempus needs to split the net/pin load and that can only be done efficiently if
buffers are added along the route. In addition, this change would also allow buffers to be
added at the branching point in case the net has multiple fanouts. Once the buffer is
inserted somewhere along the route, the tool precisely estimates the new parasitic for the
current and newly created net by using the node location information from the parasitic
database.

To enable this feature, there are two prerequisites:

Use set_db opt_signoff_along_route_buffering true.

To provide parasitic with node location (See section, Generating Node Locations in Parasitic
Data on page 345)

In addition, when enabling this feature, the setup timing optimization will be able to insert pairs
of inverter along the route, if that is seen as a better choice for timing closure compared to
single buffer insertion.

Example:
set_db opt_signoff_along_route_buffering true
opt_signoff –drv

This will perform DRV fixing in a mode where buffering will also be able to insert buffers along
the route topology.

Related Topics
■ Generating Node Locations in Parasitic Data

November 2023 346 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

■ Optimization using Endpoint Control

8.17 Optimization using Endpoint Control

Tempus ECO supports the following ways for path group-based fixing:
1. Endpoint-based inclusion/exclusion per view
2. Endpoint-specific slack adjustment per view (both positive and negative adjustments)
3. Option to fix only register-to-register paths

Path group support for Tempus ECO can be used for hold or setup fixing.
Note: This feature is currently not supported for DRV or leakage optimization.

1. Endpoint-based inclusion/exclusion per view

You can specify endpoints that need to be included or excluded during the optimization for a
view with the following set_db attributes:
■ opt_signoff_select_hold_endpoints
■ opt_signoff_select_setup_endpoints

File format:
<View> include/exclude <Endpoints>

<View> can be specified as either viewName or V* (if the endpoints are to be included/
excluded for all views)

<Endpoints> can be specified in three ways:

■ As space-separated list of endpoint names: for example, E1 E2 E3.

■ Slack range in nanosecond: <minSlack> <maxSlack>, where all endpoints with the
slack greater than or equal to minSlack and slack less than or equal to maxSlack will be
included/excluded, for example, -2.0 -1.0.
■ E*, if all endpoints for the view need to be included/excluded.
Note:
■ When few pins are excluded from the view, those pins cannot be included back even after
overriding the excluded pins, as shown in the below example:
> V* exclude E*

November 2023 347 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

> V* include inst/FF/D

■ Tempus default behavior refers to the inclusion of all pins for the view, as shown below:
> V* include E*

■ Wildcards cannot be used for including/excluding pins, as shown in the below example:
> V* include inst/FF/*
> V* include inst*/FF/D

■ You can set exclude endpoints one by one without using any wild card.

Sample configuration files

The lines starting with # are comments and will be skipped.

File : hold_exclude_example
# Exclude endpoints EXECUTE_INST/pc_acc_reg/SE and EXECUTE_INST/
read_prog_reg/SE from view core+typ-rcMin for hold fixing
core+typ-rcMin exclude EXECUTE_INST/pc_acc_reg/SE EXECUTE_INST/
read_prog_reg/SE
File : hold_include_example_with_range
# Include only the endpoints that have slacks >= -0.5 ns and <= 0.04
ns for view core+best-rcTyp for hold fixing
core+best-rcTyp include -0.5 0.04

2. Endpoint-specific slack adjustment per view

You can specify slack adjustment (margin) for selected endpoints during optimization for a
view with the following set_db attributes:
■ opt_signoff_set_hold_endpoints_margin
■ opt_signoff_set_setup_endpoints_margin

File format:
<View> <Margin> <Endpoints>

<View> can be specified as either viewName or V* (if the endpoints are to be included/
excluded for all views)

<Margin> is specified as a float value in nanosecond. Margin value is subtracted from the
endpoint slack, so a positive margin means that the endpoint slack would be degraded by the
margin amount.

<Endpoints> can be specified in three ways:

November 2023 348 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

■ As space-separated list of endpoint names: for example, E1 E2 E3.

■ Slack range in nanosecond: <minSlack> <maxSlack>, where all endpoints with the
slack greater than or equal to minSlack and slack less than or equal to maxSlack would
be included/excluded: for example, -2.0 -1.0.
■ E* if all endpoints for the view need to be included/excluded.

Sample configuration files

The lines starting with # are comments and would be skipped.

File : hold_margin_allViews_slackRange_example
# Apply margin of 0.1 nanosecond to all endpoints that have slacks between -0.07
to -0.03 for all hold views
V* 0.1 -0.07 -0.03
File : hold_margin_allEndPoints_example
# Apply margin of 0.2 nanosecond to all endpoints for hold view core+typ-rcMin
core+typ-rcMin 0.2 E*
File : hold_margin_selectedEndPoints_example
# Apply margin of 0.6 ns to endpoints TDSP_CORE_MACH_INST/phi_6_reg/SE and
TDSP_CORE_MACH_INST/phi_1_reg/SE for hold view core+best-rcTyp
core+typ-rcMin 0.6 TDSP_CORE_MACH_INST/phi_6_reg/SE TDSP_CORE_MACH_INST/
phi_1_reg/SE

3. Option to fix only register-to-register paths

You can choose to optimize timing/leakage/area only on register-to-register paths during

opt_signoff with the options specified below. Other path group configurations will be
ignored in this mode. The timing for non-register-to-register paths for fixing mode (hold or
setup) will be adjusted to 0, but the timing for other mode (setup during hold fixing/hold during
setup fixing) is not affected.
set_db opt_signoff_optimize_core_only <true/false>
read_spef <all corner spef files>
update_timing –full
report* commands (optional)

In addition to timing closure, Tempus ECO is also a solution to reduce overall power
consumption of the netlist. At Signoff stage, some amount of timing pessimism is removed
due to Path Based Analysis, also called retiming, and that extra timing margin can be used to
perform netlist change leading to lesser overall power. This is especially beneficial when
AOCV or SOCV timing mode are enabled.

Related Topics
■ Optimization Along Wire Topologies

November 2023 349 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

8.18 Metal ECO Flow

The Metal ECO flow, also known as Post-Mask flow supports the Gate Array filler cells. Using
this flow, the timing closure engine performs the netlist change without touching the base
layer mask.

Before starting metal ECO, perform the following sanity checks:

■ All instances of the design must be placed (no unplaced instance allowed).
■ The initial design placement density must be 100%, that is no empty spaces left.
■ The list of Gate Array filler cells must contain enough granularity to ensure that any empty
space created during metal ECO can be filled back.
■ Do not specify cells through setTieHiLoMode if Tie cell insertion is not allowed.

The following command is used to run the metal ECO flow:

set_db opt_signoff_post_mask true

The software performs the following netlist changes:

■ Inserts the Gate Array buffers or an inverter pair in place of existing Gate Array filler cells.
■ Resizes regular cells to Gate Array cells. It also resize Gate Array cells to Gate Array
cells.
■ Deletes a regular cell.

The software automatically identifies the Gate Array cells by checking which library instances
have the same SITE name as the Gate Array filler cells specified by the user. Here, empty
spaces will be filled up by the Gate Array filler cells to ensure 100% placement density.

By default, the opt_signoff_post_mask parameter is set to false.

The following command lists all the Gate Array filler cells, which can be deleted or inserted
back:

set_db opt_signoff_post_mask_gate_array_filler_cells
{<list_of_Gate_Array_filler_cells_name>}

Note that this parameter is applicable in metal ECO mode only.

Note:
■ The Metal ECO flow is supported by DRV, Setup, and Hold fixing.

November 2023 350 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

■ When set_db add_tieoffs_cells {{<tieLo_name> <tieHi_name>}} setting is

used, this flow will insert the TieLo cells to connect dangling input pins, in case the
existing TieLo cells in the floorplan are extremely far or too overloaded.

Example:

The following command enables Hold fixing in the metal ECO mode by allowing the listed
Gate Array filler cells to be deleted or inserted during the ECO process.
tempus> set_db opt_signoff_post_mask true
tempus> set_db opt_signoff_post_mask_gate_array_filler_cells
{GFILL1BWP GFILL2BWP GFILL4BWP GFILL10BWP}
tempus> opt_signoff -hold

Related Topics
■ Signoff ECO Flow
■ High Capacity ECO Flow for Timing and Power Closure
■ Generating Node Locations in Parasitic Data

8.19 Handling Large Number of Active Timing Views

Using SmartMMMC
The SmartMMMC feature handles a large number of active timing views. This feature is used
to enable reduced memory and runtime solution when many timing views are enabled during
timing or power ECO fixing stage.

To enable the SmartMMMC feature in the two sessions flow, use the below attributes of the
set_db command:

■ opt_signoff_create_smart_mmmc_db true|false: Enables saving the additional

compact timing information in the ECO DB directory during the STA session. When set
to true, the parameter must be applied before the write_eco_opt_db command and
has no effect on opt_signoff.
Example:
The following command saves the regular timing and additional compact timing
information in the ECO DB directory named EcoTimingDB in the STA SMSC
session.
tempus> set_db opt_signoff_write_eco_opt_db
EcoTimingDB

November 2023 351 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

tempus> set_db opt_signoff_create_smart_mmmc_db true

tempus> write_eco_opt_db

■ opt_signoff_read_smart_mmmc_db <dirName>: Points Tempus ECO to the ECO DB

directory containing the additional compact timing information during the ECO fixing
session. This parameter must be set before the design is loaded and must point to an
ECO DB directory, which was previously generated through write_eco_opt_db using
the setting, set_db opt_signoff_read_smart_mmmc_db true.
Note: Before opt_signoff, you still need to point to the ECO DB directory using
the setting, set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db <dirName>.
Example:
The following command loads the design with a minimized set of data to reduce the
memory or runtime during an ECO fixing stage when many timing views are
enabled, and performs Setup timing closure in the ECO MMMC session.
tempus > set_db opt_signoff_read_smart_mmmc_db
EcoTimingDB
tempus> <load_design>
tempus> set_db opt_signoff_read_eco_opt_db EcoTimingDB
tempus> opt_signoff -setup

To enable the SmartMMMC feature in the Paradime flow, use the below parameters of the
set_distributed_mmmc_mode command:
■ set_distributed_mmmc_mode:

❑ -enable_smart_mmmc: when this is enabled, it must be applied before the design is

loaded in Paradime and set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco true should be set.
Example:
The following commands enable design loading in Paradime with the minimized set
of data to reduce the memory or runtime during ECO fixing stage when many timing
views are enabled, and performs Setup timing closure.
tempus > set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu 16 -remote_host 4 -
cpu_per_remote_host 4
tempus > set_distributed_mmmc_mode -eco true
tempus > set_distributed_mmmc_mode -enable_smart_mmmc
tempus > set_db opt_signoff_retime path_slew_propagation
tempus > set_distributed_mmmc_mode -merge_view_definitions
tempus > set eco_setup_view_list “<list_of_Setup active_views>”
tempus > set eco_setup_view_list “<list_of_Hold active_views>”
tempus > set eco_lef_file_list “<list_of_LEF_files>”
tempus > set eco_def_file_list “<list_of_DEF_files>”

November 2023 352 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

tempus > distribute_read_db -read_db

all -read_dir PARADIME_SESSIONS/ -out_dir reports_Paradime
tempus > opt_signoff -setup

Related Topics
■ High Capacity ECO Flow for Timing and Power Closure

8.20 Performing Clock Skewing for Setup Timing

Closure
Tempus ECO provides the ability to fix clock paths in order to fix the remaining setup timing
violations. If the data path is fully optimized, the software uses useful skew, which includes
two methods: early clock and late clock. This either reduces the launch clock delay or
increases capture clock delay. The Tempus ECO engine can advance and delay clock arrival
time to improve setup timing while not creating any new hold timing violations.

Below are the key features of a skew engine:

■ Advanced clock tree manipulation to allow larger flexibility for clock skewing
■ Sizing, deletion, and buffering (includes inverter pair and load cell) at any clock tree level
■ Concurrent data path and clock path optimization for optimal timing closure
■ Sophisticated push-pull weight and timing bottleneck-based engine

November 2023 353 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Signoff ECO

■ Support for max level skewing to avoid excessive padding using set_db
opt_signoff_clock_max_level <value>

Note: It is mandatory to provide a list of clock cells that are allowed to be used on the clock
tree. Those cells can be inverter, buffer, or any other combinational cells used as clock gaters.

Example:
set_db opt_signoff_clock_cell_list {CKBUFX1 CKBUFX4}
set_db opt_signoff_allow_skewing true
opt_signoff -setup

The above commands perform clock skewing during setup fixing. Only CKBUFX1 and CKBUFX4
can be added to the clock tree.

Related Topics
■ Signoff Optimization Use Models
■ Hierarchical ECO Optimization

November 2023 354 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9
Timing Model Generation

9.1 Extracted Timing Models on page 356

9.2 Boundary Models on page 400
9.3 SmartScope Hierarchical Analysis on page 413
9.4 Prototype Timing Modeling on page 421
9.5 Interface Logic Models on page 431

November 2023 355 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.1 Extracted Timing Models

9.1.1 Overview on page 357
9.1.2 ETM Generation on page 358
9.1.3 ETM Generation for MMMC Designs on page 360
9.1.4 Slew Propagation Modes in Model Extraction on page 360
9.1.5 Basic Elements of Timing Model Extraction on page 361
9.1.6 Secondary Load Dependent Networks on page 374
9.1.7 Characterization Point Selection on page 375
9.1.8 Constraint Generation during Model Extraction on page 377
9.1.9 Parallel Arcs in ETM on page 381
9.1.10 Latency Arcs Modeling on page 382
9.1.11 Latch-Based Model Extraction on page 382
9.1.12 Model Extraction in AOCV Mode on page 383
9.1.13 Stage Weight Modeling in ETM on page 383
9.1.14 AOCV Derating Mode on page 384
9.1.15 PG Pin Modeling During Extraction on page 385
9.1.16 Extracted Timing Models with Noise (SI) Effect on page 386
9.1.17 Extracted Timing Models with SOCV on page 387
9.1.18 Merging Timing Models on page 387
9.1.19 Limitations of ETM on page 389
9.1.20 Validation of Generated ETM on page 393
9.1.21 Auto-Validation of ETM on page 396
9.1.22 ETM Extremity Validation on page 397
9.1.23 Limitations/Implications of EV-ETM on page 399
9.1.24 Ability to Check Timing Models on page 399

November 2023 356 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.1.1 Overview
Timing model extraction is the process of extracting the interface timing of hierarchical blocks
into a timing library. Typically, model extraction has the following advantages:
■ Reduces the memory requirements by generation of extraction timing models (ETMs) for
respective blocks, which may be huge in size.
■ Reduces the static timing analysis (STA) run time.
■ Hides the proprietary implementation details of the block from a third-party.

The write_timing_model command is used to build a timing model (.lib) of a digital block
to be used with a timing analyzer. The extraction of the "actual" timing context for a lower-level
module instance is required for achieving timing convergence with large hierarchical design
databases. The timing analyzer has the following advantages while analyzing timing
extracted models instead of a complete block design:
■ Provides the timing engine capability to allow for quick derivation of a module's timing
context.
■ Extracts data correctly across multiple clock domains.
■ Allows merging of various models in various modes for their respective blocks.

You can start with model extraction with the following data loaded in the software:
■ Design netlist
■ Timing libraries
■ Block context (constraints, such as, clocks, path exceptions, operating conditions etc.)
■ RC data of the nets

The following diagram illustrates this flow:

November 2023 357 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Figure 9-1 ETM Flow

9.1.2 ETM Generation

ETM represents the timing for interface paths. Input to flop/gate, input to output and flop/gate
to output paths of a design are preserved as timing arcs in the ETM. If there are multiple
clocks capturing the data from an input port then an arc with respect to each input port is
extracted.

The flop-to-flop type of paths are not written in the ETM, as these do not affect the interface
paths timing.

The following figure shows the equivalent ETM for a given netlist:

November 2023 358 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Figure 9-2 Equivalent ETM for a given netlist

The following figure shows the extracted model:

Figure 9-3 Extracted Model

The extracted timing model is context-independent because it gives the correct value of arcs/
delays, even with varying values of input transitions, output loads, input delays, or output
delays. In such cases, it is not required to re-extract the model if some of the context is
changed at a later stage of development.

However, the model depends upon the operating conditions, wire load models, annotated
delays/loads, and RC data present on internal nets defined in the original design. So if these
elements change at the development stage of design then we need to re-extract the model
for correlation with the changed scenario.

November 2023 359 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.1.3 ETM Generation for MMMC Designs

In MMMC configuration, for generating ETM, only one view should be active. If you need to
generate ETM for a specified view, however, the view is not active in setup as well as hold
mode, then the software will show an error. It is a prerequisite that the view should be active
for both setup and hold analysis. You can use the set_analysis_view –setup
{$viewName} –hold {$viewName}command before running the write_timing_model
command to achieve this.

After model extraction for MMMC designs, the dumped assertion files will be added with
${viewName} suffix, and the dumped derate related assertion files will be added with
${delayCornerName} prefix. You need to choose the corresponding file while using the
extracted models.

9.1.4 Slew Propagation Modes in Model Extraction

Model extraction supports worst slew and path-based slew propagation modes. These are
described below.
■ Worst Slew Propagation
In worst slew propagation mode, the worst of all the slews coming at a convergent point
is propagated for characterizing the delay of an arc.
■ Path-Based Slew Propagation
In path-based slew propagation mode, the slew in the actual path is propagated.

The slew propagation mode can be controlled by using the

timing_extract_model_slew_propagation_mode attribute. The default value of this
attribute is worst_slew.

An example of slew propagation is given below.

In worst slew propagation mode, for characterizing both A-Z and B-Z delay arcs, the worst
slews S1 and S2 will be propagated to calculate the delay of logic downstream to the AND
gate.

November 2023 360 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

In path-based propagation mode, the slew S1 will be propagated to characterize the A-Z arc,
whereas S2 will be propagated to characterize the B-Z arc.

9.1.5 Basic Elements of Timing Model Extraction

The following basic elements are relevant to model extraction:
■ Nets – internal and boundary nets
■ Timing Paths - check and delay paths – in2reg, in2out, and reg2out paths
■ Minimum Pulse Width and Period Checks
■ Path Exceptions – false, multi-cycle, min delay, max delay, disable timing
■ Constants
■ Unconstrained Paths
■ Clock Gating Checks
■ Annotate Delays, Slews, and Load
■ Design Rules
■ Clocks - created clocks and generated clocks

These are explained in the following sections.

Nets

Nets can mainly be classified into two types – boundary nets and internal nets. The nets
which are directly connected to the input or output ports of the block are termed as the
boundary nets. The nets which drive and are driven by some internal instance pin of the block
are termed as the internal nets. Model extraction treats both the nets differently as boundary
nets are always related and connected to the context.
■ Boundary Nets
The boundaries are connected to the context. So the RC data for them may change if the
context of the block changes at a later stage. To be better context independent the model
should not consider SPEF or DSPEF data for their delay calculation and a separate
SPEF/DSPEF file for the boundary nets can be stitched to the top level data while
instantiating the extracted model.
Note: Currently, the software does not output the SPEF file for boundary nets which can
be used at the top level. To solve this problem, you need to create the top level SPEF file

November 2023 361 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

for boundary nets of this block or use the default behavior to consider the boundary nets
RC data for model extraction.
■ Internal Nets
As the internal nets connect the pins for the internal instance of the block, they are in no
way dependent on the context environment. So the RC data defined for the internal nets
is used as it is for delay calculation and is added in the extracted paths. If no RC is
defined for these nets, then the wire load models are used to calculate their delays.
However, if a load or resistance is annotated using the set_load/set_resistance
command, then it will override the annotated SPEF or the applied wire load model.
If the nets are annotated with the delays using the set_annotated_delay command
or SDF annotation, then the annotated delay is used instead of the calculated delays. In
case of incremental delays the addition of calculated and incremental delays is used.

Timing Paths

Timing paths are broadly divided in four types:

■ In2reg
■ reg2out
■ in2out
■ reg2reg: The reg2reg paths are not relevant to the model extraction process.

These are described below.

■ In2Reg Paths
A In2reg path is a setup/hold check that starts from an input port and is captured at a flop
or gating element by a clock. So the in2reg type of paths are captured in equivalent setup
or hold checks. The setup/hold values to be written in ETM are calculated using the data
path delay, the setup/hold value of the library cell and the clock path delay. The equations
can be written as follows.
Setup arc value = data path delay (input to flop) + setup value of flop – clock path delay
(clock source to clk pin)
Hold arc value = data path delay (input to flop) - hold value of flop – clock path delay
(clock source to clk pin)
The value for these arcs is the function of the transition on the input port and the
transition at the clock source. If a flop is captured by multiple clocks then separate setup/
hold arcs are extracted with respect to each clock source.

November 2023 362 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ Reg2out Paths
The reg2out paths are paths starting from a register and ending up on an output port.
These paths are a combination of trigger arcs (of starting register) and the combinational
delay from sink of trigger arc to the output port. So for such paths an equivalent trigger/
sequential arc is modeled in the extracted model. The delay for the arc will be equal to:
Sequential arc delay = delay (clock source to CK of register) + delay (register CK pin to
out port).
The delay for these arcs is a function of the slew at the clock source and the capacitance
at the output port. As the extracted model can be used for max as well as min analysis,
two arcs are preserved in the model to represent the longest and the shortest
path. Different types (rising_edge/falling_edge) of arcs are extracted for the different
valid clock edges.
■ In2Out Paths
The in2out paths are the path starting from an input port and ending up on an output port.
These paths are pure combinational paths. So for such paths an equivalent
combinational arc is modeled in the extracted model. The delay for the arc will be equal
to:
Combinational arc delay = delay (delay of all elements in the path)
The delay for these arcs is a function of the slew at the input port and the capacitance at
the output port. As the extracted model can be used for max as well as min analysis, two
arcs are preserved in the model to represent the longest and the shortest combinational
path. In case if no path exists for a particular transition (rise/fall), half unate
(combinational_rise /combinational_fall) arcs will be extracted. The timing sense for the
arc will depend on the function of worst (early/late) paths.

Minimum Pulse Width and Period Checks

The minimum pulse width and period constraints defined at the CK pin of the registers are
transferred to the clock source pins during model extraction.

There may be several different type of registers in the fanout of a clock source. So while
transferring the minimum pulse width to the clock source you can use the worst values
present on the fanout registers. The pulse width is calculated as:
■ pulse width = MAX(Arrival time of Launch clock Path - Arrival time of Capture Clock Path
+ pulse width at clock pins from library)

The minimum period for any clock pin is calculated in the same way as the minimum pulse
width. The minimum period is calculated as:

November 2023 363 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ Min Period = MAX(Arrival time of Launch clock Path - Arrival time of Capture Clock Path
+ Min Period at clock pins from library)

These checks can be modeled in the following three ways:

■ Library Attribute
■ Scalar Tables
■ Arc-Based Modeling

These are explained below.

Library Attribute
By default, these checks are written as library attributes in ETM.
pin (CLKIN2 ) {
clock : true ;
min_period : 2.0554;
min_period : 2.6248;
min_pulse_width_low : 0.2773;
min_pulse_width_high : 0.7673;
}
If min_period checks corresponding to both rise and fall transitions are present in a
design, then they wiil be modeled as duplicate entries in ETM when written as library
attributes. To avoid duplicate entries we can model these checks as scalar tables or arcs,
where rise and fall transition of min_period checks can be modeled as shown in
following sections. These arcs will be honored by the timer depending on the context,
hence will be more accurate.

Scalar Tables
If the timing_extract_model_write_clock_checks_as_scalar_tables
attribute is set to true, then these checks will be written as scalar tables as shown below:
pin (CLKIN2 ) {
clock : true ;
timing() {
timing_type : minimum_period ;
rise_constraint (scalar){
values( " 2.0554");
}
fall_constraint (scalar){
values( " 2.6248");
}
related_pin :" CLKIN2 ";
}

November 2023 364 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

timing() {
timing_type : min_pulse_width ;
rise_constraint (scalar){
values( " 0.7673");
}
fall_constraint (scalar){
values( " 0.2773");
}
related_pin :" CLKIN2 ";
}
}

Arc-Based Modeling
These checks can also be written as arcs by setting the
timing_extract_model_write_clock_checks_as_arc attribute to true. In this
case the resulting arc is the function of rise/fall slew of CLK port, hence delay and slew
propagation of the clock network for rise and fall transitions is considered for writing these
arcs. The arc-based modeling of clock-style checks is more accurate and is
recommended for use.
pin (CLKIN2 ) {
clock : true ;
timing() {
timing_type : minimum_period ;
rise_constraint (lut_timing_2 ){
values(" 2.000, 2.000, 2.000, 2.000, 2.000, 2.000, 2.000");
}
fall_constraint (lut_timing_2 ){
values(" 2.000, 2.000, 2.000, 2.000, 2.000, 2.000, 2.000");
}
related_pin :" CLKIN2 ";
}
timing() {
timing_type : min_pulse_width ;
rise_constraint (lut_timing_2 ){
values("0.767, 0.767, 0.767, 0.767, 0.742, 0.087, 0.100");
}
fall_constraint (lut_timing_2 ){
values("0.201, 0.201, 0.201, 0.201, 0.238, 0.247, 0.2636");
}
related_pin :" CLKIN2 ";
}
}

Path Exceptions

Timing extraction flow honors path exceptions defined in the given constraints' file. Typically,
the following path exceptions are used:

November 2023 365 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ set_false_path
■ set_multicycle_path
■ set_min_delay
■ set_max_delay

For more information on handling of these exceptions, refer to section “Constraint Generation
during Model Extraction”.

Constants

The case analysis and constants are propagated while extracting a model. When you specify
the set_case_analysis command, you can use the following attribute to control how
constants, propagated at o/p or bi-di ports, are modeled in ETM:
set timing_extract_model_case_analysis_in_library true (or false)

When set to false, the software models the propagated or applied constants to output ports
in the generated constraints’ file (which is generated using the write_timing_model -
assertions command).

When set to true, the software models the propagated constants to output ports written as
pin functions in the extracted model.

Unconstrained Paths

The unconstrained end points exist when proper launch/capture clock phase is not
propagated at the desired endpoint due to any exceptions. The unconstrained input ports due
to false path exceptions are ignored and are not modeled during ETM extraction. The
unconstrained combinational IO paths due to false path exceptions are ignored and are not
modeled during ETM extraction. The unconstrained trigger arcs are calculated during ETM
extraction.

Clock Gating Checks

If integrated clock gating (ICG) cells are used for gating the clocks, then these arcs are
preserved as setup/hold arcs. If combinational cells are used for gating, then these arcs will
be preserved as no-change arcs between a clock pin and its enabling signal pin. If you wish
to extract these checks as regular setup/hold checks, you can set the
timing_extract_model_gating_as_nochange_arc attribute to false.

Depending on the type of clock gating situation, no change checks are inferred as follows:

November 2023 366 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Figure 9-4 no_change Checks Modeling

Simple Clock Gating with AND or Logic

The following diagram shows clock gating AND/OR logic:

A simple AND gate check will be as follows:

timing () {
timing_type: nochange_high_high;
}
timing () {
timing_type: nochange_low_high;
}

Note: After extracting the clock gating check arc the signal downstream the gate output is not
propagated to the clock pins of the registers.

November 2023 367 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Clock Gating with Blackbox or Unknown Logic

In case of clock gating with unknown logic, as shown below, no_change checks will be
checked with respect to both the rising edge and the falling edge of the clock signal.

No Clock Gating Logic

There are some gates, such as multiplexers or XOR gates, where a clock signal cannot
control the clock gate, as shown below.

In such cases, no checks are inferred so you need to explicitly set the gating check if you want
these interface paths to be extracted in the ETM. To know where static timing analyzer will not
infer the gating in such situations, you can use the following command:
check_timing -check_only clock_gating_controlling_edge_unknown –verbose

Annotate Delays, Slews, and Load

Model extraction uses the back annotated delay slews and the load information during the
extraction process and reflect the effect in the extracted model. Here is a small description
how these are used.
■ Annotated Delays
The annotated delays using SDF or the set_annotated_delay command override
the calculated delay (from library or RC data) value for the arc; however, the output slew
for the arcs is used as calculated. In case of incremental delays the delta delay is added
to the calculated arc delay.
■ Annotated Slews
Annotated slews are ignored during timing model extraction. These constraints are
dumped in assertions file generated with the write_timing_model -assertions
parameter.

November 2023 368 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ Annotated Load
Annotated load overrides the pin capacitance defined in the library, and is used for delay
calculations.
Note: The annotated delays are generated with a particular context and remain true for that
context (transition times) only. So annotating the delays/slews makes the model context
dependent. So to create a context independent model it is recommended not to annotate the
SDF.

Design Rules

Model extraction uses the design rules defined in the library. The worst (smaller for max
design rules and vice-versa) among all the fanout pins (topologically first level) is used for the
input ports and the worst of all the fanin pins (topologically first level) is used for the output
ports.

If design rule limits are defined at the pin and library level, the design rule from the pin is
chosen, rather than the worst of the pin and library level, because the pin level information
overrides the cell level, which in turn overrides the library level information. If design rule
violations (DRV) are coming from the constraints, then you can choose them based on the
following setting:
set timing_extract_model_consider_design_level_drv true (or false)

When set to false, the user-asserted design level DRVs are not considered while modeling
DRVs in the extracted timing model.

When set to true, the user-asserted design level DRVs are considered while modeling DRVs
into the extracted timing model.

Clocks
■ Created Clocks
■ Generated Clocks
■ Clocks with Sequential and Combinational Arcs

Created Clocks

If the create_clock assertion is applied on the pin of a design (not port), then the pin is
modeled as an internal pin with the same name as that of the clock asserted on it. If a clock
is created on a design port, then this port will be preserved as ETM I/O pin, with the same
name as that of the port itself.

November 2023 369 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

create_clock [get_ports {CLKIN}] -name clk -period 3 -waveform {0 1.5}

create_clock [get_pins buf5/Y] -name clk3 –period 3 -waveform {0 1.5}
pin (CLKIN ) {
clock : true ;
direction : input ;
capacitance : 0.0042;
}
pin (clk3 ) {
clock : true ;
direction : internal ;
capacitance : 0.0110;
}

Generated Clocks

The generated clocks that defined in a hierarchical block are supposed to be a part of the
block itself and do not come from the top level. So ETM preserves generated clocks inside
the model as internal pins using the Liberty generated_clock construct. The name of any such
internal pin is the same as that of the generated clock.

Some of the examples are described below.

Example 1: Single generated clock on a single pin

create_generated_clock –name gclk –source [get_ports clk] –divide_by 2
[get_pins buf1/A]

During the extraction process the pin “buf1/A” will be preserved as an internal pin in the library
with name gclk. The model will show as follows:
generated_clock (gclk) {
master_pin : clk;
divided_by : 2;
clock_pin : “gclk “;
}
pin (gclk ) {
clock: true ;
direction: internal ;
.
.
}
Example 2: Multiple clocks on the same pin

There are some design scenarios when multiple generated clocks are defined on a single pin.
This asserts multiple clock definitions on the pins. In this case, during model extraction the
pin is duplicated with the name of the clock. For example, in a design if there are two clock
definitions, such as:
create_generated_clock –name gclk1 –source [get_ports clk] –add –master_clock CLK
–divide_by 2 [get_pins buf1/A]
create_generated_clock –name gclk2 –source [get_ports clk] –add –master_clock CLK
–divide_by 2 [get_pins buf1/A]

November 2023 370 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

During the extraction process the pin buf1/A will be preserved as an internal pin with names
gclk1 and gclk2. The model will be as follows:
generated_clock (gclk1) {
master_pin : clk;
divided_by : 2;
clock_pin : “gclk1 “;
}
generated_clock (gclk2) {
master_pin : clk;
divided_by : 2;
clock_pin : “gclk2 “;
}
pin (gclk1) {
clock: true;
direction: internal;
…..
}
pin (gclk2) {
clock: true;
direction: internal;
…..
}

Example 3: Generated clocks on multiple pins

When a generated clock is defined on multiple pins, the software asserts a single clock
definition on multiple pins. To handle this scenario, all the pins asserted with this clock are
preserved as internal pins in the model with the name [clock_name_<count>] and the
generated_clock construct is written in the model with all the pin names in the clock_pin
attributes with a space between them. For example, consider a netlist having clock definitions
on multiple pins.
create_generated_clock –name gclk1 –source [get_ports clk] –add –master_clock CLK
–divide_by 2 [get_pins {buf1/A buf2/A}]

During the extraction process, the pin buf1/A will be preserved as an internal pin in the library
with the name gclk1_1; and the pin buf2/A will be preserved as an internal pin with name
gclk1. The model will be as follows:
generated_clock (gclk1) {
master_pin : clk;
divided_by : 2;
clock_pin : “gclk1_1 gclk1 “;
}
pin (gclk1_1) {
clock: true;
direction: internal;
…
}
pin (gclk1) {
clock: true;
direction: internal;
…
}

November 2023 371 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

In this case when a ETM is read, two generated clocks gclk1_1 and gclk1 will be created on
two internal pins - gclk1_1 and gclk1, respectively. Any constraint coming from the top level
will match only with clock gclk1, and not with gclk1_1. To avoid such a situation, you can set
timing_library_generated_clock_use_group_name attribute to true. When this
attribute is enabled, the original clock (gclk1) is generated at two internal pins - gclk1_1 and
gclk1.

The report_clocks command shows the following output:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
Clock Descriptions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Clock Name Source Period Lead Trail Gen Prop
------------------------------------------------------------------------
clk clkin 3.600 0.000 1.800 n y
gclk1 BLOCK/gclk1_1 BLOCK/gclk1 7.200 0.000 3.600 y y
------------------------------------------------------------------------
On turning off this global, report_clocks will return:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Clock Descriptions
---------------------------------------------------------------
Clock Name Source Period Lead Trail Gen Prop
---------------------------------------------------------------
clk clkin 3.600 0.000 1.800 n y
gclk1 BLOCK/gclk1 7.200 0.000 3.600 y y
gclk1_1 BLOCK/gclk1_1 7.200 0.000 3.600 y y
----------------------------------------------------------

Example 4: Multiple clocks on master clock root pin

Liberty supports the master_pin attribute inside a generated_clock group definition, which
refers to the pin where the corresponding master clock is defined.

Please note that you are not allowed to define a master clock name in the generated_clock
group in Liberty. Due to this, the software may infer an incorrect master for the generated
clock genclk - if multiple clocks are defined on the CLKIN pin.
generated_clock ( genclk ) {
divided_by : 2 ;
clock_pin : " genclk ";
master_pin : CLKIN ;
}

Hence, for the correct master clock association with the generated clocks, you need to
provide the create_generated_clock definition with the corresponding master clock,
while reading the ETM at the top level.

Example 5: Generated clock in case of multi-ETM instantiation at top

November 2023 372 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

When the timing_prefix_module_name_with_library_generated_clock

attribute is set to true, the software appends the instance name to the clock pin name when
creating a generated clock.

For example, assume that the cell for instance a/b in the timing library contains the following
generated clock group:
generated_clock ( genclk1 ) {
divided_by : 2 ;
clock_pin : " genclk1 ";
master_pin : CLKIN ;
}

By default (true), the software creates a generated clock with the name - genclk1.

When set to false, the software uses only the clock pin name when creating a generated
clock.

If ETM is instantiated at the top level as BLOCK1 and BLOCK2, then by default the
report_clocks command output will show the following:
----------------------------------------------------------
Clock Descriptions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Clock Name Source Period Lead Trail Generated Propagated
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
BLOCK1/genclk1 BLOCK1/genclk1 7.200 0.000 3.600 y y
BLOCK2/genclk1 BLOCK2/genclk1 7.200 0.000 3.600 y y
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

If you do not want to differentiate between genclk1 generated in various ETM instantiations,
you can set timing_prefix_module_name_with_library_generated_clock attribute to
false. In this case, the report_clocks command will show the following output:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Clock Descriptions
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Clock Name Source Period Lead Trail Generated Propagated
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
genclk1 BLOCK2/genclk1 7.200 0.000 3.600 y y
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: You will need to ensure that the constraints are applied with respect to the generated
clock naming. If required, you can remove the library generated clocks and then apply the
specified generated clocks so that minimal changes are required in the constraints.

Clocks with Sequential and Combinational Arcs

Consider a case where both the sequential and combinational arcs exist between a clock
(CLK) and an output (OUT) pin. If any of the early/late sequential/combination arcs are
missing (due to a path exception) between the CLK and OUT pins, the CLK pin is duplicated

November 2023 373 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

as two pins with _SEQ_pin and _COMB_pin suffixes. All the combinational arcs starting from
this clock root to the duplicated pin are bound with the “_COMB_pin” suffix and all the
sequential arcs are bound to be duplicated pin with the “_SEQ_pin” suffix.

Figure 9-5 Sequential and combinational arcs between a clock

The following will be created in the ETM:

pin (CLKIN_SEQ_pin ) {
clock : true ;
direction : internal ;
capacitance : 0.0110;
}
pin (CLKIN_COMB_pin ) {
clock : true ;
direction : internal ;
capacitance : 0.0110;
}
pin (DATAOUT ) {
direction : output ;
timing() {
timing_type : combinational ;
fall_transition (lut_timing_3 ){ … }
related_pin :" CLKIN_COMB_pin ";
}
timing() {
timing_type : rising_edge ;
fall_transition (lut_timing_3 ){ … }
related_pin :" CLKIN_SEQ_pin ";
}

9.1.6 Secondary Load Dependent Networks

If there is a timing path from one output pin to another pin, the model extractor considers both
the primary output loading and the secondary output loading when output-to-output delays
are computed. In the following figure there is an output-to-output path from z1 to z2:

November 2023 374 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Figure 9-6 Output-to-Output path from z1 to z2

The extracted timing model for this block consists of two delay arcs - one from a -> z1 and
another from a -> z2. But the delay of arc a -> z2 also depends on the secondary loading, that
is, at port z1.

This gives rise to a delay arc from a to z2 which is dependent on two loads and one input slew.
So this arc will be dumped as a three-dimensional delay table because the delay depends on
the primary output loading at z2, as well as a secondary output loading at z1.

The table template will be as follows:

lu_table_template (lut_timing_1) {
variable_1: input_net_transition;
index_1 (“0...0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0”);
variable_2: total_output_net_capacitance;
index_2 (“0...0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0”);
variable_3: related_out_total_output_net_capacitance;
index_3 (“0...0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0”);
}

By default, 3D arc modeling is disabled - the software considers 3D arcs as 2D arcs in timing
modeling.
Note: You should always buffer the port to avoid 3D dependencies. If there is more than a
couple of load dependencies, then there will be accuracy loss since model extraction cannot
accurately model beyond 3D arcs accurately.

9.1.7 Characterization Point Selection

The selection of characterization during point extracted models depends on the selection
criteria described below.

If no input_slews/clock_slews/output_load is specified as an argument in the

write_timing_model command, then the software determines the characterization points
from the designs’ interface elements - that are supplied with the external slew/load. This can
be explained as follows.

All the check arcs (e.g., clk->in) will be characterized for the slew points as follows:
■ Reference slew points will be taken from the slew index of the first element just after the
“clk” port.

November 2023 375 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ Signal slew points will be taken from the slew index of the first element just after the “in”
port.

All the sequential (e.g., clk->out) arcs will be characterized as follows:

■ Input slew will be taken from the slew index of the first element just after the *clk* port.
■ Output load will be taken from the load index of the last element just before the *out* port.

All the combinational arcs (e.g., in->out) will be characterized as follows:

■ Input slew will be taken from the slew index of the first element just after the *in* port.
■ Output load will be taken from the load index of the last element just before the *out* port.

Consider the following topology in a netlist:

in --------> buf1-- -----> ff1/d -------->buf2 --------> out

clk ------> clk_buf ---- ->ff1/clk-------->buf2 --------> out

in ------> buf3 ------> buf4 --------> buf5 --------> out

A snapshot of the original timing library for the interface elements (i.e., BUF and CLK_BUF)
is as follows:
Cell (BUF)
{
timing ()
index_1 ("0.0500, 1.4000, 4.5000");
index_2 ("1.0500, 6.5000, 10.0000");
}
Cell (CLK_BUF)
{
timing ()
index_1 ("1.0500, 2.4000, 3.5000");
index_2 ("0.0500, 4.5000, 5.0000");
}

If the write_timing_model command is used, then the extracted model will be

characterized as follows:
■ The signal slew is taken from buf1 slew-index in the original libraries.
Check Arc clk->in
index_1 ("0 0.0500, 1.4000, 4.5000");
■ The reference slew is taken from clk_buf slew-index in the original libraries.
index_1 ("0 1.0500, 2.4000, 3.5000");
■ The input slew is taken from clk_buf slew-index in the original libraries.

November 2023 376 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Seq. Arc clk->out

index_1 ("0 1.0500, 2.4000, 3.5000");
■ The output load is taken from buf2 slew-index in the original libraries.
index_2 ("0 1.0500, 6.5000, 10.0000");
■ The input slew is taken from buf3 slew-index in the original libraries.
Combinational arc in->out
index_1 ("0 1.0500, 1.4000, 4.5000");
■ The output load is taken from buf5 slew-index in the original libraries.
index_2 ("0 1.0500, 6.5000, 10.0000");
Note: A value of 0 is always added to the characterization points.

9.1.8 Constraint Generation during Model Extraction

The extracted models need to be validated before they are transferred to other designers to
be used for a top level analysis or optimization flow. For validation purposes, we need a
subset of the original timing constraints and further a subset of these constraints is needed
for fitting the model in a top level netlist.

The model extraction process will output a timing library and two constraint files containing
the subset of the original constraint. One of these constraint files will be used for a standalone
validation of the model compared to the original netlist. By default model.asrt and
model.asrt.latchInferredMCP will be written in the CWD. If the write_timing_model -
assertions test.asrt command is specified, then three assertion files are generated,
named -test.asrt. test.asrt.latchInferredMCP, and top_model.asrt. The other constraint file
(top_model.asrt) will be used when the extracted model will be stitched to a top level netlist
and test.asrt will be used for standalone model validation.

Two separate constraint files are required for the following:

■ Standalone validation will need all the context parameters of the design.
■ STA or optimization flow when stitched to a top level environment, the context parameter
will be automatically coming from the top level. So some of the constraints (in the above
file) need to be filtered.

The following sections describe constraints in a model extraction flow:

■ False Path Exceptions
■ Multi-Cycle Path Exceptions

November 2023 377 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

False Path Exceptions

If the set_false_path constraint is applied through some internal pins/ports, then those
paths/arcs are removed during extraction.

If the set_false_path constraint is applied between clocks or a clock and a port, then these
paths are removed and these exceptions are saved in a top_model.asrt as well as test.asrt
file.

Multi-Cycle Path Exceptions

If multi-cycle paths through pins/ports are applied, then during extraction the worst paths
through them mapped to the IO ports are calculated and the exceptions through these IOs
are dumped in the top_model.asrt file.

Consider the following design scenario with multi-cycle path exception applied at A.

Figure 9-7 Multi-cycle path exception

If there is no path from IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2, the multi-cycle path will be pushed to IN2/
OUT1. Since there are other paths going through these ports, multi-cycle paths cannot be
pushed to IN2/OUT1 and cycle adjustment is done in delay values of the arcs. This will make
the model context dependent.

When you set timing_extract_model_disable_cycle_adjustment attribute to

true, the software will disable the cycle adjustment to make ETM context independent. You
will have to manually apply the multi-cycle path at the top level while using this ETM.
Note: You should examine the constraint file (”top_model.asrt”), as these constraints are just
indicative of what is needed to be modeled at the top level. In certain situations, it may not be
possible to extract all possible exceptions for top level due to limitations of liberty to model
them correctly for a given path in case of conflicts.

November 2023 378 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ set_disable_timing
If the set_disable_timing constraint is applied on any arc, then this arc gets disabled
and is not used for the extraction purpose. Thus, such arcs are handled internally by the
tool and are not written in any of the constraint files. Also, the path broken by them will
not be extracted during ETM generation.
■ set_case_analysis
Constants applied/propagated by the set_case_analysis command can be written as
a function attribute of pins in the ETM by setting the
timing_extract_model_case_analysis_in_library attribute to true. This can
be written in the ETM-validation constraint file generated by setting this attribute to
false.

■ create_clock
The pins/ports having create_clock definitions on them are preserved in the timing
model. If a clock is created on some internal pin then the pin name needs to be modified
to reflect the instance name of the extracted model. This is achieved using the same
variable approach.
[get_pins “$ETM_CORE/pin1 $ETM_CORE/pin2 $ETM_CORE/pin3”]
When the extracted model is stitched to some top level netlist, then the clock definitions
are supposed to come from the top level netlist itself. So that such clock definitions are
not needed to be dumped in the top level constraint file, but need to exist in the assertion
file for standalone validation.
■ create_generated_clock
The pins having the create_generated_clock defined on them are preserved in the
extracted model as internal pins. As generated clocks are very much intended for the
block itself and are not supposed to be coming from the top level, liberty provides syntax
to define the generated clocks in the timing model. You can use the following use model:
generated_clock (gclk) {
clock_pin : gclk ;
master_pin : clk ;
multiplied by : 2 ;
}
While loading a model, the software names the generated clocks after their target pin
names, so while dumping the generated clocks in the library the target pin name is
modified to the clock name itself. This facilitates the same name of generated clock
names in the original netlist and the extracted model. This name changing cuts down the
need to modify other constraints (clock uncertainty/path exceptions) related to this clock.
In this case it is not required to dump these generated clocks as a separate constraint.
■ set_input_delay/set_output_delay

November 2023 379 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

The constraints like set_input_delay and set_output_delay lie in this category.

Though these constraints can be applied on ports as well as some internal pins. Such
constraints applied on some internal pins are of no use for the extracted models, as in
an extracted model only interface timing is considered.
The constraints applied on the ports need not any change as the port will be preserved
with the same name. So these constraints are dumped out in the assertion file for
validation and do not have any impact on the generated ETM. These need not to be
dumped out for the top level constraint file as in a top level the data must be coming to
the port from some other top level register or port. So the input delay value is supposed
to be the delay of path from top level register/port to this port.
■ set_max_transition/set_max_capacitance
If these constraints exist in the SDC file for block and the
timing_extract_model_consider_design_level_drv attribute is set to false,
then these max_cap/max_trans constraints (from SDC) will not have any impact on the
generated model.
If the timing_extract_model_consider_design_level_drv attribute is set to true,
then these constrains are considered while generating the timing model. The
conservative value of max_transition defined at a library cell associated with a port or
set_max_transition defined in the SDC is chosen for all the ports. Similarly, in case of
max_capacitance, a conservative value defined at a library cell associated with a port or
defined in the SDC is chosen for all the output ports.
Note: The set_max_transition/set_max_transition constraint defined in the SDC
is always dumped in the side constraints file that is read during validation.
■ set_load/set_resistance/set_annotated_transition
The set_load, set_resistance, or set_annotated_transition constraints can be
applied on pins as well as ports. The constraints applied on internal pins are handled in
the extraction flow during delay calculation and are included in the model. But the
constraints applied on the ports are treated as out-of-context environment and need to
be written out in the constraints file to be read for model validation.
■ set_annotated_delay/set_annotated_check
The set_annotated_delay or set_annotated_check constraint is applied on the
internal arcs as incremental or absolute values. The annotated delays/checks are
handled in the extraction flow during delay calculation, so these are included in the
model. This constraint is not written out in any of the constraint files.
■ set_input_transition/set_driving_cell

November 2023 380 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

The set_input_transition or set_driving_cell constraints are applied only on

ports. At the top level , the input transition at ETM pins depends upon the transition of
the signal coming from the top-level circuitry. Similarly, the driving cell is needed only at
the block level to replicate the actual driver of ETM at the top level. Hence, these are
written only in the validation constraint file.
■ set_clock_uncertainty/set_clock_latency
By default, the clock uncertainty or clock latency constraints are written in the validation
constraint file. But if the
timing_extract_model_include_latency_and_uncertainty attribute is set to
true, then these values will be taken care of during ETM characterization. And the delay
tables in ETM are written with these values included.

9.1.9 Parallel Arcs in ETM

If a model is extracted in the BC-WC or OCV mode, then timing is handled using the early
and late path analysis (as done with the report_timing command).

Consider the following design:

Figure 9-8 Parallel arcs in ETM

In the above design there are two paths CLK->IN (check path) and CLK->OUT (sequential
path).

Here, the check (setup) path will be captured by the early path of clock (CLK->buf4->buf5-
>FF/CK). But the sequential path will be using the late clock path (CLK->buf1->buf2->buf3-
>and1->FF/CK). The extraction of early/late attributes is differentiated through the
min_delay_arc attribute. So, in the extracted model for combinational/trigger/latency arc, both
the rise/fall maximum and minimum arcs exist.

November 2023 381 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.1.10 Latency Arcs Modeling

Latency arcs are between a generated clock and the respective master clock. The actual
paths are considered during extraction. For example, consider a generated clock with -
divide_by 2. The edge relationship of master and generated clock will be “R ->R” and “R ->
F”. The paths “F->F” and “R->F” arc will not be dumped, even if such paths are present in the
design for data propagation.

In case of an ideal master clock, the arcs between master and generated clock source, is
controlled through the following setting:
set timing_extract_model_ideal_clock_latency_arc false (or true)

When set to true, the zero delay arc from the master clock to generated clock is considered
in the extracted model. When set to false, this arc is not modeled.

9.1.11 Latch-Based Model Extraction

Extraction model handles transparent latches during model extraction based on the arrival
times defined on input ports and the specified clock periods - whether a path from an input
port to a latch causes borrowing or not.

The following points should be noted:

■ If the path causes borrowing then path traversal should continue through the latch until
either a non-borrowing latch or edge-triggered flip-flop is encountered. If the path does
not cause borrowing, then path tracing should be stopped and a setup arc should be
extracted relative to the closing edge of the first (interface) latch.
■ The borrowing behavior of latches does not impact the extracted hold arc. So hold arcs
should always be extracted relative to the close edge of the first interface register (latch
or flip-flop) that is encountered while tracing paths from input ports.
■ Borrowing can result in paths being traced through latches from an input port to an output
port. In this case, a delay (comb) arc should be extracted from the input port to output
port. In scenarios where path becomes more than 1 cycle, inferred multi-cycle paths are
dumped in a separate file named as “model.asrt. latchInferredMCP”.
■ When tracing paths from interface registers to output ports, transparent latches will be
handled by tracing through borrowing latches backwards and generating a sequential
delay arc from a clock port to an output port.
Note: As all such latch traversal arcs are true for setup analysis, there will be a
set_false_path -hold statement in the assertion file for any such arcs. Please also note
that “model.asrt. latchInferredMCP” file is indicative of what assertions you may need to be

November 2023 382 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

used at the top level. The assertions should be audited before using multi-cycle paths, as they
cannot be inferred in all the cases.

9.1.12 Model Extraction in AOCV Mode

Tempus supports modeling of AOCV derated delays and stage weights in ETM. These stage
weights and AOCV derates are used during the top level analysis with ETM by correctly
computing the stage counts and derates of the paths related to ETM.

The AOCV analysis mode can be enabled by using the following command:
set_db timing_analysis_aocv true

9.1.13 Stage Weight Modeling in ETM

The stage weight modeling feature can be enabled by using the following command:
write_timing_model -include_aocv_weights
Using this command will enable the software to write stage weights on individual arcs.

The weights written in the ETM are not meant to derate the model. The model will be
containing the derated delays. The stage weight extracted on arcs will be used to calculate
the stage count of chip level paths going across the ETM.

The extraction of stage weight will be done by tracing the minimum stage count path on arc-
by-arc basis. A path-based cell stage count will be printed on all sequential and combinational
arcs. The extraction strategy for computing stage weight will be as follows:

The stage weights in the extracted model are dumped as user-defined attributes. This will
require defining three attributes at the arc level.
define ("aocv_weight","timing","float");
define ("clock_aocv_weight","timing","float");
The first attribute will be used for combinational and trigger arc and will be
dumped at arc level
as below.
timing () {
timing_type : combinational;
timing_sense : positive_unate;
aocv_weight : 4;
.
.
}

The check arcs will be dumped with two separate stage weights for data and clock:
timing () {
timing_type : setup_rising;
aocv_weight : 4;

November 2023 383 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

clock_aocv_weight : 3;
.
.
}

9.1.14 AOCV Derating Mode

The AOCV derating mode can be specified as path-based, graph-based, or none using the
following setting:
set timing_extract_model_aocv_mode {graph_based | path_based | none}

The global values are explained below:

■ graph_based: Delays in ETM are derated using the graph-based stage counts.

■ path_based: Delay in ETM are derated using total path stage count of worst path
between those pin pairs.
■ none: Models derated delays that contain the effect of user-derate but does not contain
effect of AOCV derates. The default is set to none.

Before setting this attribute to graph_based or path_based, it is mandatory that the AOCV
libraries are read in and AOCV analysis is enabled (using the set_db
timing_analysis_aocv true setting).

Merging Model with stage_weight Attribute

The merged timing model contains minimum stage_weight defined between various input
library files, hence the merged timing model is pessimistic.

Points to be Considered for AOCV-ETM Flow

The following points need to be considered for a block-level AOCV run:

1. If analysis of a block is performed in the standalone mode, then you need to specify the
stage weight seen at the port(s). The applied stage weight affects the internal weight
count of the block for the IO paths. If these weights are not applied, the pessimistic
analysis will be done for the interfacing paths of the block (when block is top). Hence the
ETMs will also have pessimistic numbers for such paths.
2. The same ETM may not be used for multiple instantiation at the top level, due to the
following reasons:
❑ Different stage counts at the ports (as seen from the top) is possible.

November 2023 384 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

❑ Different critical paths between the ports for different instances is possible.
You can use ETM with most conservative stage count for all the instances, but this will
lead to pessimistic analysis.
3. The ETMs are written taking AOCV derates into account. At the top level, you need to
have two types of AOCV derate tables:
❑ Cell level AOCV tables
❑ Design level AOCV tables for net
4. While loading ETM for model validation the AOCV derates are already modeled in the
ETM. In this case, you should turn off AOCV analysis mode.

If design level cell AOCV derates are used at the top level, then the block delays (as seen
from the top) will have the AOCV effect twice - once during model extraction at the block level
and second at the top level from design level cell AOCV tables. In case design level AOCV
tables are being passed with ETM at the top level, then you should provide a cell level table
for ETM with derating as 1 for all the possible stage counts and/or distance.

9.1.15 PG Pin Modeling During Extraction

The power-ground rails of a block are modeled as PG pins of a macro in the corresponding
ETM. Since the software infers the information of power-ground rails from CPF/UPF, these
files should be read to model PG-pins in the ETM.

To write PG pin information in a timing model, you can use the write_timing_model -
include_power_ground parameter. The low power attributes can be written at the library
level, cell level, and pin level in the ETM.

PG Modeling in ETM

Consider the following scenarios:

■ Modeling of voltage maps
Voltage maps definitions are typically modeled inside the Liberty dotlib format at library
scope level. It specifies the voltage value associated with the power rail name (voltage
names). At cell level pg_pin groups are associated with voltage values using the voltage
names.
voltage_map (VDD, 0.8);
voltage_map (VSS, 0.0);
■ Modeling of power/ground pins
At the cell level, the pg_pin groups will be modeled in the ETM in the following way:

November 2023 385 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

pg_pin (VDD1) {
voltage_name : VDD ;
pg_type : primary_power;
}
pg_pin (VSS1) {
voltage_name : VSS ;
pg_type : primary_ground ;
}
The supported pg_type in model extractions: primary_power, primary_ground,
internal_power, internal_ground. If a power rail is the output of a power switch cell, it will
be marked as internal_power/ground.
■ Associating power and ground pins to signal pin
This information will be written for all the logic input/output/in-out pins that are written in
the ETM. For internal pins that are preserved inside the ETM dotlib (e.g., a pin on which
the generated clock was asserted), no such information will be retained.
pin (A) {
…
related_power_pin: VDD1;
related_ground_pin: VSS1;
}
For ports, that are written as pins in ETM, the associated pin (driver or receiver of a net)
will be checked and printed in the same way as related_power_pin and
related_ground_pin information.

ETM Merging Requirements for Power/Ground-Aware ETMs

■ Voltage maps from two libraries will be merged successfully as long as the voltage rail
names are distinct.
■ The pg_pins will be merged successfully as long as power rail names and the pg_type
match.
■ The related_power_pin and related_ground_pin will be merged as long as they are
available in all the libraries and refer to the same power rail name.

9.1.16 Extracted Timing Models with Noise (SI) Effect

To generate a timing model with SI effects contained within a block, you can use the following
flow for a block under consideration:
■ Load the database and the relevant information for performing STA/SI analysis.
■ Perform SI analysis, or if you have an incremental SDF from the previous SI run just load
the incremental SDF.

November 2023 386 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ Run model extraction. During this phase, the incremental delays will be added to the
computed base delays for characterization of the dotlib table. When the final dotlib is
written, it contains the effect of the SI analysis in terms of characterized delays.

The block ETM can then be instantiated in the top level flow and the required file can be
loaded for performing top level analysis with ETM.

9.1.17 Extracted Timing Models with SOCV

To write ETMs with variation data, set the timing_extract_model_write_lvf attribute
to true. This will enable separate mean-sigma modeling of all the delay, constraint, and
transition values.

When set to false, the product of sigma multiplier and the sigma value of delay/constraint/
transition will be added (or subtracted) to (or from) the corresponding mean value and
modeled in the ETM.

9.1.18 Merging Timing Models

The software supports merging library models through the merge_model_timing
command. You can generate ETM in various modes and then merge them in a single library
(in which all the modes are defined inside a merged group) that can be used for timing
optimization during design flow. These mode_group/modes are defined in merged ETM as
mode_definition/mode_value.

To merge two ETMs (corresponding to funct and scan views), use the following command:
merge_model_timing -library_file funct_etm.lib scan_etm.lib -modes funct scan -
mode_group funct_scan -outfile merged_funct_scan.lib

These modes are defined in a merged ETM as:

mode_definition (funct_scan){
mode_value (funct){
}
mode_value (scan){
}

In a merged ETM, the arcs corresponding to different modes are defined as given below:
timing() {
mode( funct_scan," funct " );
min_delay_arc : "true" ;
related_pin :" SI_ClkIn ";
}

timing() {
mode( funct_scan ," scan " );

November 2023 387 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

related_pin :" EJ_TCK ";

}

To read arcs corresponding to funct (scan) mode, use set_mode funct (scan). If the
set_mode command is not issued, the arcs corresponding to both the modes will be reported
by the report_timing command.

The single mode can be specified using the set_mode command. An error is issued if more
than one mode is passed as an argument to this command. The mode merging enables you
to do the analysis in various modes on a single shell.

Some considerations while merging models are given below:

■ All the input timing models should have the same cell name.
■ If the timing arcs are not comparable i.e., the number of index values differ, then they are
written as separate timing arcs with separate mode definitions.
■ Boundary pins of single mode libraries should be equivalent in number and name while
merging. An error message will be flagged if that is not the case.
■ If you have generated clocks with the same name, as well as same definition in ETM
libraries, then just this clock is preserved in the merged library, without issuing an error
message.
■ If you have generated a clock with the same name, but different divided_by/multiply_by/
master_pin/clock_pin definition, then an error message is displayed stating that “genclk
is defined with different specification in two modes, merging is not possible”.
■ If there is a mismatch in timing arcs among the input libraries, then the merged library
will contain the union of all the timing arcs with the respective mode. For example, if the
first library has only setup arcs and the second library has only hold arcs then the merged
library will have both setup and hold arcs with respective modes appended.
■ If there are mismatches in internal pins among input libraries, that is, if a particular
internal pin is missing in one or more libraries then that internal pin and its timing arcs
will be part of a merged library with respective mode.
■ For both maximum and minimum DRV, you can use the most conservative value. The
minimum value from maximum DRVs will be used and the maximum value from minimum
DRVs will be used in the merging.
■ When same modes are specified in the modes list for two libraries, for example,
merge_model_timing -input_library_files "setup.lib hold.lib" - modes
"M M" -mode_group “MG”, then the arcs from the two libraries will be assigned the same
mode, that is, “M” while merging.

November 2023 388 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.1.19 Limitations of ETM

The limitations of ETM are as follows:
■ In path-slew propagation mode, the slew/delay dependency on side inputs will be lost.
■ Consider the following two cases:
❑ clk-in check ac will depend on the slew at the D and CK pins of the register. Hence
these check arcs are modeled as 2D-check arcs, as expected.
❑ In the second case, the slew at D pin will depend upon the loading at the out port.
Hence check arc value will essentially depend upon the slews at the D and CK pins
and the out load as well. But currently model extraction does not support 3D
modeling of check arcs.

Figure 9-9 Check arc

Figure 9-10 Load dependent check arc

The following timing report shows setup_rising present in the ETM:

Path 1: VIOLATED Hold Check with Pin cppr_block/CLKIN
Endpoint: cppr_block/DATAIN (^) checked with leading edge of 'clk'
Beginpoint: DATAIN (^) triggered by leading edge of 'clk2'
Path Groups: {clk}
Other End Arrival Time 0.000
+ Hold 5.000
+ Phase Shift 0.000
= Required Time 5.000
Arrival Time 0.500
Slack Time -4.500

November 2023 389 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Clock Rise Edge 0.000

+ Input Delay 0.500
= Beginpoint Arrival Time 0.500
Timing Path:
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Pin Arc Cell Edge Arrival
Time
--------------------------------------------------------------------
DATAIN -> DATAIN ^ ^ 0.500
cppr_block/DATAIN cppr_block ^ 0.500
--------------------------------------------------------------------
The following timing report shows no setup_rising in the ETM:
Path 1: VIOLATED Hold Check with Pin cppr_block/CLKIN
Endpoint: cppr_block/DATAIN (^) checked with leading edge of 'clk'
Beginpoint: DATAIN (^) triggered by leading edge of 'clk2'
Path Groups: {clk}
Other End Arrival Time 0.000
+ Hold 5.000
+ Phase Shift 1.800
= Required Time 6.800
Arrival Time 0.500
Slack Time -6.300
Clock Rise Edge 0.000
+ Input Delay 0.500
= Beginpoint Arrival Time 0.500
Timing Path:
-------------------------------------------------------
Pin Arc Cell Edge Arrival
Time
-------------------------------------------------------
DATAIN -> DATAIN ^ ^ 0.500
cppr_block/DATAIN cppr_block ^ 0.500
-------------------------------------------------------
■ When ETM is read at the top, the information about the stage count inside the block is
lost. Hence for paths coming in/out of the block, incorrect stage count is calculated while
applying AOCV derate (on the top level instances which fall in this path).

Figure 9-11 ETM at the top level

November 2023 390 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

When BLOCK netlist is read at the top level, the stage count for buf1 and buf2 is 4, but
when an ETM of BLOCK is read, their stage count becomes 2.
The following example shows a timing report with BLOCK netlist:
Path 1: MET Late External Delay Assertion
Endpoint: DATAOUT2 (^) checked with leading edge of 'clk'
Beginpoint: DATAIN (^) triggered by leading edge of '@'
Path Groups: {clk}
Other End Arrival Time 0.000
- External Delay 0.010
+ Phase Shift 3.600
= Required Time 3.590
- Arrival Time 0.354
= Slack Time 3.236
Clock Rise Edge 0.000
+ Input Delay 0.000
= Beginpoint Arrival Time 0.000
-------------------------------------------------
Aocv Aocv Cell Pin
Stage Derate
Count
------------------------------------------------
DATAIN
4.000 1.169 BUF buf2/Y
4.000 1.169 BUF buf_2/Y
4.000 1.169 BUF BLOCK/buf7/Y
4.000 1.169 BUF BLOCK/buf8/Y
5.000 1.167 DATAOUT2
------------------------------------------------
The following example shows a timing report with BLOCK ETM:
Path 1: MET Late External Delay Assertion
Endpoint: DATAOUT2 (^) checked with leading edge of 'clk'
Beginpoint: DATAIN (^) triggered by leading edge of '@'
Path Groups: {clk}
Other End Arrival Time 0.000
- External Delay 0.010
+ Phase Shift 3.600
= Required Time 3.590
- Arrival Time 0.325
= Slack Time 3.265
Clock Rise Edge 0.000
+ Input Delay 0.000
= Beginpoint Arrival Time 0.000
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Aocv Aocv Cell Pin
Stage Derate
Count
--------------------------------------------------------------------
DATAIN
2.000 1.173 BUF buf2/Y
2.000 1.173 BUF buf_2/Y
3.000 1.171 cppr_block BLOCK/DATAOUT2

November 2023 391 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

4.000 1.169 DATAOUT2

--------------------------------------------------------------------
While modeling any arc, the rise and fall constraints are written separately. While
modeling stage weights, the worst of rise/fall stage weight is written in ETM.
Consider the following example showing two paths with given stage weight and rise/fall
slack values. The rise and fall arcs will be modeled corresponding to Path1 and Path2,
respectively, between IN1/OUT1. The single value of stage weight (4 in this case) will be
written in ETM. Ideally, the fall constraint should have the stage weight of 2 in this case,
but due to the limitation, the stage weight becomes 4 adding to the pessimism in
analysis.

Figure 9-12 Modeling stage weights

pin (DATAOUT ) {
direction : output ;
timing() {
timing_type : combinational ;
timing_sense : positive_unate ;
cell_rise (lut_timing_2 ){
values(\
" -10, -20", \
" -30, -40" \
);
}
cell_fall (lut_timing_2 ){
values(\
" -10, -20", \
" -30, -40" \

November 2023 392 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

);
}
aocv_weight : 4.0000;
related_pin :" CLKIN ";
}

9.1.20 Validation of Generated ETM

The extracted models should be validated before stitching to the top level for their accuracy
and coverage. This block-level validation can be achieved by comparing the interface timing
of the extracted timing models against the original gate-level netlist, by using the
report_timing_model and check_timing_model commands.

A brief description of the ETM commands used in a validation flow is given below:

Commands Used in Validation Flow

■ write_timing_model
The ETM is generated by using the write_timing_model command. The use model
is given below:
write_timing_model top.lib -verilog_shell_file test.v -
verilog_shell_module test-assertions test.asrt
The following are the outputs:
❑ verilog_shell_file (test.v): Verilog having an ETM instantiated in it. In case the block
constraints file has the set_driving_cell command, then the cell used there will be
instantiated in test.v.
❑ verilog_shell_module(test): Module name of test.v.
❑ top.lib: The resulting ETM.
❑ test.asrt: The resulting exception file to be used in a validation flow.
■ report_timing_model
The report_timing_model command writes a report on the interface timing of a
specified netlist. The use model of the command is as follows:
report_timing_model –type slack ref.rpt
The report ref.rpt contains the following timing view properties to capture the timing
characteristics of the design being extracted as a timing model:
❑ Slack or Arc Value: Reports the worst-case slack or arc value for each path from
input port to clock, from clock to output port, and from input port to output port.

November 2023 393 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

❑ Transition Time: Reports the actual transition time at each port for the four delay
types: min_fall, min_rise, max_fall, and max_rise.
❑ Capacitance: Reports the maximum total (lumped) capacitance at each port, and if
available, the effective capacitance.
❑ Design Rules: Reports all the design rules that apply to each port, including the
maximum capacitance, minimum capacitance, maximum transition time, maximum
fan-out (for input ports), and fan-out load (for output ports).
■ check_timing_model
The check_timing_model command compares two reports generated by the
write_model_timing command. If the timing parameter values in the two files are the
same or within the specified tolerance, then the result is pass, or otherwise fail. The use
model is as follows:
check_timing_model –ref ref.rpt -compare comp.rpt -outFile final.rpt
percent_tolerance 3 -absolute_tolerance [expr 0.30/$timeUnit]
The check_timing_model report shows the comparison results for individual paths,
ports, and timing parameters. The resulting comparison report has the same sections as
the interface timing report: slack, or arc value, transition time, capacitance, design rules.
There are two tolerance settings as follows:
❑ Absolute tolerance: Indicates the absolute acceptable difference between compared
parameters in library time units.
❑ Percentage tolerance: Shows the percentage of acceptable difference between
compared parameters.
A path is flagged as a failure by the check_timing_model command if it violates both
the absolute and percentage tolerance values.

Validation Flow- SMSC

■ Step1: Generating timing model (ETM) (using the write_timing_model command)
and the report_timing_model command output from the original session, as
described below.
read_db
write_timing_model test.lib -verilog_shell_file test.v -
verilog_shell_module test -assertions test.asrt
report_timing_model -type slack ref.rpt
exit
■ Step2: Loading the generated ETM, generating the report_timing_model report for
the ETM session, and then comparing reports with the reference session using the
check_timing_model command as described below.

November 2023 394 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

read_libs test.lib
read_netlist test.v -top test
init_design
read_sdc test.asrt
report_timing_model -type slack comp.rpt
check_timing_model -reference ref.rpt -compare comp.rpt -out_file
final.rpt -percentage_tolerance 3 -absolute_tolerance 0.003
Note: It is recommended to set
timing_prefix_module_name_with_library_generated_clock attribute to
false, and timing_library_generated_clock_use_group_name to true. For
more information, refer to section on Generated Clocks.

At the end of a complete validation flow, the following files will be written:
■ Files generated by write_timing_model (test.lib, test.v, test.asrt)
■ Interface timing (report_timing_model) report from netlist session (ref.rpt)
■ Interface timing (write_model_timing) report from ETM session (comp.rpt)
■ Comparison (check_timing_model) report of the above two files (final.rpt)

Validation Flow - MMMC

■ Step1: In MMMC configuration, only one view should be active before running the
write_timing_model command, which is done by using the set_analysis_view
-setup {$viewName} –hold {$viewName} command.

Suppose if there are two views in setup, two views in hold, and two RC corners, as
defined below:
set_analysis_view -setup {view1 view2} -hold {view3 view4}
The following sets of commands can be used to run all the 4 views in CMMMC for
modeling the libraries in ETM:
set_analysis_view -setup {view1 view2 view3 view4} -hold { view1 view2
view3 view4}
read_spef -rc_corner <corner1>
read_spef -rc_corner <corner2>
………………………………
set viewList [all_analysis_view -type active]
foreach viewName $viewList {
file mkdir $viewName
write_timing_model -view $viewName $viewName/test.lib -assertions \
$viewName/test.asrt -verilog_shell_file $viewName/test.v \
-verilog_shell_module test
write_timing_model -view $viewName -type slack -verbose $viewName/
ref.rpt

November 2023 395 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

}
exit
This will create a separate directory for each view in $viewList, and files from each view
will be written in the corresponding directory. The generated ETM and the
report_timing_model command output from the complete netlist will be saved in the
corresponding ($view) folder.
■ Step2: For validation of ETM generated from multiple views, the following syntax can be
used to read the ETMs from their corresponding directory.
foreach viewName $viewList {
free_design
read_verilog $viewName/test.v
read_lib $viewName/test.lib
set_top_module test
read_sdc $viewName/test.asrt.$viewName
write_model_timing -type slack -verbose $viewName/comp.rpt
compare_model_timing -ref $viewName/ref.rpt -compare $viewName/comp.rpt
–ignore_view -outFile $viewName/final.rpt -percent_tolerance 2 -
absolute_tolerance 0.003
}
exit
It is recommended to set
timing_prefix_module_name_with_library_generated_clock attribute to
false, and timing_library_generated_clock_use_group_name to true.

For more information, refer to Generated Clocks.

At the end of a complete validation flow, the following will be written out in each view-
specific directory for the corresponding view:
❑ Files generated by write_timing_model (test.lib, test.v,
test.asrt.$view)

❑ Interface timing (report_timing_model) report from netlist session (ref.rpt)

❑ Interface timing (report_timing_model) report from ETM session (comp.rpt)
❑ Comparison (check_timing_model) report of above two files (final.rpt)

9.1.21 Auto-Validation of ETM

Tempus provides an automated validation flow for ETM, in which all the validation steps
mentioned in the previous steps can be run automatically. This can be done by using the
write_timing_model -validate parameter.

November 2023 396 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Note: When the -validate parameter is used, the existing validation directory will be
removed and a new directory will be created. It is recommended to specify different
directories for the output ETM file and auto-validation reports.

This flow will write out the required report_timing_model and check_timing_model
reports in $val_dir. At the end of the auto-validation, the shell with block netlist is retained.
The comparison of both setup and hold checks is performed by the auto-validation.

The following summary is generated at the end of the auto-validation:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Total_fail | Slack_Fail | Cap_Fail | Trans_Fail | DRV_Fail | checkType
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
| 5 | 2 | 1 | 0 | 2 | setup
| 2 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 1 | hold
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

9.1.22 ETM Extremity Validation

The ETM models the timing arcs in the design for a range of discrete input-slews/output-
loads. The slew/load asserted using the SDC at the block-level during ETM characterization
represents the anticipated context of the ETM instance at the top-level. However, the current
validation of the ETM is done only for the input-slews/output-loads that have been asserted
on the design during the ETM extraction. Therefore, the current validation of ETM is
incomplete in the sense that the validation is not being done for a complete range of slew/load
points for which ETM has been characterized.

Additionally, in GBA mode the problem of ETM validation is computationally more difficult. In
GBA mode, the assertion of a slew on a particular input port may have an impact on the timing
of a path starting from some other input port. Therefore, different combinations of input slews
at the input ports will result in different timing behavior of the block in GBA mode. Since there
can be exponentially large number of combination of slews at the input ports, validation of
ETM in GBA mode is computationally more difficult.

The “Extremity-Validation” of ETM (also referred as EV_ETM) validates ETM at the minimum/
maximum value of the slew at the input ports and minimum/maximum value of the output load
at the output ports, thereby validating the ETM to a greater extent of the possible scenarios
at the top. The minimum/maximum slew at the input port is defined as the minimum/maximum
slew for which that input port has been characterized in the ETM library. Similarly, the
minimum/maximum load at the output port is defined as the minimum/maximum load for
which that output port has been characterized in the ETM library.

The minimum/maximum value of the slew/load will yield four corners of the ETM context, as
given below:

November 2023 397 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ Corner 1 (Fast): the minimum slew at the input ports and the minimum load at the output
ports
■ Corner 2: the minimum slew at the input ports and the maximum load at the output ports
■ Corner 3: the maximum slew at the input ports and the minimum load at the output ports
■ Corner 4 (Slow): the maximum slew at the input ports and the maximum load at the
output ports

The validation flow in exhaustive mode is the same as that in non-exhaustive mode, that is,
■ write_timing_model
■ report_timing_model at the block level
■ Read ETM at top level
■ report_timing_model at the top level

■ check_timing_model

This flow is controlled by the

timing_extract_model_exhaustive_validation_mode attribute.

The additional files generated in the EV-ETM (but not generated in normal validation) will be
stored in the current working directory by default. However, the location to save these files
can be controlled by the timing_extract_model_exhaustive_validation_dir
attribute. These files are written as hidden files.

Also note that the timing_extract_model_exhaustive_validation_dir attribute should

point to the same directory at the block and top level. When this attribute is not used at the
block level, then the EV-ETM files (in step 1 and 2 above) will be dumped in the working
directory at the block level. If the working directory at the top level is different than that at the
block level, then at the top level timing_extract_model_exhaustive_validation_dir
attribute should point to the block level working directory.

The check_timing_model command will compare the report_timing_model reports

written at the block level with the corresponding top-level report. The output of
check_timing_model command, corresponding to the four corners is written to a file named:
<output_file_name>_ev - where <output_file_name> is the name of the output-file specified
using the check_timing_model command. The results of four different corners are written in
four different columns as shown below:
#Slack(SS)/Status Slack(SF)/Status Slack(FS)/Status Slack(FF)/Status Transition
Arc-Type From To
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------
7.511[7.511]/PASS 7.511[7.511]/PASS 7.466[7.466]/PASS 7.466[7.466]/PASS rise/rise

November 2023 398 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

setup CLK1 CLOCK1

9.666[9.665]/PASS 9.666[9.665]/PASS 9.336[9.321]/PASS 9.336[9.321]/PASS fall/rise
setup CLK3 CLOCK2

In this mode, there is no change in the use models of the write_timing_model,

report_timing_model, and check_timing_model commands. The behavioral
difference (between default validation and EV_ETM) is the creation of additional four files
corresponding to the four corners.

If the slew propagation is set to worst, then the write_timing_model and

report_timing_model commands will issue a warning.

Currently, the extremity validation feature is not supported with auto-validation. You will need
to run the two-step validation flow in this mode.

9.1.23 Limitations/Implications of EV-ETM

The EV-ETM flow has the following limitations/implications:
■ The runtime of validation will appreciably increase.
■ The EV-ETM will be supported only in path-based mode and not in the worst-case mode.
■ The EV-ETM, though validates the ETM at the corners, cannot be considered as fully
rigorous. For example, the proposed methodology does not validate the timing obtained
by interpolation of the tables characterized in ETM.

9.1.24 Ability to Check Timing Models

The write_timing_model -post_check parameter command checks the extracted timing
model for any possible Liberty-related issue. When specified, the command displays detailed
error and warning messages and their summaries.

November 2023 399 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.2 Boundary Models

9.2.1 Overview on page 401
9.2.2 Boundary Model Flow on page 401
9.2.3 Hierarchical Flow with Boundary Model on page 402
9.2.4 Clock Mapping in Top Level Run with Boundary Models on page 406
9.2.5 Recommendations for Generating Accurate Boundary Models on page 407
9.2.6 Glitch-Specific Boundary Models on page 408
9.2.7 Boundary Models in MMMC Mode on page 412
9.2.8 Save-Restore of Hierarchical Analysis on page 412

November 2023 400 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.2.1 Overview
A boundary model for a module provides sufficient details of its interface paths in order to
accurately analyze these paths for timing (including path-based analysis) when loading the
model into timing analysis of a higher-level module. The model includes timing context
information that improves the accuracy of the model, for example, the timing windows of
attacker nets that are not on interface paths for SI analysis.

9.2.2 Boundary Model Flow

The following figure shows the flow for creating and using a boundary model.

Figure 9-13 Boundary Model Flow

The first step is to perform a full timing analysis on the lower-level module. This analysis is
done using block-level constraints for the module. After the analysis is complete, the
boundary model can be generated.

The following figure shows a typical block and its boundary model.

November 2023 401 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Figure 9-14 Block with the generated boundary model

This model can be subsequently loaded into a timing session for a higher-level module. The
higher-level session is timed using flat constraints for those constraints that affect the
interface paths of the instances of all the boundary model blocks.

The following figure shows the top level design with a block flat design vs block boundary
model:

Figure 9-15 Top level design with flat design vs block boundary model

9.2.3 Hierarchical Flow with Boundary Model

The boundary model hierarchical flow is described below.

November 2023 402 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Creating Boundary Models

For creating a boundary model of a block, you can use the create_boundary_model
command.

To ensure that the correct context information is saved in the boundary model, you should
make the following setting before running the update_timing command:
set timing_full_context_flow 1

The block run script can be modified as follows:

set timing_full_context_flow 1
read_libs <>
read_netlist block.v -top block
init_design
read_spef block.spef
read_sdc block.sdc
update_timing
create_boundary_model -dir bm

Boundary Model Usage

In the top-level timing run, the boundary model can be loaded (instead of the full block Verilog
and SPEF) by using the read_boundary_model command before the init_design
command is run. The boundary models can be loaded for multiple blocks.

The following example shows a sample top run script for flat timing analysis:
read_verilog ‘top.v block.v’
read_libs <>
read_netlist 'top.v block.v' -top top
init_design
read_spef ‘top.spef block.spef’
read_sdc top.sdc
update_timing

This script can be modified for top analysis with boundary models, as shown below:
read_verilog top.v
read_libs <>
read_boundary_model -dir bm
init_design
read_spef top.spef

November 2023 403 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

read_sdc top.sdc
update_timing

It may be noted that none of the higher-level SPEF files should contain parasitics for the
boundary model block, because this will lead to extra parasitics being present on the primary
I/O nets of the block instances. Therefore, for performing timing analysis with boundary
models you must use the hierarchical SPEF.

If both the boundary model and Verilog of a block are read at the top level, then the model
netlist will override the block netlist. This run will have a higher run time and memory usage
as compared to the run with only block boundary models - with the same accuracy. Hence, it
is recommended to remove the block Verilog from the top run script.

The non-default true setting of the timing_full_context_flow attribute in the top run will
increase the run time/memory usage. Hence, this should be used in the top run, only if you
need to create a scope from this run.

Boundary Model Contents

A boundary model consists of the following:

■ Netlist for a model in a binary form:
❑ Interface paths
The logic which constitutes the interface paths of a block are saved in the boundary
model netlist. This includes the paths from the primary input ports to the sequential
input pins, from the sequential output pins to the output ports, and from the input
port(s) to the output ports. The interface paths are timed in the top level analysis.
❑ Extended fanin
The slew/arrival and the graph-based analysis (GBA) slack at an endpoint depends
on its full fanin cone, therefore, the cone is also saved in the boundary model for an
accurate top level timing analysis. The extended fanin logic is timed during the top
level analysis.
❑ Internal attackers
Internal path nets, that are SI attackers to the interface paths nets, along with their
slew and timing windows (TW) are preserved in the boundary model. All the leaf
driver and receiver instances of such nets are also included. These attacker nets are
not timed in the top level analysis but their SI impact, as per the stored slew and
timing windows adjusted for clock latencies, is taken into account for better accuracy.
❑ Side load receivers

November 2023 404 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

The receiver instances on the interface path nets that are not part of the interface
logic are included.

The following figure shows an example of a netlist saved for a boundary model of a simple
block.

Figure 9-16 Saved netlist for a boundary model

The netlist contains the following data:

■ Parasitics for the nets in the model in the SPEF format.
■ The SDC constraints for elements on block internal paths. These constraints are not
used by the top-level timing but are used if a block scope is generated for the boundary
modeled block in the top-level session.
■ Timing context data. Several types of timing data are saved to improve the accuracy of
the model. Some of these are:
❑ Timing windows and slew data for non-interface attacker nets.

November 2023 405 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

❑ Clock definitions. The definitions of all the clocks used in the block-level timing is
stored in the model, in order to automatically map block-level clocks to the top-level
clocks. This mapping is required for timing window application.
❑ Constant values on pins of sequential instances that are not part of a boundary path.
These constants can affect timing results of sequential instances and are therefore
maintained in the boundary model. The extra constants on non-extended fanin pins
are also maintained in the boundary model.

9.2.4 Clock Mapping in Top Level Run with Boundary Models

The context that gets saved in a boundary model is with respect to the clocks defined in the
block run. The block level clocks, whose definition is also saved in the boundary model, are
mapped to the top level clocks for the application of context data in the top run.

You can specify the mapping for some or all the clocks for each block instance by using a
clock mapping file. You can specify a clock map file using the read_boundary_model -
clock_map_file parameter.

The software attempts the auto clock mapping for clocks that do not have any user-specified
mapping. The user-specified clock mapping settings have higher precedence over auto
inferred clock mapping.

The auto clock mapping rules are given below:

■ To map a clock ‘clkA’ defined at pin ‘pinA’ at a block:
❑ The software will identify the source pin of clock clkA at block level, that is, pinA.
❑ In the top level run with boundary model, the software will examine the clocks at pinA
of the block, that is, at block/pinA.
❍ Top level clock at block/pinA having waveform matching with clkA will be
mapped to clkA.
❍ If multiple clocks with matching waveforms are found, then the mapping of clkA
is dropped due to ambiguity.
❑ If no match is found, a check is made for the top-level clock with the same name
(irrespective of clock source):
❍ If a top level clock with name ‘clkA’ exists and has the same definition as block
level ‘clkA’, then the mapping is successful.
❍ If a top level clock with name ‘clkA’ exists and has a definition different from the
block level ‘clkA’, then the mapping is ignored.

November 2023 406 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ Mapping virtual clocks:

❑ Block virtual clocks are mapped only to the top virtual clocks.
❑ Clocks with the same name/waveform will be mapped.
■ Mapping generated clocks:
❑ Block generated clocks will be mapped only with the top generated clocks, and
cannot be mapped with top master clock.
❑ Block master clock can be mapped with the top generated clocks.

The details of all the mapped and unmapped clocks are written in files named -
blkname_clock_map.txt and blkName_unmapped_clocks.txt respectively, where blkName is
the name of the block module. These files are written for every boundary modeled block. If a
block is multiply instantiated at the top level, then the software writes mapped and unmapped
clocks corresponding to each instance of a block.

If a block-level clock is not mapped to the top-level clock, then the timing windows (saved in
the boundary model context), which reference the unmapped clock, are treated as infinite
windows.

In addition to finding the corresponding clock, the timing window application applies a latency
adjustment for a better correlation between the saved timing windows and the timing windows
present in a full flat run. This latency adjustment is to account for the difference in clock arrival
time between the block-level run and the top-level run. This is based on the difference in the
arrival time between the matching clock phase on the block instance pin and the arrival time
seen in the block-level run. This latency adjustment is made for each boundary model
instance and clock, when there is a matching phase found. No latency adjustment is done
where mapping is done by the clock name.

9.2.5 Recommendations for Generating Accurate Boundary Models

The timing correlation between a fully flat higher level run and a higher level run using one or
more boundary models is expected to be close. However, the following factors can negatively
affect the correlation:
■ The timer settings between the lower-level timing run that generate the model and the
higher-level run which loads the mode should be consistent.
■ The SDC constraints applied in the lower-level timing run and the constraints that are
applied to instances of the model in the higher level timing run should be consistent.
■ Multiple SI passes: The timing windows in the boundary model context data are the
timing windows used in the final SI delay calculation pass in the block level run. These

November 2023 407 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

timing windows will be used for every SI delay calculation pass in the top-level run. If
there are multiple SI passes, the timing window convergence can differ between the full
flat top-level run and the top-level run with the model. Hence, it is recommended to use
two SI iterations in both the block and top runs for good correlation.
■ Clock Mapping: A successful mapping of all the block clocks is necessary for performing
timing correlation between the top flat vs top boundary model runs. If there are
unmapped clocks, you can use the set_db si_use_infinite_timing true
command setting for the block as well as top runs for correlation purpose. If clock
mapping is not successful and this setting is not used, then the top run with the boundary
model will be pessimistic compared to the top flat run.
■ Power Supply Voltage: If the power supply voltage setting is different in the block and the
top CPF, then the cell delay and slew will change in two runs. This difference affects the
slew and timing window calculation of the non-interface attacker nets. Due of this timing
window difference, the top scope STA run can either get pessimistic or optimistic as
compared to a full flat run.

9.2.6 Glitch-Specific Boundary Models

To improve efficiency of glitch-only analysis, a glitch-specific model can be created using the
create_glitch_boundary_model command.

For glitch-only analysis, the software will keep N-levels (default is 2 levels) of logic (controlled
by the create_glitch_boundary_model -max_stages command parameter) from the
boundary along with the RCs connected to any of those nets. If a multi-stage cell is
encountered, then the noise will not propagate through the logic and multi-stage cells will be
considered as path end or start points.

The following figure shows an example of a netlist saved for a boundary model of a simple
block for a maximum of 2 levels of glitch stages.

November 2023 408 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Figure 9-17 Saved netlist for a boundary model with 2 levels of glitch stages

If a cell is encountered without any noise model, then it is treated as a single-stage cell for
the purpose of logic level tracing. The next stage after the end point is also kept as load so
that the slew/waveform can be put on the driver of the net connected to the start point, but is
not analyzed when the block is used. The driver stage of the start point is kept as a driver and
noise is injected if the cell is single-stage or a buffer. This logic is described below:
■ The internal path nets that are SI attackers to the N-level path nets. All the leaf drivers
and receiver instances of such nets are also included.
■ The receiver instances on the N-level path nets that are not part of the interface logic are
included. These side load receivers can occur in the clock network and on the paths from
the register to the output port paths.
■ The end points are saved to ensure proper loading, but they are not analyzed when the
boundary model is used.
■ The attacker driver and receiver are saved, but not analyzed when the boundary model
is used.
■ The analyzed noise on the drivers to the start points is saved and injected when the
driver is a single-stage cell or buffer.

November 2023 409 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ The feedthrough is saved as part of the boundary model.

The following figure illustrates the logic described above:

Figure 9-18 Glitch-specific boundary model with feedthrough

The glitch correlation between a fully flat higher level run and a higher level run using one or
more boundary models is expected to be close. However, the following are some of the
factors that can negatively affect the correlation:
■ Boundary slews at the block and the top level will not match perfectly, but the expectation
from the boundary constraints is that they will be worst case. The differences in slews
can cause differences in glitch results.
■ User errors in the form of inconsistent SI settings between the block level and the top
level.

Glitch Boundary Model Usage

The following command is used to generate a glitch boundary model:

November 2023 410 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ create_glitch_boundary_model

In addition, the following attribute must be set prior to glitch/delay calculation so that the
attacker timing windows are stored as part of the boundary model:
set timing_full_context_flow 1

The default value of this variable is 0.

Glitch Boundary Model Contents

The contents of a glitch boundary model are as follows:

■ <block>.db: Contains the Verilog files that are equivalent to the block:
❑ model_<#>.v.gz
■ bound_libs.txt:
❑ File containing the timing libraries used in the block.
■ context: Context of the boundary model:
❑ ct.gz
❑ es.gz
❑ et.gz
❑ glitch.tcl.gz
❑ timestamp
❑ tw.gz
■ libs
❑ File containing all the timing libraries loaded from the Tcl to create the model.
■ Partition: Contains the SPEF file and partition information:
❑ SPEF file
❑ endpoints.gz
❑ endpoints2.gz
❑ stoppoints2_wf.gz
❑ Ignoredpins.gs

November 2023 411 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.2.7 Boundary Models in MMMC Mode

The boundary model flow is MMMC-aware. The requirement is that the block run used to
generate the boundary model should be CMMMC with the same (or larger) set of views as in
the top CMMMC run.

The boundary model generated from the MMMC environment saves the SPEF data for all the
active RC corners, the constrains for all active modes, and the context for all the active views.

9.2.8 Save-Restore of Hierarchical Analysis

A hierarchical analysis run with a boundary model can be saved and restored like a non-
hierarchical run. In addition, boundary models can be generated from the restored sessions
without performing a timing update.

November 2023 412 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.3 SmartScope Hierarchical Analysis

9.2.1 Overview on page 414
9.2.2 Why Use SmartScope Analysis on page 415
9.2.3 Choosing Blocks to Use for SmartScope Analysis on page 415
9.2.4 SmartScope Analysis Flow on page 416
9.2.5 Running SmartScope Hierarchical Analysis on page 418
9.2.6 Scope Generation from Distributed STA (DSTA) on page 420

November 2023 413 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.3.1 Overview
The SmartScope hierarchical analysis feature allows you to re-time a modified block with its
context without having to re-time the full design. The feature also allows timing at the top-level
without having to time the full internals of the blocks. There are two aspects of SmartScope
analysis, which can be used either separately or together:
■ Boundary models can be generated for the blocks and used at the top level. This
provides a timing analysis of the complete top level paths with a reduced runtime.
■ Scope models can be generated from a top level run for the instance(s) of a block and
the surrounding context. The scope models can be generated either from a full flat run,
or a top level run with boundary models.

Using both aspects together allows for a complete hierarchical analysis without having to
make a full flat timing run.

The scopes mentioned above are referred to as block scope, because they contain the block
instance(s) along with the surrounding fanin and fanout logic.

A scope of the top-level logic can also be generated, which is referred to as a top scope. A
top scope is the dual of a block scope, such that it contains all of the top-level logic, and the
interface paths of the hierarchical child instances. The top scope is analogous to a top level
run with boundary models.

The following figure illustrates block scope and top scope.

Figure 9-19 Top scope and multiple block scope logic

The SmartScope hierarchical analysis provides the following features:

■ Scopes can be generated for blocks from either STA or DSTA run.

November 2023 414 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ Scopes can be generated from an STA run without a full flat timing analysis.
■ For multi-instantiated blocks, the scope analysis can be limited to a single copy of the
block internals from one of the instances. For the other instances, only the boundary
paths with be analyzed.
■ A scope for the top-level logic can be generated from a either full STA or DSTA run.

9.3.2 Why Use SmartScope Analysis

The SmartScope Analysis feature enables you to take a full chip and reduce the amount of
timing analysis required. This restricts the scope of the timing analysis down to few modules
that are relevant, thus reducing the run time and providing a better constraint accuracy than
a block-level script.

Additionally, SmartScope Analysis reduces CPU requirements, and increases the quality of
constraints. The budgetary constraints cannot fully capture the top level environment.

The top-level constraints can be different than budgetary constraints for the following reasons:
■ Top level design may tie in different clocks than expected.
■ Full chip introduces new pin drives and loads.
■ Full chip introduces new module input and output expectations.
■ Full chip introduces new clock latencies and CRPR.
■ Full chip introduces new constants or constraints many be added.

9.3.3 Choosing Blocks to Use for SmartScope Analysis

SmartScope allows selection of modules to analyze or to exclude from analysis. If a large part
of a full design is analyzed, then the run time will be as high as a full flat run. Selecting the
right amount of the design for analysis is an important choice, as described in the following
section.

Good Choices for Block Selection

■ High level modules that have a SPEF:
These blocks match the layout hierarchy. It is likely that they are owned by a single
designer and any failing timing paths will be addressed by changing this level of
hierarchy. If the module represents 10-30 percent of the full flat design, it is a great
choice.

November 2023 415 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ Modules that have a large number of timing issues:

These blocks will need to be changed and will be candidates to be retimed using scope.
As the block is changes the block scope can be used to to analyze the effects.
■ Modules that have no timing violations:
These are good blocks to exclude from the top-level analysis. There is no advantage in
running timing analysis on the internals of a block that is not changing.

9.3.4 SmartScope Analysis Flow

The full SmartScope hierarchical analysis flow is as follows:
■ For each block of interest, a block-only timing run with STA is made which generates a
boundary model for the block. The boundary mode consists of a netlist, SPEF, timing
context data, clock information, and internal constraints.
■ A timing run is made from the top level which reads in boundary models for the blocks
rather than the full netlist.
■ A block scope is generated in the top level run for each of the blocks of interest.

The flow is shown in the diagram below:

November 2023 416 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Figure 9-20 SmartScope Hierarchical Block Scope Flow

SmartScope analysis is designed to be used with Tempus ECO. For ECO purposes, the flow
can be extended as follows:
■ From the top-level run with boundary models, generate an ECO-DB for the top-level
logic.
■ Run Tempus ECO with the top-level netlist and the generated ECO-DB.
■ Run timing analysis using the scope models for each block, and then generate an ECO-
DB for each block.
■ Run Tempus ECO with each block-level netlist and the corresponding ECO-DB.

November 2023 417 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

The following diagram illustrates the block scope flow for Tempus ECO:

Figure 9-21 SmartScope Hierarchical Block Scope ECO Flow

For timing of the top-level logic with the context of the block interfaces, an alternative to using
boundary models is to generate a scope of the top-level logic from a full flat run. This type of
scope is referred to as a top scope rather than a block scope.

An ECO-DB for the top-level logic can be generated from a timing run of the top scope. This
has the disadvantage of requiring a flat run, but has the advantage of not requiring good
block-level constraints for a timing run of the block.

9.3.5 Running SmartScope Hierarchical Analysis

This section provides the specifics of how to run full SmartScope analysis from Tempus STA
sessions.

November 2023 418 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

To generate the boundary model for a block, make a block-level timing run using the following
commands:
■ set timing_full_context_flow 1

The timing_full_context_flow variable is used to capture the estimated slews and

timing windows during update_timing as part of the timing context in the boundary
model.
■ create_boundary_model -dir path [-overwrite]
The create_boundary_model command generates a boundary model from the full
design.
Note: The timing_full_context_flow variable needs to be set ahead of any timing
update, and the create_boundary_model command needs to be run after a full timing
update. The command will implicitly run update_timing, if necessary.

For the top level timing run, the following commands should be used.
■ read_boundary_model -dir path [-clock_map_file file]
The read_boundary_model command is used for each cell boundary model generated
by the block-level runs. Multiple commands can be specified if there are multiple models.
The commands must be issued prior to the init_design command.
■ set timing_full_context_flow 1

If scopes are to be generated from the run, then set the timing_full_context_flow to
1. This setting must be done ahead of any timing update.
■ create_scope_model {-cell cell | -instance inst_list | -cell_nohier
cell | -instance_nohier inst_list} [-exclude_cell cell_list]
[-exclude_instance inst_list] -path dir
[-rep_instance inst] [-overwrite]

The create_scope_model command generates a top or block scope and should be

specified after the update_timing command. The command will implicitly run the
update_timing command, if necessary. Multiple commands can be issued to generate
different scopes.
For multi-instantiated cells, the -cell parameter will limit the corresponding internal
endpoints included in the scope to a single instance. The other instances will only include
boundary paths, either input-to-register or register-to-output. You can specify which
instance is to be fully included with the -rep_instance parameter; otherwise an
instance will be determined by the software.

For the scope timing run, the following commands should be used.

November 2023 419 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ read_scope_verilog file_list
The read_scope_verilog command is optional, but should be issued in cases where
there is a modified version of the block Verilog which is to be run with the scope. The
module definitions in the supplied file(s) will overwrite the modules saved in the scope.
Multiple commands can be used, and the commands must be issued prior to the
read_scope command.
■ read_scope_spef [-scaleRC] [{-rc_corner name} | {-early_rc_corner
name} {-late_rc_corner name}]

The read_scope_spef command is optional, but should be issued in cases where there
is a modified version of the block SPEF, which is to be run with the scope. The supplied
file(s) will replace the corresponding files specified in any subsequent read_spef
commands. Multiple commands can be used, and the commands must be issued prior
to the read_scope command.
■ read_scope -dir path
The read_scope command reads a scope. The scope includes the netlist, SPEF,
constraints, settings, modes, view definition, and so on. When the scope is loaded, the
STA session is ready for timing updates and reporting.

9.3.6 Scope Generation from Distributed STA (DSTA)

The block and top scope can be generated from a DSTA session.

Given below are some of the differences between scope generation in STA and DSTA modes:
■ The scope generation command is distribute_create_scope_model (in DSTA)
instead of create_scope_model.
■ For multi-instantiated blocks, the scope will contain the internal register-to-register logic
for analysis for all the instances instead of a single representative instance.

Note that the timing_full_context_flow attribute should be set for DSTA scope
generation in the same way as for STA scope generation.

The DSTA-generated scopes are loaded in a STA session in exactly the same way as a STA-
generated scope.

November 2023 420 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.4 Prototype Timing Modeling

9.3.1 Overview on page 422
9.3.2 Inputs and Outputs on page 422
9.3.3 Using the PTM Flow to Generate Dotlib Model on page 423
9.3.4 Handling of Bus Bits in PTM on page 427

November 2023 421 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.4.1 Overview
The prototype timing model (PTM) feature enables you to define and generate a prototype
timing model database, which contains preliminary information about the block, such as
ports, delay arcs, timing check or constraints. This information is then used to generate a
library (.lib), Verilog (.v), and What-If (.cmd) command files.

PTM models are useful for performing feasibility studies on a logical block. In addition, PTM
can be used to generate preliminary timing information, which becomes the validation check
point for early development, and evolves with design.

With PTM, you can easily create a block without providing many details, which would then
provide preliminary timing information for it. This block can be replaced by a detailed timing
model later in the design cycle to get more accurate timing information.

This chapter describes how to define and generate prototype timing models (PTM). It explains
the inputs and outputs for PTM flow and the procedure to use PTM models.

9.4.2 Inputs and Outputs

■ Inputs
■ Outputs

Inputs
■ Standard cell libraries or macros.
■ A set of PTM commands to define the PTM model.

Outputs

A PTM database that contains the following information:

■ Verilog (.v) model: Contains the port definition with the instantiated PTM cell model.
■ Library (.lib) model: Contains pin or bus definitions (direction and capacitance).
■ What-If Command file (.cmd): Contains the mapped What-If commands.
■ Configuration file (.conf): Contains information to load the generated library and Verilog
models with the read_db command.
■ Top-level Tcl script: Contains the commands to load the configuration file, source the
What-If constraints, and write the timing model and assertions.

November 2023 422 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.4.3 Using the PTM Flow to Generate Dotlib Model

The following diagram shows how the PTM commands are used to generate the PTM model
database. This PTM model database is later used to save a What-If timing model, which can
be used to generate a dotlib model that contains detailed timing information. You can
optionally load the SDC constraints while generating the output dotlib model.

Figure 9-22 Flow Diagram

Command Flow

The following figure shows the PTM command flow for generating a dotlib model:

November 2023 423 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Figure 9-23 Sample PTM Model Flow

Generating a PTM Model

The following procedure shows how to define a PTM model and use it to generate a dotlib
timing model, which can later be instantiated in a top-level design:
1. To create the PTM model, use the create_ptm_model command:
create_ptm_model dma
Note: All other PTM commands will work only after this command is executed.
2. To define global values for setup check arcs, hold check arcs, or sequential delay arcs
across the PTM model, use the set_ptm_global_parameter command:

November 2023 424 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

set_ptm_global_parameter -param setup -value 1.5

set_ptm_global_parameter -param hold -value 1.5
set_ptm_global_parameter -param clk_to_output -value 1.5
Note: The global value specified with this command is added to the arc specific delay
value. As a result, the final arc's delay is calculated as a sum of the global parameter
value and the arc delay specified using the create_ptm_constraint_arc or the
create_ptm_delay_arc command.
3. To create drive types for specifying the drive strength equivalent to existing library cells,
use the create_ptm_drive_type command:
create_ptm_drive_type -lib_cell INVX1 stdDrive
4. To create a load type by assigning it a unique name, use the create_ptm_load_type
command:
create_ptm_load_type -lib_cell INVX4 stdLoad
Typically, the load type represents a capacitance value from a library input or bidirectional
pin. Use multiple create_ptm_load_type commands to create multiple load types for a
PTM model.
5. To create PTM data ports for the current model, use the create_ptm_port command:
create_ptm_port -type input data_in
create_ptm_port -type output data_out
create_ptm_port -type input data_test_1
create_ptm_port -type inout data_test_2
create_ptm_port -type input bcstop
create_ptm_port -type input bdis1
6. To create a PTM clock port for the current model, use the create_ptm_port command:
create_ptm_port -type clock clock_in
7. To set the drive for the output and bidirectional ports, use the set_ptm_port_drive
command:
set_ptm_port_drive -type stdDrive data_out
The drive type specifies the type of library cell within the model as driver on the interface
nets. You cannot specify two different drivers for two timing arcs ending at the same
output port.
8. To define a load for the PTM model ports by specifying a capacitance value, use the
set_ptm_port_load command:
set_ptm_port_load -value 4.0 bdis1
9. To set the delay for combinational or sequential paths from input ports to the output ports,
use the create_ptm_delay_arc command:

November 2023 425 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

create_ptm_delay_arc -from clock_in -to data_out -edge rise -value 0.05

create_ptm_delay_arc -from data_test_1 -to data_test_2 -value 1.0
create_ptm_delay_arc -from data_test_2 -to data_out -value 1.5
Note: If you do not specify the drive type on the output port, a constant timing table is
created, which signifies that the delay is constant for this arc. This means that the delay
does not vary with respect to input slew and output capacitance.
10. To define the timing check at data input port with a reference clock port, use the
create_ptm_constraint_arc command:
create_ptm_constraint_arc -setup -value 0.3 -from clock_in -to
data_in -edge rise
create_ptm_constraint_arc -setup -value 0.4 -from clock_in -to
data_in -edge fall
create_ptm_constraint_arc -hold -value 0.1 -from clock_in -to data_in -
edge rise
create_ptm_constraint_arc -hold -value 0.2 -from clock_in -to data_in -
edge fall
11. To generate a report on ports, arcs, and global delay parameter details for the current
PTM model, use the report_ptm_model command:
report_ptm_model
12. To save the PTM model in dotlib library file format, use the save_ptm_model command:
save_ptm_model
13. To use the PTM database for generating a dotlib timing model, source the dma.tcl file:
source dma.tcl
14. To instantiate the model block in a top-level design, use the read_libs command:
read_lib dma.lib
This serves the purpose of validating the top-level timing information related to the
instantiated block.

PTM Example

The following example provides a list of commands that can be used to generate a PTM
model illustrated in the figure (Sample PTM Block) below:
# Start of model dma
create_ptm_model dma

# Define drive and load type

create_ptm_drive_type -lib_cell INVX1 stdDrive
create_ptm_load_type -lib_cell inv_hivt_4 stdLoad

# Create data ports

create_ptm_port -type input data_in
create_ptm_port -type output data_out

November 2023 426 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

create_ptm_port -type input data_test_1

create_ptm_port -type inout data_test_2

# Create clock ports

create_ptm_port -type clock clock_in

# Define drive for ports

set_ptm_port_drive -type stdDrive data_out
# Define load for ports
set_ptm_port_load -type stdload data_test_2
# Define delay arcs
# Data delays
create_ptm_delay_arc -from data_test_1 -to data_test_2 -value 1.0
create_ptm_delay_arc -from data_test_2 -to data_out -value 0.5
# Sequntial clock to output delay
create_ptm_delay_arc -from clock_in -to data_out -edge rise -value 0.05

# Setup and hold checks

create_ptm_constraint_arc -setup -value 0.3 -from clock_in -to data_in -edge rise
create_ptm_constraint_arc -setup -value 0.4 -from clock_in -to data_in -edge fall

create_ptm_constraint_arc -hold -value 0.1 -from clock_in -to data_in -edge rise
create_ptm_constraint_arc -hold -value 0.2 -from clock_in -to data_in -edge fall

Figure 9-24 Sample PTM Block

9.4.4 Handling of Bus Bits in PTM

The following examples provide a list of commands that can be used to handle bus bits in
PTM:

November 2023 427 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Defining Bus Bits

To create a bus port along with bus members definition, use the create_ptm_port
command. An integer specified with a bus name designates the number of bus bits, as shown
below:
create_ptm_port -type input test_input[31:0]

Creating Arcs from/to Multiple Bits of a Bus

Delay ARC

Example1:

The example shows how to create delay arc on pin, test_clk, with respect to each bit of
test_input bus:
create_ptm_delay_arc -from test_input[31:0] -to test_clk -value 1.0
Example 2:

The example shows how to create delay arc on pin, test_inout[7:0], with respect to each
bus bit, test_input[31:0]:
create_ptm_delay_arc -from test_input[31:0] -to test_inout[7:0] -value 5.0

This command creates 32 arcs on all 8 bus pins, test_inout [7:0].

Example 3:

The example shows how to create delay arc on pin, test_inout[7:0], with respect to
selected bus bit:
create_ptm_delay_arc -from test_input[20:0] -to test_inout[7:0] -value 5.0

This command creates 21 arcs on all 8 bus pins, test_inout [7:0].

Constraint ARC

Example 1:

The example shows how to create constraint arc on bus bits, test_input[31:0], with
respect to clock pin, test_clk1:
create_ptm_constraint_arc -setup -value 0.3 -from test_clk1 -to
test_input[31:0] -edge rise

Example 2:

November 2023 428 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

The example shows how to create constraint arcs with different values for selected bits of bus,
test_input[31:0], with respect to clock pin, test_clk1:
create_ptm_constraint_arc -setup -value 0.3 -from test_clk1 -to
test_input[3:0] -edge rise
create_ptm_constraint_arc -setup -value 0.8 -from test_clk1 -to
test_input[7:4] -edge rise

Define DRV on Bus Bits

Set load on bus bits:

Example 1:

The example shows how to create a load type by assigning it a unique name using the
create_ptm_load_type command:
create_ptm_load_type -lib_cell ABC -input_pin A load1

The example shows how to set the load type, load1 on all the bus bits using the
set_ptm_port_load command:
set_ptm_port_load -type load1 test_input[31:0]

Example 2:

The example shows how to set the different load type on specified bus bits using the
set_ptm_port_load command:
create_ptm_load_type -lib_cell ABC -input_pin A load1
set_ptm_port_load -type load1 test_input[21:0]
create_ptm_load_type -lib_cell XYZ -input_pin A load2
set_ptm_port_load -type load2 test_input[31:22]

This will set load1 on 0-21 bits and load2 on 22-31 bits of the test_input bus.

Example 3:

The example shows how to define a load for ports by specifying a capacitance value using
the set_ptm_port_load command:
set_ptm_port_load -value 4.0 test_input[31:0]

To set DRV on bus bits:

Example 1:

November 2023 429 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

The example shows how to specify a value for the max_transition, max_capacitance, and
max_fanout design constraints:
set_ptm_design_rule -max_transition 1.1 -port test_input[31:0]
set_ptm_design_rule -max_capacitance 1.2 -port test_inout [7:0]
set_ptm_design_rule -max_fanout 4 -port test_inout[7:0]

Example 2:

The example shows how to specify a value for the max_transition, max_capacitance, and
max_fanout using the set_ptm_design_rule command on specified bit:
set_ptm_design_rule -max_transition 1.5 -port test_input[21:0]
set_ptm_design_rule -max_fanout 5 -port test_inout[4:0]
set_ptm_design_rule -max_capacitance 1.8 -port test_inout[4:0]

November 2023 430 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.5 Interface Logic Models

9.4.1 Overview on page 432
9.4.2 Creating ILMs on page 432
9.4.3 Specifying ILM Directories at the Top Level on page 436
9.4.4 ILMs Supported in MMMC Analysis on page 436
9.4.5 ILM Validation Flow on page 437
9.4.6 Use of SDF, SDC, and XTWF in ILM Flow on page 439
9.4.7 Creating XILM on page 442
9.4.8 Using ILM/XILM for Hierarchical Analysis on page 443

November 2023 431 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.5.1 Overview
Models are compact and accurate representations of timing characteristics of a block.

Interface Logic Model (ILM) is a structural representation of a block, specifically a subset of

the block's structure including instances along the I/O timing paths, clock-tree instances, and
instances or net coupling affecting the signal integrity (SI) on I/O timing paths. It is a compact
and accurate representation of timing characteristics of a block. Instead of using a blackbox
at the top level, you create an ILM at the block level and use it as you would use a blackbox.

The ILM is not only a netlist; it comprises at least three files: verilog netlist, SPEF, and SDC
constraints. The SI ILM logic model, or XILM additionally contains capacitances and other
logic needed to model SI effects. An XILM would contain netlist, SPEF, and SDCs, and also
a timing window file (.xtwf).

The advantages of using ILMs are as follows:

■ More accurate analysis than a black box flow
❑ More SI aware than combined .lib or .cdb approach
❑ Can model clock generator inside block
❑ More accurate timing and SI reduces the number of design iterations to close timing
and SI
■ No need to characterize blocks
❑ Works on a actual design data
■ Can be used in the initial prototyping stage for very big designs when loading full design
data is not feasible.
❑ Allows you to modify only top-level data
❑ Fully preserves implemented partitions
■ Uses the original constraint file for top-level analysis
❑ No abstraction for timing exceptions

9.5.2 Creating ILMs

In the hierarchical design flow, you load a detailed block-level implementation of a block and
its parasitic data, then specify the write_ilm command to create an ILM for the block. This
command creates the specified directory containing ILM files.

November 2023 432 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

Note: An ILM created for an incomplete block is not as accurate as an ILM created for a
complete block. Always use ILMs for complete blocks to complete the top-level design.

The software generates ILM data for timing and signal integrity (SI):
■ ILM data for timing
The model contains the netlist of the circuitry leading from the I/O ports to interface
sequential instances (that is, registers or latches), and from interface sequential
instances to I/O ports. The clock tree leading to the interface registers is preserved.
■ Internal register-to-register paths, if internal logic is not part of the interface path.
However, in special cases some internal paths will be kept, as shown in the following
example:

Figure 9-25 Internal Paths

■ Internal paths
Internal paths controlled by different clock, or clocks connected to the ILM module
through different ports. If the logic between the I/O ports is pure combinational, it is
preserved in an ILM.
■ ILM data for SI
The model includes all of the above, plus attacker drivers or nets which affect I/O paths.
It also includes the timing window files in the ILM model directory.

Example ILM Creation

The following command generates the ILM ignoring certain ports and including certain
objects in the BlockB directory. It also writes out the ILM SDF file under the BlockB
directory.

November 2023 433 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

write_ilm -writeSDF -ignore_ports $ignorePorts -include_objects $includeObjects -

dir BlockB

Sample Summary Report

The following is a sample summary report generated after running the write_ilm
command:
--------------------------------------------------------------
createInterfaceLogic Summary
--------------------------------------------------------------
Model Reduced Instances Reduced Registers
--------------------------------------------------------------
ilm_data
+
setup 4/16 (25%) 0/3 (0%)
hold 4/16 (25%) 0/3 (0%)
setupHold 4/16 (25%) 0/3 (0%)
--------------------------------------------------------------
si_data

setup 3/16 (18%) 0/3 (0%)

hold 3/16 (18%) 0/3 (0%)
setupHold 3/16 (18%) 0/3 (0%)
--------------------------------------------------------------

In this report, the reduction ratio in the ilm_data model is 25 percent which means that 4 out
the total 16 instances for this block have been eliminated.
Note: You can run the set_db -ilm_keep_high_fanout_ports false command for
improving the reduction ratio.

Preserving Selected Instances in ILMs

The write_ilm command can preserve specified instances and/or nets. The -
include_objects parameter of the write_ilm command accepts a collection of instances
and/or nets. All the specified instances and nets are preserved in the generated ILM.

Creating ILMs for Shared Modules

You can use the same sub-block module in different ILM blocks, enabling reuse of versatile
modules. The write_ilm command considers constant propagate, so that only the enabled
parts of a module are considered when creating ILMs for the reused modules. Because the
Tempus database cannot handle the same module name in different circuits, the software
automatically modifies the module names with the following rule:
topModuleName+timestamp+$+moduleName

November 2023 434 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

As an example, one ILM block (ModuleA) uses an ALU module (ALU) as an unsigned ALU,
and a second block (ModuleB) uses the ALU as a signed ALU. You can change the input
signal to use the ALU differently, setting one ALU as sign enabled and the other to off. When
you run the write_ilm command, the software considers only the enabled parts of the ALU
when creating ILMs for ModuleA and ModuleB. The software also ensures that the name of
the ALU module in ModuleA and the name of the ALU module in ModuleB are different.

Creating ILMs Without Using Tempus Database

If you do not have Tempus database for an implemented block but have a Verilog netlist,
constraints, and SPEF and TWF for that block, then use the create_ilm_from_files
command to store data in the ILM/XILM format.

The following example shows the create_ilm_from_files command in case of a MMMC

design:
create_ilm_from_files -si -out_dir block_A.ILM -cell block_A -mmmc -verilog_file
myfile.v
create_ilm_from_files -si -out_dir block_A.ILM -cell block_A -mmmc -incremental\
-spef max.spef.gz -rc_corner rcMax
create_ilm_from_files -si -out_dir block_A.ILM -cell block_A -mmmc -incremental\
-spef typ.spef.gz -rc_corner rcTyp
create_ilm_from_files -si -out_dir block_A.ILM -cell block_A -mmmc -incremental\
-spef min.spef.gz -rc_corner rcMin
create_ilm_from_files -si -out_dir block_A.ILM -cell block_A -mmmc -incremental\
-sdc_file funMaxMax.sdc -view_name funct-devSlow-rcMax
create_ilm_from_files -si -out_dir block_A.ILM -cell block_A -mmmc -incremental\
-sdc_file funMaxTyp.sdc -view_name funct-devSlow-rcTyp
create_ilm_from_files -si -out_dir block_A.ILM -cell block_A -mmmc -incremental\
-sdc_file tstMaxMax.sdc -view_name test-devSlow-rcMax
create_ilm_from_files -si -out_dir block_A.ILM -cell block_A -mmmc -incremental\
-sdc_file funMinMin.sdc -view_name funct-devFast-rcMin
create_ilm_from_files -si -out_dir block_A.ILM -cell block_A -mmmc -incremental\
-sdc_file tstMinMin.sdc -view_name test-devFast-rcMin

The following example shows the create_ilm_from_files command in case of a non-

MMMC design:
create_ilm_from_files -out_dir test -verilog_file \ ILM/ilm_setup/ilm_data/\
BlockA_0/BlockA_0_postRoute.v.gz -cell BlockA_0 -spef_file \ ILM/ilm_setup/
ilm_data/BlockA_0\ BlockA_0_postRoute.spef.gz -\ sdc\ILM/ilm_setup/ilm_data/
BlockA_0\ BlockA_0_postRoute.core.sdc.gz -si \
-overwrite -si_timing_window_file ILM/ilm_setup/si_ilm_data/BlockA_0/
BlockA_0_SI.xtwf.gz

November 2023 435 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

9.5.3 Specifying ILM Directories at the Top Level

You can use the set_ilm command to use the ILM data for a block at the top partition level
rather than using the default dotlib model. You can run set_ilm multiple times in the same
session. Each time you run this command, the software overwrites the previous setting for a
block. If master/clones exist in a design, the cell name will have the name of the master
partition.

You can use the reset_ilm command to revert to using the dotlib model for a block.
Note: You must use the set_ilm (or reset_ilm) command before specifying read_ilm.
This is because the ILM settings cannot be changed after using read_ilm.

Example Top-Level Signoff Flow with ILMs

1. Before starting the Tempus tool, prepare the top-level Verilog file, if needed.

You need the following in the top-level directory:

❑ A Verilog netlist that includes dummy modules for the blocks (ILM or Liberty) in the
design
❑ A view definition file if you have a MMMC design. Create or load a view definition file
that contains the following:
set_analysis_view -setup {mode1_slowCorner} -hold {mode1_f astCorner}

2. Start a Tempus session from the top-level module directory within the directory where
the partitions are saved.
3. Load the config file, including the top-level netlist, libraries, top-level constraint file, and
ILM directory name.
set_ilm -cell block_A -in_dir ../block_A/block_A.ILM
set_ilm -cell block_B -in_dir ../block_B/block_B.ILM
read_design filename
4. Run read_spef to load the top-level Standard Parasitic Extraction File (SPEF).
5. Run the read_ilm command.
6. Run the report_timing command to perform timing analysis.

9.5.4 ILMs Supported in MMMC Analysis

Cadence strongly recommends that you use ILMs in the MMMC mode. If you have a non-
MMMC design, create and load a view definition file that contains the following:

November 2023 436 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

set_analysis_view -setup {mode1_slowCorner} -hold {mode1_fastCorner}

The MMMC analysis for designs including ILMs is identical to MMMC analysis for black box
designs except for the following considerations:
1. Views, modes, and corners at the top and partition levels must have same names.
2. When you use create_constraint_mode or update_constraint_mode to specify
constraints for MMMC, you must specify the ILM constraints using the -ilm_sdc_files
parameter (that is, timing in the presence of ILMs get constraints from the -
ilm_sdc_files parameter, not the -sdc_files parameter). The SDC files specified
with the -ilm_sdc_files parameter should be the constraint file of the full-chip flat
netlist, where it allows referencing nets or pins internal to the ILM model.
Note: In the current ILM flow, the SDC constraints (originally specified against the complete
flat netlist for the design) that reference parts of the design that were pruned cause warnings
and errors during constraint loading. In this release, you can set the temporary
timing_suppress_ilm_constraint_mismatches attribute to true to suppress all
error and warning messages related to the unfound objects. Note that this command might
also suppress error messages that might be of use (that is, where the top-level pins or nets
or instances cannot be found).

9.5.5 ILM Validation Flow

The ILM validation flow can be used to validate a model at the block level. For example, an
ILM netlist and the .sdc file can be read in a separate Tempus session and timing analysis
can be run on all paths. Then, the results can be compared against timing for the same path
during full-block implementation.

Use the following steps to run the automated ILM validation flow:
1. Load a block level design.
2. Load the SPEF file.
3. Run the following command:
write_ilm -dir ilm_dir -validation_dir validation_dir
Two directories are created - one for saving the ILM data and the second for saving the
validation information. The validation directory contains following files:

Table 9-1 List of Files in the Validation Directory

File Description

November 2023 437 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

init.tcl Used to initialize the ILM data.

nets.tcl Used to get the list of net names in which only the real ILM nets are
included and other nets like attacker nets are excluded.
full.tcl Used to run timing analysis on the original netlist using the
report_timing_model command.
xilm.tcl Used to run timing analysis on the generated ILM data using the
report_timing_model command.
rpt.tcl Compares the output of original netlist with the output of ILM data
using the check_timing_model command.
validation.src Used to run the ILM validation flow by sourcing the Tcl files
automatically.

4. Switch to the validation directory.

5. Source the validation.src file.
After running the ILM validation flow, the validation.sum file is generated. This file
provides the summary of the validation checks.

Sample ILM Validation Summary Report

#---------------------------------------------------------------------
# Tolerance FAIL/PASS Ave Max
# (abs,per) AbsDiff AbsDiff
#---------------------------------------------------------------------

ILM SETUP Slack (0.050 , 2%) 0/6 0.000 0.000 #

PinCap (0.050 , 2%) 0/5 0.000 0.00 #
Tran (0.050 , 2%) 0/5 0.000 0.000 #
DRV ( , 2%) 0/5 -- NA #

ILM HOLD Slack (0.050 , 2%) 0/0 NA NA #

PinCap (0.050 , 2%) 0/5 0.000 0.000 #
Tran (0.050 , 2%) 0/5 0.000 0.000 #
DRV ( , 2%) 0/5 -- NA #

XILM SETUP Slack (0.100 , 3%) 0/6 0.000 0.000 #

PinCap (0.100 , 3%) 0/5 0.000 0.000 #
Tran (0.100 , 3%) 0/5 0.000 0.000 #
DRV ( , 3%) 0/5 -- NA #

XILM HOLD
Slack (0.100 , 3%) 0/0 NA NA #
PinCap (0.100 , 3%) 0/5 0.000 0.000 #
Tran (0.100 , 3%) 0/5 0.000 0.000 #
DRV ( , 3%) 0/5 -- NA #
#----------------------------------------------------------------------
# ILM/XILM Validation PASS

Note:

November 2023 438 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

■ When write_ilm is specified, all the views are generated for multi-corner, multi-mode
(MMMC) analysis.
■ The automated ILM validation performs both ILM/XILM validation depending upon the
data available.

Interactive Use of ILMs

The Global Timing Debugger (GTD) also requires the design to be in a flattened state. The
GTD displays rows with instances or nets as grayed out, which are internal to ILM.

9.5.6 Use of SDF, SDC, and XTWF in ILM Flow

■ High-Level view of the ILM-based flow
The ILM flow falls into two essential flows that are placed in a bottom-up/top-down
fashion. The two flows are done separately, and in separate sessions.
❑ ILM generation flow, usually done bottom-up.
❑ ILM analysis flow, usually done top-down.
For example, a hierarchical design made up of BlockA and BlockB sub-blocks.
❑ In the ILM generation flow, each sub-block has to be implemented as an ILM
(write_ilm) after timing and SI analysis sign-off.
❑ In the ILM analysis flow, the whole design is stitched together by reading the ILM
models for BlockA and BlockB, top level netlist, top level SPEF, top level TWF and
chip level SDC constraints to perform top level timing and SI analysis. This usually
takes place in a separate session.

Use of XTWF Generated in ILM

The write_ilm command creates a directory structure containing the ILM data for timing and
SI analysis as described below:

The information is saved in the following directories:

■ For Timing:
$dir/ilm_data
*.v
*.sdc
*.spef
■ For SI:

November 2023 439 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

$dir/si_ilm_data
*.v
*.sdc
*.spef
*.xtwf

The XTWF is a timing file that contains timing window (the earliest and the latest possible
arrival times that a signal may arrive on a net or a pin) for attacker nets. Tempus does use the
XTWF for SI analysis in the ILM flow. The TWF file is usually used in Tempus if you are
performing timing analysis in third-party tool and you want to bring the design into Tempus for
SI analysis.

The ILM model is self-contained with all the needed information for both Timing and SI
analysis which is suitable for the ILM bottom-up generation/top down analysis flow. See
example below:

Example 1: Block based ILM generation for a sub-module called blockA

read_libs "$libDir/worst.lib"
read_libs -cdb "$libDir/worst.cdB"
read_netlist "$designDir/blockA.v" -top blockA
init_design
read_sdc "$designDir/blockA.sdc"
set_power_rail -global_voltage 1.65
read_spef "$designDir/blockA.spef"
set_db -delaycal_enable_si true
report_timing
write_sdf blockA.sdf
write_ilm -dir blockA

In a new session (when the hierarchical design is all stitched together), you read the ILMs of
the sub-blocks to perform top-level STA and SI analysis sign-off.

Example 2: Top-Level ILM based flow of design made up of two sub-module blockA
and blockB

For SI Analysis:
set_ilm -cell blockA -dir dir1
set_ilm -cell blockB -dir dir2
read_libs, read_libs -cdb …
read_netlist top.v -top TOP
init_design
read_spef top.spef

November 2023 440 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

read_sdc top.sdc
read_ilm
set_db -delaycal_enable_si true
report_timing
write_sdf

For Timing Analysis:

set_ilm -cell blockA -dir dir1
set_ilm -cell blockB -dir dir2
read_libs
read_netlist top.v TOP
init_design
read_spef top.spefread_sdc top.sdc
read_ilm
report_timing
…

ILM Models and SDC-Generated Constraints

The SDC files generated within the ILM directories do not reflect a complete normal set of
constraints. You will notice that only set_annotated_transition and
set_case_analysis constraints are written in the SDC.

The SDC constraints found in the ILM directories are primarily used to save the input slew
information for loop back path between interface logic and non-interface logic. This feature
provides higher accuracy for both Timing/SI analysis using the ILM/XILM flow in Innovus/
Tempus. Here is a scenario describing how the slews of reduced nets are stored for better
accuracy of timing and SI:

An ILM instance inst1 has following two input pins:

■ Input pin1: connects with ILM path, its input slew will be calculated and propagated
from an ILM path.
■ Input pin2: connects with non-ILM path which is not kept in ILM netlist. This often
happens in a loop-back path. The path is reduced in which as a result its pin becomes
dangling but its input slew information is needed to calculate the delay of the inst1. In this
case, Tempus uses the slew kept in ILM/XILM .sdc file instead of the default input slew
which improves the ILM analysis accuracy.

To perform timing analysis using ILM data files, you will need to use the chip level SDC
constraints and the generated SDC constrains for the ILM block. The idea here is that these

November 2023 441 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

constraints are giving high accuracy while not colliding with top-level SDC constraints during
ILM top down analysis flow.

Example:

Generating ILM for BlockA:

read_libs tech.lib
read_netlist blockA.v -top blockA
init_design
read_sdc blockA.sdc
read_spef blockA.spef
write_ilm -dir blockA
report_timing > sta1.rpt

Now to use the ILM data for timing analysis and suppose the file names in the ILM directory
are: ilm.v, ilm.spef, ilm.sdc, ilm.xtwf.

Simply read the original SDC and the SDC generated for the ILM.

Example:
read_libs tech.lib
read_netlist ilm.v -top blockA
init_design
read_sdc ilm.sdc
read_sdc blockA.sdc *
read_spef ilm.spef
report_timing > sta2.rpt

The timing report of the ILM interface paths should be consistent with the timing report of
original full netlist (sta1.rpt should match sta2.rpt). This is usually done for validation
purposes and not a real usage of the ILM flow.

If an ILM is read back to represent a sub-module in a hierarchical design, then to perform

timing analysis, you will need to load the top level original constraints only. The timing report
of all the top nets and interface paths should be consistent with original full flat netlist. This is
the real usage of ILM as it reflects accurate timing and SI information derived from top level
constraints.

9.5.7 Creating XILM

In Tempus, ILMs and XILMs are created using the write_ilm command.

November 2023 442 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

To create an ILM or XILM for a block in Tempus, you must be at that block's hierarchy level;
you cannot write a block ILM from the top-chip level of hierarchy. To provide the data needed
for the ILM, you need the block's netlist, timing libraries, SPEF annotation, and SDC
constraints.

In the following example, an XILM is created for a sub-block, named blockA:

read_libs "$libDir/worst.lib"
read_libs -cdb "$libDir/worst.cdB"
read_netlist "$designDir/blockA.v" -top blockA
init_design
read_sdc "$designDir/blockA.sdc"
set_power_rail -global_voltage 1.65
read_spef "$designDir/blockA.spef"
write_ilm -dir blockA
set_db -delaycal_enable_si true
report_timing
write_sdf blockA.sdf

When ILM is created using the write_ilm command, a directory named blockA will be
created with the MMMC sub-directory. Within this directory you will see another level of sub-
directories, named ilm_data and si_ilm_data, depending upon the -modelType
parameter settings.

9.5.8 Using ILM/XILM for Hierarchical Analysis

The Tempus command for loading an ILM or XILM is read_ilm. To use one or more ILMs,
use the read_ilm command just once. If there are multiple ILM blocks, specify them in a list,
as shown in the example below. The -cell and -dir parameters accept Tcl lists, but note
that the order of the cells and directories must match, for example:
set_ilm -cell cell1 -dir dir1
set_ilm -cell cell2 -dir dir2
read_libs
read_netlist top.v -top TOP
set_db init_read_netlist_allow_undefined_cells false
read_spef top.spef
read_ilm
report_timing

You must run read_ilm after read_spef, and before report_timing. If you get an error
such as:
**ERROR: (xxxILM-334): Specified ILM blockA has non-empty module definition; no ILM
created for it.

November 2023 443 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Timing Model Generation

You will need to remove gates, assign statements, and so on from the blockA module in the
top verilog netlist, because an ILM cannot overwrite the existing logic. The module, if it exists
in the verilog netlist, must be empty.
create_constraint_mode -name mymode -sdc_files {file1_top_level.sdc
file2_top_level.sdc ...} \
-ilm_sdc_files {file1_chip_level.sdc file2_chip_level.sdc ...}

If ILM constraint files (at the chip level SDC) are not specified with the
create_constraint_mode command (in the viewdefinition.tcl while reading the design),
then these can be read using the update_constraint_mode command (after the
set_ilm command is issued), as shown in the following example:
update_constraint_mode –name mymode \
-ilm_sdc_files {file1_chip_level.sdc file2_chip_level.sdc ...}

November 2023 444 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

10
Low Power Flows

10.1 Low Power Overview on page 446

10.2 Low Power Flow on page 446
❍ Low Power Flow for CPF on page 446
❍ Low Power Flow for PGV Flow on page 449
10.3 PGV Flows on page 451
❍ PGV SMSC Flow on page 451
❍ PGV MMMC Flow on page 454
10.4 Importing the Design in Low Power Flow on page 457
10.5 Non-MMMC Flow Settings in Low Power Flow on page 457

November 2023 445 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

10.1 Low Power Overview

Along with capturing the design and technology-related power constraints, the Common
Power Format (CPF) defines timing analysis views based on a combination of different
operating corners, power modes, and timing library sets. CPF does not contain RC corner
information. To update the RC corners for each timing view, you must use the Tempus
command to define the RC corners.

10.2 Low Power Flow

The Low Power flow is described below for CPF and PG Verilog (PGV):

Low Power Flow for CPF

The below flow shows the steps for setting-up Tempus using the CPF file:

November 2023 446 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

Figure 10-1 Low Power Flow for CPF

Sample CPF File Script

You can use the following settings for Tempus using the CPF file:
1. Specify the number of CPUs to enable multi-threading:
set_multi_cpu_usage -local_cpu n
2. Load the design data:
read_mmmc <abc. tel>
3. Load the libraries:
create_library_set

November 2023 447 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

4. Create RC and Delay calculation corners:

create_rc_corner
create_delay_corner
5. Group SDC constraints files
create_constraint_mode
6. Create an analysis view object that associates a delay calculation corner with a
constraint mode.
create_analysis_view
7. Set the analysis views used for setup and hold analysis:
set_analysis_view
8. Schedule reading of structural gate-level vVerilog netlist:
read_verilog <abc.v>
9. Set the top module name, and checks for consistency between Verilog netlist and timing
libraries:
set_top_module <abc>
10. Specify the CPF file, which contains the power domain definitions:
read_power_intent -cpf <xyz.cpf>
11. Load the cell parasitics:
read_spef -rc_corner
12. Run a full timing update for the current design:
update_timing -full
13. Generate a report of all defined views in the design:
report_analysis_views
14. Specify the instance(s) for which the report is to be printed.
report_instance_library <instance>
15. Report the voltage of the cell or net timing arc.
report_delay_calculation -voltage
16. Generate the timing report:
report_timing
17. Save the design:
save_design -overwrite
18. Exit the design:

November 2023 448 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

exit

Low Power Flow for PGV Flow

The following figure shows the steps for setting-up Tempus using the PGV flow:

Figure 10-2 Low Power Flow for PGV

November 2023 449 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

Sample PGV Flow Script

You can use the following settings for Tempus using the PGV flow:
1. Specify the number of CPUs to enable multi-threading:
set_multi_cpu_usage -localCpu n
2. Read library file.
read_libs < >
3. Schedule reading of structural gate-level Vverilog netlist:
read_verilog <PG verilog.v>
4. Set the top module name, and check for consistency between the Verilog netlist and
timing libraries:
set_top_module <abc>
5. Load the timing constraints file:
read_sdc < >
6. Load the cell parasitics:
read_spef -rc_corner
7. Initiate power intent inference and library binding:
set_lib_binding_by_voltage -power_net_voltages
8. Run a full timing update for the current design:
update_timing -full
9. Generate a report of all defined views in the design.
report_analysis_views
10. Report library related information for an instance:
report_instance_library <instance>
11. Report the voltage of the cell or net timing arc
report_delay_calculation -voltage
12. Generate the timing report:
report_timing
13. Overwrite the previously saved session with a new session:
write_db -overwrite
14. Exit the design:
exit

November 2023 450 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

10.3 PGV Flows

The PGV flows in Tempus can be categorized as below, based on the various timing analysis
practices:
■ PGV SMSC Flow (without MMMC)
■ PGV MMMC Flow

PGV SMSC Flow

In the PGV SMSC flow, timing analysis can be performed in a separate session for each view
(SMSC flow). The following figure represents the PGV SMSC flow:

Figure 10-3 PGV SMSC Flow

In the PGV SMSC flow, Tempus requires a PGV netlist as input along with other essential
information required for static timing analysis. Run the set_lib_binding_by_voltage
command after running the init_design command, which initiates auto inferencing of power
intent and view definition. The set_lib_binding_by_voltage command provides voltages
for each power net in the design.

In PGV, the instantiation of each library cell includes power and ground pins and their
connectivity, as shown in the following example:
module block1 (clk, in1, in2, out1, rail1, rail2, gnd);
input clk, in1, in2;

November 2023 451 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

output out1;
input rail1,rail2, gnd;
.BUFX1 i0 (.A(in1), .Y(n0), .VDD12(rail1), .VSS(gnd));
.NOR_HVT i1 (.N_CORE_O(n1), .CNTL_CORE_I(n0), .PORTS_ON_33_I(in2), .VDD12(rail1),
.VDDS33(rail2), .VSS(gnd));
.BUFX1 i2 (.A(n1), .Y(n3), .VDD12(rail1), .VSS(gnd));
.DFFHQX1 i3 (.CK(clk), .D(n3), .Q(out1), .VDD12(rail1), .VSS(gnd));
endmodule

SMSC PGV Flow Script

You can assert voltages for power rails using the set_lib_binding_by_voltage command,
which initiates power intent inference and library binding. The following example presents the
usage of the set_lib_binding_by_voltage command:
set_lib_binding_by_voltage
-power_net_voltages {<power_net_name> @<Voltage> <power_net_name>@<Voltage>}
[-process <num>]
[-temperature <num>]

You can specify the process and temperature of the corner using the -process and -
temperature parameters of the set_lib_binding_by_voltage command along with the
power rail voltages. You can provide all the libraries required for all the power domains upfront
using the read_lib command. During the library binding, Tempus creates library sets for
each power domain-based matching PVT conditions.

Following is the PGV SMSC flow script:

read_libs {list of Liberty files}
read_netlist <power_aware_verilog_file>
set_db init_read_netlist_allow_undefined_cells true; init_design <top_name>
read_sdc <sdc_file>
read_spef <spf_file>
set_lib_binding_by_voltage -power_net_voltages {net1@v1 net2@v2 .. } -process 1 -
temperature 125
report_timing ...

PGV SMSC Power Intent Inference

Following is an example of the MSV design:

November 2023 452 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

Figure 10-4 PGV SMSC Power Intent Interface

In this example, the PGV flow creates an internal CPF with five power domains, one each for
every power net, as shown below:
set_cpf_version 1.0e
set_hierarchy_separator "/"
set_db top
create_power_nets -nets VDD1
create_power_nets -nets VDD2
create_power_nets -nets VDD3
create_power_nets -nets VDD4
create_power_nets -nets VDD5
create_ground_nets -nets gnd
create_power_domain -name pd_VDD1 -default
update_power_domain -name pd_VDD1 -primary_power_net VDD1 -primary_ground_net gnd
create_power_domain -name pd_VDD2 -instances {PD1}
update_power_domain -name pd_VDD2 -primary_power_net VDD2 -primary_ground_net gnd
create_power_domain -name pd_VDD3 -instances {PD2}
update_power_domain -name pd_VDD3 -primary_power_net VDD3 -primary_ground_net gnd
create_power_domain -name pd_VDD4 -instances {PD3}
update_power_domain -name pd_VDD4 -primary_power_net VDD4 -primary_ground_net gnd
create_power_domain -name pd_VDD5
update_power_domain -name pd_VDD5 -primary_power_net VDD5 -primary_ground_net gnd
create_global_connection -net VDD1 -domain pd_VDD1 -pins VDD
create_global_connection -net gnd -domain pd_VDD1 -pins VSS
… Similarly for VDD2 thru VDD5
end_design

The set_lib_binding_by_voltage command also creates the view definition file for single
corner analysis and assigns the operating voltage for each power domain accordingly. It also
creates library sets for each power domain based on the assigned PVT and associates the
corresponding library set for the power domains.

November 2023 453 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

PG Net Voltages for Early and Late Analysis in PGV SMSC Flow

You can specify various early and late voltages for power rails using the -
early_power_net_voltages and -late_power_net_voltages parameters of the
set_lib_binding_by_voltage command. These parameters do not impact the inference of
power domains.

However, library binding will look for a library for both late and early voltages of each instance.
As a result, the view definition file written out internally will consist of both early and late library
sets and late and early op_conds.

Late analysis will use late operating condition and late library set. Similarly, early analysis is
done based on early operating condition and early library set.

PGV MMMC Flow

In the PGV MMMC flow, timing analysis can be performed concurrently on multiple views. The
following figure represents the PGV MMMC flow:

Figure 10-5 PGV MMMC Flow

In addition to a PGV netlist, the PGV MMMC flow requires a view definition template file. In
this template file, you can define all the required analysis views, including the corresponding
RC corner, constraint mode, and delay corner.

However, you do not need to define a delay corner definition to the power domain level. That
means, you only need to specify the design-level operating conditions. You can also create a

November 2023 454 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

single library set, which includes all the libraries to cover all the power domain voltages in a
given timing analysis corner.

Power domains and power nets are independent of analysis corners or, rather, same for all
corners. Only the voltages assigned to power nets are different for different analysis corners.
You can define specific voltages for specific power nets in the view definition template file. For
this requirement, use the create_delay_corner -pg_net_voltages parameter, as shown
below:
create_delay_corner -pg_net_voltages \
{<power_net_name> @<Voltage> <power_net_name>@<Voltage> … }

This parameter serves the same purpose as set_lib_binding_by_voltage -

power_net_voltages. After the design is loaded with the template view definition file, you
can use the add_pg_netlist_power_intent command to initiate power intent inferencing.

This command creates an individual power domain for each power net, similar to the PGV
flow without MMMC (SMSC flow). This command also updates the view definition file to
update delay_corners with the power domain information.

This command creates library sets for each power domain based on PVT. Power domain PVT
is inferred based on the voltage from the associated power net of the domain, and the process
and temperature of the design-level PVT for the corner.

View Definition Template

The view definition template is presented below:

create_library_set -name libset_all_dc1\
-timing [list stdLib_volt1.lib stdLib_volt2.lib stdLib_volt3.lib\
IO_volt1.lib IO_volt2.lib IO_volt3.lib ]
create_rc_corner -name default_rc_corner
create_timing_condition -name dc1 -library_set [list libset_all_dc1]\ -opcond slow
-opcond_library stdLib_volt2.lib \
-pg_net_voltages {[email protected] [email protected] [email protected]} -rc_corner default_rc_corner
create_library_set -name libset_all_dc2\
-timing [list stdLib_volt4.lib stdLib_volt5.lib stdLib_volt6.lib\
IO_volt4.lib IO_volt5.lib IO_volt6.lib ]
create_rc_corner -name default_rc_corner
create_timing_condition -name all -library_sets all_libs
create_rc_corner -name rcTyp
create_rc_corner -name rcMin
create_rc_corner -name rcMax

November 2023 455 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

create_timing_condition -name dc2 -library_set [list libset_all_dc2] -opcond best

-opcond_library stdLib_volt4.lib \
-pg_net_voltages {[email protected] [email protected] [email protected]} -rc_corner default_rc_corner
create_constraint_mode -name mode_func -sdc_files [list func.sdc]
create_analysis_view -name view1_func constraint_mode mode_func -delay_corner dc1
create_analysis_view -name view2_func -constraint_mode mode_func -delay_corner dc2
set_analysis_view -setup view1_func -hold view1_func

Note:
■ The library set for each delay corner includes libraries for multiple voltages, which are
assigned to different power domains during power intent inferencing and recreating the
view definition file.
■ The opcond specified for each delay corner provides the process and temperature
values for the corner.
■ The voltage for each power net is specified with the create_delay_corner -
pg_net_voltages parameter.

MMMC PGV Flow Script

Following is the PGV MMMC flow script:

read_mmmcread_mmmc view_definition_template.tcl
read_netlist <power_aware_verilog_file>
set_db init_read_netlist_allow_undefined_cells true; init_design <top_name>
infer_pgv_power_intent
set_analysis_view -setup [….] -hold [….]
report_timing ...

Run the set_analysis_view command after running the infer_pgv_power_intent

command to activate the MMMC views for PGV analysis. Tempus updates the MMMC view
definition with power domains for each corner and corresponding library sets after the
set_analysis_view command is run.

The view definition template file preferably has only one active view. It is recommended not
to specify all active views in this file.

PGV MMMC Power Intent Inference

Power domain inferencing in the PGV MMMC flow is the same as in the PGV SMSC flow. The
view definition template file creation is also very similar, except that the PGV MMMC flow has
multiple corners/views defined.

November 2023 456 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Low Power Flows

PG Net Voltages for Early and Late Analysis in PGV MMMC Flow

Similar to the PGV SMSC flow, you can specify various early and late voltages for power rails
in the PGV MMMC flow. You can specify the -early_pg_net_voltages and -
late_pg_net_voltages parameters of the create_delay_corner command in the MMMC
view definition template to assign various early/late voltages for power rails in a given corner.

During library binding, libraries for both late and early voltages of each instance will be bound
to each cell as late/early libraries. As a result, the view definition template file written out
internally will consist of both the early and late library sets and late and early op_conds for
each corner.

Late analysis will use late operating condition and late library set. Similarly, early analysis is
done based on early operating condition and early library set.

10.4 Importing the Design in Low Power Flow

Use the following Tempus commands to import the timing libraries, cdb library (for signal
integrity analysis), and netlist in low power flow:
read_mmmcread_mmmc -cpf cpffile
read_netlist netlist
init_design

10.5 Non-MMMC Flow Settings in Low Power Flow

Use the below Non-MMMC flow settings in low power flow:
■ Load the constraint and parasitic data files:
read_sdc constraint_files
read_spef parasitic_data_files
■ Set the operating conditions for each power domain:
set_opcond condition_name1 -library library_name1 -powerdomain domain_name1

■ Load both the Min and Max timing libraries:

set_timing_library -max Max -min Min
set_opcond -max condition_name1 -maxlibrary maxLibrary_name1 -min condition_name2
-minLibrary minLibrary_name1 -powerdomain domain_name1

After completing the above steps, you can run other Tempus commands to continue with the
timing flow.

November 2023 457 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

11
Appendix

This chapter covers the following topics:

■ Appendix - Timing Debug GUI on page 459
■ Appendix - Multi-CPU Usage on page 485
■ Appendix - Base Delay, SI Delay, and SI Glitch Correlation with SPICE on page 491
■ Appendix - Supported CPF Commands on page 501
■ CPF 1.0e Script Example on page 502
■ CPF 1.0 Script Example on page 509
■ CPF 1.1 Script Example on page 519
■ Supported CPF 1.0 Commands on page 527
■ Supported CPF 1.0e Commands on page 536
■ Supported CPF 1.1 Commands on page 547
■ Path Exception Priorities on page 559

November 2023 458 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Appendix - Timing Debug GUI

■ Overview on page 459
■ Timing Debug Flow on page 460
■ Generating Timing Debug Report on page 461
■ Displaying Violation Report on page 461
■ Analyzing Timing Results on page 461
❑ Viewing Power Domain Information on page 467
■ Creating Path Categories on page 468
❑ Creating Predefined Categories on page 468
❑ Creating New Categories on page 470
❑ Creating Sub-Categories on page 471
❑ Hiding path categories on page 474
❑ Reporting Path Categories on page 474
❑ Using Categories to Analyze Timing Results on page 475
❑ Analyzing MMMC Categories on page 476
❑ Manual Slack Correction of Categories on page 478
■ Editing Table Columns on page 479
❑ Cell Coloring on page 481
■ Viewing Schematics on page 482
■ Running Timing Debug with Interface Logic Models on page 483

Overview
Tempus provides the Global Timing Debug feature for debugging the timing results. The
various Timing Debug forms provide easy visual access to the timing reports and debugging
tools.

You can group all paths that are failing for the same reason and apply solutions for faster
timing closure. You can cross-probe between the timing paths in the timing report and display
area under Layout Tab in Tempus.

November 2023 459 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Note: If you have a previously saved timing debug report, you can use the timing debug
feature even when the design is not loaded in the Tempus session.

Timing Debug Flow

You can generate a detailed violation report to list the details of all violating paths. You can
then use the timing debug capability to visually identify problems with critical paths in this
report. After identifying the problems, you group all paths with the same problem under a
single category. You can define several categories to capture all problems related to the
violating paths before fixing the problems and running timing analysis again.

Following is the flow for debugging timing results.

November 2023 460 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Note: The file gtd.pref.tcl is loaded automatically at launch.

Generating Timing Debug Report

Tempus uses a machine readable timing report to display timing debug information. The
report is generated in the ASCII format and contains details of all violating paths. By default,
the report has .mtarpt extension.

To generate a violation report, use one of the following options:

■ Use report_timing -machine_readable command

You can also generate text-format report from a machine readable report.

To generate the text report, use the following:

■ Use the write_text_timing_report command.
■ Use the Write Textual Timing Report form.

Displaying Violation Report

To analyze the timing results, you need to load the machine readable timing report in Tempus.

To display the violation report, use one of the following options:

■ Specify the file name in the Display/Generate Timing Report form.
Note: To select an existing file, deselect the Generate option before clicking on the
directory icon to the right of the Timing Report File field. By default, the global timing
debug engine uses the following command to generate a machine-readable timing
analysis report for the GUI display:
report_timing -machine_readable -max_points 10000 -max_slack 0.75
■ Use the load_timing_debug_report command.
Note: Use the Append to Current Report option in the Display/Generate Timing
Report form to load multiple reports in a single session.

Analyzing Timing Results

Tempus provides Timing Debug feature to visually analyze timing problems.

You analyze the following data in the Analyze tab in the main Tempus window:

November 2023 461 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ Visual display of passing and failing paths as a histogram. Failing paths are represented
in red and passing paths are represented in green color. The goal of timing debug
process is to identify paths that fall in red category.
■ Details of the critical paths in the Path list. You identify a critical path in this list for further
analyses using the Timing Path Analyzer form.
■ Visual display of paths reported in different timing reports. When you load multiple debug
reports in a single timing debug session, the paths are displayed in different colors
corresponding to the report file they are coming from. You can move the cursor over a
path to display the name of the report file.

You analyze the following data in the Timing Path Analyzer form:
■ Slack calculation bars for arrival and required times. You can identify clock skew issues,
latency balancing or large clock uncertainty issues using these bars.

The following examples illustrate the problems that you can identify using the slack
calculation bars in the Timing Path Analyzer form.

Example 9-1

Launch and capture latency components are not aligned. Therefore there can be large clock-
latency mismatch in this path.

Example 9-2

The cycle adjustment bar in the required time indicates presence of multicycle path.

Example 9-3

Large input delay in an I/O path is represented by the blue bar in the arrival time.

November 2023 462 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Example 9-4

Path Delay bar in the required time indicates a set_max_delay constraint.

■ Path details including launch and capture. This information is provided as tabs in the
Timing Path Analyzer form. You can click on a single path to display it in the design
display area. You can select each element consecutively to trace the entire path in the
design display area. This form has a Status column that indicates the status of the path
as follows:

Flag Description
a Assign net
b Blackbox instance
c Clock net
cr Cover cell
f Preplaced instance
i Ignore net
s Skip route net
t "don't touch" net
t instance marked as "don't touch"
T instance not marked as "don't touch" when the module it
belongs to is marked as "don't touch"
u Unplaced cell
x External net

■ SDC related to the path. The Path SDC tab displays the SDC constraints related to the
selected path. The list contains the name of the SDC file, the line number that indicates
the position of the constraint in the SDC file, and the constraint definition.

The commands that can be displayed in the Path SDC tab are:
■ create_clock

November 2023 463 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ create_generated_clock
■ group_path
■ set_multicycle_path
■ set_false_path
■ set_clock_transition
■ set_max_delay
■ set_min_delay
■ set_max_fanout
■ set_fanout_load
■ set_min_capacitance
■ set_max_capacitance
■ set_min_transition
■ set_max_transition
■ set_input_transition
■ set_capacitance
■ set_drive
■ set_driving_cell
■ set_logic_one
■ set_logic_zero
■ set_dont_use
■ set_dont_touch
■ set_case_analysis
■ set_input_delay
■ set_output_delay
■ set_annotated_check
■ set_clock_uncertainty
■ set_clock_latency
■ set_propagated_clock
■ set_load

November 2023 464 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ set_disable_clock_gating_check
■ set_clock_gating_check
■ set_max_time_borrow
■ set_clock_groups

When you create a constraint on the command line, the Path SDC tab interactively displays
the result of the additional constraint.
Note: MMMC views are not displayed interactively.
Note: You can create a path category directly from SDC constraints in the Path SDC form.
When you right-click a constraint and view the Create Path Category form, to see the line
number (from the SDC file) and the name of the constraint.

In Tempus, you can also ceate a path category based on SDC constraint using the -sdc
parameter of the create_path_category command:
create_path_category -name category_name -sdc {file_name line_number}

where file_name is the name of the constraint file and line_number is the line number of
the SDC constraint.
■ Schematic display of the path. The Schematics tab displays the gate-level schematic
view of the critical path. For more information, see Viewing Schematics.
■ Timing interpretation for the path. This feature provides rule-based path analysis to help
you discover sources of potential timing problems in a path. By default, the software
performs the following checks on the following rules:

Path structure
■ Transparent Latch in Path
■ Clock Gating
■ Hard Macros
■ HVT Cells
■ Buffering List
■ Net Fanout
■ Level Shifters
■ Isolation Cells

November 2023 465 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ Net too long

■ Couple capacitance ratio

Timing and constraints

■ Large Skew
■ Divider in Clock Path
■ Total SI Delay
■ SI Delay
■ External Delay

Floorplan
■ Fixed Cells
■ Distance from start to end
■ Distance of repeater chain
■ Detour
■ Multiple power domains

DRVs
■ Max transitions
■ Max capacitance
■ Max fanout

You can customize the type of timing information reported. The Edit Timing Interpretation
GUI Tempus lets you add, modify, or delete rules you want the tool to check and report.
■ Timing bar to analyze delays associated with instances and nets in a path. Use this
information to identify issues related to large instance or net delays, repeater chains,
paths with large number of buffers, and large macro delays. The small bars

November 2023 466 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

superimposed on net delays or within element delays show incremental (longer or

shorter) delays due to noise effects:

■ Hierarchical representation of the path in the Hierarchy View field. This representation of
the path-delay shows the traversal of a path through the design hierarchy drawn on the
time axis. A longer arrow means that there are more instances on its path. Use this
information to see the module where the path is spending more time or to identify inter-
partition timing problems.

Viewing Power Domain Information

While debugging critical paths on MSV designs, it is useful to be able to identify power
domains and low power cells. The Timing Debug feature displays this information in the
following ways:
■ The level shifters and isolation cells are listed in the Timing Interpretation tab of the
Timing Path Analyzer.

November 2023 467 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ The delay bar of the Timing Path Analyzer can display the level shifters and isolation
cells. You can also use the Preferences form to specify the colors in which the level
shifters and isolation cells are displayed.

Creating Path Categories

After analyzing the paths in the timing report, you identify problems in various paths. Then
you create a group of paths such that all paths in that group have the same timing problem
and can be fixed at the same time. In timing debug such a group of paths is called a category.
In Tempus, you can either define your own category or use predefined categories to group
your paths. The categories that you define are then displayed in the Path Category field in
the Analysis tab. The form also displays the paths associated with each category.

Creating Predefined Categories

There are following predefined categories:

■ Basic Path Group
Creates standard path categories according to basic path groups.

The basic path groups are:

■ Register to register
■ Input to register
■ Register to output

November 2023 468 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ Input to Output

Registers can be macros, latches, or sequential-cell types. To create categories by basic path
groups, choose the Analysis tab - Analysis drop-down menu - Path Group Analysis
option.
■ Clock Paths
Creates categories according to launch clock - capture clock combinations.

Following categories are created:

■ Paths with clock fully contained in a single domain, clk1.
■ Paths with clocks starting one clock domain and ending at another, clk1->clk2.

To create categories for clock paths, choose the Analysis tab - Analysis drop-down menu -
Clock Analysis option.
■ Hierarchical Floorplan
Creates categories according to the hierarchical characteristics of a path.
■ View
Creates categories according to the view for which the path was generated.

To create view path categories, choose the Analysis tab - Analysis drop-down menu - View
Analysis option.
■ False Paths
Creates a category with paths defined as False paths.

To create view path categories, choose the Analysis tab - Analysis drop-down menu -
Critical False Path option.
■ Bottleneck
Creates categories based on instances that occur often in critical paths.

To create view path categories, choose the Analysis tab - Analysis drop-down menu -
Bottleneck Analysis option.
■ DRV Analysis
Generates or loads a DRV report containing capacitance, transition, or fanout violations.
Paths that are affected by the selected DRV types are grouped in a category.

November 2023 469 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

To create or load this report, choose the Analysis tab - Analysis drop-down menu - DRV
Analysis option.

Creating New Categories

To define a new category, use the Create Path Category form. The Create Path Category
form contains drop-down menus with conditions that you use to define a path category. The
conditions are characteristics that a path must have to be added to the named category. You
can define multiple conditions that a path must meet to be added to the category.

The category that you create is added in the Path Category field in the Analysis tab. All
paths that meet the conditions set for this category are grouped under the category name.
Paths are separated automatically according to MMMC views into different categories, for
example:
CLOCK1<View_test_mode>
CLOCK2<View_mission_mode>

■ Double-click on the category name in the Path Category field in the Analysis tab to
display the list of paths in the Path List field.
Note: You can add a comment in the Comment field to record any notes that you would like
to include with the category. The comment appears in the category report file.

November 2023 470 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Creating Sub-Categories

You can create sub-categories based on existing categories. While analyzing a sub-category,
global timing debug will traverse the paths in the master category instead of all the paths in
the current report.
■ Creating Sub-Categories through the GUI on page 471
■ Creating Sub-Categories through Command Line on page 472

Creating Sub-Categories through the GUI

■ In the GUI, you can create a sub category as follows:
■ Right-click on a path category, and select Nested Category.

November 2023 471 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

The Create Path Category form is displayed.

In the Master category name field, the name of the category you selected previously is
displayed. Create one or more subcategories as explained in Creating Path Categories.
Note: You can create nested sub-categories, that is, you can further create sub-categories
for a sub-category.

You can also use the Category - Create menu command to bring up the Create Path Category
form. In the Master category name field, type the name of the category for which you want
to create the sub-category, and then create one or more subcategories as explained in
Creating Path Categories.

Creating Sub-Categories through Command Line

Use the -master parameter of the create_path_category command to create sub-

categories. The category created will be a sub-category of the category name specified with
the -master parameter.

The following other commands also support sub-categories; to run these commands only on
the sub-categories of a particular master category, specify the master category name with the
-master parameter.
■ analyze_paths_by_basic_path_group

November 2023 472 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ analyze_paths_by_bottleneck
■ analyze_paths_by_clock_domain
■ analyze_paths_by_critical_false_path
■ analyze_paths_by_drv
■ analyze_paths_by_hierarchy
■ analyze_paths_by_view

Note: If the parent category of a sub-category is deleted, the sub-category cannot be edited
or changed anymore. However, the sub-category is still displayed in case you want to refer to
it.

Viewing Sub-Categories

The subcategories for a master category are displayed in a hierarchically numbered list below
the master category. As an illustration, consider the example shown here:

In this example:
■ master_category1 is the master category
■ nested_category_1a and nested_category_1b are the sub-categories of
master_category1.
The prefix (1) is displayed with nested_category_1a and nested_category_1b.
■ nested_category_2 is the sub-category of nested_category_1a.
The prefix (2) is shown with nested_category_2.

November 2023 473 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Hiding path categories

To remove a path category from the histogram display, right-click on a path and select Hide
Category. The category name in the category list is not hidden, but is marked with an "H" as
hidden.

Reporting Path Categories

To generate a report containing information about path categories, use the following options:
■ Use the write_category_summary command
■ Use the Write Category Report File GUI

The text file contains the following information:

■ Category name
■ Total number of paths
■ Number of passing paths
■ Number of failing paths
■ Worst negative slack
■ Total negative slack
■ TNS

November 2023 474 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Sample report:

Using Categories to Analyze Timing Results

You can use the categories that you create to group the timing paths, and display them as
histogram in the Analysis tab. The Analysis tab displays the category details in the Path
Category field. You can perform the following tasks in the Analysis tab to analyze the timing
results:

Double-click on any category to display the details of the paths grouped in that category in
the Path List field.

Right-click on the category name and select Add to Histogram option. The paths related to
the selected category are highlighted in a different color in the histogram. This gives you a
visual representation of the number of paths that meet the conditions in that category and can
possibly have the same timing problem.

November 2023 475 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

For example, in the following figure the SetupCheck category was added to the histogram.

Analyzing the resulting the Analysis tab gives you information for fixing problems related to
larger sets of timing paths. After identifying the problems, you can make the required changes
such as modify floorplan, script or SDC files and run timing analysis again for further analysis.

Analyzing MMMC Categories

Paths are separated automatically according to MMMC views into different categories, for
example, the following figure shows two categories based on MMMC views:
1. view_mission_140MHz_1.0V

November 2023 476 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

2. view_mission_166MHz_1.8V

Do the following:
■ Right-click on one of view_mission_140MHz_1.0V and choose List Paths.
■ Right-click on one the paths and choose Show Timing Path Analyzer.

The Timing Path Analyzer is displayed.

November 2023 477 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ Click on the Path SDC tab to display the SDCs:

Note that the SDCs relative to mode mission_140MHz that produced the path are
highlighted.

Manual Slack Correction of Categories

Use the Set Category Slack Correction form to specify the estimated slack correction for the
selected category of paths. A slack correction that you apply to a category modifies all the
paths in that category. If a path belongs to several categories, all the correction from the
categories are added. The worst negative slack and total negative slack values of a category
can be affected by the correction applied to another category.

November 2023 478 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Once you enable the slack correction, the histogram is updated to reflect the slack correction.
An asterisk (*) is added next to the slack value of paths that belong to this category in the
Path List field in the Analysis tab. Paths are reordered based on new specified slack. This
allows you to filter out the paths that can be fixed and work on the remaining paths.

To access the Set Category Slack Correction form complete the following steps:
■ Click on the Analysis Tab in the main Tempus window.
■ Right click on the category name in the Path Category field.
■ Choose the Set Category Slack Correction option.

To disable the set slack correction value:

■ Right click on the category name in the Path Category field.
■ Choose the Deactive Category Slack correction option.

Editing Table Columns

You can customize the dimensions and contents of table columns to suit your needs.
■ To begin customizing a table, click on the Analysis tab, then right-click on a path.

A drop-down menu is displayed.

■ Select Edit Table Column.

November 2023 479 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

The Edit Table Column form is displayed.

■ Choose the timing window that contains the table to want to customize.
■ Choose the table whose columns you want to customize. The selections change
according to the timing window you choose.
■ Choose a column item or specify a command.

For commands, specify the procedure you want to use to determine the information you want
to include in the column. Source the file containing the procedure before you specify the
procedure here.

For example:
# Combine fedge (from edge) and tedge (to edge) #information into a single field
proc my_get_edge {id var} {
upvar #0 $var p
($ added before p)
if {p(type) == "inst"} {
return "$p(fedge) -> $p(tedge)"
} elseif {$p(type) == "port" } {
return $p(fedge)
} else {
return ""
}
}

■ Build the column list.

❑ Add adds a column to the column list.

November 2023 480 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

❑ Modify let you modify characteristics. Click on a column in the column list. Edit the
information, then click Modify.
❑ Delete removes a column from the column list.
❑ Move Up moves a column up in the column list. This effectively moves a column to
the left in the table.
❑ Move Down moves a column down in the column list. This effectively moves a
column to the right table.
■ (Optional) Click Load. The opens the GTD (Global Timing Debug) Preferences form.
Specify a file name.

Cell Coloring

Use the Cell Coloring page of the Timing Debug Preferences form to choose colors for
specific cells in the delay bar.

When you assign colors, this same colors will be restored when you start a new session.

In the Cell Name Selection Elements field for each color, you can choose whether you are
providing one of the following:

November 2023 481 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ Cell name
■ Instance
■ Procedure that you have defined

The procedure is invoked with the full instance name as the argument. You must source the
file containing the procedure before you use this feature.

For example:
# Colors when the instance name contains "core/block1"
proc belongs_to_block1 {inst_name} {
if [regexp {core/block1} $inst_name] {
return 1
} else {
return 0
}
}

Viewing Schematics
The Critical Path Schematic Viewer displays the gate-level schematic view of the critical
path. To display the Schematic Viewer, click on the schematics icon in the Path List field of
the Analysis tab. You can display additional paths in the Schematic Viewer by using the
middle mouse button to drag the path from path list to Schematic Viewer.

You can also display the Schematics by selecting the Schematics tab in the Timing Path
Analyzer form. The form is displayed when you double-click on a critical path in the Path List
in the Analysis tab.

On displaying the Schematic Viewer, you can see the power instance colored and the power
domain information displayed in a popup message box as well as in terminal.

November 2023 482 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

You can perform the following tasks in the Module Schematic Viewer:
■ View the Gate-level design elements.
■ Select an element in the schematic.
❑ Click on an object in the schematic to select and highlight it. When you move the
cursor to an object, the object type and name of the object appear in the information
box.
■ Scroll over an object to display the object type and name of the object in the Object field.
■ Cross-probe between the Schematics window and Path List field.
❑ Select a path and left-click on the Schematics button above the Path List Table. (This
is the button at the far-right side, just above the table).
❑ To show multiple paths, select another path, and drag and drop it to the Schematics
window.
■ Use the menu options provided in the Schematic Viewer. To access the menu options,
you can either click on the menu bar or right-click on an object in the schematic. You can
use the menu options to perform the following tasks:
❑ Manipulate schematic views of fan-in and fan-out cones.
❑ Trace connectivity between drivers, objects, and loads.
❑ Move between different levels of instance views.

Running Timing Debug with Interface Logic Models

You can use the timing debug feature with designs containing Interface Logic Models (ILMs).
■ The Timing Path Analyzer - Path SDC form displays ILM SDCs rather than the original
SDCs.

November 2023 483 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ The software highlights the entire ILM module instead of the instances and nets inside
the ILM. The instances and the nets inside the ILMs are greyed out in the Timing Path
Analyzer - Path SDC form.

November 2023 484 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Appendix - Multi-CPU Usage

■ Overview on page 485
■ Running Distributed Processing on page 486
■ Running Multi-Threading on page 486
■ Memory and Run Time Control on page 487
■ Checking the Distributed Computing Environment on page 489
■ Setting and Changing the License Check-Out Order on page 489
■ Limiting the Multi-CPU License Search to Specific Products on page 489
■ Releasing Licenses Before the Session Ends on page 489
■ Controlling the Level of Usage Information in the Log File on page 490
■ Where to Find More Information on Multi-CPU Licensing on page 490

Overview
You can accelerate portions of the design flow by using multiple-CPU processing.
The Tempus Timing Solution software has the following multiple-CPU modes:
■ Multi-threading
In this mode, a job is divided into several threads, and multiple processors in a single
machine process them concurrently.
■ Distributed processing
In this mode, a job is processed by two or more networked computers running
concurrently.

You can configure multiple-CPU processing by using the commands described in the
Multiple-CPU Processing Commands chapter of the Tempus Text Command
Reference.

The following Tempus features support multiple-CPU processing:

■ Multi-mode multi-corner timing analysis
For information, see Distributed Multi-Mode Multi-Corner Analysis
■ Timing analysis reporting commands specified by run_threaded_commands

November 2023 485 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

For information, see run_threaded_commands in the Tempus Text Command

Reference.
■ Signal integrity analysis
For information, see set_delay_cal_mode in the Signal Integrity Analysis
Commands chapter of the Tempus Text Command Reference.

Running Distributed Processing

To run the software in distributed processing mode, the following two commands are required:
■ set_distribute_host

Use this command to specify a configuration file for distributed processing or create the
configuration for the remote shell, secure shell, or load-sharing facility queue to use for
distributed processing. If you request more machines than are available, most
applications wait until all requested machines are available.
To display the current setting for set_distribute_host, use the
get_distribute_host command.
■ set_multi_cpu_usage:

Use this command to specify the maximum number of computers to use for processing.
To display the current setting for set_multi_cpu_usage, use the
get_multi_cpu_usage command.

Running Multi-Threading
To run the software in multi-threading mode, the following command is required:
■ set_multi_cpu_usage

Use this command to specify the number of threads to use. Upon completion, the log file
generated by each thread is appended to the main log file.
Note: The -localCpu parameter limits the number of threads running concurrently.
Although the software can create additional threaded jobs during run time, depending on the
application in use, only the number of threads specified with this parameter are run at a given
time.

If you ask for more threads than are available, the software issues a warning and runs with
the maximum number of available threads.

November 2023 486 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

For example, to run signal integrity analysis with four threads, specify the following
commands:
set_multi_cpu_usage -localCpu 4
set_delay_cal_mode -siAware true
report_timing

Memory and Run Time Control

Use the report_resource command to report memory/run time in multiple-CPU processing.
This command allows you to determine how much memory is being used at any time and of
what form (physical vs. virtual), and to determine real time and CPU time. You can use the -
verbose parameter of the report_resource command to get detailed memory usage
information.

When you run report_resource -verbose, the following detailed memory information is
displayed:

Current (total cpu=0:00:12.9, real=0:05:48, peak res=275.8M, current mem=383.9M)

Cpu(s) 2, load average: 4.63
Mem: 16443800k total, 16378412k used, 65388k free, 105704k buffers
Swap: 16777208k total, 17460k used, 16759748k free, 12528212k cached
Memory Detailed Usage:
Data Resident Private Virtual Resident
Set(DRS) Dirty(DRT) Size(VIRT) Size(RES)
Total current: 383.9M 275.8M 854.1M 358.9M
peak: 383.9M 275.8M 854.1M 358.9M

■ Cpu(s) is the number of available processors in the machine.

■ Load average is the system load averages for the past 1 minute.

■ Mem and Swap are the current memory information of the machine.
The value of MEM in the LSF report corresponds to the value of RES in the
report_resource report, and the value of SWAP in the LSF report corresponds to the
value of VIRT in the report_resource report.
■ Data Resident Set (DRS)is the amount of physical memory devoted to other than
executable code. "current mem" shows this value (Total current DRS) .

November 2023 487 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ Private Dirty (DRT) is the memory which must be written to disk before the
corresponding physical memory location can be used for some other virtual page. "peak
res" shows this value (Total peak DRT). This is the minimum number that you must
reserve to run the program.
■ Virtual Size (VIRT) is the total amount of virtual memory used by the task. It
includes the swapped and non-swapped memory.
■ Resident Size (RES) is the non-swapped physical memory a task has used. The
number of "Total Peak RES" is the recommended physical memory to reserve.

The -verbose parameter also works in conjunction with the -peak and -start/-end
parameters of the report_resource command. When you run the local distributed host
(set_distribute_host -local) command, the memory information will include the
memory consumed by master and clients. Otherwise, the master and client details are not
displayed.

The following command script specifies to display detailed memory information during the
report_timing command:
report_resource -start report_timing
set_distribute_host -local
set_multi_cpu_usage -localCpu 8
report_timing -machine_readable -max_paths 100
report_resource -end report_timing -verbose

Note: For -start/-end parameters, use -verbose with the -end parameter only.

The following message is displayed:

Ending "report_timing" (total cpu=0:57:18, real=0:33:24, peak res=6493.1M, current

mem=5305.0M)
Memory Detailed Usage:
Data Resident Private Virtual Resident
Set(DRS) Dirty(DRT) Size(VIRT) Size(RES)
Total current: 5305.0M 4012.1M 5919.2M 4255.4M
peak: 10712.8M 6493.1M 15090.3M 7312.5M
Master 5305.0M 4012.1M 5919.2M 4255.4M
current:
peak: 5565.5M 4055.1M 6064.5M 4298.4M
Task peak: 748.8M 368.7M 1219.4M 456.4M

November 2023 488 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Task peak reports peak value of each item from all clients, therefore, it is possible that eight
values come from eight different clients.

Checking the Distributed Computing Environment

To check if distributed processing can work in the software environment, use the
check_multi_cpu_usage command. This command checks if the specified CPUs can
be accessed.

Setting and Changing the License Check-Out Order

To change the license check-out order, use the following command:
set_multi_cpu_usage -licenseList {tempusl cndc tempusxl edsl edsxl}

For information on the default check-out order, see Encounter Digital Implementation
System Packaging and Licensing.

Limiting the Multi-CPU License Search to Specific Products

Each base license allows a set of specific licenses to be used for Multi-CPU processing. This
list can be obtained from the get_multi_cpu_usage command after invoking the software.
[DEV]tempus 24> get_multi_cpu_usage
Total CPU(s) Enabled: 8
Current License(s): 1 Tempus_Timing_Signoff_XL
keepLicense: true
licenseList: tpsmp
true

This license list can be customized from among the available choices by using the
set_multi_cpu_usage -licenseList command.

Releasing Licenses Before the Session Ends

By default, the software holds multi-CPU licenses for the duration of the current session. To
release the multi-CPU licenses before the Tempus session ends, complete one of the
following steps:
■ Before running any multi-CPU applications, specify the following command to keep the
acquired multiple CPU-licenses until the current session ends:

November 2023 489 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

set_multi_cpu_usage -keepLicense true

To display the current setting for set_multi_cpu_usage -keepLicense, use the
get_multi_cpu_usage -keepLicense command.

■ At the point when you want to release the multi-CPU licenses (for example, when global
placement finishes), specify the following command:
set_multi_cpu_usage -releaseLicense

Controlling the Level of Usage Information in the Log File

Use the following command to set the level of usage information in the log file:
set_multi_cpu_usage -threadInfo {0 | 1 | 2}

By default, the software does not write starting and ending information for threads or timing
details to the log file, but you can change this behavior by specifying 1 or 2 for the -
threadInfo parameter.
■ Specify 1 to write the final message to the log file.
■ Specify 2 to write additional starting/ending information for each thread.

Where to Find More Information on Multi-CPU Licensing

See Encounter Digital Implementation System Packaging and Licensing for more
information on multi-CPU licenses.

November 2023 490 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Appendix - Base Delay, SI Delay, and SI Glitch Correlation

with SPICE
■ Overview on page 492
■ Spice Deck Generation on page 492
■ Running Path Simulation and Results on page 497
■ Results of the Simulation on page 497
■ Debugging Correlation Issues on page 499

November 2023 491 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Overview
To maintain signoff accuracy of the design, designers often use SPICE to correlate critical
paths in timing analysis with path simulation. Tempus offers a built-in critical path simulation
for base delay correlation with SPICE.

This chapter describes how to perform SPICE correlation with base delay timing in
Tempus. The methodology is explained by providing an overview of the
create_spice_deck command used for SPICE deck generation and then, by explaining
the process to run path simulation.

Spice Deck Generation

The create_spice_deck command is used to generate the SPICE deck, which means that
the SPICE trace for a path is generated.

The output SPICE deck includes the following details:

■ All nets in the path and their instance connections
■ Standard cell gate information for the instances and their port connections
■ Initial conditions and voltage sources
■ Measure statements for slew and delay measurements
■ RC parasitic network information

Using create_spice_deck Command Parameters for SPICE Deck

Generation
The following parameters of the create_spice_deck command are frequently used for
SPICE deck generation in base timing analysis correlation.

-report_timing {report_timing_options}

Description:

Specifies the path(s) for which SPICE deck needs to be generated. SPICE deck will contain
the SPICE trace of the path exactly as reported by the report_timing options.

Options Used:

November 2023 492 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

■ -path_type full_clock: Is used when launch or capture clock path is also needed in
the SPICE deck.
■ -late/-early: Is used to generate a SPICE deck for the setup or hold mode.

Note: Without using the -report_timing options, SPICE deck will be generated for worst
path identified by the software.

-run_path_simulation

Description:

Enables the tool to perform path simulation using the Spectre™ simulator in Tempus.
Note: If this option is used, it is recommended to use the report_timing -retime
path_slew_propagation option of create_spice_deck for more accurate correlation with
SPICE because SPICE deck is path specific.

-subckt_file filename

Description:

Specifies the name of the SPICE sub-circuit file for the library cells. This option is used to get
the port directions.
Note: When create_spice_deck is specified with -run_path_simulation and this option
is not specified, Tempus uses the SPICE sub-circuits from the cdB files loaded in the design.

Recommended option.

-model_file filename

Description:

Specifies the name of the SPICE models file. This option must be used when you specify a
SPICE sub-circuit file for simulation.
Note: When create_spice_deck is specified with -run_path_simulation and this option
is not specified, Tempus uses the SPICE models from the cdB files loaded in the design.

Recommended option.

-Spectre path_to_Spectre

Description:

Specifies the location of the Spectre™ version, which is to be used for path simulation.

November 2023 493 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-spice_include "spice_options"

Description:

Specifies the user-defined SPICE statements that are written to the SPICE deck. For example,
.measure statement or any SPICE option represents a user-defined SPICE statement.

-outdir spice_dir

Description:

Specifies the name of the output directory that contains the generated SPICE decks. The
default directory name is tempus_pathsim.
Note:
■ If the –run_path_simulation option is not specified, SPICE deck is saved in the
specified directory as path_<index_of_path>_setup.sp.
■ If a single path is specified, the SPICE deck filename is saved as path_1_setup.sp.
■ If more than one path is specified (using the max_path/max_point/nworst options of
report_timing), SPICE decks are saved as path_1_setup.sp, path_2_setup.sp,
and so on.
■ If the –run_path_simulation option is specified in addition to the path_1_setup.sp
file, some result files are also saved as mentioned in the Running Path Simulation and
Results section.

-side_path_level number

Description:

Specifies the number of levels for the side path stages to be included in the SPICE deck. By
default, the side path stages are not included in the SPICE deck. You can assign
the maximum value of 4 for a side path stage. As you increase –side_path_level, the size
of the SPICE deck and simulation run time will increase.

The default value of –side_path_level is 0, which means that only lumped cap model of
side loads are provided.
Note: It is recommended to use value of 1 to include real gate load. It provides good accuracy
with reasonable SPICE deck size and simulation run time.

-power {list_of_power_nets} | - ground {list_of_ground_nets}

Specifies the list of global names for power/ground nets.

November 2023 494 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

If the -power and –ground options are not specified, Tempus retrieves this information from
the power/ground supplies set via other ways in the design, such as the set_dc_sources
command used from libraries/cdb and so on. If the information is not available, Tempus
uses the default list of power node names (VDD and VCC) and ground node names (GND
and VSS).

For more details on the parameters and options, see create_spice_deck in the Tempus
Text Command Reference Guide.

-xtalk {delay | vl_glitch | vh_glitch}

The -xtalk parameter generates Spice deck for a single net (not a path).

For example, the following commands create a VL and VH Spice deck for the receiver pin x1/
A and will place them in the spice_rip/outlier directory:
create_spice_deck -xtalk vl_glitch -receiver_pin x1/A -outdir spice_rip/outlier -
model_file models.sp -subckt_file base.sp
create_spice_deck -xtalk vh_glitch -receiver_pin x1/A -outdir spice_rip/outlier -
model_file models.sp -subckt_file base.sp

If you do not specify the report_timing -point_to_point parameter, the Spice deck can
be generated (with victim sweep). However, path level Spice deck generation is not
supported.

Examples for SPICE Deck Generation Command

The following section shows examples of a generated SPICE deck.

Example 1: The following section in SPICE deck specifies global supplies and transient
analysis window time.
*--------------------
*Command and Options
*--------------------
.GLOBAL vdd vbbnw
V0Xvdd vdd 0 1.0
V0Xvbbnw vbbnw 0 1.0
.GLOBAL vss vbbpw
V0Xvss vss 0 0
V0Xvbbpw vbbpw 0 0
.TEMP -40.0000
.TRAN 1p 10256p
*---------------------------------

Example 2: The following section shows an example of a net and its instance connections.

November 2023 495 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

*------------------------
*Net Instances
*------------------------
*Net module1/inst_1/net
*------------------------
Xmodule1/inst_1/net module1/inst_1/q
+ module1/inst_2/a wc:module1/inst_1/q
*------------------------

Example 3: The following section shows an example of a gate instance and its port
connections.
*----------------------------------------
*Gate Instances
*----------------------------------------
*Gate module1/inst_2
*----------------------------------------
*Cell ports in order : a y vss vdd vbbpw vbbnw
*----------------------------------------
Xmodule1/inst_2/a module1/inst_2/y
+ 0 module1/inst_2/vdd 0 module1/inst_2/vbbnw
+ inv1
*----------------------------------------

Example 4: The following section shows the measurement statements for delay and slew.

Note: The DELAY and SLEW keywords in the MEASURE statements indicate that these are
the measurement statements for delay and slew, respectively.

November 2023 496 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Also, stage numbers (Stage_0001 and Stage_0002) in the MEASURE statement indicate the
respective stages; first and second stage, in the timing path, which makes it easier for
correlation with the report_timing report.

Running Path Simulation and Results

You can perform path simulation in the following two ways:
■ Using the Spectre™ path simulator available in the Tempus installation, or
create_spice_deck -run_path_simulation.

■ Using the standalone (outside the Tempus environment) path simulation that can be run
using Spectre™ or any simulator that understands the SPICE syntax.

Using SPECTRE Path Simulator

You can use the create_spice_deck –run_path_simulation parameter to run the path
simulation. In addition, you can specify the Spectre™ version using the -spectre parameter
of the create_spice_deck command. If the path is not specified with the -spectre option,
the software will check if you have the Spectre™ location defined in your path. If it is not
defined in your path, it will use the Spectre™ version that is available under the Tempus
installation. The generated log file will have the Spectre™ version used for path simulation.

Important

Results of the Simulation

A table of timing (see figure below) with the slew, delay, and arrival columns from
report_timing and path simulation, which are used for correlation comparison, is displayed.

November 2023 497 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

If report_timing -path_type full_clock is used, two separate tables for launch and
capture paths are also shown.

Using Standalone Path Simulation

If the create_spice_deck command is run without the –run_path_simulation option, it

will save the SPICE deck of the path (path_1_setup.sp) in the specified directory (which is
specified using the -outdir option). By default, it saves the SPICE deck in tempus_pathsim
directory.

Using the standalone simulation generates the SPICE deck in the user-specified directory.
The SPICE deck of the path (path_1_setup.sp) is saved at the specified path within the
specified directory. Specify the directory through the -outdir parameter of the
create_spice_deck command. By default, the generated SPICE deck is saved in the
tempus_pathsim directory.

You can also run standalone path simulation using Spectre™ or any other simulator, which
understands the SPICE syntax on the SPICE deck (path_1_setup.sp) saved by Tempus.

Results of the Simulation

The path_1_setup.measure file is generated, which can be used to extract path simulation
results.

November 2023 498 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

The figure below is an example of the path_1_setup.measure file, which shows the slew and
delay measurements of the two stages. This file can be easily post-processed to extract
simulation results. For example, sum of all “delay” stages will give the path delay of the total
path.

Sample path_1_setup.measure File

Debugging Correlation Issues

If the results between the SPICE path simulation and STA results do not correlate, you need
to check the following:
■ Ensure that the .lib/.cdB files are consistent with the SPICE models/subckt files being
used for path simulation. Characterize libraries with the same SPICE models/subckt files
which are used for running path simulation.
■ Designers compare simulation results with the report_timing output. In such cases,
since SPICE deck is always path-based, the comparison must always be done with the
path-based analysis (PBA) report in Tempus. The PBA report can be generated using
the report_timing -retime path_slew_propagation command. For slew/delay
comparison with SPICE, make sure to use the retime_slew and retime_delay
columns of the report_timing command instead of slew and delay, respectively.
■ If there is any miscorrelation in any particular stage in delay or slew, then ensure that the
slew/delay reported in Tempus analysis is not using extrapolation of library data. You can
search for the IMPTS-403 message (Delay calculation was forced to extrapolate…) in
update_timing as well as for the report of extrapolated arcs in a file with the
nomenclature below written out by Tempus:

November 2023 499 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

<top_cell>_dc_outbound_<view>_*.rpt
■ SPICE deck generation and built-in path simulation do not account for any timing derates
that may have been specified. Derate values can come from various sources, such as
user-defined derates, AOCV derates, and so on.

For correlation comparison, ensure that you compare un-derated STA numbers from
Tempus. To do this, you need to load the design in Tempus without any derates.
■ Another source of miscorrelation could be the waveform used for simulation. Check that
the library file has normalized driver waveforms (NDW) specified.
■ Another potential source of differences between SPICE path simulation and STA results
is the difference in analysis mode in both runs. This can happen when STA is done in the
On-Chip Variation (OCV) mode (which is the default in Tempus) because the SPICE
simulation is done only in one corner, either MAX or MIN. This means in SPICE both the
launch and capture paths are using the same corner SPICE data for path simulation
results.
■ If path being correlated has latches, Tempus timing will have time borrowing during
timing analysis while SPICE run will not have any time borrowing. In that case, turn off
time borrowing in Tempus using set timing_use_latch_time_borrow false setting for
correlation with SPICE.

November 2023 500 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Appendix - Supported CPF Commands

■ CPF 1.0e Script Example on page 502
■ CPF 1.0 Script Example on page 509
■ CPF 1.1 Script Example on page 519
■ Supported CPF 1.0 Commands on page 527
■ Supported CPF 1.0e Commands on page 536
■ Supported CPF 1.1 Commands on page 547

November 2023 501 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

CPF 1.0e Script Example

The following section contains an example of the CPF 1.0e file using a sample design and
library.

For list of supported CPF commands and options within Encounter product family, see
"Supported CPF 1.0e Commands".
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------
# setting
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
set_cpf_version 1.0e
set_hierarchy_separator /

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# define library_set/cells
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
define_library_set -name wc_0v81 -libraries { \
../LIBS/timing/library_wc_0v81.lib }
define_library_set -name bc_0v81 -libraries { \
../LIBS/timing/library_bc_0v81.lib }
define_library_set -name wc_0v72 -libraries { \
../LIBS/timing/library_wc_0v72.lib }
define_library_set -name bc_0v72 -libraries { \
../LIBS/timing/library_bc_0v72.lib }

define_always_on_cell -cells {PTLVLHLD* AOBUFF*} -power_switchable \

VDD -power TVDD -ground VSS

define_isolation_cell -cells { LVLLH* } -power VDD -ground VSS -enable \

NSLEEP -valid_location to
define_isolation_cell -cells { ISOHID* ISOLOD* } -power VDD -ground VSS \
-enable ISO -valid_location to

define_level_shifter_cell -cells { LVLHLD* } -input_voltage_range \

0.72:0.81:0.09 -output_voltage_range 0.72:0.81:0.09 -direction down \
-output_power_pin VDD -ground VSS -valid_location to
define_level_shifter_cell -cells { PTLVLHLD* } -input_voltage_range \
0.72:0.81:0.09 -output_voltage_range 0.72:0.81:0.09 -direction down \
-output_power_pin TVDD -ground VSS -valid_location to
define_level_shifter_cell -cells { LVLLHCD* } -input_voltage_range \

November 2023 502 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

0.72:0.81:0.09 -output_voltage_range 0.72:0.81:0.09 \

-output_voltage_input_pin NSLEEP -direction up -input_power_pin VDDL \
-output_power_pin VDD -ground VSS -valid_location to
define_level_shifter_cell -cells { LVLLHD* } -input_voltage_range \
0.72:0.81:0.09 -output_voltage_range 0.72:0.81:0.09 -direction up \
-input_power_pin VDDL -output_power_pin VDD -ground VSS -valid_location to

define_power_switch_cell -cells { HEADERHVT1 HEADERHVT2 } \

-stage_1_enable NSLEEPIN1 -stage_1_output NSLEEPOUT1 -stage_2_enable \
NSLEEPIN2 -stage_2_output NSLEEPOUT2 -type header -power_switchable VDD \
-power TVDD

define_state_retention_cell -cells { MSSRPG* } -cell_type \

master_slave -clock_pin CP -restore_check !CP -save_function !CP \
-always_on_components { DFF_inst } -power_switchable VDD -power TVDD \
-ground VSS
define_state_retention_cell -cells { BLSRPG* } -cell_type ballon_latch \
-clock_pin CP -restore_function !NRESTORE -save_function SAVE \
-always_on_components { save_data } -power_switchable VDD -power TVDD \
-ground VSS

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# macro models
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# top design
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
set_design top

create_operating_corner -name PMdvfs2_bc -voltage 0.88 -process 1 -temperature \

0 -library_set bc_0v72
create_operating_corner -name PMdvfs1_bc -voltage 0.99 -process 1 -temperature \
0 -library_set bc_0v81
create_operating_corner -name PMdvfs1_wc -voltage 0.81 -process 1 -temperature \
125 -library_set wc_0v81
create_operating_corner -name PMdvfs2_wc -voltage 0.72 -process 1 -temperature \
125 -library_set wc_0v72

create_power_nets -nets VDD -voltage { 0.72:0.81:0.09 } -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \

-average_ir_drop_limit 0

November 2023 503 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

create_power_nets -nets VDD_sw -voltage { 0.72:0.81:0.09 } -internal \

-peak_ir_drop_limit 0 -average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_power_nets -nets VDDL -voltage 0.72 -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_power_nets -nets VDDL_sw -voltage 0.72 -internal -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_power_nets -nets Avdd -voltage 0.81 -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_power_nets -nets VDD_IO -voltage { 0.72:0.81:0.09 } \
-external_shutoff_condition { io_shutoff_ack } -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0

create_ground_nets -nets Avss -voltage 0.00 -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \

-average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_ground_nets -nets VSS -voltage 0.00 -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0

create_nominal_condition -name nom_0v81 -voltage 0.81

create_nominal_condition -name nom_0v72 -voltage 0.72

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# create power domains
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
create_power_domain -name PDdefault -default
create_power_domain -name PDshutoff_io -instances { IOPADS_INST/Pspifsip \
IOPADS_INST/Pspidip } -boundary_ports { spi_fs spi_data } \
-external_controlled_shutoff -shutoff_condition io_shutoff_ack
create_power_domain -name PDpll -instances { INST/PLLCLK_INST \
IOPADS_INST/Pibiasip IOPADS_INST/Ppllrstip IOPADS_INST/Prefclkip \
IOPADS_INST/Presetip IOPADS_INST/Pvcomop IOPADS_INST/Pvcopop } -boundary_ports {
ibias reset \
refclk vcom vcop pllrst }
create_power_domain -name PDram_virtual
create_power_domain -name PDram -instances { INST/RAM_128x16_TEST_INST } \
-shutoff_condition !INST/PM_INST/power_switch_enable \
-secondary_domains { PDram_virtual }
create_power_domain -name PDtdsp -instances { INST/RAM_128x16_TEST_INST1 \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST0 INST/DSP_CORE_INST1 } -shutoff_condition \
!INST/PM_INST/power_switch_enable -secondary_domains { PDdefault }

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

November 2023 504 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

# set instances
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
set_instance INST/RAM_128x16_TEST_INST1/RAM_128x16_INST -domain_mapping \
{ {RAM_DEFAULT PDtdsp} }

set_macro_model ram_256x16A

create_power_domain -name RAM_DEFAULT -boundary_ports { A* D* CLK CEN WEN Q* } \

-default -external_controlled_shutoff

create_state_retention_rule -name RAM_ret -instances { mem* } -save_edge !CLK

update_power_domain -name RAM_DEFAULT -primary_power_net VDD \

-primary_ground_net VSS

end_macro_model

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# create power modes
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs1 -default -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v81 PDtdsp@nom_0v81 PDram@nom_0v72 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v81 \
PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs1_off -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v81 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v81 PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs1_shutoffio_off -domain_conditions { \
PDpll@nom_0v81 PDdefault@nom_0v81 PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs2 -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v72 PDtdsp@nom_0v72 PDram@nom_0v72 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v72 \
PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs2_off -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v72 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v72 PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs2_shutoffio_off -domain_conditions { \
PDpll@nom_0v81 PDdefault@nom_0v72 PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMscan -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v81 PDtdsp@nom_0v81 PDram@nom_0v72 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v81 \
PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }

create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_BC -mode PMdvfs1 -domain_corners { \

PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_bc PDtdsp@PMdvfs1_bc PDram@PMdvfs2_bc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_bc }

November 2023 505 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_WC -mode PMdvfs1 -domain_corners { \

PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_wc PDtdsp@PMdvfs1_wc PDram@PMdvfs2_wc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_off_BC -mode PMdvfs1_off -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_bc PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_off_WC -mode PMdvfs1_off -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_wc PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_shutoffio_off_BC -mode \
PMdvfs1_shutoffio_off -domain_corners { PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc \
PDdefault@PMdvfs1_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_shutoffio_off_WC -mode \
PMdvfs1_shutoffio_off -domain_corners { PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc \
PDdefault@PMdvfs1_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs2_BC -mode PMdvfs2 -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs2_bc PDtdsp@PMdvfs2_bc PDram@PMdvfs2_bc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs2_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs2_WC -mode PMdvfs2 -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs2_wc PDtdsp@PMdvfs2_wc PDram@PMdvfs2_wc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs2_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_PMdvfs2_off_BC -mode PMdvfs2_off -domain_corners \
{ PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs2_bc PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs2_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_PMdvfs2_off_WC -mode PMdvfs2_off -domain_corners \
{ PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs2_wc PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs2_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs2_shutoffio_off_BC -mode \
PMdvfs2_shutoffio_off -domain_corners { PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc \
PDdefault@PMdvfs2_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs2_shutoffio_off_WC -mode \
PMdvfs2_shutoffio_off -domain_corners { PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc \
PDdefault@PMdvfs2_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_scan_BC -mode PMscan -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_bc PDtdsp@PMdvfs1_bc PDram@PMdvfs2_bc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_scan_WC -mode PMscan -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_wc PDtdsp@PMdvfs1_wc PDram@PMdvfs2_wc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_wc }

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# create rules
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
create_power_switch_rule -name PDram_SW -domain PDram -external_power_net VDDL
create_power_switch_rule -name PDtdsp_SW -domain PDtdsp -external_power_net \

November 2023 506 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

VDD

create_isolation_rule -name ISORULE1 -isolation_condition { \

!INST/PM_INST/isolation_enable } -from { PDtdsp } -to { PDdefault } \
-isolation_target from -isolation_output high
create_isolation_rule -name ISORULE3 -isolation_condition { \
!INST/PM_INST/isolation_enable } -from { PDram } -to { PDdefault } \
-isolation_target from -isolation_output high
create_isolation_rule -name ISORULE4 -isolation_condition { \
!INST/PM_INST/spi_ip_isolate } -from { PDshutoff_io } \
-isolation_target from -isolation_output low

create_level_shifter_rule -name LSRULE_H2L3 -from { PDdefault } -to { PDram } \

-exclude { INST/PM_INST/power_switch_enable }
create_level_shifter_rule -name LSRULE_H2L_PLL -from { PDpll }
create_level_shifter_rule -name LSRULE_L2H2 -from { PDram } -to { PDdefault }

create_state_retention_rule -name \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST0/PDtdsp_retention_rule -instances { \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST0 } -save_edge !INST/DSP_CORE_INST0/clk
create_state_retention_rule -name \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST1/PDtdsp_retention_rule -instances { \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST1 } -restore_edge \
!INST/PM_INST/state_retention_restore -save_edge \
INST/PM_INST/state_retention_save

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# update domains/modes
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
update_nominal_condition -name nom_0v81 -library_set wc_0v81
update_nominal_condition -name nom_0v72 -library_set wc_0v72

update_power_domain -name PDdefault -primary_power_net VDD -primary_ground_net \

VSS
update_power_domain -name PDshutoff_io -primary_power_net VDD_IO \
-primary_ground_net VSS
update_power_domain -name PDpll -primary_power_net Avdd -primary_ground_net \
Avss
update_power_domain -name PDram_virtual -primary_power_net VDDL \
-primary_ground_net VSS
update_power_domain -name PDram -primary_power_net VDDL_sw -primary_ground_net \

November 2023 507 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

VSS
update_power_domain -name PDtdsp -primary_power_net VDD_sw -primary_ground_net \
VSS

update_power_mode -name PMdvfs1 -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs1.sdc

update_power_mode -name PMdvfs1_off -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs1.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMdvfs1_shutoffio_off -sdc_files \
../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs1.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMdvfs2 -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs2.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMdvfs2_off -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs2.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMdvfs2_shutoffio_off -sdc_files \
../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs2.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMscan -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/scan.sdc

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# update rules
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
update_power_switch_rule -name PDram_SW -cells { HEADERHVT1 } -prefix \
CDN_SW_RAM -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 -average_ir_drop_limit 0
update_power_switch_rule -name PDtdsp_SW -cells { HEADERHVT2 } -prefix \
CDN_SW_TDSP -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 -average_ir_drop_limit 0

update_isolation_rules -names ISORULE1 -location to -prefix CPF_ISO_

update_isolation_rules -names ISORULE3 -location to -prefix CPF_ISO_
update_isolation_rules -names ISORULE4 -location to -prefix CPF_ISO_

update_level_shifter_rules -names LSRULE_H2L3 -location to -cells { LVLHLD* \

} -prefix CPF_LS_
update_level_shifter_rules -names LSRULE_H2L_PLL -location to -prefix CPF_LS_
update_level_shifter_rules -names LSRULE_L2H2 -location to -prefix CPF_LS_

update_state_retention_rules -names \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST0/PDtdsp_retention_rule -cell_type master_slave
update_state_retention_rules -names \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST1/PDtdsp_retention_rule -cell_type ballon_latch

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# end
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
end_design

November 2023 508 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

CPF 1.0 Script Example

The following section contains an example of the CPF 1.0 file using a sample design and
library.

For list of supported CPF commands and options within, see "Supported CPF 1.0
Commands".

set_cpf_version 1.0

####################################################
# #
# Technology portion of the CPF: #
# Defining the special cells for low-power designs #
# #
####################################################

################################
#### High-to-Low level shifters
################################

define_level_shifter_cell -cells LVLH2L* \

-input_voltage_range 0.8:1.0:0.1 \
-output_voltage_range 0.8:1.0:0.1 \
-direction down \
-output_power_pin VDD \
-ground VSS \
-valid_location to

##########################################
#### Always-on High-to-low level shifters
##########################################

define_level_shifter_cell -cells AOLVLH2L* \

-input_voltage_range 0.8:1.0:0.1 \
-output_voltage_range 0.8:1.0:0.1 \
-direction down \
-output_power_pin TVDD \
-ground VSS \
-valid_location to

November 2023 509 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

################################
#### Low-to-High Level Shifters
################################
define_level_shifter_cell -cells LVLL2H* \
-input_voltage_range 0.8:1.0:0.1 \
-output_voltage_range 0.8:1.0:0.1 \
-input_power_pin VDDI \
-output_power_pin VDD \
-direction up \
-ground VSS \
-valid_location to

##########################################################
#### Low-to-High level shifting plus isolation combo cells
##########################################################
define_level_shifter_cell -cells LVLCIL2H* \
-input_voltage_range 0.8:1.0:0.1 \
-output_voltage_range 0.8:1.0:0.1 \
-output_voltage_input_pin ISO \
-input_power_pin VDDI \
-output_power_pin VDD \
-direction up \
-ground VSS \
-valid_location to

####################
#### Isolation cells
####################

define_isolation_cell -cells LVLCIL2H* \

-power VDD \
-ground VSS \
-enable ISO \
-valid_location to

#################################
#### Power switch cells: headers
#################################

define_power_switch_cell -cells {HEADERHVT HEADERAOPHVT} \

November 2023 510 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-power_switchable VDD -power TVDD \

-stage_1_enable !ISOIN1 \
-stage_1_output ISOOUT1 \
-stage_2_enable !ISOIN2 \
-stage_2_output ISOOUT2 \
-type header

#################
#### SRPG cells
#################

define_state_retention_cell -cells { SRPG2Y } \

-clock_pin CLK \
-power TVDD \
-power_switchable VDD \
-ground VSS \
-save_function "SAVE" \
-restore_function "!NRESTORE"

################################################
#### Always-on cells: buffers and level shifters
################################################

define_always_on_cell -cells {AOBUFF2Y AOLVLH2L*} \

-power_switchable VDD -power TVDD -ground VSS
#################################################
# #
# Design part of the CPF #
# #
#################################################

set_design top

set_hierarchy_separator "/"

set constraintDir ../CONSTRAINTS

set libdir ../LIBS

####################################################
#### create the power and ground nets in this design

November 2023 511 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

####################################################

### VDD will connect the power follow-pin of the instances in the always-on
#power domain
### VDD_core_SW will connect the power follow-pin of the instances in the
#switchable power domain and is the power net that can be shut-off
### VDD_core_AO is the always-on power net for the switchable power domain

create_power_nets -nets VDD -voltage {0.8:1.0:0.1}

create_power_nets -nets VDD_core_AO -voltage 0.8
create_power_nets -nets VDD_core_SW -internal -voltage 0.8
create_power_nets -nets AVDD -voltage 1.0

create_ground_nets -nets VSS

create_ground_nets -nets AVSS

#####################################################################
#### Creating three power domains:
#### AO is the default always-on power domain
#### CORE is the switchable power domain
#### PLL is another always-on power domain
### Also specifying the power net-pin connection in each power domain
######################################################################

#########################
### For power domain "AO"
#########################

create_power_domain -name AO -default

update_power_domain -name AO -internal_power_net VDD

create_global_connection -domain AO -net VDD -pins VDD

create_global_connection -domain AO -net VSS -pins VSS
create_global_connection -domain AO -net VDD_core_SW -pins VDDI

###########################
### For power domain "CORE"
###########################

create_power_domain -name core -instances CORE_INST \

-shutoff_condition {PWR_CONTROL/power_switch_enable}

November 2023 512 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

update_power_domain -name core -internal_power_net VDD_core_SW

create_global_connection -domain CORE -net VSS -pins VSS

create_global_connection -domain CORE -net VDD_core_AO -pins TVDD
create_global_connection -domain CORE -net VDD_core_SW -pins VDD

###########################
### For power domain "PLL"
###########################

### PLL conatins a single PLL macro and five top-level boundary ports which
#connect to the PLL macro directly

create_power_domain -name PLL -instances PLLCLK_INST -boundary_ports \

{refclk vcom vcop ibias pllrst}
update_power_domain -name PLL -internal_power_net AVDD

create_global_connection -domain PLL -net AVDD -pins avdd!

create_global_connection -domain PLL -net AVSS -pins agnd!
create_global_connection -domain PLL -net VDD -pins VDDI
create_global_connection -domain PLL -net AVDD -pins VDD
create_global_connection -domain PLL -net AVSS -pins VSS

########################################
########################################

set lib_1p1_wc "$libdir/technology45_std_1p1.lib"

set lib_1p3_bc "$libdir/technology45_std_1p3.lib"
set lib_1p0_bc "$libdir/technology45_std_1p0.lib"
set lib_0p8_wc "$libdir/technology45_std_0p8.lib"

set lib_ao_wc_extra "\

$libdir/technology45_lvll2h_1p1.lib \
"
set lib_ao_bc_extra "\
$libdir/technology45_lvll2h_1p3.lib \
"
set lib_core_wc_extra "\
$libdir/technology45_lvlh2l_0p8.lib \
$libdir/technology45_headers_0p8.lib \

November 2023 513 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

$libdir/technology45_sprg_ao_0p8.lib \
"
set lib_core_bc_extra "\
$libdir/technology45_lvlh2l_1p0.lib \
$libdir/technology45_headers_1p0.lib \
$libdir/technology45_srpg_ao_1p0.lib \
"

set lib_pll_wc "\

$libdir/pll_slow.lib \
$libdir/ram_256x16_slow.lib \
$libdir/rom_512x16_slow.lib \
"
set lib_pll_bc "\
$libdir/pll_fast.lib \
$libdir/ram_256x16_fast.lib \
$libdir/rom_512x16_fast.lib \
"
########################
#### Define library sets
########################
define_library_set -name ao_wc_0p8 -libraries "$lib_0p8_wc $lib_ao_wc_extra"
define_library_set -name ao_bc_1p0 -libraries "$lib_1p0_bc $lib_ao_bc_extra"

define_library_set -name ao_wc_1p1 -libraries "$lib_1p1_wc_base $lib_ao_wc_extra"

define_library_set -name ao_bc_1p3 -libraries "$lib_1p3_bc_base $lib_ao_bc_extra"

define_library_set -name core_wc_0p8 -libraries "$lib_0p8_wc $lib_core_wc_extra"

define_library_set -name core_bc_1p0 -libraries "$lib_1p0_bc $lib_core_bc_extra"

define_library_set -name pll_wc_1p1 -libraries "$lib_pll_wc"

define_library_set -name pll_bc_1p3 -libraries "$lib_pll_bc"

#############################
#### Create operating corners
#############################

create_operating_corner -name BC_PVT_AO_L \

-process 1 -temperature 0 -voltage 1.0 \
-library_set ao_bc_1p0

November 2023 514 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

create_operating_corner -name WC_PVT_AO_L \

-process 1 -temperature 125 -voltage 0.8 \
-library_set ao_wc_0p8

create_operating_corner -name BC_PVT_AO_H \

-process 1 -temperature 0 -voltage 1.3 \
-library_set ao_bc_1p3

create_operating_corner -name WC_PVT_AO_H \

-process 1 -temperature 125 -voltage 1.1 \
-library_set ao_wc_1p1

create_operating_corner -name BC_PVT_CORE \

-process 1 -temperature 0 -voltage 1.0 \
-library_set core_bc_1p0

create_operating_corner -name WC_PVT_CORE \

-process 1 -temperature 125 -voltage 0.8 \
-library_set tdsp_wc_0p8

create_operating_corner -name BC_PVT_PLL \

-process 1 -temperature 0 -voltage 1.3 \
-library_set core_bc_1p3

create_operating_corner -name WC_PVT_PLL \

-process 1 -temperature 125 -voltage 1.1 \
-library_set tdsp_wc_1p1

#########################################
#### Create and update nominal conditions
#########################################

create_nominal_condition -name high_ao -voltage 1.1

update_nominal_condition -name high_ao -library_set ao_wc_1p1

create_nominal_condition -name low_ao -voltage 0.8

update_nominal_condition -name low_ao -library_set ao_wc_0p8

create_nominal_condition -name low_core -voltage 0.8

November 2023 515 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

update_nominal_condition -name low_core -library_set core_wc_0p8

create_nominal_condition -name high_pll -voltage 1.1

update_nominal_condition -name high_pll -library_set pll_wc_1p1

create_nominal_condition -name off -voltage 0

######################################
#### Create and upDate four power modes
######################################

create_power_mode -name PM_HL_FUNC \

-domain_conditions {AO@high_ao CORE@low_core PLL@high_pll} \
-default
update_power_mode -name PM_HL_FUNC -sdc_files ${constraintDir}/top_func.sdc

create_power_mode -name PM_HL_TEST \

-domain_conditions {AO@high_ao CORE@low_core PLL@high_pll}
update_power_mode -name PM_HL_TEST -sdc_files ${constraintDir}/top_test.sdc

create_power_mode -name PM_HO_FUNC \

-domain_conditions {AO@high_ao CORE@off PLL@high_pll}
update_power_mode -name PM_HO_FUNC -sdc_files ${constraintDir}/top_func.sdc

create_power_mode -name PM_LO_FUNC \

-domain_conditions {AO@low_ao CORE@off PLL@high_pll}
update_power_mode -name PM_LO_FUNC -sdc_files ${constraintDir}/top_slow.sdc

#################################
##### Creating ten analysis views
#################################

create_analysis_view -name AV_HL_FUNC_MIN_RC1 -mode PM_HL_FUNC \

-domain_corners {AO@BC_PVT_AO_H CORE@BC_PVT_CORE PLL@BC_PVT_PLL}
create_analysis_view -name AV_HL_FUNC_MIN_RC2 -mode PM_HL_FUNC \
-domain_corners {AO@BC_PVT_AO_H CORE@BC_PVT_CORE PLL@BC_PVT_PLL}

create_analysis_view -name AV_HL_FUNC_MAX_RC1 -mode PM_HL_FUNC \

-domain_corners {AO@WC_PVT_AO_H CORE@WC_PVT_CORE PLL@WC_PVT_PLL}
create_analysis_view -name AV_HL_FUNC_MAX_RC2 -mode PM_HL_FUNC \
-domain_corners {AO@WC_PVT_AO_H CORE@WC_PVT_CORE PLL@WC_PVT_PLL}

November 2023 516 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

create_analysis_view -name AV_HL_SCAN_MIN_RC1 -mode PM_HL_TEST \

-domain_corners {AO@BC_PVT_AO_H CORE@BC_PVT_CORE PLL@BC_PVT_PLL}
create_analysis_view -name AV_HL_SCAN_MAX_RC1 -mode PM_HL_TEST \
-domain_corners {AO@WC_PVT_AO_H CORE@WC_PVT_CORE PLL@WC_PVT_PLL}

create_analysis_view -name AV_HO_FUNC_MIN_RC1 -mode PM_HO_FUNC \

-domain_corners {AO@BC_PVT_AO_H CORE@BC_PVT_CORE PLL@BC_PVT_PLL}
create_analysis_view -name AV_HO_FUNC_MAX_RC1 -mode PM_HO_FUNC \
-domain_corners {AO@WC_PVT_AO_H CORE@WC_PVT_CORE PLL@WC_PVT_PLL}

create_analysis_view -name AV_LO_FUNC_MIN_RC1 -mode PM_LO_FUNC \

-domain_corners {AO@BC_PVT_AO_L CORE@BC_PVT_CORE PLL@BC_PVT_PLL}
create_analysis_view -name AV_LO_FUNC_MAX_RC1 -mode PM_LO_FUNC \
-domain_corners {AO@WC_PVT_AO_L CORE@WC_PVT_CORE PLL@WC_PVT_PLL}

#########################################################
#### Creating and updating the rules for the insertion
#### of power switch, level shifter, isolation cell
#########################################################

###########################
##### One power switch rule
###########################

create_power_switch_rule -name PWRSW_CORE -domain CORE \

-external_power_net VDD_core_AO

update_power_switch_rule -name PWRSW_CORE \

-cells HEADERHVT \
-prefix CDN_SW_ \
-acknowledge_receiver SIWTCH_ENOUT
#######################################################################
##### One isolation rule using level-shifting and isolation combo cells
#######################################################################

create_isolation_rule -name ISORULE -from CORE \

-isolation_condition "!PWR_CONTROL/isolation_enable" \
-isolation_output high

update_isolation_rules -names ISORULE -location to -cells LVLCIL2H2Y

November 2023 517 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

################################
##### Three level shifting rules
################################

#### For signals from AO to CORE

create_level_shifter_rule -name LSRULE_H2L -from AO -to CORE \

-exclude {PWR_CONTROL/power_switch_enable PWR_CONTROL \
/state_retention_enable PWR_CONTROL/state_retention_restore}
update_level_shifter_rules -names LSRULE_H2L -cells LVLH2L2Y -location to

#### Only for the control signals from AO to CORE

create_level_shifter_rule -name LSRULE_H2L_AO -from AO -to CORE \

-pins {PWR_CONTROL/power_switch_enable PWR_CONTROL/state_retention_enable\
PWR_CONTROL/state_retention_restore}
update_level_shifter_rules -names LSRULE_H2L_AO -cells AOLVLH2L2Y -location to

#### For signals from PLL to AO

create_level_shifter_rule -name LSRULE_H2L_PLL -from PLL -to AO

update_level_shifter_rules -names LSRULE_H2L_PLL -cells LVLH2L2Y -location to

####################
##### One SRPG rule
####################

create_state_retention_rule -name SRPG_CORE \

-domain CORE \
-restore_edge {!PWR_CONTROL/state_retention_restore} \
-save_edge {PWR_CONTROL/state_retention_enable}

update_state_retention_rules -names SRPG_CORE \

-cell SRPG2Y \
-library_set tdsp_wc_0v792

end_design

November 2023 518 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

CPF 1.1 Script Example

The following section contains an example of the CPF 1.1 file using a sample design and
library.

For list of supported CPF commands and options within Encounter product family, see
Supported CPF 1.1 Commands.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------
# setting
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
set_cpf_version 1.1
set_hierarchy_separator /

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# define library_set/cells
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
define_library_set -name wc_0v81 -libraries { \
../LIBS/timing/library_wc_0v81.lib }
define_library_set -name bc_0v81 -libraries { \
../LIBS/timing/library_bc_0v81.lib }
define_library_set -name wc_0v72 -libraries { \
../LIBS/timing/library_wc_0v72.lib }
define_library_set -name bc_0v72 -libraries { \
../LIBS/timing/library_bc_0v72.lib }

define_always_on_cell -cells {PTLVLHLD* AOBUFF*} -power_switchable \

VDD -power TVDD -ground VSS

define_isolation_cell -cells { LVLLH* } -power VDD -ground VSS -enable \

NSLEEP -valid_location to
define_isolation_cell -cells { ISOHID* ISOLOD* } -power VDD -ground VSS \
-enable ISO -valid_location to

define_level_shifter_cell -cells { LVLHLD* } -input_voltage_range \

0.72:0.81:0.09 -output_voltage_range 0.72:0.81:0.09 -direction down \
-output_power_pin VDD -ground VSS -valid_location to
define_level_shifter_cell -cells { PTLVLHLD* } -input_voltage_range \
0.72:0.81:0.09 -output_voltage_range 0.72:0.81:0.09 -direction down \
-output_power_pin TVDD -ground VSS -valid_location to
define_level_shifter_cell -cells { LVLLHCD* } -input_voltage_range \

November 2023 519 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

0.72:0.81:0.09 -output_voltage_range 0.72:0.81:0.09 \

-output_voltage_input_pin NSLEEP -direction up -input_power_pin VDDL \
-output_power_pin VDD -ground VSS -valid_location to
define_level_shifter_cell -cells { LVLLHD* } -input_voltage_range \
0.72:0.81:0.09 -output_voltage_range 0.72:0.81:0.09 -direction up \
-input_power_pin VDDL -output_power_pin VDD -ground VSS -valid_location to

define_power_switch_cell -cells { HEADERHVT1 HEADERHVT2 } \

-stage_1_enable NSLEEPIN1 -stage_1_output NSLEEPOUT1 -stage_2_enable \
NSLEEPIN2 -stage_2_output NSLEEPOUT2 -type header -power_switchable VDD \
-power TVDD -stage_1_on_resistance 10 - stage_2_on_resistance 10

define_state_retention_cell -cells { MSSRPG* } -cell_type \

master_slave -clock_pin CP -restore_check !CP -save_function !CP \
-always_on_components { DFF_inst } -power_switchable VDD -power TVDD \
-ground VSS
define_state_retention_cell -cells { BLSRPG* } -cell_type ballon_latch \
-clock_pin CP -restore_function !NRESTORE -save_function SAVE \
-always_on_components { save_data } -power_switchable VDD -power TVDD \
-ground VSS

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# macro models
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# top design
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
set_design top

create_operating_corner -name PMdvfs2_bc -voltage 0.88 -process 1 -temperature \

0 -library_set bc_0v72
create_operating_corner -name PMdvfs1_bc -voltage 0.99 -process 1 -temperature \
0 -library_set bc_0v81
create_operating_corner -name PMdvfs1_wc -voltage 0.81 -process 1 -temperature \
125 -library_set wc_0v81
create_operating_corner -name PMdvfs2_wc -voltage 0.72 -process 1 -temperature \
125 -library_set wc_0v72

create_power_nets -nets VDD -voltage { 0.72:0.81:0.09 } -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \

-average_ir_drop_limit 0

November 2023 520 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

create_power_nets -nets VDD_EQ -voltage { 0.72:0.81:0.09 } -peak_ir_drop_limit 0\

-average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_power_nets -nets VDD_sw -voltage { 0.72:0.81:0.09 } -internal \
-peak_ir_drop_limit 0 -average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_power_nets -nets VDDL -voltage 0.72 -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_power_nets -nets VDDL_sw -voltage 0.72 -internal -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_power_nets -nets Avdd -voltage 0.81 -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_power_nets -nets VDD_IO -voltage { 0.72:0.81:0.09 } \
-external_shutoff_condition { io_shutoff_ack } -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0

create_ground_nets -nets Avss -voltage 0.00 -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \

-average_ir_drop_limit 0
create_ground_nets -nets VSS -voltage 0.00 -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 \
-average_ir_drop_limit 0

create_nominal_condition -name nom_0v81 -voltage 0.81

create_nominal_condition -name nom_0v72 -voltage 0.72

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# create power domains
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
create_power_domain -name PDdefault -default
create_power_domain -name PDshutoff_io -instances { IOPADS_INST/Pspifsip \
IOPADS_INST/Pspidip } -boundary_ports { spi_fs spi_data } \
-external_controlled_shutoff -shutoff_condition io_shutoff_ack
create_power_domain -name PDpll -instances { INST/PLLCLK_INST \
IOPADS_INST/Pibiasip IOPADS_INST/Ppllrstip IOPADS_INST/Prefclkip \
IOPADS_INST/Presetip IOPADS_INST/Pvcomop IOPADS_INST/Pvcopop } -boundary_ports {
ibias reset \
refclk vcom vcop pllrst }
create_power_domain -name PDram_virtual
create_power_domain -name PDram -instances { INST/RAM_128x16_TEST_INST } \
-shutoff_condition !INST/PM_INST/power_switch_enable \
-base_domains { PDram_virtual }
create_power_domain -name PDtdsp -instances { INST/RAM_128x16_TEST_INST1 \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST0 INST/DSP_CORE_INST1 } -shutoff_condition \
!INST/PM_INST/power_switch_enable -base_domains { PDdefault }

November 2023 521 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# set instances
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
set_instance INST/RAM_128x16_TEST_INST1/RAM_128x16_INST -domain_mapping \
{ {RAM_DEFAULT PDtdsp} }

set_macro_model ram_256x16A

create_power_domain -name RAM_DEFAULT -boundary_ports { A* D* CLK CEN WEN Q* } \

-default -external_controlled_shutoff

create_state_retention_rule -name RAM_ret -instances { mem* } -save_edge !CLK

update_power_domain -name RAM_DEFAULT -primary_power_net VDD \

-primary_ground_net VSS

end_macro_model ram 256x16A

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# create power modes
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs1 -default -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v81 PDtdsp@nom_0v81 PDram@nom_0v72 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v81 \
PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs1_off -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v81 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v81 PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs1_shutoffio_off -domain_conditions { \
PDpll@nom_0v81 PDdefault@nom_0v81 PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs2 -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v72 PDtdsp@nom_0v72 PDram@nom_0v72 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v72 \
PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs2_off -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v72 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v72 PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMdvfs2_shutoffio_off -domain_conditions { \
PDpll@nom_0v81 PDdefault@nom_0v72 PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }
create_power_mode -name PMscan -domain_conditions { PDpll@nom_0v81 \
PDdefault@nom_0v81 PDtdsp@nom_0v81 PDram@nom_0v72 PDshutoff_io@nom_0v81 \
PDram_virtual@nom_0v72 }

create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_BC -mode PMdvfs1 -domain_corners { \

November 2023 522 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_bc PDtdsp@PMdvfs1_bc PDram@PMdvfs2_bc \

PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_WC -mode PMdvfs1 -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_wc PDtdsp@PMdvfs1_wc PDram@PMdvfs2_wc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_off_BC -mode PMdvfs1_off -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_bc PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_off_WC -mode PMdvfs1_off -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_wc PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_shutoffio_off_BC -mode \
PMdvfs1_shutoffio_off -domain_corners { PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc \
PDdefault@PMdvfs1_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs1_shutoffio_off_WC -mode \
PMdvfs1_shutoffio_off -domain_corners { PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc \
PDdefault@PMdvfs1_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs2_BC -mode PMdvfs2 -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs2_bc PDtdsp@PMdvfs2_bc PDram@PMdvfs2_bc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs2_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs2_WC -mode PMdvfs2 -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs2_wc PDtdsp@PMdvfs2_wc PDram@PMdvfs2_wc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs2_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_PMdvfs2_off_BC -mode PMdvfs2_off -domain_corners \
{ PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs2_bc PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs2_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_PMdvfs2_off_WC -mode PMdvfs2_off -domain_corners \
{ PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs2_wc PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs2_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs2_shutoffio_off_BC -mode \
PMdvfs2_shutoffio_off -domain_corners { PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc \
PDdefault@PMdvfs2_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_dvfs2_shutoffio_off_WC -mode \
PMdvfs2_shutoffio_off -domain_corners { PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc \
PDdefault@PMdvfs2_wc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_scan_BC -mode PMscan -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_bc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_bc PDtdsp@PMdvfs1_bc PDram@PMdvfs2_bc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_bc }
create_analysis_view -name AV_scan_WC -mode PMscan -domain_corners { \
PDpll@PMdvfs1_wc PDdefault@PMdvfs1_wc PDtdsp@PMdvfs1_wc PDram@PMdvfs2_wc \
PDshutoff_io@PMdvfs1_wc }

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# create rules
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

November 2023 523 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

create_power_switch_rule -name PDram_SW -domain PDram -external_power_net VDDL

create_power_switch_rule -name PDtdsp_SW -domain PDtdsp -external_power_net \
VDD

create_isolation_rule -name ISORULE1 -isolation_condition { \

!INST/PM_INST/isolation_enable } -from { PDtdsp } -to { PDdefault } \
-isolation_target from -isolation_output high
create_isolation_rule -name ISORULE3 -isolation_condition { \
!INST/PM_INST/isolation_enable } -from { PDram } -to { PDdefault } \
-isolation_target from -isolation_output high
create_isolation_rule -name ISORULE4 -isolation_condition { \
!INST/PM_INST/spi_ip_isolate } -from { PDshutoff_io } \
-isolation_target from -isolation_output low

create_level_shifter_rule -name LSRULE_H2L3 -from { PDdefault } -to { PDram } \

-exclude { INST/PM_INST/power_switch_enable }
create_level_shifter_rule -name LSRULE_H2L_PLL -from { PDpll }
create_level_shifter_rule -name LSRULE_L2H2 -from { PDram } -to { PDdefault }

create_state_retention_rule -name \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST0/PDtdsp_retention_rule -instances { \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST0 } -save_edge !INST/DSP_CORE_INST0/clk
create_state_retention_rule -name \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST1/PDtdsp_retention_rule -instances { \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST1 } -restore_edge \
!INST/PM_INST/state_retention_restore -save_edge \
INST/PM_INST/state_retention_save

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# update domains/modes
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
update_nominal_condition -name nom_0v81 -library_set wc_0v81
update_nominal_condition -name nom_0v72 -library_set wc_0v72

update_power_domain -name PDdefault -primary_power_net VDD -primary_ground_net \

VSS -equivalent_power_nets VDD_EQ
update_power_domain -name PDshutoff_io -primary_power_net VDD_IO \
-primary_ground_net VSS
update_power_domain -name PDpll -primary_power_net Avdd -primary_ground_net \
Avss
update_power_domain -name PDram_virtual -primary_power_net VDDL \

November 2023 524 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-primary_ground_net VSS
update_power_domain -name PDram -primary_power_net VDDL_sw -primary_ground_net \
VSS
update_power_domain -name PDtdsp -primary_power_net VDD_sw -primary_ground_net \
VSS

update_power_mode -name PMdvfs1 -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs1.sdc

update_power_mode -name PMdvfs1_off -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs1.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMdvfs1_shutoffio_off -sdc_files \
../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs1.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMdvfs2 -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs2.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMdvfs2_off -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs2.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMdvfs2_shutoffio_off -sdc_files \
../RELEASE/mmmc/dvfs2.sdc
update_power_mode -name PMscan -sdc_files ../RELEASE/mmmc/scan.sdc

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# update rules
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
update_power_switch_rule -name PDram_SW -cells { HEADERHVT1 } -prefix \
CDN_SW_RAM -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 -average_ir_drop_limit 0
update_power_switch_rule -name PDtdsp_SW -cells { HEADERHVT2 } -prefix \
CDN_SW_TDSP -peak_ir_drop_limit 0 -average_ir_drop_limit 0

update_isolation_rules -names ISORULE1 -location to -prefix CPF_ISO_

update_isolation_rules -names ISORULE3 -location to -prefix CPF_ISO_
update_isolation_rules -names ISORULE4 -location to -prefix CPF_ISO_

update_level_shifter_rules -names LSRULE_H2L3 -location to -cells { LVLHLD* \

} -prefix CPF_LS_
update_level_shifter_rules -names LSRULE_H2L_PLL -location to -prefix CPF_LS_
update_level_shifter_rules -names LSRULE_L2H2 -location to -prefix CPF_LS_

update_state_retention_rules -names \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST0/PDtdsp_retention_rule -cell_type master_slave
update_state_retention_rules -names \
INST/DSP_CORE_INST1/PDtdsp_retention_rule -cell_type ballon_latch

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# end

November 2023 525 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
end_design

November 2023 526 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Supported CPF 1.0 Commands

Note: The following commands are supported unless otherwise noted.

Command Name Option Notes

N/A = not available in this
release
create_analysis_view
-name
-mode
-domain_corners
create_bias_net
-net
-driver N/A
-user_attributes Accessible by
getCPFUserAttr
-peak_ir_drop_limit N/A
-average_ir_drop_limit N/A
create_global_connection
-net
-pins
-domain
-instances
create_ground_nets
-nets
-voltage N/A
-internal N/A
-user_attributes Accessible by
getCPFUserAttr
-peak_ir_drop_limit N/A

November 2023 527 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-average_ir_drop_limit N/A
create_isolation_rule
-name
-isolation_condition
-pins
-from
-to
-isolation_target N/A
-isolation_output
-exclude
create_level_shifter_rule
-name
-pins
-from
-to
-exclude
create_mode_transition N/A
-start_condition
create_nominal_condition
-name
-voltage
-pmos_bias_voltage N/A
-nmos_bias_voltage N/A
create_operating_corner
-name
-voltage
-process
-temperature
-library_set

November 2023 528 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

create_power_domain
-name
-default
-instances
-boundary_ports
-shutoff_condition
-default_restore_edge
-default_save_edge
-power_up_states N/A
create_power_mode
-name
-domain_conditions
-default
create_power_nets
-nets
-voltage
-external_shutoff_condition
-internal
-user_attributes Accessible by
getCPFUserAttr
-peak_ir_drop_limit N/A
-average_ir_drop_limit N/A
create_power_switch_rule
-name
-domain
-external_power_net
-external_ground_net
create_state_retention_rule
-name

November 2023 529 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-domain
-instances
-restore_edge
-save_edge
define_always_on_cell -cells
-power_switchable
-power
-ground_switchable
-ground
define_isolation_cell
-cells
-library_set
-always_on_pin
-power_switchable
-ground_switchable
-power
-ground
-valid_location
-non_dedicated N/A
-enable
define_level_shifter_cell
-cells
-library_set
-always_on_pin N/A
-input_voltage_range
-output_volage_range
-direction
-output_voltage_input_pin N/A

November 2023 530 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-input_power_pin
-output_power_pin
-ground
-valid_location
define_open_source_input_p
in
-cells
-pin
-library_set
define_power_clamp_cell N/A
-cells
-data
-ground
library_set
-power
define_power_switch_cell
-cells
-library_set
-stage_1_enable
-stage_1_output
-stage_2_enable
-stage_2_output
-type
-power_switchable
-power
-ground
-ground_switchable
-on_resistance Accessible by
::CPF::getCpfPsoCell

November 2023 531 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-stage_1_saturation_current Accessible by
::CPF::getCpfPsoCell
-stage_2_saturation_current Accessible by
::CPF::getCpfPsoCell
-leakage_current Accessible by
::CPF::getCpfPsoCell
define_state_retention_cell
-cells
-library_set
-always_on_pin N/A
-clock_pin N/A
-restore_function
-restore_check N/A
-save_function
-save_check N/A
-power_switchable
-ground_switchable
-power
-ground
define_library_set
-name
-libraries
end_design
identify_always_on_driver N/A
identify_power_logic
-type
-instances
set_array_naming_style
set_cpf_version
set_design

November 2023 532 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-ports
module
set_hierarchy_separator
set_instance
-port_mapping
-merge_default_domains
hier_instance
set_power_target N/A
set_power_unit N/A
set_register_naming_style
set_switching_activity
-all
-pins
-instances
-hierarchical
-probability
-toggle_rate
-clock_pins N/A
-toggle_percentage N/A
-mode N/A
set_time_unit
update_isolation_rules
-names `
-location
-cells
-library_set
-prefix
-combine_level_shifting N/A
-open_source_pins_only

November 2023 533 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-update_level_shifter_rules
-names
-location
-cells
-library_set
-prefix
update_nominal_condition
-name
-library_set
update_power_domain
-name
-internal_power_net
-internal_ground_net
-min_power_up_time N/A
-max_power_up_time N/A
-pmos_bias_net N/A
-nmos_bias_net N/A
-user_attributes Accessible by
::CPF::getCpfUserAttr
-rail_mapping N/A
-library_set
update_power_mode
-name
-activity_file N/A
-activity_file_weight N/A
-sdc_files
-peak_ir_drop_limit N/A
-average_ir_dropt_limit N/A
-leakage_power_limit N/A

November 2023 534 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-dynamic_power_limit N/A
update_power_switch_rule
-name
-enable_condition_1
-enable_condition_2
-acknowledge_receiver
-cells
-library_set
-prefix
-peak_ir_drop_limit Accessible by
::CPF::getCpfUserAttr
-average_ir_drop_limit Accessible by
::CPF::getCpfUserAttr
update_state_retention_rules
-name
-cell_type
-cell
-library_set

November 2023 535 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Supported CPF 1.0e Commands

Note: The following commands and options are supported unless otherwise noted.

Command Name Option Notes

create_analysis_view
-name
-mode
-domain_corners
-group_views
-user_attributes
create_assertion_control
-name Unsupported
-assertions Unsupported
-domains Unsupported
-shutoff_condition Unsupported
-type Unsupported
create_bias_net
-net
-driver
-user_attributes Supported: query
getCPFUserAttributes
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-average_ir_drop_limit
create_global_connection
-net
-pins
-domain
-instances
create_power_domain

November 2023 536 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-name
-instances
-boundary_ports
-default
-shutoff_condition
-external_controlled_shutoff
-default_isolation_condition
-default_restore_edge
-default_save_edge
-default_restore_level Supported
-default_save_level Supported
-power_up_states Unsupported
-active_state_condition Unsupported
-secondary_domains
create_ground_nets
-nets
-voltage
-external_shutoff_condition
-user_attributes Supported: query
getCPFUserAttributes
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-average_ir_drop_limit
create_isolation_rule
-name
-isolation_condition
-no_condition Unsupported
-pins
-from
-to

November 2023 537 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-exclude
-isolation_target
-isolation_output
-secondary_domain
create_level_shifter_rule
-name
-pins
-from
-to
-exclude
create_mode_transition
-name
-from
-to
-start_condition
-end_condition
-cycles
-clock_pin
-latency
create_nominal_condition
-name
-voltage
-ground_voltage
-state Unsupported
-pmos_bias_voltage Unsupported
-nmos_bias_voltage Unsupported
create_operating_corner
-name
-voltage

November 2023 538 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-ground_voltage Unsupported
-pmos_bias_voltage Unsupported
-nmos_bias_voltage Unsupported
-process
-temperature
-library_set
create_power_mode
-name
-default
-group_modes
-domain_conditions
create_power_nets
-nets
-voltage
-external_shutoff_condition
-user_attributes Supported: query
getCPFUserAttributes
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-average_ir_drop_limit
create_power_switch_rule
-name
-domain
-external_power_net
-external_ground_net
create_state_retention_rule
-name
-domain
-instances
-exclude

November 2023 539 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-restore_edge
-save_edge
-restore_precondition
-save_precondition
-target_type
-secondary_domain
define_always_on_cell
-cells
-library_set
-power_switchable
-ground_switchable
-power
-ground
define_isolation_cell
-cells
-library_set
-always_on_pins
-power_switchable
-ground_switchable
-power
-ground
-valid_location
-enable
-no_enable Unsupported
-non_dedicated
define_level_shifter_cell
-cells
-library_set
-always_on_pins

November 2023 540 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-input_voltage_range
-output_voltage_range
- Unsupported
ground_output_voltage_rang
e
-
groung_output_voltage_rang
e
-direction
-input_power_pin
-output_power_pin
-input_ground_pin Unsupported
-output_ground_pin Unsupported
-ground
-power Unsupported
-enable
-valid_location
define_library_set
-name
-libraries
-user_attributes cdb: specify cdb libraries for
the library set
aocv: specify aocv libraries
for the library set
define_power_clamp_cell
-location Unsupported
-within_hierarchy Unsupported
-cells Unsupported
-prefix Unsupported
define_power_switch_cell
-cells

November 2023 541 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-library_set
-stage_1_enable
-stage_1_output
-stage_2_enable
-stage_2_output
-type
-enable_pin_bias Unsupported
-gate_bias_pin Unsupported
-power_switchable
-power
-ground_switchable
-ground
-on_resistance Supported (for use with
addPowerSwitch)
-stage_1_saturation_current Supported (for use with
addPowerSwitch)
-stage_2_saturation_current Supported (for use with
addPowerSwitch)
-leakage_current Supported (for use with
addPowerSwitch)
define_state_retention_cell
-cells
-library_set
-cell_type
-always_on_pins
-clock_pin
-restore_function
-save_function
-restore_check
-save_check

November 2023 542 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-always_on_components Unsupported
-power_switchable
-ground_switchable
-power
-ground
end_macro_model
end_power_mode_control_g
roup
get_parameter
include
identify_power_logic
-type Only "isolation" is supported
for the -type
-instances Supported
-module Supported
set_array_naming_style
set_cpf_version
set_hierarchy_separator
set_design
-ports
-
honor_boundary_port_domai
n
-parameters
set_equivalent_control_pins
-master Unsupported
-pins Unsupported
-domain Unsupported
-rules Unsupported
set_floating_ports Unsupported

November 2023 543 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

set_input_voltage_tolerance
-ports Unsupported
-bias Unsupported
set_instance
-design
-model
-port_mapping
-domain_mapping
-parameter_mapping
set_macro_model
set_power_mode_control_gr
oup
-name
-domains
-groups Unsupported
set_power_target
-leakage Unsupported
-dynamic Unsupported
set_power_unit
set_register_naming_style
set_switching_activity
-all Supported
-pins Supported
-instances Supported
-hierarchical Supported
-probability Supported
-toggle_rate Supported
-clock_pins Unsupported
-toggle_percentage Unsupported

November 2023 544 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-mode Supported
set_time_unit
set_wire_feedthrough_ports
update_isolation_rules
-names
-location
-within_hierarchy
-cells
-prefix
-open_source_pins_only Supported
update_level_shifter_rules
-names
-location
-within_hierarchy
-cells
-prefix
update_nominal_condition
-name
-library_set
update_power_domain
-name
-primary_power_net
-primary_ground_net
-pmos_bias_net Unsupported
-nmos_bias_net Unsupported
-user_attributes Supported: query
getCPFUserAttributes
-transition_slope Unsupported
-transition_latency Unsupported

November 2023 545 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-transition_cycles Unsupported
update_power_mode
-name
-activity_file Unsupported
-activity_file_weight Unsupported
-sdc_files
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-average_ir_drop_limit
-leakage_power_limit Unsupported
-dynamic_power_limit Unsupported

update_power_switch_rule
-name
-enable_condition_1
-enable_condition_2
-acknowledge_receiver
-cells
-gate_bias_net Unsupported
-prefix
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-average_ir_drop_limit
update_state_retention_rule
s
-names
-cell_type
-cells
-set_rest_control Unsupported

November 2023 546 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Supported CPF 1.1 Commands

Note: The following commands and options are supported unless otherwise noted.

Command Name Option Notes

asset_illegal_domain_config
urations
-domain_conditions
-group_modes
-name
create_analysis_view
-domain_corners
-group_views
-mode
-name
-user_attributes
create_assertion_control
-assertions Unsupported
-domains Unsupported
-exclude
-name Unsupported
-shutoff_condition Unsupported
-type Unsupported
create_bias_net
-average_ir_drop_limit
-driver
-net
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-user_attributes Supported: query
getCPFUserAttributes

November 2023 547 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

create_global_connection
-domain
-instances
-net
-pins
create_ground_nets
-average_ir_drop_limit
-external_shutoff_condition
-nets
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-user_attributes Supported: query
getCPFUserAttributes
-voltage
create_isolation_rule
-exclude
-from
-isolation_condition
-isolation_output
-isolation_target
-name
-no_condition
-pins
-secondary_domain
-to
-force
create_level_shifter_rule
-exclude
-from
-name

November 2023 548 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-pins
-to
-force
create_mode_transition
-clock_pin
-cycles
-end_condition
-from
-latency
-name
-to
-start_condition
create_nominal_condition
-ground_voltage
-name
-nmos_bias_voltage Unsupported
-pmos_bias_voltage Unsupported
-state Unsupported
-voltage
create_operating_corner
-ground_voltage Unsupported
-library_set
-name
-nmos_bias_voltage Unsupported
-pmos_bias_voltage Unsupported
-process
-temperature
-voltage
create_power_domain

November 2023 549 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-active_state_condition Unsupported
-base_domains
-boundary_ports
-default
-default_isolation_condition
-default_restore_edge
-default_restore_level Supported
-default_save_edge
-default_save_level Supported
-external_controlled_shutoff
-instances
-name
-power_up_states Unsupported
-shutoff_condition
create_power_mode
-default
-domain_conditions
-group_modes
-name
create_power_nets
-average_ir_drop_limit
-external_shutoff_condition
-nets
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-user_attributes Supported: query
getCPFUserAttributes
-voltage
create_power_switch_rule
-domain

November 2023 550 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-external_ground_net
-external_power_net
-name
create_state_retention_rule
-domain
-exclude
-instances
-name
-restore_edge
-restore_precondition
-save_edge
-save_precondition
-secondary_domain
-target_type
define_always_on_cell
-cells
-ground
-ground_switchable
-library_set
-power
-power_switchable
define_isolation_cell
-always_on_pins
-cells
-enable
-ground
-ground_switchable
-library_set
-no_enable

November 2023 551 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-non_dedicated
-power
-power_switchable
-valid_location
define_level_shifter_cell
-always_on_pins
-cells
-direction
-enable
-ground
-
ground_input_voltage_range
-
ground_output_voltage_rang
e
-input_ground_pin
-input_power_pin
-input_voltage_range
-library_set
-output_ground_pin
-output_power_pin
-output_voltage_range
-power
-valid_location
define_library_set
-libraries
-name

November 2023 552 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-user_attributes cdb: specify cdb libraries for

the library set
aocv: specify aocv libraries
for the library set
define_power_clamp_cell
-cells Unsupported
-data Unsupported
-power pin Unsupported
-ground Unsupported
-library_set
define_power_switch_cell
-cells
-enable_pin_bias Unsupported
-gate_bias_pin Unsupported
-ground
-ground_switchable
-leakage_current Supported (for use with
addPowerSwitch)
-library_set
-power
-power_switchable
-stage_1_on_resistance
-stage_2_on_resistance
-stage_1_enable
-stage_1_output
-stage_1_saturation_current Supported (for use with
addPowerSwitch)
-stage_2_enable
-stage_2_output

November 2023 553 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-stage_2_saturation_current Supported (for use with

addPowerSwitch)
-type
define_state_retention_cell
-always_on_components Unsupported
-always_on_pins
-cell_type
-cells
-clock_pin
-ground
-ground_switchable
-library_set
-power
-power_switchable
-restore_check
-restore_function
-save_check
-save_function
end_design
end_macro_model
end_power_mode_control_gr
oup
get_parameter
include
identify_power_logic
-instances Supported
-module Supported
-type Only "isolation" is supported
for the -type
set_array_naming_style

November 2023 554 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

set_cpf_version
set_hierarchy_separator
set_design
module
-ports
-
honor_boundary_port_domai
n
-parameters
set_equivalent_control_pins
-domain Unsupported
-master Unsupported
-pins Unsupported
-rules
set_floating_ports Unsupported
set_input_voltage_tolerance
-bias Unsupported
-ports Unsupported
set_instance
-design
-domain_mapping
-model
-parameter_mapping
-port_mapping
set_macro_model
set_power_mode_control_gr
oup
-domains
-groups Unsupported
-name

November 2023 555 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

set_power_target
-dynamic Unsupported
-leakage Unsupported
set_power_unit
set_register_naming_style
set_switching_activity
-all Supported
-clock_pins Unsupported
-hierarchical Supported
-instances Supported
-mode Supported
-pins Supported
-probability Supported
-toggle_percentage Unsupported
-toggle_rate Supported
set_time_unit
set_wire_feedthrough_ports
update_isolation_rules
-cells
-location
-names
-open_source_pins_only Supported
-prefix
-within_hierarchy
update_level_shifter_rules
-cells
-location
-names
-prefix

November 2023 556 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-within_hierarchy
update_power_domain
-equivalent_ground_nets
-equivalent_power_nets
-name
-nmos_bias_net Unsupported
-pmos_bias_net Unsupported
-primary_ground_net
-primary_power_net
-transition_cycles Unsupported
-transition_latency Unsupported
-transition_slope Unsupported
-user_attributes Supported: query
{{disable_secondary_domain getCPFUserAttributes
s {list of domains}}}
update_power_mode
-activity_file Unsupported
-activity_file_weight Unsupported
-average_ir_drop_limit
-dynamic_power_limit Unsupported
-leakage_power_limit Unsupported
-name
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-sdc_files
update_power_switch_rule
-acknowledge_reciever_1
-acknowledge_reciever_2
-average_ir_drop_limit
-cells

November 2023 557 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

-enable_condition_1
-enable_condition_2
-gate_bias_net Unsupported
-name
-peak_ir_drop_limit
-prefix
update_state_retention_rules
-cell_type
-cells
-names
-set_rest_control Unsupported

November 2023 558 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Appendix

Path Exception Priorities

The following are the path exception priorities if a path in the design matches more than one
path exception:
■ set_false_path
■ set_min_delay, set_max_delay
■ set_multicycle_path

If there is more than one exception of a given type, for example,

the set_multicycle_path command, the path exception that is more specific has higher
priority. A path exception is more specific if it specifies a longer path than the other. For
example, the -from, -to options will have priority over the -from option.

If the path has the same number of reference points, then:

■ -from option has priority over the -to option

■ -to option has priority over the -through option

■ -clock_from option has priority over the -clock_to option

Note: To check for ignored path exceptions, use the report_path_exceptions -

ignored command.

The following list shows the priorities (highest to lowest) for path exceptions applied to
the same path.

Path Exception Priorities

1. set_false_path (Highest)
2. set_max_delay -from pin_list
3. set_max_delay -to pin_list
4. set_max_delay -through pin_list

5. set_max_delay -clock_from clkwave_name <<<<<<<

6. set_max_delay -clock_to clkwave_name <<<<<<<

7. set_max_delay (The most constraining adjustment has the higher priority

over less constraining adjustments.)
8. set_multicycle_path -from pin_list
9. set_multicycle_path -to pin_list

November 2023 559 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

12
Glossary

The below glossary defines the terms and concepts that you should understand to use
Tempus effectively.

arc

Is the timing relation between two points. This could either be a cell arc or net arc.

arrival time

Is the time elapsed from the source of launch clock till the arrival of the data at the end point.

asynchronous clocks

Two clocks that do not have a fixed phase relationship between their time period.

attribute

A value related to an object.

attacker

A net that causes undesirable cross-coupling effects on a victim net.

bindkey

A keyboard key or mouse button linked (bound) to a Cadence command or function name.

bounding box

November 2023 560 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

A rectangular area, identified by a lower-left point and an upper-right point. Typically used to
identify the area of an object (a path or an instance) or a collection of objects (the selected
set).

branch

A path between two nodes. Each branch has two associated quantities, a potential and a flow,
with a reference direction for each.

capacitance

The function of a design to store energy in the form of an electrostatic field.

cell

A component of a design; a collection of different aspects (representations) of component

implementations, such as its schematic, layout, or symbol representations. A design object
consisting of a set of views that can be stored and referenced independently. A cell can
include other cells, forming a hierarchical design. A cell is an individual building block of a chip
or system. In the database, a cell contains all the cellviews of that cell.

An inverter and a buffer are examples of a small cell. A decoder register, arithmetic logic unit
(ALU), memories, complete chips, and printed circuit boards are examples of large cells.

cell delay

Represents the time difference of a signal when transmitted from an input to an output.

cellview

A specific representation (view) of a cell. A particular representation of a particular

component, such as the physical layout of a flip-flop or the schematic symbol of a NAND gate.
A database object containing all the information unique to a particular representation of a
particular component. Cellviews are classified by their view type. Each cellview has a view
name and can have one or more versions.

clock

Timing signals generated periodically by a device in the digital domain.

clock gating

November 2023 561 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

One of the basic power-saving techniques where the clock is gated in a logic block only when
a next state logic is required to be captured.

clock latency

Is the amount of time taken from the clock origin point to the clock pin of the flop (sink pin).

clock path

Is the timing path from the clock source to the sink(clock) pin of the flop.

clock skew

Is the difference between the clock arrival time at two different nodes.

clone

A layout structure that has been replicated from a specified source structure already
implemented in the layout view. Each clone inherits its physical characteristics from the layout
structure on which it is based, and the connectivity information from the associated schematic
structure.

constraint

The restrictions set on the objects in a layout or schematic to meet the routing or placement
requirements in a design.

corner

A corner is defined as a set of libraries (characterized for process, voltage, and temperature
variations) and net delay, which together account for delay variations. Corners are not
dependent on functional settings; they are meant to capture variations in the manufacturing
process, along with expected variations in the voltage and temperature of the environment in
which the chip will operate.

coupled capacitance

Is the parasitic capacitance between two wires.

coupling

Is the transfer of electrical energy from one circuit segment to another. In the context of Signal
integrity, coupling refers to the capacitive coupling that is often unintended because of the
capacitance between two wires that are adjacent to each other. Usually, one signal
capacitively couple with another signal and causes noise.

November 2023 562 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

critical path

Is defined as the path that has the worst amount of slack relative to the desired arrival time.

crosstalk

Unwanted interaction between signals on different electrical nets in proximity because of

coupling capacitance between them.

cross coupling

Is the effect introduced on neighboring nets because of the coupling capacitance between
them.

current design

Is the top-level design in a design hierarchy.

data path

Is the timing path between output of the launch flop to the input of capture flop.

default value

The value used by the software unless you specify otherwise. The default is frequently the
initial state.

delay

Is the time that it takes a signal to propagate from a given point to another given point.

delay calculation

Is the term used in an integrated circuit design for the sum of the delay of logic gates and
delay of wires attached to it; basically the delay of any path from a start point to end point.
This also refers to the process by which cell delay or net delay is calculated.

design

The collection of all data in a cellview, including all nested data, starting at the top and
expanding the hierarchy.

design library

November 2023 563 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

A library that contains data for the current design. It is usually in the designer’s own directory
or in the design group’s directory.

design verification

Process of verifying the functional and performance requirements of a design.

device

A design element that has both a symbol view and a layout view, with corresponding pins.

distributed processing

Runs a program on a distributed computing system of multiple independent machines that

communicate through a network.

distortion

Is the changing of any of the attributes of a signal, such as amplitude, pulse width, rise time,
and so on because of the medium, such as a connector or a cable through which the signal
flows.

DMMMC

Abbreviation for Distributed Multi-mode multi-corner timing analysis. It is a method for

processing timing analysis views where the software automatically distributes the runs to
multiple machines for analysis.

driver

A primitive device or behavioral construct that affects the digital value of a signal.

DSTA

Abbreviation for Distributed Static Timing Analysis. It is the Master/Client architecture that
fully leverages multiple threads on both the Master/Client processes allowing maximum
scalability, even with the growing size and complexity of the designs.

dynamic analysis

Dynamic analysis is a method of analyzing a circuit to obtain operating currents and voltages.
It is a time-based analysis, where the circuit netlist is analyzed over a specified period, such
as a clock cycle.

November 2023 564 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

endpoint

Point in a design where the timing path ends. This is either a primary output port or the
launching pin of a sequential cell (CK pin of a flop or EN pin of a latch).

environment

The hardware and software setup and conditions within which the system operates.

extrapolation

Using two or more points on a curve to determine an intermediate curve point that provides
a more accurate value than the provided available points. For example, calculating delay for
cases where the inputs are lying outside of look up table.

false path

Is a timing path not required to meet its timing constraints for the design to function properly.

fanin

Is the number of pins or ports in the cone of logic connected to the input of a logic gate.

fanout

Is the number of gate inputs that can connect to the gate output. For example, with a fanout
of 4, one TTL gate can drive 4 others.

floorplanning

Placing ports, cells, memories, macros, and so on to either create a rough plan to estimate
whether a design meets the timing and routability criteria, or create a starting point for design
implementation.

GBA

November 2023 565 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

Abbreviation for Graph Based Analysis. It calculates the worst-case delays of all cells
considering the worst-case slew for all the inputs of a gate when the worst slew propagation
is ON.

GUI

Abbreviation for Graphical User Interface.

glitch

Unintended noise pulse induced on the neighboring nets due to capacitive (or inductive)
coupling.

hierarchical design

A hierarchical design is a way of structuring the logic at more than one level of abstraction;
that is, a symbol at one level of abstraction represents the internal contents of a cell at a
higher level of hierarchy.

hierarchy

Nested design levels, such as instances within a cell. By default, you open the top level in the
hierarchy when you open a cellview.

hierarchy representation

Specification of how the physical hierarchy is generated from your logical design, including
which logical components are to be generated or ignored in the physical implementation and
which physical views are used to implement logical components.

IPD

Inter Power Domain

IPD Logic

Design logic having PD transitions in fanin/fanout cone and hence identified for IPD analysis
is termed as IPD logic.

November 2023 566 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

IR drop

IR drop is a reduction in the voltage that occurs on the VDD network of an integrated circuit
because of the current flowing through the resistance of the VDD network itself (V = I x R).

impedance

The opposition of an electronic component to the flow of current.

interconnect

Refers to the physical wires and vias between the gates and cells in an integrated circuit.

instance

A database object that creates a level of hierarchy. An instance creates an occurrence of the
referenced cellview.

latch

Latch is a level-sensitive register with three ports - input, output, and enable. When enable is
active, input drives output, which means that the latch is open or transparent. When enable
is inactive, the output is kept at the existing value.

latency

Is the time taken by a clock signal to be transmitted from the input source to output.

layer

A layer refers to a mask material. Various database shape objects are created referencing a
layer and a purpose.

library

A library is a logical collection of design data implemented as a physical collection of the

directories and files that can reside anywhere in the file system. A library can be shared by
all users or controlled by a single person.

November 2023 567 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

man page

A description of a command, variable, or message code displayed using the man command
in Tempus. For example, entering man report_timing at the Tempus prompt displays the man
page showing the description of the command and its related parameters.

miller capacitance

Is the coupling capacitance between nets associated with the coupling between the gate and
the source/drain of a transistor.

mode

A mode is defined by a set of clocks, supply voltages, timing constraints, and libraries. It can
also have annotation data, such as SDF or parasitics files. Many chips have multiple modes
such as functional modes, test mode, sleep mode, and so on.

modeling

Refers to the creation and simulation of electronic circuits on a machine.

MSV

Abbreviation for Multi Supply Voltage. MSV is used to indicate instances/cells that should be
identified as IPD logic.

multithreading

Ability of a processing unit to run multiple processes or threads concurrently.

MMMC

Abbreviation for Multi Mode Multi Corner. MMMC is the ability to configure the software to
support multiple combinations of modes and corners, and to evaluate them concurrently.

MSV Designs

Abbreviation for Multi Supply Voltage Design where the design is using more than one voltage
sources.

November 2023 568 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

net

A logical signal connection between a set of pins on different instances. After routing, a net
consists of routed wires on the routing layers.

netlist

Is a collection of related lists of the terminals (pins) in a circuit along with their
interconnections.

Non IPD Logic

Design logic having no PD transitions in its fanin/fanout cone and hence not left out from IPD
analysis is termed as non-IPD logic.

optimization

Ability to achieve the most efficient design of a product. There are various types of
optimizations, which are performed by different tools in the design flows for chips, boards, and
so on.

path

A path object is a shape-based object represented by a point array with a specified width,
style, and layer-purpose pair.

path search

The list of directories the software searches for files, libraries, and commands.

parasitic capacitance

Parasitic capacitance is any capacitance causing wanted or unwanted effects between

proximity conductors or in devices.

PBA

November 2023 569 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

Abbreviation for Path Based Analysis. Here, a timing path that is found by graph-based
analysis (GBA), is re-timed for increased accuracy and for removing pessimism due to slew
merging effects, AOCV stage counts, and so on.

peak current

Peak current is the maximum value of a current waveform.

phase timing

Is the timing relationship between the edges of a clock and other clock signals or data signals.

placement and routing

Process of placing and routing the connections of circuit.

pin

A physical implementation of a terminal. You can place pins on any layer. Pins have a figure
defining the physical implementation and a terminal defining the type, such as the input,
output, and so on. Pins also have names, access directions and placement status.

ports

Endpoints that let the model and the application to interact during simulation.

propagation delay

Is the speed with which a signal travels on a conductor path.

properties

Properties are a name-value pair defining an attribute or characteristic. Properties can be

created on any database object. A property can be edited and deleted. Certain properties are
mandatory for certain applications. Properties are defined and managed by the application.

pulse

Pulse is a standard representation of a waveform that is typically used as a voltage source in

circuit simulation. The waveform displays a recurring pattern.

receiver

November 2023 570 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

A primitive device or behavioral construct that samples the digital value of a signal.

required time

Is the latest time at which a signal can arrive without making the clock cycle longer than
desired.

routing

Physically connecting objects in a design according to the design rules set in the reference
library or technology file.

RCDB

Is Binary RC Database. It is a random-access format that provides parasitics information for

timing analysis and reduces memory footprint. The RC database has better runtime and
memory performance.

RSH

Abbreviation for Remote Shell. It is the method of launching jobs on remote machines.

scaling

Scaling is the process of globally reducing or enlarging a design. Scaling is typically used to
match a design to a specific process.

session window

The current working window. A session window can contain multiple tabs, each potentially
running a different application. You can have more than one session window open at a time,
each with a workspace of its own.

skew

Is the difference in the timing that arises when a clock transition occurs.

slack

Is associated with each connection and is the difference between the required time and the
arrival time. A positive slack s at a node implies that the arrival time at that node may be
increased by s without affecting the overall delay of the circuit. Whereas, a negative slack

November 2023 571 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

implies that a path is too slow, and the path must be sped up (or the reference signal delayed)
if the whole circuit is to work at the desired speed.

slew

Is the time taken by a signal to change from rise to fall or from fall to rise . This is also known
as the transition time.

signal integrity

Refers to a signal's freedom from noise and the unpredictable delay caused by increasing the
coupling capacitance between neighboring lines.

standalone

A mode in which a machine can run only locally installed and licensed applications.

startpoint

Is a point in a design where the timing path begins. This is either a primary input port or the
capturing pin of a sequential cell (D pin of a flop, a latch or synchronous reset/set pins of a
reset/set flop).

static analysis

Method of analyzing a circuit without using time-based simulation.

superthreading

Is a type of multithreading that enables different threads to be executed by a single processor

without truly executing them at the same time.

SDF file

Abbreviation for Standard Database Format files. These are used to store values and the data
of fixed lengths in a defined way and can easily be transferred across databases and
programs.

SMSC

Abbreviation for Single Mode Single Corner. This is the ability to configure the software to
support single mode and single corner at one time.

STA

November 2023 572 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

Abbreviation for Static Timing Analysis. It is a simulation method of computing the expected
timing of a digital circuit without requiring a simulation of the full circuit.

SSH

Abbreviation for Secure Shell. It is the method of securely launching jobs on remote
machines.

SPEF

SPEF is an acronym for Standard Parasitic Exchange Format, which is a form of SPF that
allows true coupling capacitance to be carried between nodes and is passed to downstream
analysis tools.

synchronous

When specific transitions occur at the same time between two clocks or signals, thereby
maintaining a timing relationship with each other.

task

Work objective. For example, a hierarchical task comprising a complex objective, such as
optimizing device sizing, or a simple task such as adding a new pin to a schematic.

time borrowing

Is a technique that allows logic to automatically borrow time from the next cycle, thereby
reducing the time available for the data to arrive for the following cycle or permitting the logic
to use the slack from the previous cycle in the current cycle.

timing arc

Is the path set when a signal travels from one input to another output.

tool

Is a shorthand term for an EDA product in the electronic design automation industry.

top-down design

An approach to hierarchical design that uses estimates and floorplanning to start at the top
level of a design.

November 2023 573 Product Version 23.10

 Tempus Stylus User Guide
Glossary

transistor

Is a semiconductor device, which is used to amplify a signal, or to open and close a circuit.

transient analysis

Transient analysis is a time-based analysis of a system.

tapeout

Process of transferring the final chip layout design files to a mask-making vendor.

via

A via is a connection point between two adjacent metal routing layers defined by a pad in each
layer.

victim

A victim net receives undesirable cross-coupling effects from any neighboring attacker net.

VDD

VDD is the common name of the power node, which is the voltage supply. It is the same as
VCC.

VSS

VSS is the common name of the ground node, which is a conducting body used as the
electrical current return. It is the same as GND.

wire

Wire refers to the routed physical metal conducting an electrical signal in contrast to a net,
which refers to the logical electrical signal that is being transferred.

November 2023 574 Product Version 23.10